Toshiba GR 200 Series Скачать руководство пользователя страница 1235

Страница: 1235 / 1563

6F2S1915 (0.46)

GRZ200 (Soft 031 & 032)

- 1214 -



Monitoring point (for Edition 2)

GOOSEed2 (Function ID: 305101)

Element ID

Name

Description

74009A6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#154 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

74009B6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#155 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

74009C6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#156 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

74009D6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#157 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

74009E6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#158 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

74009F6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#159 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400A06470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#160 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400A16470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#161 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400A26470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#162 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400A36470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#163 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400A46470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#164 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400A56470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#165 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400A66470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#166 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400A76470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#167 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400A86470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#168 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400A96470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#169 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400AA6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#170 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400AB6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#171 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400AC6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#172 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400AD6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#173 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400AE6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#174 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400AF6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#175 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400B06470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#176 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400B16470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#177 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400B26470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#178 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400B36470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#179 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400B46470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#180 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400B56470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#181 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400B66470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#182 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400B76470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#183 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400B86470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#184 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400B96470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#185 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400BA6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#186 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400BB6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#187 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400BC6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#188 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400BD6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#189 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400BE6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#190 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400BF6470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#191 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400C06470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#192 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400C16470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#193 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400C26470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#194 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

7400C36470

SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#195 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message

«
...
1233
1234
1235
1236
1237
...
»

Содержание GR 200 Series

Страница 1: ...s issued for 031 and 032 software code which you can identify at S G and T positions on Software nameplate GRZ200 S G and T positions TOSHIBA ENERGY SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS CORPORATION Instruction manual Distance Protection IED GR200 series GRZ200 ...

Страница 2: ...hich could result in death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor injury or moderate injury or property damage Current transformer circuit Never allow the current transformer CT secondary circuit connected to this equipment to be opened while the primary system is live Opening the CT circu...

Страница 3: ...is on as this may cause the equipment to malfunction External circuit When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit carefully check the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating Connection cable Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force Modification Do not modify this equipment as this may cause the equ...

Страница 4: ... contact to a local dealer and sales staff at Toshiba Energy Systems Solutions Corporation Toshiba ESS Japan This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor recyclables Plastics material This equipment contains the following plastics material ABS Polycarbonate Acrylic resins Nylon 66 and others Equipment installation and operation Equipment installation Never remove cables at frame ground ...

Страница 5: ...nce no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions contained in the information given We review the information in this manual regularly and there will be some corrections in subsequent editions We reserve the right to make technical improvements without notice Copyright Toshiba Energy Systems Solutions Corporation 2021 All rights reserved Registered Trademarks Product Equipment names me...

Страница 6: ... application 12 Monitoring and metering functions 13 Hardware overview 14 Symbols used in logical diagrams 15 Abbreviation 19 Function Block FB Function ID Signal number Data ID 21 2 Relay application 23 Distance protection ZS ZG 24 2 1 1 Principle of distance measurement 25 2 1 2 Equations in distance protection function 29 2 1 3 Element characteristic in distance relay 36 2 1 4 Common applicatio...

Страница 7: ...otection 146 2 4 5 Carrier signal reception 147 2 4 6 Setting 149 2 4 7 Data ID 150 Overcurrent protection OC 152 2 5 1 Relay polarity 153 2 5 2 Inverse time and definite time delay characteristic 156 2 5 3 Threshold value for operation 163 2 5 4 Reset Ratio 163 2 5 5 Miscellaneous functions 163 2 5 6 Scheme logic 165 2 5 7 Setting 167 2 5 8 Data ID 172 Earth fault protection EF 175 2 6 1 Relay po...

Страница 8: ... 9 5 Setting 221 2 9 6 Data ID 222 Circuit breaker fail protection CBF 223 2 10 1 CBF operation and its elements 224 2 10 2 Re trip feature 224 2 10 3 Backup feature 225 2 10 4 Scheme logic 227 2 10 5 Operation timing 229 2 10 6 Setting 230 2 10 7 Data ID 231 Stub protection with overcurrent relay STUB OC 233 2 11 1 Stub OC characteristic 234 2 11 2 Scheme logic 234 2 11 3 Setting 236 2 11 4 Data ...

Страница 9: ...age protection UV 261 2 15 1 Drop off and pick up characteristic 262 2 15 2 Time characteristic 262 2 15 3 Miscellaneous functions 265 2 15 4 Scheme logic 265 2 15 5 Setting 267 2 15 6 Data ID 268 Phase to phase under voltage protection UVS 269 2 16 1 Drop off and pick up characteristic 270 2 16 2 Time characteristic 270 2 16 3 Miscellaneous functions 273 2 16 4 Scheme logic 273 2 16 5 Setting 275...

Страница 10: ...der voltage element for phase to phase UVSFS 302 2 20 7 Under voltage change detection element DUVFS 302 2 20 8 Scheme logic 303 2 20 9 Setting 305 2 20 10 Data ID list 306 VT failure detection VTF 307 2 21 1 VTF features 308 2 21 2 Operation for the VTF function 308 2 21 3 VTF Logic 309 2 21 4 Setting 311 2 21 5 Data ID 312 CT failure detection CTF 313 2 22 1 CTF features 314 2 22 2 Operation for...

Страница 11: ...or tripping CB and signal to block reclosing CB 1 CB 2 400 2 26 2 Recording identifiers for respective fault types 403 2 26 3 Scheme logic 404 2 26 4 Setting 409 2 26 5 Data ID 410 Protection common PROT_COMMON 412 2 27 1 Selection of breaker system 413 2 27 2 Decision of CB open close status 413 2 27 3 Decision of DS open close status 416 2 27 4 Dead line detection 417 2 27 5 Detection of current...

Страница 12: ...e control 451 3 5 5 Signal 452 LED reset function LEDR 453 3 6 1 Select logic for resetting LEDs 454 3 6 2 Cancel logic in SBO mode 457 3 6 3 Operate logic for SBO DIR mode 458 3 6 4 Settings in LED logics 460 3 6 5 Mapping for IEC61850 communication 461 3 6 6 Setting 465 3 6 7 Signal 466 Counter function for the general GCNT 467 3 7 1 Counter setting for a signal 468 3 7 2 Select logics for SBO D...

Страница 13: ...2 7 Mapping for IEC 61850 communication 601 4 2 8 Setting 605 4 2 9 Signal 607 Software switch controller function SOFTSW 612 4 3 1 SOFTSW controlling 613 4 3 2 Control logics for SBO DIR modes 616 4 3 3 Cancel logic for SBO mode 625 4 3 4 Operate logic for SBO DIR modes 625 4 3 5 Mapping for IEC 61850 communication 633 4 3 6 Setting 637 4 3 7 Signal 638 Operation time reset function OPTIM 647 4 4...

Страница 14: ... 1 Select logic for SBO DIR modes 719 4 8 2 Cancel logic for SBO mode 737 4 8 3 Operate logic for SBO DIR modes 741 4 8 4 Operation counter 758 4 8 5 Measurement of operation intervals 762 4 8 6 Setup for BIO module 764 4 8 7 Mapping for IEC61850 communication 775 4 8 8 Setting 779 4 8 9 Signal 781 Three position device function TPOS 784 4 9 1 Select logic for SBO DIR modes 786 4 9 2 Cancel logic ...

Страница 15: ... 5 2 4 Sifting VCT rated current 907 5 2 5 Settings for residual voltage CT polarity and busbar arrangements 910 Signal processing and communication module CPU 913 5 3 1 Signal processing 913 5 3 2 Configuration switch 914 5 3 3 Communication modules 915 5 3 4 Location of communication modules 919 Binary IO module BI BO and BIO 921 5 4 1 Binary input feature 922 5 4 2 Binary input circuit 923 5 4 ...

Страница 16: ... 987 Overview of GR TIEMS 988 Connection 989 Common tools 990 Monitoring tools 990 Record tools 991 Generic configuration tools 991 IEC 61850 configuration tool 992 IEC 60870 5 103 configuration tool 992 MIMIC configuration tool 992 7 PLC function 993 Overview of PLC function 994 PLC data error 994 PLC driver 995 7 3 1 Monitoring point for PLC driver 995 Timer variable settings using PLC drivers 9...

Страница 17: ...mode 1031 8 4 3 Transferred state information 1031 8 4 4 Transferring record value and information 1032 9 Monitoring function 1043 Outline 1044 Metering data Metering group 1045 9 2 1 Metering information on the screen 1045 9 2 2 Setting for measurements 1046 9 2 3 Diminishing a very small value to display zero 1047 9 2 4 Flow settings for active reactive apparent powers 1047 9 2 5 Polarity settin...

Страница 18: ...78 10 2 6 Supervision of FPGA FPGA error 1079 10 2 7 Supervision of program codes CPU error 1080 10 2 8 Supervision of task operation RUN error 1081 10 2 9 Detecting non maskable interrupt NMI error 1082 10 2 10 Supervision of sampling period SMP error 1083 10 2 11 Supervision of setting data Setting error 1084 10 2 12 Supervision of real time clock RTC error 1085 10 2 13 Supervision of A D accura...

Страница 19: ...upervision of GOOSE publishing LAN GOOSE error 1112 10 2 38 Aux contacts monitoring DPSY DOPS TOPS faulty or undefined 1113 10 2 39 Setting 1115 10 2 40 Signal Data ID 1121 Trip circuit supervision task 1128 10 3 1 Detecting erroneous operation 1129 10 3 2 Trip circuit error TC error 1132 10 3 3 Setting 1133 10 3 4 Signal Data ID 1134 Supervision task for interruption capability on CB 1136 10 4 1 ...

Страница 20: ...he IEC 60870 5 103 standard 1223 11 4 5 Editing data of the configuration 1224 11 4 6 Protocol selection 1243 11 4 7 Tips for settings 1244 11 4 8 Setting 1245 11 4 9 Signal Data ID 1246 USB communication 1247 RS485 communication 1248 12 User interface 1249 Outline 1250 HMI operation 1253 Record sub menu 1256 Monitoring sub menu 1263 Setting sub menu 1271 I O setting sub menu 1284 Time sub menu 12...

Страница 21: ... test 1330 Setting 1331 Signal 1332 Appendix 1 Signal list for common function 1333 Appendix 2 Case outline 1340 Appendix 3 Typical external connection 1349 Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS PICS PIXIT and TICS 1356 Appendix 5 IEC60870 5 103 interoperability 1445 Appendix 6 Ordering 1459 Appendix 7 Technical data 1476 Appendix 8 Manufacture setting 1497 Appendix 9 Matrix between VCT terminals and relay app...

Страница 22: ...positon device SPOS 12 VT failure relay VTF 11 Double positon with sync DPSY 12 CT failure relay CTF 11 Software switch controller SOFTSW 12 Fault locator FL 11 Operation time reset OPTIM 12 Voltage check relay VCHK 11 Total time measurement TOTALTIM 12 Function identifies and signals FB 21 Synchronizing check SYNDIF 12 Hardware overview 14 Software interlock ILK 12 Main protections Double positio...

Страница 23: ...mary device even if faults occur successively For example destruction of insulators rupture of lines burning of transformers and others may result in severe damages in devices in the power system The protection function can serve the device not be vulnerable severely for such damages 3 Prevention of system instability is to clear faults in the power system speedy by the operation in the protection...

Страница 24: ... V Protection relay which is located at V M Current transformer which is connected with a relay Figure 1 1 1 Two protection schemes for line and busbar b Line and Busbar protected relays with a CT Ry X Ry S N Line Busbar G Ry X Ry S N Line a Line and Busbar protected relays with two CTs isolated Busbar G Figure 1 1 2 Protection schemes and the location of the CB ii Speediness As mentioned earlier ...

Страница 25: ...de as soon as possible or the power system may result in the outage As to protect the power system as a rule a main primary relay operates along with a number of backup relays A protection function represents the main primary relay whereas the other protection functions operate as the backup relays Accordingly faults could be clear if the main primary relay were in the failure to operate i Protect...

Страница 26: ... telecommunication ii Coordination between the main and the backup protections The operation of the backup protection is realized by retarding the operation of the backup protection rather than the main protection retarding is made with setting the delay timer of the backup protection We shall note that the setting value for the delay timer should be chosen so that the coordination between the mai...

Страница 27: ...otection operates when the difference of the currents exceeds a set value The DIF function in the GR200 series relay located at the ends of the line can examines the entering and outgoing currents in every 7 5 electrical degrees they are transmitted to the other terminals in every four samples using the telecommunication As the DIF function can obtain the current data at all remote ends using the ...

Страница 28: ...rrier command protection function DISCAR or DEFCAR is practical when the user wishes to clear instantly the fault that occurs in that area ii Measuring error and its influence In the case of a fault with resistance the reactance component seen by the relay at the terminal sending power is smaller than the actual value and it tends to overreach On the contrary the reactance component seen by the re...

Страница 29: ...or voltage transformers CCVT and transient overreach errors caused by the DC component of the fault current For the GR200 series relays the errors are defined to be less than 5 iii Detection of power swing and out of step Power swings occur when the output voltages of generators at different points in the power system slip relative to each other which result in system instabilities that may be cau...

Страница 30: ...e locus typically describes an arc passing through the electrical center as shown in Figure 1 1 6 X R Load Area Distance protection characteristic Mho Impedance locus during out of step condition Figure 1 1 6 Impedance locus during out of step condition In the case of a full out of step condition as opposed to a transient power swing it is desirable to separate the system in the vicinity of the ce...

Страница 31: ...OP Unblocking overreach protection UOP Blocking overreach protection BOP ii DEFCAR command protection by the earth fault EF protection Like in the DISCAR function the DEFCAR function is designed to operate using the directional characteristic of the earth fault protection EF function The DEFCAR function can provide the following carrier command schemes Permissive overreach protection POP Unblockin...

Страница 32: ...ite time SOTF OC Switch on to fault protection In order to quickly remove a fault which may occur when a faulted line or bus bar is energized the SOTF protection will be operational for a certain period after the circuit breaker closes FS Fail safe protection The IED is provided with Fail safe elements which function as a check relay and enhance security against a fault a power system with week in...

Страница 33: ...n observe a signal for example the output of a PLC function and counts the number of pulses for the signal The total number of pulses counted is recorded MDCTRL Mode control function This function enables an interface for test function block TSET FB With this interface a mode change command is made within the IED for the TEST FB 1 2 2 Control and monitoring application SPOS Single position device ...

Страница 34: ...t signal and it can verify the signal coming from the external device ASEQ Automatic sequence control function The ASEQ function is used together with a logic that is programmed by the user using PLC function Monitoring and metering functions Using the HMI the monitoring and metering functions can display status settings data and others The user can also see information using GR series Toshiba IED...

Страница 35: ...he rear HMI features Menu driven human interfaces for settings or viewing of stored data A standard LCD or a large LCD MIMIC screen LEDs function keys and operation keys Communication features USB for GR TIEMS RS485 for Substation control and Automation System SAS with IEC60870 5 103 protocol Fiber Optic FO option for SAS with IEC60870 5 103 protocol 100BASE TX or FX for SAS with IEC61850 protocol...

Страница 36: ...61850 logical node LN to send a signal for the SAS An alternative point discussed in Chapter PLC function is provided in place of the signal monitoring point for starting the user programmed logic 3 Marked with PLC connection points designated by Element ID and its name Element ID or Signal No Signal name corresponding to Element or Signal No Data ID Note that the symbol can be used for the recept...

Страница 37: ...e shot timer 0 t XXX 0 t XXX YYY XXX YYY t 0 Fixed timer XXX Set time t 0 XXX Fixed timer XXX Set time Variable timer XXX YYY Setting range Variable timer XXX YYY Setting range Delayed pick up timer Delayed drop off timer A Output XXX YYY A Output XXX YYY Setting range ...

Страница 38: ...2 17 iii Logic symbol AND gate OR gate XOR gate Signal inversion A B Output 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 A B Output 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 A B Output 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 A Output 0 1 1 0 A Output B A Output B 1 A Output B 1 A Output 1 ...

Страница 39: ...S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 18 iv Flip flop symbol v Scheme switch A B Output 0 0 No change 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 A Switch Output 1 On 1 1 Off 0 Switch Output On 1 Off 0 A Output B R S Output A On Output On ...

Страница 40: ...oring Software GUI Graphical User Interface HMI Human Machine Interface IED Intelligent Electronic Device IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time LCD Liquid Crystal Display for IED screen standard LCD screen LCP Local Panel for Controlling LED Light Emitting Diode MIMIC Touchscreen operation configured by user s program to operate control application NA Not Applicable NGR Neutral Grounding Resistance N...

Страница 41: ...GRZ200 Soft 031 032 20 Abbreviation Description UTC Coordinated Universal Time SyncSrc Synchronization Source VT Voltage Transformer VCT Transformer module including VTs and CTs 43 Selector device or selector switch ...

Страница 42: ...xx0 XX relay in phase A is operated XX1 A B C 1 XX_BLOCK 8000011xxx0 80000xxxx0 81000xxxx1 82000xxxx2 8000xxxxxx 1 XX1_OPT FB Function ID 123456 Element ID 3 PLC connection point Signal name 1 Relay element 2 Signal monitoring point Element ID Figure 1 7 1 Example of symbols and others Note that a PLC connection point can be shown with the function ID 123456 plus element ID 8000011xxx0 expressed i...

Страница 43: ...bits 400001 2200001B6F 22 First and second of Element ID 32 bits 400001 3200001B6F 32 First and second of Element ID 32 bits 400001 4200001B6F 42 First and second of Element ID Float 32 64 bits 400001 2300001B6F 23 First and second of Element ID 64 bits 400001 3300001B6F 33 First and second of Element ID 64 bits 400001 4300001B6F 43 First and second of Element ID Float 64 ...

Страница 44: ...h distance relay DISCAR 123 Cold load protection CLP 424 UOP with directional earth DEFCAR 144 Distance protection ZS ZG 24 UOP with distance relay DISCAR 126 Principle and equations 25 BOP with directional earth DEFCAR 144 Z1 element control 56 BOP with distance relay DISCAR 128 Z1 Z1X Z2 to Z5 element characteristics 36 PUP with distance relay DISCAR 122 Load encroachment block relay LEB 54 Swit...

Страница 45: ... certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ordering number and check the order number for the G T position whilst referring to the comparison table below For more information see Appendix Ordering Table 2 1 1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers Sec Feature Ordering No at G T 31 32 Main features Power swing block Appl...

Страница 46: ... Ib and Ic and the fault point voltage is VF then Vb and Vc are given by the following equations 𝑉𝑏 𝑍𝑠 𝐼𝑏 𝑍𝑚 𝐼𝑐 𝑉𝐹 2 1 1 𝑉 𝑐 𝑍𝑠 𝐼𝑐 𝑍𝑚 𝐼𝑏 𝑉𝐹 2 1 2 From equations 2 1 1 and 2 1 2 the following equation is obtained 𝑉𝑏 𝑉 𝑐 𝑍𝑠 𝑍𝑚 𝐼𝑏 𝐼𝑐 2 1 3 where Zs Self impedance Zm Mutual impedance Since the effect of the phase A current is small and hence negligible in equation 2 1 3 there is no need to introduce i...

Страница 47: ...ence impedance Therefore the faulted phase voltage is not simply proportional to the faulted phase current Figure 2 1 2 Single phase earth fault It is necessary to analyze the impedance seen by the relay in the event of a single phase earth fault according to the method of symmetrical components Figure 2 1 3 shows an equivalent circuit for a single phase earth fault based on the method of symmetri...

Страница 48: ...o sequence current I0m Adjacent line zero sequence current Z1 Fault point relay point positive sequence impedance Z0 Fault point relay point zero sequence impedance Z0m Adjacent line zero sequence mutual impedance Considering the faulted phase voltage VaF at the point of fault is 𝑉 𝑎𝐹 𝑉1𝐹 𝑉2𝐹 𝑉0𝐹 0 2 1 10 Phase A voltage Va at the relay is calculated from the following equation 𝑉 𝑎 𝑉1 𝑉2 𝑉0 𝑍1 𝐼𝑎 ...

Страница 49: ... and setting the coefficient correctly makes it possible to measure exactly the distance to the fault point In equations 2 1 7 to 2 1 9 the fault resistance is ignored Since the measurement of the distance up to the fault point based on equation 2 1 14 is carried out using the reactance component in principle there is no influence on the voltage component due to the fault resistance However under ...

Страница 50: ... IZs S2 Vp o Mho element Figure 2 1 4 Element in Mho characteristic Figure 2 1 4 shows the Mho characteristic obtained by comparing phases provided the fault voltage V and the polarizing voltage Vp are in phase In Figure 2 1 4 the Mho characteristic is obtained by dividing the voltage V by the current I The Mho characterize is provided to detect for both the distance relays in phase to phase ZS an...

Страница 51: ...r a three phases fault Figure 2 1 5 shows that an offset Mho characteristic is applied when the relay detects a fault in three phase That is the ZS element having the memory action is able to issue a trip signal with a time delay the ZS element is able to issue an instantaneous tripping for the close in fault in three phase Note that the memory action is not performed in the ZG element the offset ...

Страница 52: ...stic It is possible that the Mho characteristic operate with reactance characteristic a level line or a gradual descent line toward the R axis is provided for the reactance characteristic The gradual descent one is set using variables Xs θ1 and θ2 as shown in Figure 2 1 7 X R a Reactance element with a level line θ1 θ2 Xs knee X R Xs b Reactance element with a gradual descent line o o Mho element ...

Страница 53: ...1 X RF 2 1 23 θ1 tan 1 ILmax ILmax IFmin 2 1 24 where X reactance component RF fault resistance ILmax maximum load current IFmin minimum fault current To commence the element of the distance relay Z in accompany with the reactance characteristic a fault recognition is executed every one sixth of a power cycle system frequency using Equations 2 1 21 and 2 1 22 The Z relay shall operate if two fault...

Страница 54: ...nt of measured impedance X reactance component of measured impedance Rs reach setting If the minimum load impedance ZLmin is predictable we can take the Rs setting for the worst case such that the load angle is of 30 and the margin is of 80 in case of θ 75 Equation 2 1 27 can be applied to obtain the resistive setting for the blinder element Rs 0 8 ZLmin cos 30 sin 30 tan 75 2 1 27 v Element equat...

Страница 55: ...uation 2 1 29 the Vpbc voltage is subject to the memory action if the close in fault occurs in three phases that is the values of the Va and Vbc voltages are set from the pre fault voltages The memory is retained for two cycles after the fault occurs Note that the polarizing voltage Vpa in Equation 2 1 30 is not subject to the memory action If a close in fault in three phases occurs the Quad eleme...

Страница 56: ...e in fault The element of the offset directional characteristic is obtained using Equation 2 1 31 X R tan 𝜃 𝑍𝐵 2 1 31 where X reactance component of measured impedance R resistance component of measured impedance θ directional angle setting directional element angle setting in 2 1 28 ZB offset reach setting fixed to be 1 5Ω in 5A rating and 7 5Ω in 1A rating ...

Страница 57: ...cribed later i Common characteristic of ZS and ZG The distance protection function has a Mho characteristic Mho element and a Quadrilateral characteristic Quad element and either the Mho characteristic or the Quad characteristic is selected by the scheme switches ZS Chara and ZG Chara Note The complete elements and their characteristics ZS and ZG are based on the scheme switches ZS Chara and ZG Ch...

Страница 58: ...the user set On for the scheme switch Z S MhoX EN Similarly ZG should be set using the setting Z G X Reach when On set for the Z G MhoX EN The knee function is configured by using the settings ZSF X GrAngle1 and ZSF X GrAngle2 When On Adapt is set for the scheme switch ZS X GrAngleEN the knee function operates when power flow is detected For the Mho characteristic a composition component Z X is pr...

Страница 59: ...al element bottom line can be set by the settings Z S DX Angle and Z S DR Angle respectively The resistive elements right and left lines can be configured by the settings Z S R Reach and Z S R Angle the blinder left line is used to cut the area of the Quad characteristic by applying settings Z S R Reach and Z S R Angle The knee function is configured by the settings ZSF X GrAngle1 and ZSF X GrAngl...

Страница 60: ...1 14 Composition feature for Mho characteristic Selection of Forward Reverse or Non directional for the respective zones The selection of the element direction is provided with the setting Z S Dir For instance if Forward is set then Z S is set in forward direction as shown in Figure 2 1 11 to Figure 2 1 13 If Reverse is set then Z S is set in reverse direction as shown in Figure 2 1 15 to Figure 2...

Страница 61: ... 15 Z1S MHO element in reverse direction Z1S R Reach X R Z1S X Reach Z1S DX Angle Z1S R Angle Z1S Mho angle Z1S R Angle Z1S R Reach Figure 2 1 16 Z1S MHO element set with reactance X in reverse direction X R Z1S X Reach Z1S DR Angle Z1S R Angle Z1S R Reach Z1S DX Angle Z1S R Angle Z1S R Reach Figure 2 1 17 Z1S Quadrilateral element in reverse direction ...

Страница 62: ...ummary of the zones and characteristics for each element Z1XS and Z1XG can be set to cover 100 of the protected line in their respective zones of protection in order to provide extended coverage beyond the settings of Z1S and Z1G On the other hand Z5S and Z5G can be set to protect beyond 100 of the protected line The element characteristic used for Z1XS and Z5S is similar and so is the element cha...

Страница 63: ...ction for over Zone 1 extension Relay reach 100 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Charging current compensation When this distance protection function is applied to underground cables or long distance overhead lines the effect of charging current is to be considered it appears as a distance measurement error to the fault In order to suppress the effect and maintain the high accuracy distance measurement...

Страница 64: ...other elements do not operate Figure 2 1 20 Impedance seen from ZS on occurrence of phase to phase BC fault The previous phenomenon is referred to as overreaching of the leading phase in distance protection terminology A countermeasure is necessary to deal with this phenomenon The countermeasure is to utilize a Zmin element as shown in section 2 1 7 It is generally recognised as being the result o...

Страница 65: ...ristic in the reverse direction is not provided in Z2S and Z3S 1Note As a rule Z1S Z1XS and Z5S are utilized for a close up three phase fault For example the Z1S element can be instructed to operate in the reverse direction the operation of the Z1S element should be covered the origin i e voltage 0 as shown in Figure 2 1 21 Owing to the memory action for the close up fault the Z1S element is able ...

Страница 66: ... in the backup protection easier to operate iii Special characteristic in ZG Earth fault compensation Zero sequence current compensation On the detection of an earth fault ZG requires a compensation function that corrects measuring errors caused by the earth return of zero sequence current By using the compensation function the positive sequence impedance to the fault point can be determined preci...

Страница 67: ...s Z5G Kxs Z5G Krm Z5G Kxm Measuring the positive sequence impedance to the fault point is necessary Therefore for a single circuit line the current input to the earth fault measuring element is compensated by the residual current 3I0 of the protected line On the other hand for a double circuit line the current input is compensated by the residual current 3I0 of the protected line and residual curr...

Страница 68: ...0R 𝐾𝑥𝑚 100 3 3I0mR 2 1 34 where Kxs compensation factor Kxs X0 X1 100 Krs compensation factor Krs R0 R1 100 Kxm compensation factor Kxm Xom X1 100 Krm compensation factor Krm Rom R1 100 X imaginary part of the measured impedance R real part of the measured impedance VaX imaginary part of phase a voltage VaR real part of phase a voltage IaX imaginary part of phase a current IaR real part of phase a...

Страница 69: ...e faults ZG uses an EFL function for the detection of earth faults hence ZG will operate when the EFL function operates However the operation of Z G can be set to be either dependent or independent of the operation of EFL that is On is set for the scheme switch Z G EFL for the Z G operation with EFL and Off is set for the scheme switch Z G EFL for the Z G operation without EFL There is a possibili...

Страница 70: ...asurement and operating condition could be less restricted With regard to the leading phase block function the leading phase ZG element could operate in the event of a multi phase fault The leading phase ZG element can be blocked by an operation of a ZG COV element as shown in scheme logics of the distance protection element described later For example when an A phase or B phase or C phase ZG1COV ...

Страница 71: ... The majority of power swings are transient and the power system recovers after a short period Since a trip signal from the relay is undesirable in such cases the function of power swing blocking PSB is provided enabling the operation of the distance protection to be blocked during the power swing Figure 2 1 24 illustrates a typical impedance locus as seen by the relay during the transient power s...

Страница 72: ...e size of PSBSIN For example in Figure 2 1 25 Z2S is the most distant measuring element in the forward direction Z3S is the most distant measuring element in reverse direction the top line of the PSBSIN function is similar to the tangent of Z2S the bottom line of the PSBSIN function is similar to the tangent of Z3S The outer element PSBSOUT encloses the inner element PSBSIN with a width which can ...

Страница 73: ...SBGOUT in ZG PSBSZ PSBGZ PSBGZ 0 PSBGZ PSBGIN PSBGOUT R X Z2G Z3G PSBGZ Z1G DX Angle Z1G R Reach in the right R ZGF X GrAngle2 Z1G DR Angle Z1G R Angle Z1G R Reach in the left Z1G R Angle Z2S Z3S Figure 2 1 27 Example of PSB element in Quad characteristic Figure 2 1 28 shows the PSBS out and PSBS in logic During a power swing the impedance viewed from the PSB elements passes through the area betwe...

Страница 74: ...for the scheme switch PSBSRS accordingly PSB operation cannot work when the fault is detected by the operation of EFL or OCN PS element i e ZS ZG element is able to work even if the PSB operates It is also possible to remove the PSB operation by utilizing an external reset signal which can be injected at PLC connection point PSBS F RESET Another delayed timer resets the trip block signal that is g...

Страница 75: ...ive scheme switches Z S PSBBlk and Z G PSBBlk However when it is required to continue the operation of respective ZS and ZG elements during a power swing Non is set for respective scheme switches ii Load encroachment The load encroachment element is used to improve security when heavy load current flows in a line When the impedance remains within the hatched area as shown in Figure 2 1 30 a signal...

Страница 76: ...S EN the overcurrent element is subject to the setting of OCF S in Z S The setting value is chosen between 0 02 5 00 A 1 A rating or 0 10 25 00 A 5 A rating Similarly ZG is also provided with overcurrent elements for fail safe operation If On is set for the scheme switch Z G OCFS EN the overcurrent element is subject to the setting of OCF G in Z G iv Definite time delay operation In accordance wit...

Страница 77: ...re 2 1 43 and Figure 2 1 51 of section 2 1 7 Note The operation and setting of the ARC are discussed separately For more information on ARC see Chapter Relay application Autoreclose and voltage check vi Zone 1 control Both Z1S and Z1G offer a variety of trip modes in order to satisfy the diverse nature of the many schemes and applications in which the relay is required to operate The following sch...

Страница 78: ...57 8000001B62 Z1CNT TPBlk On Z1CNT_MPROT 8000001BB0 Z1CNT TPBLK 8100001B63 Z1CNT 3PTP On Z1CNT 3PTP 8200001B64 Z1CNT ARCBlk On Z1CNT ARCBLK 8300001B65 Z1CNT INSTOP On Z1CNT INSTOP 1 Figure 2 1 31 Scheme logic of Zone1 operation control ...

Страница 79: ...he distance measuring element can operate for faults other than close up three phase faults 2Note The operation and settings of the PROT_COMMON is described separately See Chapter Relay application Protection common ii Blocking all phase ground elements Each Z G zone has an option to block all phase ground elements from operating if more than one phase is involved in a ground fault This is achieve...

Страница 80: ... as the base value The resistance reaches of the Covering zones are automatically set to be identical to the operating zone resistance reaches hence the user does not need to consider them Figure 2 1 32 illustrates the Z1G covering zone Z1GCOV characterized with setting Z1G CovCoeff it shows the Z1GCOV element can operate between the zone2 and the zone3 X R Z1G X Reach 100 Z2G X Reach Z3G X Reach ...

Страница 81: ... the calculation result is 1 5 or less Defined value is 1 5 Testing Note that testing of a single phase to ground fault by standard methods will result in failures at the resistance line boundary because the resistance line of the Covering zones is set to the same value as the operating zone This is due to test equipment applying the zero sequence compensation on a system basis rather than on a pe...

Страница 82: ...ch and ZCSF R Angle the resistive elements are applicable when you place a set of On for scheme switch ZCSF MhoR EN On the other hand as shown in Figure 2 1 34 when you require placing an element in the Quad characteristic in forward direction you should place the reach of the ZCSF with setting ZCSF X Reach You can also place resistive elements right side and left side in the figure with setting Z...

Страница 83: ...ngs for the offset element are fixed at 7 5 Ω for 1 A rating or 1 5 Ω for 5 A rating The fix offset makes the ZCSR operate constantly even when the three phase fault appears close in the reverse side However the ZCSF blocks its operation in the three phase fault because the ZCSR runs together with the ZCSF As a result the command protection can avoid improper operations Figure 2 1 33 ZCSF and ZCSR...

Страница 84: ...ake sure that the ZCGR does not have an offset action in revers zone as shown in Figure 2 1 35 and Figure 2 1 36 That is only static characteristics are drawn in the characteristic figures As for the cancellation of the ZCGF and the ZCGR provided are settings ZCGF PSBBlk and ZCGR VTFBlk X R ZCSF R Angle ZCSF R Reach ZCSF DX Angle ZCSF X Reach ZCSR R Angle ZCSR X Reach ZCSR R Reach ZCSR R Angle ZCS...

Страница 85: ...tic X R ZCGF R Angle ZCGF Mho Reach ZCGF Mho Angle ZCGF X Reach ZCGR X Reach ZCGR Mho Reach ZCGR Mho Angle ZCGR R Reach ZCGR R Angle ZCGR R Angle ZCGF R Reach ZCGR R Reach ZCGF R Reach ZCGF R Angle X R ZCGF R Angle ZCGF R Reach ZCGF DX Angle ZCGF X Reach ZCGR DX Angle ZCGR X Reach ZCGR R Reach ZCGR R Angle ZCGF DR Angle ZCGB DR Angle ...

Страница 86: ...B2 1 1 1 EFL 1 PSBS OUT AB BC CA PSBS IN AB BC CA 1 1 1 1 1 PSBS BLOCK 800008EBB0 1 PSBSFR ON TPSBSFR t 0 1 TPSBS t 0 0 020 0 100s 0 00 10 00s PSBS F RESET 810008EBB1 t 0 0 05s S R 1 S R PSBS VCTF BLK 1 1 To CTF VTF SOTF Z1S OPT BC 8100011B6B SOTF Z1S OPT AB 8000011B6A Z1STP_BLOCK 800001EBB0 8200081B6D 8100081B6C 8000081B6B 8200081B6A 8100081B69 8000081B68 8200081B70 8100081B6F 8000081B6F Z1S LEBl...

Страница 87: ... PSBSFR ON TPSBSFR t 0 1 TPSBS t 0 0 020 0 100s 0 00 10 00s PSBS F RESET 810008EBB1 t 0 0 05s S R 1 S R PSBS VCTF BLK 1 1 To CTF VTF SOTF Z1XS OPT BC 8500061B6B SOTF Z1XS OPT AB 8400061B6A Z1XSTP_BLOCK 810006EBB0 8200081B6D 8100081B6C 8000081B6B 8200081B6A 8100081B69 8000081B68 8200081B70 8100081B6F 8000081B6F Z1X_M PHASE_FAULT From ZG Z1XS MDDET OFF 1 Z1XS EN On Z1XS OPT AB Z1XS OPT BC Z1XS OPT C...

Страница 88: ...PSBS t 0 0 020 0 100s 0 00 10 00s PSBS F RESET 810008EBB1 t 0 0 05s S R 1 S R PSBS VCTF BLK 1 1 To CTF VTF SOTF Z2S OPT BC 8100021B6B SOTF Z2S OPT AB 8000021B6A Z2STP_BLOCK 820002EBB0 8200081B6D 8100081B6C 8000081B6B 8200081B6A 8100081B69 8000081B68 8200081B70 8100081B6F 8000081B6F Z2S MDDET OFF 1 Z2S EN On Z2S OPT AB Z2S OPT BC Z2S OPT CA SOTF Z2S BLOCK 820002EBB3 1 1 8300021B63 8200021C26 810002...

Страница 89: ...IN AB BC CA 1 1 1 1 1 PSBS BLOCK 800008EBB0 1 PSBSFR ON TPSBSFR t 0 1 TPSBS t 0 0 020 0 100s 0 00 10 00s PSBS F RESET 810008EBB1 t 0 0 05s S R 1 S R PSBS VCTF BLK 1 1 To CTF VTF SOTF Z3S OPT BC 8500031B6B SOTF Z3S OPT AB 8400031B6A Z3STP_BLOCK 830003EBB0 8200081B6D 8100081B6C 8000081B6B 8200081B6A 8100081B69 8000081B68 8200081B70 8100081B6F 8000081B6F Z3S MDDET OFF 1 Z3S EN On Z3S OPT AB Z3S OPT B...

Страница 90: ...IN AB BC CA 1 1 1 1 1 PSBS BLOCK 800008EBB0 1 PSBSFR ON TPSBSFR t 0 1 TPSBS t 0 0 020 0 100s 0 00 10 00s PSBS F RESET 810008EBB1 t 0 0 05s S R 1 S R PSBS VCTF BLK 1 1 To CTF VTF SOTF Z4S OPT BC 8900041B6B SOTF Z4S OPT AB 8800041B6A Z4STP_BLOCK 840004EBB0 8200081B6D 8100081B6C 8000081B6B 8200081B6A 8100081B69 8000081B68 8200081B70 8100081B6F 8000081B6F Z4S MDDET OFF 1 Z4S EN On Z4S OPT AB Z4S OPT B...

Страница 91: ...SBSFR ON TPSBSFR t 0 1 TPSBS t 0 0 020 0 100s 0 00 10 00s PSBS F RESET 810008EBB1 t 0 0 05s S R 1 S R PSBS VCTF BLK 1 1 To CTF VTF SOTF Z5S OPT BC 8900051B6B SOTF Z5S OPT AB 8800051B6A Z5STP_BLOCK 850005EBB0 8200081B6D 8100081B6C 8000081B6B 8200081B6A 8100081B69 8000081B68 8200081B70 8100081B6F 8000081B6F Z5_M PHASE_FAULT From ZG Z5S MDDET OFF 1 Z5S EN On Z1XS OPT AB Z1XS OPT BC Z1XS OPT CA SOTF Z...

Страница 92: ...of the scheme switches termed EN with zone names Z S EN The user should set Off for scheme switch Z S EN to disable for issuing the trip signals Using PLC signal Z S_ARCBLOCK the Z S elements can issue ARC BLOCK signals for the ARC function via the TRC function we shall see it later in Chapter Relay application Autoreclose To TRC To DISCAR 1 Z1S OPT Z1XS OPT Z2S OPT Z3S OPT Z4S OPT Z5S OPT Z1S OPT...

Страница 93: ...T CA 1 1 8C00001B66 8D00001B67 8E00001B68 8300001B28 Figure 2 1 44 SOTF ZS grouping logic for TRC Recording functions ii ZG logic Figure 2 1 45 to Figure 2 1 50 to shows the ZG logics and corresponding SOTF logics All logic operations Z1G Z1GX Z2G Z3G Z4G and Z5G can be selected using the scheme switches Scheme switch Z G EFL is used to select the EFL element for the detection of earth faults when...

Страница 94: ...B68 8000011B66 8000011B69 Z1G ARC BLOCK 1 1 SOTF Z1G TRIP To Grouping logic Z1G PSBBlk Block LEG BLOCK 800008EBB2 PSBG OUT A B C 1 1 1 1 PSBG BLOCK 800008EBB0 TPSBGFR t 0 1 TPSBG t 0 0 020 0 100s 0 00 10 00s PSBG F RESET 810008EBB1 S R 1 S R PSBG VCTF BLK To CTF VTF 1 1 1 1 Z1G_3PTP 800001EBB2 Z1G TPMD 3P Z1G ARCBlk On 1 Z1GARC_BLOCK 800001EBB3 Z1G_INST_OP 800001EBB1 1 1 A B C PSBG IN 1 1 PSBGFR t...

Страница 95: ...BLOCK 1 1 SOTF Z1XG TRIP To Grouping logic Z1XG PSBBlk Block LEG BLOCK 800008EBB2 PSBG OUT A B C 1 1 1 1 PSBG BLOCK 800008EBB0 TPSBGFR t 0 1 TPSBG t 0 0 020 0 100s 0 00 10 00s PSBG F RESET 810008EBB1 S R 1 S R PSBG VCTF BLK To CTF VTF 1 1 1 1 Z1XG_3PTP 810006EBB2 Z1XG TPMD 3P Z1XG ARCBlk On 1 Z1XG_ARCBLOCK 810006EBB3 Z1XG_INST_OP 810006EBB1 1 A B C PSBG IN 1 1 PSBGFR t 0 0 05s To ZS Z1XG OPT A Z1X...

Страница 96: ...LOCK 800008EBB0 TPSBGFR t 0 1 TPSBG t 0 0 020 0 100s 0 00 10 00s PSBG F RESET 810008EBB1 S R 1 S R PSBG VCTF BLK To CTF VTF 1 1 1 1 Z2G_3PTP 820002EBB2 Z2G TPMD 3P Z2G ARCBlk On 1 Z2G_ARCBLOCK 820002EBB3 Z2G_INST_OP 820002EBB1 1 A B C PSBG IN 1 1 PSBGFR t 0 0 05s To ZS Z2G OPT A Z2G OPT B Z2G OPT C 1 Z2G OCFS Off 1 8200021C26 8100021C25 8000021C24 Distance common function 8000081B60 8100081B61 820...

Страница 97: ...LOCK 800008EBB0 TPSBGFR t 0 1 TPSBG t 0 0 020 0 100s 0 00 10 00s PSBG F RESET 810008EBB1 S R 1 S R PSBG VCTF BLK To CTF VTF 1 1 1 1 Z3G_3PTP 830003EBB2 Z3G TPMD 3P Z3G ARCBlk On 1 Z3G_ARCBLOCK 830003EBB3 Z3G_INST_OP 830003EBB1 1 A B C PSBG IN 1 1 PSBGFR t 0 0 05s To ZS Z3G OPT A Z3G OPT B Z3G OPT C 1 Z3G OCFS Off 1 8600021C26 8500021C25 8400021C24 Distance common function 8000081B60 8100081B61 820...

Страница 98: ...LOCK 800008EBB0 TPSBGFR t 0 1 TPSBG t 0 0 020 0 100s 0 00 10 00s PSBG F RESET 810008EBB1 S R 1 S R PSBG VCTF BLK To CTF VTF 1 1 1 1 Z4G_3PTP 840004EBB2 Z4G TPMD 3P Z4G ARCBlk On 1 Z4G_ARCBLOCK 840004EBB3 Z4G_INST_OP 840004EBB1 1 A B C PSBG IN 1 1 PSBGFR t 0 0 05s To ZS Z4G OPT A Z4G OPT B Z4G OPT C 1 Z4G OCFS Off 1 8A00041C26 8900041C25 8800041C24 Distance common function 8000081B60 8100081B61 820...

Страница 99: ...OCK 1 1 SOTF Z5G TRIP To Grouping logic Z5G PSBBlk Block LEG BLOCK 800008EBB2 PSBG OUT A B C 1 1 1 1 PSBG BLOCK 800008EBB0 TPSBGFR t 0 1 TPSBG t 0 0 020 0 100s 0 00 10 00s PSBG F RESET 810008EBB1 S R 1 S R PSBG VCTF BLK To CTF VTF 1 1 1 1 Z1XG_3PTP 850005EBB2 Z5G TPMD 3P Z5G ARCBlk On 1 Z5G_ARCBLOCK 850005EBB3 Z5G_INST_OP 850005EBB1 1 A B C PSBG IN 1 1 PSBGFR t 0 0 05s To ZS Z5G OPT A Z5G OPT B Z5...

Страница 100: ...s Z1G ARC BLOCK Z1XG ARC BLOCK Z2G ARC BLOCK Z3G ARC BLOCK Z4G ARC BLOCK Z5G ARC BLOCK 1 ZG ARC BLOCK ZG OPT AR ZG OPT BR ZG OPT CR Z1G OPT A Z1G OPT B Z1G OPT C Z1XG OPT A Z1XG OPT B Z1XG OPT C Z2G OPT A Z2G OPT B Z2G OPT C Z3G OPT A Z3G OPT B Z3G OPT C Z4G OPT A Z4G OPT B Z4G OPT C Z5G OPT A Z5G OPT B Z5G OPT C 1 1 1 ZG TRIP A ZG TRIP B ZG TRIP C Z1G TRIP A Z1G TRIP B Z1G TRIP C Z1XG TRIP A Z1XG...

Страница 101: ...ing the CB poles The ZG function issues a per phase trip signal so that a per phase TRIP COMMAND will be generated in the TRC function set a single phase trip 1P mode for scheme switch Z G TPMD The user can also set a three phase trip 3P mode if the TRIP_COMMANDs does not need to issue separately Note that the TRIP_COMMANDs will be issued for the CB in the TRC function after collecting signals fro...

Страница 102: ...ine CD TZ1 TZ2 TZ3 TZ4 TZ5 Reach in the forward CTI Figure 2 1 53 Zones and time coordination between terminals3 1Note For the ZS elements the reach setting is possible using the settings Z S Mho Reach and Z S Mho Angle for the Mho characteristic If the Quad characteristic is applied the value of the reach setting is projected on the reactance axis 2Note To realize the coordination time interval C...

Страница 103: ...electivity for the adjacent line BC i e the operation in the zone1 Y the user should set the reach of the zone2 X not beyond the reach of the zone1 Y Note that setting TZ2 X does not influence the CTI regarding the zone1 Y If delayed tripping in the zone1 X is preferred the CTI between the zone2 X and the zone1 Y should be taken into account Note that setting TZ2 X should be satisfied with Equatio...

Страница 104: ...r far adjacent lines if the coordination could be satisfied with the zone2 Y then the user should set the reach of the zone3 x that can cover the remote end of the longest adjacent line whenever possible Note that the effect of fault infeed should be taken into account at the remote busbars If the line configuration is similar to the one in Figure 2 1 53 the user is only required to think of the c...

Страница 105: ...ault occurred near the busbar B its operation is taken together with the operation of the autoreclose function ARC CTI Busbar A Busbar B Busbar C G Zone2 X Zone1 X TZ1 X Zone3 X Zone4 X Zone5 X Y Zone1 Y Zone2 Y TZ5 TZ4 1 TZ3 TZ2 R Q X Y Q Line AB Line BC Zone1X X Reach Figure 2 1 56 CTIs for zone1 and zone1X As shown in Figure 2 1 56 the reach of the zone1X should be set to overreach the protecte...

Страница 106: ...e effectively than the zone3 S That is it is difficult for the zone3 S or the zone3 O to service a remote backup relay for the line AB once a fault occurs on the line AB because a fault current is fed from several busbars On the other hand the fault current feeding will not influence the operation of the zone4 W CTI Busbar F Busbar A Busbar B Zone1 S TZ1 X Zone1 W Reach U R W X Line AJ Line AB TZ2...

Страница 107: ...ire length of the line as shown in the long dashed short dashed circle line to avoid unwanted operations for external faults at busbar C Consequently clearing faults by a delayed zone2 are performed mostly as shown in the broken circle line that is operated at an end of the line AB Busbar A Busbar B U Line AJ S Busbar C J Line JK Line FJ O Busbar B Busbar A Busbar C U S O broken circle line long d...

Страница 108: ...Angle ZG Test XAngle Figure 2 1 60 illustrates that the ZS element with knee point which can be ruled with the angles made with θ1 and θ2 Should On Adapt be set for setting Z S X GrAngleEN the knee slope can be made with θ1 which will be computed internally using a current difference measured before and after the fault For the test if a fixed θ1 is preferred during the On Adapt has been set the us...

Страница 109: ...0 Z Vn 100 120 V Rated voltage for ZG and ZS 110 Z IcC EN Off On Charging current compensation use or not for ZG and ZS Off Z1CNT TPBlk Off On Z1 trip block when main protection is out of service Off Z1CNT INSTOP Off On Z1 instant trip when main protection is out of service Off Z1CNT 3PTP Off On Z1 3 phases trip when main protection is out of service Off Z1CNT ARCBlk Off On arc block by Z1 operati...

Страница 110: ...5 50 5 10 LESL Angle 5 75 degMaximum load angle on the left 10 Z1S Z1S Dir Forward Reverse NonDir Z1S directional characteristic Forward Mho Z1S Mho Angle 30 90 degZ1S mho characteristic angle for Mho 85 Z1S Mho Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 Z1S mho reach for Mho 8 00 1 60 Z1S MhoX EN Off On Z1S reactance reach use or not for Mho Off Z1S X Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 Z1S reactance reach 8 00 1 6...

Страница 111: ...gZ2S directional X characteristic angle 30 Quad Z2S X Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 Z2S reactance reach 20 00 4 00 Z2S R Angle 30 90 degZ2S resistive reach characteristic angle 75 Z2S R Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 Z2S resistive reach 25 50 5 10 Z2S DX Angle 0 60 degZ2S directional X characteristic angle 30 Z2S DR Angle 0 60 deg Z2S directional R characteristic angle for Quad 5 TZ2S 0 00 100 00 s...

Страница 112: ...gZ4S mho characteristic angle for Mho 85 Z4S Mho Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 Z4S mho reach for Mho 20 00 4 00 Z4S MhoX EN Off On Z4S reactance reach use or not for Mho Off Z4S X Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 Z4S reactance reach 20 00 4 00 Z4S MhoR EN Off On Z4S resistive reach use or not for Mho Off Z4S R Angle 30 90 degZ4S resistive reach characteristic angle 75 Z4S R Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100...

Страница 113: ...00 0 01 100 00 Z5S resistive reach 25 50 5 10 Z5S DX Angle 0 60 degZ5S directional X characteristic angle 30 Z5S DR Angle 0 60 deg Z5S directional R characteristic angle for Quad 5 TZ5S 0 00 100 00 s Z5S operation delay time 0 50 Z5S CovCoeff 1 5 10 0 Covered characteristic size coefficient 1 5 Output Z5S MSDET Off On Multi phase or non earth fault condition is used or not Off Z5S PSBBlk Non Block...

Страница 114: ...rectional X characteristic angle 30 Z1XS DR Angle 0 60 deg Z1XS directional R characteristic angle for Quad 5 TZ1XS 0 00 100 00 s Z1XS operation delay time 0 00 Z1XS CovCoeff 1 5 10 0 Covered characteristic size coefficient 1 5 Output Z1XS MSDET Off On Multi phase or non earth fault condition is used or not On Z1XS PSBBlk Non Block Z1XS operation block or not by PSB detection Block Z1XS LEBlk Non ...

Страница 115: ...ZCSR mho reach for Mho 40 00 8 00 MhoX ZCSR MhoX EN Off On ZCSR reactance reach use or not for Mho Off ZCSR X Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 ZCSR reactance reach 40 00 8 00 MhoR ZCSR MhoR EN Off On ZCSR resistive reach use or not for Mho Off ZCSR R Angle 30 90 degZCSR resistive reach characteristic angle 75 ZCSR R Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 ZCSR resistive reach 25 50 5 10 MhoDX ZCSR MhoDX EN Off...

Страница 116: ... 1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A ZCSR R Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 ZCSR resistive reach 25 50 5 10 ZCSR DX Angle 0 60 degZCSR directional X characteristic angle 30 ZCSR DR Angle 0 60 deg ZCSR directional R characteristic angle for Quad 5 Output ZCSR CovCoeff 1 5 10 0 Covered characteristic size coefficient 1 5 ...

Страница 117: ...A EFL threshold 0 20 1 00 UVPWI ZG UVPWI EN Off On UV for positive weak infeed Off UVPWI 5 0 130 0 V UVPWI relay operation level 30 0 Z1G Z1G Dir Forward Reverse NonDir Z1G direction to protect Forward Mho Z1G Mho Angle 30 90 degZ1G mho characteristic angle for Mho 85 Z1G Mho Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 Z1G mho reach for Mho 8 00 1 60 Z1G MhoX EN Off On Z1G reactance reach use or not for Mho Off...

Страница 118: ...h for Mho 20 00 4 00 Z2G MhoX EN Off On Z2G reactance reach use or not for Mho Off Z2G X Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 Z2G reactance reach 20 00 4 00 Z2G MhoR EN Off On Z2G resistive reach use or not for Mho Off Z2G R Angle 30 90 degZ2G resistive reach characteristic angle 75 Z2G R Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 Z2G resistive reach 25 50 5 10 Z2G MhoDX EN Off On Z2G directional X characteristic use...

Страница 119: ...500 00 0 01 100 00 Z3G reactance reach 40 00 8 00 Z3G R Angle 30 90 degZ3G resistive reach characteristic angle 75 Z3G R Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 Z3G resistive reach 25 50 5 10 Z3G DX Angle 0 60 degZ3G directional X characteristic angle 30 Z3G DR Angle 0 60 deg Z3G directional R characteristic angle for Quad 5 I0K Z3G Krs 0 1000 Zero phase current factor Self line R0 R1 100 Z3G Kxs 0 1000 Zer...

Страница 120: ... Adjacent line R0m R1 0 Z4G Kxm 0 1000 Zero phase current factor Adjacent line X0m X1 0 Z4G EFL Off On EFL operation condition used or not for Z4G operation On TZ4G 0 00 100 00 s Z4G operation delay time 0 60 Output Z4G MPFBlk Non Block Z4G operation block or not in multi phase fault Non Z4G PSBBlk Non Block Z4G operation block or not by PSB detection Non Z4G LEBlk Non Block Load encroachment enab...

Страница 121: ...ion block or not in multi phase fault Non Z5G PSBBlk Non Block Z5G operation block or not by PSB detection Non Z5G LEBlk Non Block Load encroachment enable Non Z5G LPBlk Non Block Z5G leading phase operation block Non Z5G TPMD 1P 3P Z5G trip mode phase segregated trip or 3 phase trip 3P Z5G ARCBlk Non Block Autoreclose execution block by Z5G trip Block Z5G OCFS EN Off On Fail safe OC for Z5G trip ...

Страница 122: ... Output Z1XG EFL Off On EFL operation condition used or not for Z1XG operation On Z1XG MPFBlk Non Block Z1XG operation block or not in multi phase fault Block Z1XG PSBBlk Non Block Z1XG operation block or not by PSB detection Block Z1XG LEBlk Non Block Load encroachment enable Non Z1XG LPBlk Non Block Z1XG leading phase operation block Non Z1XG TPMD 1P 3P Z1XG trip mode phase segregated trip or 3 ...

Страница 123: ...tic angle 75 ZCGF R Reach 0 10 500 00 0 01 100 00 ZCGF resistive reach 25 50 5 10 ZCGF DX Angle 0 60 degZCGF directional X characteristic angle 30 ZCGF DR Angle 0 60 deg ZCGF directional R characteristic angle for Quad 5 I0K ZCGF Krs 0 1000 Zero phase current factor Self line R0 R1 100 ZCGF Kxs 0 1000 Zero phase current factor Self line X0 X1 100 ZCGF Krm 0 1000 Zero phase current factor Adjacent ...

Страница 124: ...GR directional R characteristic angle for Quad 5 I0K ZCGR Krs 0 1000 Zero phase current factor Self line R0 R1 100 ZCGR Kxs 0 1000 Zero phase current factor Self line X0 X1 100 ZCGR Krm 0 1000 Zero phase current factor Adjacent line R0m R1 0 ZCGR Kxm 0 1000 Zero phase current factor Adjacent line X0m X1 0 ZCGR CovCoeff 1 5 10 0 Covered characteristic size coefficient 1 5 Output ZCGR VTFBlk Non Blo...

Страница 125: ...phase BC 8200081B70 LD_ENC CA Load encroachment operated phase CA 8000081BB2 LES BLOCK LES block 8000081B6B LES L AB LES L relay element operated phase AB 8100081B6C LES L BC LES L relay element operated phase BC 8200081B6D LES L CA LES L relay element operated phase CA 8000081B68 LES R AB LES R relay element operated phase AB 8100081B69 LES R BC LES R relay element operated phase BC 8200081B6A LE...

Страница 126: ...ck signal for Z1S 8000011B6A SOTF Z1S OPT AB SOTF operated for Z1S phase AB 8100011B6B SOTF Z1S OPT BC SOTF operated for Z1S phase BC 8200011B6C SOTF Z1S OPT CA SOTF operated for Z1S phase CA 8000011B2B SOTF Z1S TRIP SOTF operated for Z1S 3 phases OR 8400061B6A SOTF Z1XS OPT AB SOTF operated for Z1XS phase AB 8500061B6B SOTF Z1XS OPT BC SOTF operated for Z1XS phase BC 8600061B6C SOTF Z1XS OPT CA S...

Страница 127: ...CA Z1S operated phase CA 8300011B63 Z1S ORX Z1S X operation level pick up 3 phases OR 8000011BB0 Z1STP_BLOCK Z1S trip block signal 8000011BB2 Z1S_ARCBLOCK Autoreclose block signal for Z1S 8000011BB1 Z1S_INST_OP Z1S instantaneously operated 8300011B65 Z1S_ORX OP Z1S operated before timer 3 phases OR 8400061C20 Z1XS AB Z1XS relay element operated phase AB 8400061B60 Z1XS ABX Z1XS ABX operated phase ...

Страница 128: ...ent operated phase CA 8600031B62 Z3S CAX Z3S CAX operated phase CA 8300031B23 Z3S OPT Z3S operated 3 phases OR 8400031B66 Z3S OPT AB Z3S operated phase AB 8500031B67 Z3S OPT BC Z3S operated phase BC 8600031B68 Z3S OPT CA Z3S operated phase CA 8700031B63 Z3S ORX Z3S ORX operated 3 phases OR 8300031BB0 Z3STP_BLOCK Z3S trip block signal 8300031BB2 Z3S_ARCBLOCK Autoreclose block signal for Z3S 8300031...

Страница 129: ...oreclose block signal by ZS 8C00001B62 ZS OPT ABR ZS protection operated phase A 8D00001B63 ZS OPT BCR ZS protection operated phase B 8E00001B64 ZS OPT CAR ZS protection operated phase C 8300001B23 ZS TRIP ZS trip 3000081B71 ZS_BLKZN BlkZn status signal in RPSB of IEC61580 LN 8000001C71 ZS_FL_ST0 Recording start signal forward 8100001C72 ZS_FL_ST1 Recording start signal reverse 8200001C73 ZS_FL_ST...

Страница 130: ...nt operated phase B 8200081B73 LD_ENC C Load encroachment operated phase C 8000081BB2 LEG BLOCK LEG block 8000081B6C LEG L A LEG L relay element operated phase A 8100081B6D LEG L B LEG L relay element operated phase B 8200081B6E LEG L C LEG L relay element operated phase C 8000081B69 LEG R A LEG R relay element operated phase A 8100081B6A LEG R B LEG R relay element operated phase B 8200081B6B LEG...

Страница 131: ...se B 8600081B65 PSBGOUT C PSBGOUT relay element operated phase C 8000011BB4 SOTF Z1G BLOCK SOTF block signal for Z1G 8000011B6B SOTF Z1G OPT A SOTF operated for Z1G phase A 8100011B6C SOTF Z1G OPT B SOTF operated for Z1G phase B 8200011B6D SOTF Z1G OPT C SOTF operated for Z1G phase C 8000011B2B SOTF Z1G TRIP SOTF operated for Z1G 3 phases OR 8100061BB4 SOTF Z1XG BLOCK SOTF block signal for Z1XG 84...

Страница 132: ...0011B61 Z1G BX Z1G BX operated phase B 8200011C22 Z1G C Z1G relay element operated phase C 8000071B63 Z1G COV A Z1G COV relay element operated phase A 8100071B64 Z1G COV B Z1G COV relay element operated phase B 8200071B65 Z1G COV C Z1G COV relay element operated phase C 8200011B62 Z1G CX Z1G CX operated phase C 8000011B69 Z1G OPT Z1G operated 3 phases OR 8000011B66 Z1G OPT A Z1G operated phase A 8...

Страница 133: ...Z2G A Z2G relay element operated phase A 8200021B6A Z2G ARC BLOCK Autoreclose block by Z2G protection 8000021B60 Z2G AX Z2G AX operated phase A 8100021C21 Z2G B Z2G relay element operated phase B 8100021B61 Z2G BX Z2G BX operated phase B 8200021C22 Z2G C Z2G relay element operated phase C 8200021B62 Z2G CX Z2G CX operated phase C 8200021B69 Z2G OPT Z2G operated 3 phases OR 8000021B66 Z2G OPT A Z2G...

Страница 134: ...1C22 Z4G C Z4G relay element operated phase C 8A00041B62 Z4G CX Z4G CX operated phase C 8400041B69 Z4G OPT Z4G operated 3 phases OR 8800041B66 Z4G OPT A Z4G operated phase A 8900041B67 Z4G OPT B Z4G operated phase B 8A00041B68 Z4G OPT C Z4G operated phase C 8B00041B63 Z4G ORX Z4G ORX operated 3 phases OR 8B00041B65 Z4G ORX OP Z4G operated before timer 3 phases OR 8800041B20 Z4G TRIP A Z4G trip pha...

Страница 135: ...000001B20 ZG TRIP A ZG A phase trip 8100001B21 ZG TRIP B ZG B phase trip 8200001B22 ZG TRIP C ZG C phase trip 8000001B63 ZGFCOV A ZGFCOV relay element operated phase A 8100001B64 ZGFCOV B ZGFCOV relay element operated phase B 8200001B65 ZGFCOV C ZGFCOV relay element operated phase C 8400001B66 ZGRCOV A ZGRCOV relay element operated phase A 8500001B67 ZGRCOV B ZGRCOV relay element operated phase B ...

Страница 136: ...gnal for Z3G 830003EBB1 Z3G_INST_OP Z3G instantaneously operated 840004EBB0 Z4GTP_BLOCK Z4G trip block signal 840004EBB2 Z4G_3PTP Z4G trip 3 phases 840004EBB3 Z4G_ARCBLOCK Autoreclose block signal for Z4G 840004EBB1 Z4G_INST_OP Z4G instantaneously operated 850005EBB0 Z5GTP_BLOCK Z5G trip block signal 850005EBB2 Z5G_3PTP Z5G trip 3 phases 850005EBB3 Z5G_ARCBLOCK Autoreclose block signal for Z5G 850...

Страница 137: ...ed phase A 8000071B8C ZCGF AX ZCGF operated phase A 8100071B76 ZCGF B ZCGF relay element operated phase B 8100071B8D ZCGF BX ZCGF operated phase B 8200071B77 ZCGF C ZCGF relay element operated phase C 8200071B8E ZCGF CX ZCGF operated phase C 8400071B78 ZCGR A ZCGR relay element operated phase A 8400071B8F ZCGR AX ZCGR operated phase A 8500071B79 ZCGR B ZCGR relay element operated phase B 8500071B9...

Страница 138: ...ult the fault cannot be detected by conventional standard protection functions Therefore in order to avoid such failures SOTF OC is applied so that the fault can be detected for a specific period following the closure of the CB Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain feat...

Страница 139: ...ovided to determine the SOTF threshold Setting OCSOTF 2fBlk is used to override the SOTF function when the SOTF OC detects a second harmonic If Block 3P is set for the setting OCSOTF 2fBlk all of the OCSOTF elements are overridden when second harmonic is present Alternatively if Block PerP is set for the setting OCSOTF 2fBlk each individual OCSOTF element of the SOTF function is overridden for sec...

Страница 140: ... 1 1 1 OCSOTF 2PBlk Block 3P Block PerP From ICD 800000EBB2 ADD SOTF_EN 1 SOTF Test On 0 5s t 0 800000EBB1 OC RTP EN SHOT_MULTI From ARC To DISCAR OC RETRIP SOTFOC TRIP SOTFOC OPT A SOTFOC OPT B SOTF_EN_COND 1 1 SOTFOC ARC BLOCK 8800011B62 8900011B63 8A00011B64 To TRC SOTFOC TRIP To Recording SOTFOC OPT C To ZS ZG 8000001B60 8300001B23 Figure 2 2 1 Scheme logic for the SOTF OC ...

Страница 141: ...C RTP EN OC retrip enable 8000001C20 OCSOTF A SOTFOC relay element operated phase A 8100001C21 OCSOTF B SOTFOC relay element operated phase B 8200001C22 OCSOTF C SOTFOC relay element operated phase C 8000001B60 OCSOTF OR SOTFOC relay element operated 3 phases OR 8000001B66 SOTFOC OPT SOTFOC protection operated 3 phases OR 8800001B62 SOTFOC OPT A SOTFOC protection operated phase A 8900001B63 SOTFOC...

Страница 142: ...verreach protection BOP The function of autoreclose ARC can be operated speedy using these protections above and these can issue either a single pole trip signal or three poles trip signal in accordance with DISCAR settings and the states of faults Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not...

Страница 143: ...g element is transmitted only hence respective terminals can share a telecommunication channel and a simplex channel can be used Note At remote terminals Z1X Z2 have a delay timer Thus they can remove the faults ii Scheme logic Figure 2 3 1 shows PUP logic When Z1S Z1G operate at the local terminal Z1S Z1G issue a single phase trip signal or three phase trip signal instantaneously and a trip permi...

Страница 144: ...AR_PERM1 B DISCAR_PERM1 C DISCAR_PERM DISCAR_PERM2 A DISCAR_PERM2 B DISCAR_PERM2 C DISCAR_PERM To ECHO External DISCAR R1 External DISCAR R2 Integral DISCAR R1 A Integral DISCAR R1 B Integral DISCAR R1 C Integral DISCAR R1 S Integral DISCAR R2 A Integral DISCAR R2 B Integral DISCAR R2 C Integral DISCAR R2 S Figure 2 3 1 PUP scheme logic 1 8000001B78 8100001B79 8200001B7A 8300001B7B DISCAR CS S_PUP...

Страница 145: ...le length of the protected line For more information of ECHO and WKIT see section 2 3 5 iii Countermeasure of current reversal CRL When a fault exist on one of parallel lines tripping CBs sequential may cause a current reversal on another of parallel lines The current reversal results in the false operation of POP hence countermeasure logic is provided for the current reversal CRL For more informa...

Страница 146: ...74 8200001B75 DISCAR OPT A DISCAR OPT B DISCAR OPT C DISCAR OPT S 8300001B76 1 1 1 1 DISCAR ARC BLOCK 8000001B20 8100001B21 8200001B22 DISCAR TRIP A DISCAR TRIP B DISCAR TRIP C 1 3P DISCAR_TPMD 8100001B77 Block Week infeed trip logic WKIT To TRC Current reversal logic CRL 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ZCSF ABX CX ZCSF BCX CX ZCSF CAX CX 1 1 1 1 1 DISCAR CS C_POUP ZCGR AX CX ZCGR BX CX ZCGR CX CX ZCSF X CX Z...

Страница 147: ...smission of the trip permission signal continues for a while set by TSBCT dis after reset of ZCSF ZCSG operation Consequently the overreaching elements far from the fault can also generate a trip signal because the trip permission signal is picked up delayed Thus this command protection ensures its operation at the remote terminal 1 8000001B78 8100001B79 8200001B7A DISCAR OPT A DISCAR OPT B DISCAR...

Страница 148: ...l be removed even if the power line carrier is used to exchange operation information i Operation of echo ECHO and week infeed trip WKIT UOP can have the functions of ECHO and WKIT as well as POP To operate these function user should set Dis ECHO On or Dis WIKT On For more information of ECHO and WKIT see section 2 3 5 ii Countermeasure of current reversal CRL UOP has the countermeasure of current...

Страница 149: ...ot operate Thus at local terminal CB tripping is performed when the forward overreaching element has operated and a trip block signal has not been received from the opposite terminal BOP does not send a trip block signal normally and a trip block signal is sent only when the reverse looking element operates In BOP a trip block signal is required to send in the event of an external fault Hence fail...

Страница 150: ...OP is equal to 1 Conversely a trip block signal is not observed when the logic level is equal to 0 In BOP a trip block signal is not transmitted If the reverse overreaching element operates while the forward overreaching element does not operate a trip block signal is transmitted A trip block signal is not sent for setting TREBK dis even after the local terminal issues a trip signal so that comman...

Страница 151: ...01B65 8200001B66 8300001B67 ZCGR AX CX ZCGR BX CX ZCGR CX CX ZCSF X CX ZCSR X CX 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ZCSF ABX ZCSF BCX ZCSF CAX t 0 1 1 1 t 0 t 0 t 0 1 t 0 t 0 TCHD Dis 0 000 to 0 100s From ZS and ZG From Terminal 1 Permission signals received From Terminal 2 800000EBBF DISCAR_3PTP 800000EBBF DISCAR_ARCBLOCK 800000EBB0 DISCAR_BLK 8000001BB0 CAR_BLOCK From CARRIER COMMON 1 1 1 1 1 1 CH1 USE 1 CH2 USE...

Страница 152: ...a terminal receives a trip permission signal when neither forward overreaching element nor reverse looking element have operated ECHO sends back the received signal to the opposite terminal With regard to UOP if a terminal receives a block signal when neither forward overreaching element nor reverse looking element have operated ECHO stops sending the block signal to the opposite terminal When CB ...

Страница 153: ... DIS ECHO BLOCK ECHO1_CONDITION ECHO2_CONDITION 1 0 t 0 05s t 0 0 2s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8000001B6B 0 t 0 05s t 0 0 2s 1 0 t 0 05s t 0 0 2s 1 0 t 0 05s t 0 0 2s 1 ECHO_CS B 8100001B6C ECHO_CS C 8200001B6D ECHO_CS 8300001B6E On Dis ECHO 0 t 0 05s t 0 0 2s 1 0 t 0 05s t 0 0 2s 1 0 t 0 05s t 0 0 2s 1 0 t 0 05s t 0 0 2s 1 External DISCAR R1 Integral DISCAR R1 A Integral DISCAR R1 B Integral DISCAR...

Страница 154: ...AR POP UOP Figure 2 3 10 WIKT logic UV responds to three phase to phase voltages and three phase to ground voltages UV prevents false weak infeed tripping due to spurious operation of the channel WIKT can be enabled using scheme switch Dis WKIT On 2 3 6 Countermeasure for current reversal When a fault occurs on one of the parallel lines the reversal of fault current may be found on another line ow...

Страница 155: ...ement runs when the current reversal is yielded At terminal B2 the forward looking element runs but the reverse looking element does not run Provided that the forward looking element runs at terminal A2 before the forward looking element does not run at terminal B2 This may cause false operation of POP UOP and BOP on line L2 A2 B2 B A A1 B1 F L1 L2 a Direction of fault current t1 CRL Forward looki...

Страница 156: ...uns immediately after the fault occurs The operation of CRL continues to last for another period of off delay timer setting TREBK dis even after the reverse looking element does not run and the forward looking element runs CRL continuously blocks the local tripping and transmitting a trip block signal to terminal B2 Even if operation overlap of the forward looking elements between terminal A2 and ...

Страница 157: ...sed for the external carrier communication Carrier signal received at binary inputs Used for the integral carrier communication Carrier signal transmitted by the transmission control function DIF_COMM Carrier signal for Phase A ase A Carrier signal for Phase B Carrier signal for Phase C Carrier signal for Short DisCAR CHSEL Guard And Single 1 1 t 0 5ms External DISCAR R1 Integral DISCAR R1 A Integ...

Страница 158: ...fault Note 1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A Carrier_Distance Dis CAR Off PUP POP UOP BOP DISCAR scheme enable Off PUP POP UOP BOP Dis ECHO Off On Echo function enable Off Dis WKIT Off On Weak infeed trip function enable Off DisCAR CHSEL Single And Guard Carrier channel configuration Single TREBK Dis 0 00 10 00 s Current reverse blocking time 0 10 TCHD Dis 0 000 0 100 s Coordination timer in BOP function ...

Страница 159: ...d from remote 2 8100001B63 LOSS DISCAR2 Distance carrier loss condition for remote 2 8000001B64 DIS REVBLK A Distance carrier current reversal blocking phase A 8100001B65 DIS REVBLK B Distance carrier current reversal blocking phase B 8200001B66 DIS REVBLK C Distance carrier current reversal blocking phase C 8300001B67 DIS REVBLK S Distance carrier current reversal blocking 8000001B68 PPUB_TRIP A ...

Страница 160: ...rom remote 2 for fail safe for external carrier Connection point on PLC logic DISCAR Function ID 436001 Element ID Name Description 800000EBB0 DISCAR_BLOCK Distance carrier block signal 800000EBB1 DISCAR R1 Distance carrier received from remote 1 for external carrier 800000EBB2 DISCAR R1 2 Distance carrier received from remote 1 for fail safe for external carrier 810000EBB3 DISCAR R2 Distance carr...

Страница 161: ...B are open and when the failure of voltage transformer occurs Note When both DISCAR and DEFCAR are used mutually for the command protection user should coordinate the technique between DISCAR and DEFCAR For the selection of the techniques in DEFCAR see section 2 3 Note In DEFCAR EF1 is used for a forward element DEFCF EF2 is used for a reverse element DEFCR Both EF1 and EF2 are the function of ear...

Страница 162: ...ing TDEFC Thus if users wish to carry out the DEFCAR sending and the DEFCAR tripping separately users should set a value for the setting TDEFCF and another value for the setting TDEFC For example when 0 ms set for the TDEFCF and 50 ms set for the TDEFC the DEFCAR sending is performed faster than the DEFCAR tripping See section 2 4 4 for more information POP can provide ECHO and WKIT functions whic...

Страница 163: ...HSEL C 1 1 1 1 1 t 0 TDEFCF t 0 t 0 0 00 to 0 30s 1 Current Reversal Logic CRL 1 DEFCR X DEFCF X t 0 TDEFCB 0 00 to 0 30s From EF EF2 DEFCR CX To CRL VTF_DETECT CB_LOSS_PHASE From VTF From PROT COMMON 1 1 DEFCAR_PERM1 A DEFCAR_PERM1 B DEFCAR_PERM1 C DEFCAR_PERM2 A DEFCAR_PERM2 B DEFCAR_PERM2 C To ECHO EIKT External DEFCAR R2 UOP POP DEFCAR 8400001B68 8300001B67 t 0 t 0 t 0 TDEFC 0 00 to 0 30s Inte...

Страница 164: ...73 DEFCAR_WITIP DEFCAR_WITIP C DEFCAR_WITIP B DEFCAR_WITIP A DEFCAR_PARM1 A 1 1 1 DEFCAR_PARM1 B DEFCAR_PARM1 C From CARRIER COMMON CH1 USE 1 DEFCAR_PARM1 A 1 1 1 DEFCAR_PARM1 B DEFCAR_PARM1 C From CARRIER COMMON CH2 USE 1 1 810000EBBE DEF WKIT BLOCK WKIT A_CONDITION WKIT B_CONDITION WKIT C_CONDITION From CARRIER COMMON ECHO1_CONDITION On DEF WKIT CAR 1 BOP DEFCAR UOP POP t 0 t 0 t 0 TDEFC 0 00 to...

Страница 165: ...2 4 2 Unblocking overreach protection UOP DEFCAR sends a trip block signal in UOP Thus UOP stops to send a trip block signal for an internal fault Settings and operation of UOP is the same as POP 2 4 3 Blocking overreach protection BOP BOP send a trip block signal except for an internal fault When DEFCF operates BOP issues a trip single unless a trip blocking single is received The delayed pick up...

Страница 166: ...BLOCK 8000001B20 8100001B21 8200001B22 DEFCAR TRIP A DEFCAR TRIP B DEFCAR TRIP C 1 3P DEFCAR_TPMD 8100001B77 Block Week infeed trip logic To TRC 1P t 0 TCHD DEF t 0 t 0 0 00 to 0 100s 1 Current Reversal detection logic DEFCF AX DEFCF BX DEFCF CX From Terminal 1 Permission signals received From Terminal 2 810000EBC1 DEFCAR_3PTP 800000EBC0 DEFCAR_ARCBLOCK 800000EBB0 DEFCAR_BLK CAR_BLOCK From Termina...

Страница 167: ...ion using the DEFCAR settings sand signals Note For more information of the DISCAR see chapter Relay application Distance carrier command protection i DISCAR and DEFCAR signals being separated When the DISCAR signal and the DEFCAR signal are used separately the user should set 0 for the TDEFCF Consequently the DEFCAR function can trip in TDEFC after the reception of the DEFCAR signal Figure 2 4 11...

Страница 168: ...ive carrier signals which can only be used with IEDs that has the DIF_COMM function It is called integral carrier communication Figure 2 4 13 shows how to receive carrier signals from the remote terminal 1 In the external carrier communication the carrier signal received by the binary inputs is connected to PLC connection point DEFCAR R1 As a result External DEFCAR R1 signal will be generated In a...

Страница 169: ...R1 A Integral DEFCAR R1 B Integral DEFCAR R1 C Figure 2 4 13 How to receive carrier signals How to receive carrier signals from the remote terminal 2 is the same Note When applying UOP or BOP the user must assign the signal C1_BIT to the PLC connection points shown below C1_BIT is a BIT type signal that always holds 1 The Data ID of the signal is shown in Appendix Signal list for common function I...

Страница 170: ...ngle And Guard Carrier channel configuration Single TDEFCF 0 00 0 30 s DEF carrier trip delay time 0 15 TDEFCB 0 00 0 30 s DEF carrier trip delay time 0 15 TDEFC 0 00 0 30 s DEF carrier trip delay time 0 00 TREBK DEF 0 00 10 00 s Current reverse blocking time 0 10 TCHD DEF 0 000 0 100 s Coordination timer in BOP function 0 012 TSBCT DEF 0 00 1 00 s SBCNT timer 0 10 Output DEFCAR TPMD 1P 3P DEF car...

Страница 171: ...from remote 1 for fail safe for external carrier 8100001BB3 DEFCAR R2 DEF carrier received from remote 2 for external carrier 8100001BB4 DEFCAR R2 2 DEF carrier received from remote 2 for fail safe for external carrier 8F00001B7C DEFCAR S DEF carrier send for external carrier 8000001B20 DEFCAR TRIP A DEF carrier trip of A phase 8100001B21 DEFCAR TRIP B DEF carrier trip of B phase 8200001B22 DEFCAR...

Страница 172: ... ID Name Description 800000EBBB DEF PHSEL A DEF selected A phase 810000EBBC DEF PHSEL B DEF selected B phase 820000EBBD DEF PHSEL C DEF selected C phase 800000EBBE DEF ECHO BLOCK Echo function blocked 810000EBBF DEF WKIT BLOCK Weak infeed trip function blocked 800000EBB1 DEFCAR R1 DEF carrier received from remote 1 for external carrier 800000EBB2 DEFCAR R1 2 DEF carrier received from remote 1 for ...

Страница 173: ...ession for OC1 as OC2 OC3 and OC4 at each stage unless a special explanation or instruction has been provided Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ordering number and...

Страница 174: ...irection As shown in Figure 2 5 1 the characteristic of the directional OC elements in the forward direction is a semi circle based upon the border line the hatched area shows the operating region of a directional OC element Figure 2 5 1 Characteristic of the directional OC element in the forward direction 1Note Directional characteristic angle θ forms the angle between the reference quantity and ...

Страница 175: ...ference voltage VCA 90 is adopted The phase C directional element OC C uses the same approach as the OC A and OC B elements Table 2 5 2 shows the relationship between each current and its respective reference voltage Figure 2 5 2 Object current IA and reference voltage VBC 90 Table 2 5 2 Directional polarizing signal Directional element Object current Reference voltage OC A IA VBC 90 OC B IB VCA 9...

Страница 176: ...on among two phases or more of the three phases A setting and a scheme switch as well as the non directional OC element provide the settings for the directional OC element for example the user can set the threshold value of the OC at stage 1 with the setting OC1 and Forward can be set for the scheme switch OC1 Dir Setting of the sensing angle θ is configured by the setting OC1 Angle with the value...

Страница 177: ...s characterized by setting The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the OC element by setting a scheme switch We shall see the scheme switch later i Operation principle Dependent time characteristic inverse time delay The inverse time OC element has an inverse time feature for both operation and resetting for resetting both definite time and dependent time resettin...

Страница 178: ...ment has a fixed operating time regardless of the magnitude of the fault current The operating time of the definite time OC element is set depending on the distance from the power source and should be set shorter for relays furthest from the power source Definite time OC protection provides selectivity dependent on the difference between relay operating times It is limited to use in networks with ...

Страница 179: ...is user selectable either inverse time reset or definite time reset is selected For the inverse time reset the user can choose the reset time for the preset characteristic from six characteristic curves i e IEEE and US standard five pre installed characteristic curves and one user original characteristic curve where the user can set the equation parameters The inverse time reset curve equation and...

Страница 180: ... is selected the user can set the TMS value using the setting OC1 TMS IEC incidentally the default value for the TMS is 1 00 The other TMSs are also available by the OC1 TMS UK OC1 TMS IEEE OC1 TMS US and OC1 TMS ORG Table 2 5 3 Constants for IDMT Curve type IEC 60255 151 Curve Description k sec α c sec A IEC Normal Inverse IEC NI 0 14 0 02 0 B IEC Very Inverse IEC VI 13 5 1 0 C IEC Extremely Inve...

Страница 181: ...time for the inverse time reset characteristic ref IEC 60255 151 t I RTMS kr 1 𝐼 𝐼𝑠 β 2 5 2 where t time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation seconds I energizing current amperes Is threshold setting amperes RTMS time multiplier setting for resetting kr time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is zero seconds β constants defining...

Страница 182: ... the IEC and UK see Table 2 5 5 Table 2 5 4 Constants for inverse time reset characteristics Curve Type IEC 60255 151 Curve Description kr sec Β A IEC Normal Inverse IEC NI N A N A B IEC Very Inverse IEC VI N A N A C IEC Extremely Inverse IEC EI N A N A UK Long Time Inverse UK LTI N A N A D IEEE Moderately Inverse IEEE MI 4 85 2 E IEEE Very Inverse IEEE VI 21 6 2 F IEEE Extremely Inverse IEEE EI 2...

Страница 183: ...ator Setting Rtimer DEF Reset time Integration will be kept in timer TOC1R The integration will be reset when the energizing current does not become larger than OC1 in TOC1R The integration will be deceased depending on the OC1 RTMS reset characteristics Setting Rtimer DEP Stage to element return Trip signal The integration will start again when the energizing current becomes larger than OC1 withi...

Страница 184: ... for both the IDMT and DT characteristics Note that the settings of the threshold levels have distinct values in the respective OC elements A rating current for the input is defined either 1A or 5A the input rating is defined on a VCT For more information about the VCT see Chapter Technical description Transformer module for AC analogue input 2 34 3a 2 5 4 Reset Ratio The ratio of the threshold cu...

Страница 185: ... 3P should be set when the user wishes to block all three phases of the OC1 element when the second harmonic associated with the magnetizing inrush current is present Alternatively Block PerP is set if blocking is just required for a single phase concerting to the phenomenon Non is set for the scheme switch OC1 2fBlk as the default setting For more information about the ICD function see Chapter Re...

Страница 186: ... Block OC1 OPT TRIP OC1 OPT ALARM OC1 ARC BLOCK OC1 OR 8100011B60 OC1PU OR 8100011B61 8000011C24 8200011C22 8000011C20 8100011C21 OC1 A B C 1 0 00 300 00s TOC1 1 1 1 ICD B ICD C 8100011C25 8200011C26 1 1 1 ICD A OC1 VTFBlk Block VTF_DETECT IEEE MI IEEE VI IEC VI IEC EI UK LTI ORIGINAL IEEE EI US C02 US C08 IEC NI DT OC1 Timer 0 t 0 t 0 t 1 1 800001EBB0 OC1_BLOCK From VTF 800001EBB4 OC1_INST_OP OC1...

Страница 187: ...OC4 OPT AR OC4 OPT BR OC4 OPT CR OC1 OPT AR OC1 OPT BR OC1 OPT CR OC2 OPT AR OC2 OPT BR OC2 OPT CR 1 1 OC OPT AR OC OPT BR OC OPT CR 1 OC2 OPT TRIP OC3 OPT TRIP OC4 OPT TRIP OC OPT TRIP OC1 OPT ALARM 1 OC2 OPT ALARM OC3 OPT ALARM OC4 OPT ALARM OC OPT ALARM OC1 ARC BLOCK 1 OC2 ARC BLOCK OC3 ARC BLOCK OC4 ARC BLOCK OC ARC BLOCK From OC1 to OC4 logics OC1 OPT OC2 OPT OC3 OPT OC4 OPT OC1 OPT OC2 OPT O...

Страница 188: ... 50 000 OC1 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1 000 TOC1R 0 00 300 00 s OC1 definite time reset delay 0 00 IEEE OC1 0 02 5 00 0 10 25 00 A OC1 threshold in IDMT mode 1 00 5 00 OC1 DPR 10 100 OC1 drop out pick up ratio 100 OC1 TMS IEEE 0 010 50 000 OC1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1 000 OC1 Rtimer DEF DEP OC1 reset delay type of IEEE DEF TOC1R 0 00 300 00 s OC1 definite time reset delay ...

Страница 189: ...rop out pick up ratio 100 OC2 TMS IEC 0 010 50 000 OC2 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1 000 TOC2R 0 00 300 00 s OC2 definite time reset delay 0 00 UK OC2 0 02 5 00 0 10 25 00 A OC2 threshold in IDMT mode 1 00 5 00 OC2 DPR 10 100 OC2 drop out pick up ratio 100 OC2 TMS UK 0 010 50 000 OC2 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1 000 TOC2R 0 00 300 00 s OC2 definite time reset delay 0 00 IEEE OC2 ...

Страница 190: ...hreshold in DT mode 1 00 5 00 OC3 DPR 10 100 OC3 drop out pick up ratio 100 TOC3 0 00 300 00 s OC3 operating delay time in DT mode 1 00 IEC OC3 0 02 5 00 0 10 25 00 A OC3 threshold in IDMT mode 1 00 5 00 OC3 DPR 10 100 OC3 drop out pick up ratio 100 OC3 TMS IEC 0 010 50 000 OC3 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1 000 TOC3R 0 00 300 00 s OC3 definite time reset delay 0 00 UK OC3 0 02 5 00 0 10 2...

Страница 191: ...stic NonDir OC4 Angle 0 180 degOC4 directional characteristic angle 45 OC4 Timer DT IEC NI IEC VI IEC EI UK LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE EI US CO2 US CO8 Original OC4 delay type DT DT OC4 0 02 50 00 0 10 250 00 A OC4 threshold in DT mode 1 00 5 00 OC4 DPR 10 100 OC4 drop out pick up ratio 100 TOC4 0 00 300 00 s OC4 operating delay time in DT mode 1 00 IEC OC4 0 02 5 00 0 10 25 00 A OC4 threshold in ID...

Страница 192: ...C4R 0 00 300 00 s OC4 definite time reset delay 0 00 OC4 RTMS ORG 0 010 50 000 OC4 dependent reset time multiplier of ORG inverse curve 1 000 OC4 k 0 00000 500 00000 OC4 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 OC4 a 0 00000 10 00000 OC4 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 OC4 c 0 00000 10 00000 OC4 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 OC4 kr 0 00000 500 00000 OC4 user original curve coeffic...

Страница 193: ...ion operation 8000011B60 OC1 OR OC1 relay element operated 3 phases OR 8000011C24 OC1PU A OC1 relay operation level pick up phase A 8100011C25 OC1PU B OC1 relay operation level pick up phase B 8200011C26 OC1PU C OC1 relay operation level pick up phase C 8000011B61 OC1PU OR OC1 relay operation level pick up 3 phases OR 8000011BB0 OC1_BLOCK OC1 protection block command 8000011BB1 OC1_INST_OP OC1 pro...

Страница 194: ...OC3 relay operation level pick up phase C 8200031B61 OC3PU OR OC3 relay operation level pick up 3 phases OR 8200031BB0 OC3_BLOCK OC3 protection block command 8200031BB1 OC3_INST_OP OC3 protection instant operation command 8C00041C20 OC4 A OC4 relay element operated phase A 8200041B6A OC4 ARC BLOCK Autoreclose block signal by OC4 protection operation 8D00041C21 OC4 B OC4 relay element operated phas...

Страница 195: ...ic OC Function ID 440001 Element ID Name Description 800001EBB0 OC1_BLOCK OC1 protection block command 800001EBB4 OC1_INST_OP OC1 protection instant operation command 810002EBB1 OC2_BLOCK OC2 protection block command 810002EBB5 OC2_INST_OP OC2 protection instant operation command 820003EBB2 OC3_BLOCK OC3 protection block command 820003EBB6 OC3_INST_OP OC3 protection instant operation command 83000...

Страница 196: ...uction has been provided Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ordering number and check the order number for the G T position whilst referring to the comparison table...

Страница 197: ...ction As shown in Figure 2 6 1 the characteristic of the directional EF elements in the forward direction is a semi circle based upon the border line the hatched area shows the operating region of the directional EF element Figure 2 6 1 Characteristic of the directional EF element in the forward direction Note Directional characteristic angle θ forms the angle between the reference quantity and th...

Страница 198: ...tting value of the EF element EF1 DT and the others EF_Vpol Setting value of the polarizing voltage EF1 Vpol Note In the case of an internal fault the phase angle is equal to the angle of the zero sequence impedance of the system in a directly earthed system this value is in the range of approximately 50 to 90 The sensing angle θ of the EF element can be set between 0 to 180 The minimum voltage ne...

Страница 199: ...the setting The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the EF element by setting a scheme switch We shall see the scheme switches later i DT characteristic The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time and is not affected by the level of current The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed immediately The user can set the operate t...

Страница 200: ...ately Inverse IEEE VI for IEEE Very Inverse IEEE EI for IEEE Extremely Inverse US CO2 for US CO2 short time inverse US CO8 for US CO8 inverse and Original for user programmable characteristic In the IDMT operation the user can also program the characteristic using time multiplier setting TMS for the required operate time For example the IEC characteristic is selected the user can set the TMS value...

Страница 201: ...activation The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the TEF1 but the instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal 1 High is programmed to be injected at the PLC connection point EF1_INST_OP v Reset time for IDMT Programming the reset time characteristic is available for the IEEE standard US standard and original user programmable inverse time reset...

Страница 202: ...ery Inverse IEC VI N A N A C IEC Extremely Inverse IEC EI N A N A UK Long Time Inverse UK LTI N A N A D IEEE Moderately Inverse IEEE MI 4 85 2 E IEEE Very Inverse IEEE VI 21 6 2 F IEEE Extremely Inverse IEEE EI 29 1 2 US CO8 inverse US CO8 5 95 2 US CO2 short time inverse US CO2 2 261 2 Note To select the inverse time reset characteristic set EF1 Rtimer DEP Conversely set EF1 Rtimer DEF to select ...

Страница 203: ...2 6 2 Energizing current Pickup threshold in relay Measuring quantity 0 A Time Inverse time reset characteristic Stage to element return Integrator Trip signal Definite time reset characteristic Integrator Setting Rtimer DEF Reset time Integration will be kept in timer TEF1R The integration will be reset when the energizing current does not become larger than EF1 in TEF1R The integration will be d...

Страница 204: ...N A N A N A N A N A 2 6 3 Threshold level for operation The value of threshold current at which the EF IEF element will pick up is configured by a setting the setting EF1 is provided for both the IDMT and the DT characteristic Note that the settings of the threshold levels are allowed to have distinct values in the respective EF elements A rating current for the input is defined either 1A or 5A th...

Страница 205: ...fault iii Blocking EF by CTF The operation of the EF element can be blocked by the current transformer failure CTF function via a scheme switch For example Block is set for the scheme switch EF1 CTFBlk to block the operation of the EF1 element during a CTF condition Non is set for the scheme switch EF1 CTFBlk as a default iv EF operation for autoreclose The EF element activates the auto reclose AR...

Страница 206: ...eristic defined with setting EF1_Timer as shown in Table 2 6 5 Table 2 6 5 Signal behaviors of PLC monitoring points EF1 and EF1PU PLC monitoring points Setting EF1_Timer DT IEC NT VI EI UK LTI IEET MI VI EI US CO2 CO8 ORIGINAL EF1 1 3 EF1PU 2 4 1 A pick up signal is generated instantly when the element operates 2 No signal due that the PU element is killed Use EF1 in place of this 3 A pick up sig...

Страница 207: ... DPR 10 100 EF1 drop out pick up ratio 100 EF1 TMS UK 0 010 50 000 EF1 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1 000 TEF1R 0 00 300 00 s EF1 definite time reset delay 0 00 IEEE EF1 0 02 5 00 0 10 25 00 A EF1 threshold in IDMT mode 0 30 1 50 EF1 DPR 10 100 EF1 drop out pick up ratio 100 EF1 TMS IEEE 0 010 50 000 EF1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1 000 EF1 Rtimer DEF DEP EF1 reset delay type of ...

Страница 208: ... threshold in IDMT mode 0 30 1 50 EF2 DPR 10 100 EF2 drop out pick up ratio 100 EF2 TMS IEC 0 010 50 000 EF2 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1 000 TEF2R 0 00 300 00 s EF2 definite time reset delay 0 00 UK EF2 0 02 5 00 0 10 25 00 A EF2 threshold in IDMT mode 0 30 1 50 EF2 DPR 10 100 EF2 drop out pick up ratio 100 EF2 TMS UK 0 010 50 000 EF2 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1 000 TEF2R 0 00...

Страница 209: ...0 00 0 10 250 00 A EF3 threshold in DT mode 0 30 1 50 EF3 DPR 10 100 EF3 drop out pick up ratio 100 TEF3 0 00 300 00 s EF3 operating delay time in DT mode 1 00 IEC EF3 0 02 5 00 0 10 25 00 A EF3 threshold in IDMT mode 0 30 1 50 EF3 DPR 10 100 EF3 drop out pick up ratio 100 EF3 TMS IEC 0 010 50 000 EF3 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1 000 TEF3R 0 00 300 00 s EF3 definite time reset delay 0 00...

Страница 210: ...ristic angle 45 Rev EF4 Vpol 0 5 100 0 V EF4 polarizing voltage level 3 0 EF4 Timer DT IEC NI IEC VI IEC EI UK LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE EI US CO2 US CO8 Original EF4 delay type DT DT EF4 0 02 50 00 0 10 250 00 A EF4 threshold in DT mode 0 30 1 50 EF4 DPR 10 100 EF4 drop out pick up ratio 100 TEF4 0 00 300 00 s EF4 operating delay time in DT mode 1 00 IEC EF4 0 02 5 00 0 10 25 00 A EF4 threshold in...

Страница 211: ... EF4 reset delay type of ORG DEF TEF4R 0 00 300 00 s EF4 definite time reset delay 0 00 EF4 RTMS ORG 0 010 50 000 EF4 dependent reset time multiplier of Original inverse curve 1 000 EF4 k 0 00000 500 00000 EF4 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 EF4 a 0 00000 10 00000 EF4 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 EF4 c 0 00000 10 00000 EF4 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 EF4 kr 0 00000 5...

Страница 212: ..._BLOCK Command to block the EF2 element 8100021B64 EF2_INST_OP Command to operate the EF2 element instantly 8200031C23 EF3 EF3 relay element operated 8200031B62 EF3 ARC BLOCK Block for issuing autoreclose signal in the EF3 element 8200031B60 EF3 OPT EF3 protection operated 8100031B61 EF3 OPT ALARM Alarm signal in EF3 element 8000031B23 EF3 OPT TRIP Trip signal issued in EF3 element 8200031C27 EF3P...

Страница 213: ...unction ID 441001 Element ID Name Description 820003EBB0 EF3_BLOCK EF3 protection block command 820003EBB1 EF3_INST_OP EF3 protection instant operation command 830004EBB0 EF4_BLOCK EF4 protection block command 830004EBB1 EF4_INST_OP EF4 protection instant operation command ...

Страница 214: ...ad the expression for OCN1 as OCN2 OCN3 and OCN4 at each stage unless a special explanation or instruction has been provided Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED orde...

Страница 215: ...Characteristic of directional OCN in the forward As shown in Figure 2 7 1 the characteristic of the directional OCN elements in the forward direction is a semi circle based upon the border line the hatched area shows the operating region of the directional OCN Figure 2 7 1 Characteristic of the directional OCN element in the forward direction Note Directional characteristic angle θ forms the angle...

Страница 216: ... reference voltage or polarizing voltage Φ lagging angle θ OCN setting angle OCN1 Angle IOCN Setting value of OCN OCN1 and the others OCN_Vpol Setting value of the polarizing voltage OCN1 Vpol Note The phase angle in the event of an internal fault is equal to the angle of the zero sequence impedance of the system this value ranges approximately from 50 to 90 The θ of OCN can be set from 0 to 180 T...

Страница 217: ...he IDMT either inverse dependent time reset or definite independent time reset is characterized by the setting The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the OCN element using scheme switches We shall see the scheme switches later i DT characteristic The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time it is not affected by the level of the negative sequ...

Страница 218: ...verse IEC EI for IEC Extremely Inverse UK LTI for UK Long Time Inverse IEEE MI for IEEE Moderately Inverse IEEE VI for IEEE Very Inverse IEEE EI for IEEE Extremely Inverse US CO2 for US CO2 short time inverse US CO8 for US CO8 inverse and Original for user programmable characteristic In the IDMT operation the user can also program the characteristic using time multiplier setting TMS for the requir...

Страница 219: ...ous activation The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the TOCN1 but the instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal 1 High is programmed to be injected at PLC connection point OCN1_INST_OP v Reset time of IDMT Programming the reset time characteristic is available for the IEEE standard US standard and original user programmable dependent time ch...

Страница 220: ...IEC VI N A N A C IEC Extremely Inverse IEC EI N A N A UK Long Time Inverse UK LTI N A N A D IEEE Moderately Inverse IEEE MI 4 85 2 E IEEE Very Inverse IEEE VI 21 6 2 F IEEE Extremely Inverse IEEE EI 29 1 2 US CO8 inverse US CO8 5 95 2 US CO2 short time inverse US CO2 2 261 2 Note To select the inverse time reset characteristic set OCN1 Rtimer DEP Conversely set OCN1 Rtimer DEF to select definite t...

Страница 221: ...7 2 Energizing current Pickup threshold in relay Measuring quantity 0 A Time Inverse time reset characteristic Stage to element return Integrator Trip signal Definite time reset characteristic Integrator Setting Rtimer DEF Reset time Integration will be kept in timer TOCN1R The integration will be reset when the energizing current does not become larger than OCN1 in TOCN1R The integration will be ...

Страница 222: ...DEP N A N A N A N A N A N A 2 7 3 Threshold value The value of threshold current at which the OCN I2 element will pick up is configured by settings the setting OCN1 is provided for both the IDMT and the DT characteristic Note that the settings of the threshold levels are allowed to have distinct values in the respective OCN elements A rating current for the input is defined either 1A or 5A the inp...

Страница 223: ...ilure detection iii Blocking OCN by CTF The operation of the OCN element can be blocked by the current transformer failure CTF function via a scheme switch For example Block should be set for the scheme switch OCN1 CTFBlk to block the operation of the OCN1 element during a CTF condition Non is set for the scheme switch OCN1 CTFBlk as a default For more information about the CTF see Chapter Relay a...

Страница 224: ...efined with setting OCN1_Timer as shown in Table 2 7 5 Table 2 7 5 Signal behaviors of PLC monitoring points OCN1 and OCN1PU PLC monitoring points Setting OCN1_Type DT IEC NT VI EI UK LTI IEET MI VI EI US CO2 CO8 ORIGINAL OCN1 1 3 OCN1PU 2 4 1 A pick up signal is generated instantly when the element operates 2 No signal due that the PU element is killed Use OCN1 in place of this 3 A pick up signal...

Страница 225: ... OCN1 0 02 5 00 0 10 25 00 A OCN1 threshold in IDMT mode 0 40 2 00 OCN1 DPR 10 100 OCN1 drop out pick up ratio 100 OCN1 TMS UK 0 010 50 000 OCN1 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1 000 TOCN1R 0 00 300 00 s OCN1 definite time reset delay 0 00 IEEE OCN1 0 02 5 00 0 10 25 00 A OCN1 threshold in IDMT mode 0 40 2 00 OCN1 DPR 10 100 OCN1 drop out pick up ratio 100 OCN1 TMS IEEE 0 010 50 000 OCN1 time ...

Страница 226: ...S CO8 Original OCN2 delay type DT DT OCN2 0 02 50 00 0 10 250 00 A OCN2 threshold in DT mode 0 40 2 00 OCN2 DPR 10 100 OCN2 drop out pick up ratio 100 TOCN2 0 00 300 00 s OCN2 operating delay time 1 00 IEC OCN2 0 02 5 00 0 10 25 00 A OCN2 threshold in IDMT mode 0 40 2 00 OCN2 DPR 10 100 OCN2 drop out pick up ratio 100 OCN2 TMS IEC 0 010 50 000 OCN2 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1 000 TOCN2R...

Страница 227: ... OCN2 used for trip or alarm Trip OCN2 ARCBlk Non Block Autoreclose block by OCN2 Block OCN3 OCN3 Dir NonDir Forward Reverse OCN3 directional characteristic NonDir Fwd OCN3 Angle 0 180 degOCN3 directional characteristic angle 45 Rev OCN3 Vpol 0 5 25 0 V OCN3 polarizing voltage level 3 0 OCN3 Timer DT IEC NI IEC VI IEC EI UK LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE EI US CO2 US CO8 Original OCN3 delay type DT DT O...

Страница 228: ... 0 00000 OCN3 kr 0 00000 500 00000 OCN3 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 OCN3 b 0 00000 10 00000 OCN3 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 Output OCN3 2fBlk Non Block OCN3 operation block by 2f detection Non OCN3 VTFBlk Non Block OCN3 operation block by VTF Non OCN3 CTFBlk Non Block OCN3 operation block by CTF Non OCN3 UseFor Trip Alarm OCN3 used for trip or alarm Trip OCN3 ARCBlk Non Bl...

Страница 229: ...reset time multiplier of US inverse curve 1 000 ORG OCN4 0 02 5 00 0 10 25 00 A OCN4 threshold in IDMT mode 0 40 2 00 OCN4 DPR 10 100 OCN4 drop out pick up ratio 100 OCN4 TMS ORG 0 010 50 000 OCN4 time multiplier of US inverse curve 1 000 OCN4 Rtimer DEF DEP OCN4 reset delay type of ORG DEF TOCN4R 0 00 300 00 s OCN4 definite time reset delay 0 00 OCN4 RTMS ORG 0 010 50 000 OCN4 dependent reset tim...

Страница 230: ...CN2 protection block command OCN2_INST_OP 8100021BB1 OCN2 protection instant operation command OCN3 8200031C23 OCN3 relay element operated OCN3 ARC BLOCK 8200031B62 Autoreclose block signal by OCN3 protection OCN3 OPT 8200031B60 OCN3 protection operated OCN3 OPT ALARM 8100031B61 Alarm signal by OCN3 protection OCN3 OPT TRIP 8000031B23 Trip signal by OCN3 protection OCN3PU 8200031C27 OCN3 relay ope...

Страница 231: ...tion ID 443001 Element ID Name Description 820003EBB0 OCN3_BLOCK OCN3 protection block command 820003EBB1 OCN3_INST_OP OCN3 protection instant operation command 830004EBB0 OCN4_BLOCK OCN4 protection block command 830004EBB1 OCN4_INST_OP OCN4 protection instant operation command ...

Страница 232: ...n an overload condition arises THM issues a trip signal in accordance with an alarm stage that reflects the temperature of the thermal overload condition The alarm stage is configured using a setting hence the user should determine the appropriate setting so that a trip signal can be issued before the apparatus is overheated Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the sele...

Страница 233: ... the positive sequence current I1 and negative sequence current I2 using Equation 2 8 2 and operates according to the characteristics defined in IEC 60255 149 when the user has set scheme switch THM Itype Equivalent 𝐼 𝐼1 2 𝑞 𝐼2 2 2 8 2 where q Unbalance factor the unbalance factor is used for motor generator protection the user should set q 0 when setting THM q except when it is applied to motor g...

Страница 234: ...nt minutes and Ln is the natural logarithm In Equation 2 8 3 cold curves are special versions of the hot curves where Ip is zero catering for the situation where a cold system is switched onto an immediate overload Figure 2 8 1 a shows the cold state where an overload has been switched onto a previously un loaded system Figure 2 8 1 b shows the hot state where an overload is switched onto a system...

Страница 235: ...g threshold The alarm signal is disabled when Off is set for scheme switch THMA EN The trip signal is prevented when Off is set for scheme switch THMT EN PLC signals THMA_BLOCK and THMT_BLOCK are used to block the operation of THM Figure 2 8 2 THM Logic When wishing to have a test about pre load current Ip the user should set a test value for the setting THM IP followed by setting THM Test On THMA...

Страница 236: ...e Max phase Equivalent Selection of THM equations Equivalent THM q 0 10 Factor when Equivalent selected 0 SW THMT EN Off On Thermal protection Off THM UseFor Trip Alarm THM used for trip or alarm Trip ALM THMA EN Off On Thermal alarm switch Off THM Alarm 50 100 Thermal alarm level multiplier 80 Test tool Function ID 451001 Items Range Unit Contents Default Note 1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A Function t...

Страница 237: ...Alarm 8300021B23 THM OPT TRIP THM protection operated Trip 8100021C23 THM T THM relay element operated Trip 8100021B60 THM TRIP THM protection Trip signal 8000011BB0 THMA_BLOCK THM protection for Alarm block command 8100021BB0 THMT_BLOCK THM protection for Trip block command Connection point on PLC logic THM Function ID 451001 Element ID Name Description 800001EBB0 THMA_BLOCK THM protection for Al...

Страница 238: ...tection BCD is to detect series faults and signal a trip signal to the trip circuit Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ordering number and check the order number fo...

Страница 239: ...as k1 1 k1 k2 1 k2 and k0 1 k0 Figure 2 9 1 Equivalent circuit for a single phase fault The series fault results in positive sequence current I1F negative sequence current I2F and zero phase sequence current I0F in the single phase These are given by 𝐼1𝐹 𝐼2𝐹 𝐼0𝐹 0 2 9 1 𝑍2𝐹𝐼2𝐹 𝑍0𝐹𝐼0𝐹 0 2 9 2 𝐸1𝐴 𝐸1𝐵 𝑍1𝐹𝐼1𝐹 𝑍2𝐹𝐼2𝐹 2 9 3 where E1A E1B power source voltage Z1 positive sequence impedance Z2 negative s...

Страница 240: ...d both ends As noted earlier the BCD element detects the presence of a fault by measuring the ratio between the negative sequence current and the positive sequence current I2F I1F The ratio is obtained from the negative sequence impedance Z2 and the zero sequence impedance Z0 hence the equation of the ratio is expressed as follows 𝐼2𝐹 𝐼1𝐹 𝐼2𝐹 𝐼1𝐹 𝑍0 𝑍2 𝑍0 2 9 7 A ratio value of 0 5 or higher is ob...

Страница 241: ...peration of BCD can be blocked when the IED detects 2nd harmonic caused by the phenomenon of magnetizing inrush current when a transformer is energized To block the operation of the BCD function during the occurrence of the harmonic set scheme switch BCD 2fBlk Block ii Block operation of CTF for BCD The operation of the BCD function can be blocked by the current transformer failure CTF function us...

Страница 242: ...nes the ratio I2F I1F User can check the present ratio along with the maximum value I21 max that has been examined for 15 minutes ago We recommend that user should distinguish the present ratio against the value on commissioning stage and user should set a value for BCD from 130 to 150 of the ratio has been checked Note The ratio I2F I1F is displayed only when the current in positive sequence or l...

Страница 243: ...erated 8000001B60 BCD OPT BCD protection operated 8000001BB0 BCD_BLOCK BCD protection block command 8300001B23 BCD OPT TRIP Trip signal by BCD1 protection operation 8400001B62 BCD OPT ALARM Alarm signal by BCD1 protection operation Connection point on PLC logic BCD Function ID 452001 Element ID Name Description 800000EBB0 BCD_BLOCK BCD1 protection block command ...

Страница 244: ...unction consists of two stages and their stages are operated independently Thus the settings switches logics for two stages are provided separately To simply the description only settings switches logics for the stage 1 are discussed as a representative but the ones for the stage 2 are applicable in the CBF function hence the user can read the expression for the stage 1 as for the stage 2 unless a...

Страница 245: ...on the use of re trip has the advantage of avoiding the issue of the back trip signal to the adjacent CB s or the upstream CB The timing chart for re trip and back trip are discussed later See Figure 2 10 1 There are two operation modes internal and external mode for re trip the user can select the desired mode using scheme switch CBF1 Retrip Internal mode If On is set for scheme switch CBF1 Retri...

Страница 246: ... Fault occurence Trip signal Normal trip Trip signal Re trip Stop Off Off Off Off Timer 1 Start Figure 2 10 1 Timing chart for re trip and back trip during CBF operation Figure 2 10 1 is a sequence diagram for the CBF function the overall sequence illustrated shows a target CB failing to remove a fault with the consequence that back tripping of the adjacent CB s is required following operation of ...

Страница 247: ...CBF sequence is stopped If the target CB were to fail to remove the fault with the re trip command and if OCCBF or EFCBF continued to operate and if the timer 2 were to time out in accordance with the setting time applied TCBF1 TP CBF will issue a trip signal to the adjacent CB s to clear the fault as a last resort ...

Страница 248: ...ing PLC connection points SUB CBF1 This technique will be achieved when the user programs to inject a CB close closed state signal at the SUB CBF1 points It is useful if the CBF function cannot determine the conditions of breaker failures when OCCBF1 or EFCBF1 element fails to detect small fault currents 1 1 1 1 1 1 CBF1_RETRIP A CBF1_RETRIP B CBF1_RETRIP C CBF1_START A CBF1_START B CBF1_START C C...

Страница 249: ... 0 0 000 300 000s t 0 TCBF1 TP To TRC 1 1 CBF1 RETRIP CBF1_ARC BLOCK Figure 2 10 3 CBF1 logics continued from Figure 2 10 2 Figure 2 10 2 illustrates that CBF trip signals CBF1 RETRIP will be issued when OCCBF1 or EFCBF1 element operates continuously until expiration of timer settings TCBF1 RE and TCBF1 TP Setting TCBF1 RE is overridden when On AftRe is set for scheme switch CBF1 TRIP When On is s...

Страница 250: ...ted current The time settings TCBF1 RE and TCBF1 TP are determined in relation to the opening time of the target CB and the reset time of the OCCBF or EFCBF elements see Toc and Tcb in Figure 2 10 1 The following description illustrates a setting calculation example when re trip is used Setting of TCBF RE Breaker opening time OCCBF EFCBF reset time Margin 40ms 10ms 20ms 70ms Setting of TCBF TP TCB...

Страница 251: ...Off On Current flow is judged by EF relay operation Off EFCBF1 0 10 5 00 0 50 25 00 A EFCBF1 relay operating level Current flow judgment 1 00 5 00 EFCBF2 0 10 5 00 0 50 25 00 A EFCBF2 relay operating level Current flow judgment 1 00 5 00 Timer TCBF1 RE 0 000 300 000 s CBF1 retrip timer 0 150 TCBF1 TP 0 000 300 000 s CBF1 trip timer 0 200 TCBF2 RE 0 000 300 000 s CBF2 retrip timer 0 150 TCBF2 TP 0 ...

Страница 252: ...BF2 EFCBF2 relay element operated 8000021B20 CBF2_RETRIP A OCCBF2 Retrip phase A 8100021B21 CBF2_RETRIP B OCCBF2 Retrip phase B 8200021B22 CBF2_RETRIP C OCCBF2 Retrip phase C 8300021B23 CBF2_RETRIP OCCBF2 Retrip 8800021B24 CBF2_TRIP A OCCBF2 trip phase A 8900021B25 CBF2_TRIP B OCCBF2 trip phase B 8A00021B26 CBF2_TRIP C OCCBF2 trip phase C 8B00021B27 CBF2_TRIP OCCBF2 trip 8000021BB0 EXT CBF2_START ...

Страница 253: ...0002EBB2 EXT CBF2_START C External CBF2 start phase C 830002EBB3 EXT CBF2_START External CBF2 start 800002EBB4 CBF2_BLOCK CBF2 protection block command 810002EBB5 CBF2 RE_INST CBF2 instantaneous retrip 820002EBB6 CBF2 TP_INST CBF2 instantaneous trip 800000EBB8 SUB CBF1 A Additional external signal for CBF1 phase A 810000EBB9 SUB CBF1 B Additional external signal for CBF1 phase B 820000EBBA SUB CBF...

Страница 254: ...g the VTG Thereby an overcurrent relay OC is provided to protect the stub zone and the OC relay operates speedy upon occurrence of the fault CT2G CT1G Terminal G Fault IED_G IED_H CT2H CT1H Terminal H Line GH Line DS CB CB1G Line VTG CB VTH CB2G CB1H CB2H Figure 2 11 1 Fault occurred in stub zone Note The implementation of such features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configura...

Страница 255: ...ip signals during the DS being opened i e logic signal DS_OPEN 1 TRUE1 8200011C22 8000011C20 8100011C21 OCSTUB A B C 1 ICD B ICD C ICD A DS_OPEN 1 800000EBB0 STUBOC_BLOCK From PROT COMMON STUBOC EN On 1 1 1 1 STUBOC 2PBlk Block PerP Block 3P From ICD STUB Test On OCSTUB OR STUBOC TRIP STUBOC TRIP A STUBOC TRIP B 1 To TRC To Recording STUBOC TRIP C 8000001B60 8000001B20 8100001B21 8200001B22 830000...

Страница 256: ...erved in three phase whereas the Block PerP is used when the trip signal should be blocked when 2f is observed in a phase The user can program a block signal using PLC connection point STUBOC_BLOCK If an STUB OC operation test is required in Stub protection area the user can have a test by setting STUB Test On Consequently the user can examine the function regardless of the DS condition in the stu...

Страница 257: ...455001 Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Note 1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A STUBOC EN Off On Stub OC protection enable Off OCSTUB 0 02 3 00 0 10 15 00 A OC relay for stub threshold 1 20 6 00 OCSTUB 2fBlk Non Block 3P Block PerP OCSTUB operation block by 2f detection Non ...

Страница 258: ...dition 8500001B63 STUBOC ARC BLOCK Autoreclose block signal by OC protection operation 8000001B61 STUBOC OPT STUBOC protection operated 3 phases OR 8300001B23 STUBOC TRIP STUBOC protection operated 8000001B20 STUBOC TRIP A STUBOC protection operated phase A 8100001B21 STUBOC TRIP B STUBOC protection operated phase B 8200001B22 STUBOC TRIP C STUBOC protection operated phase C 8000001BB0 STUBOC_BLOC...

Страница 259: ...of a drop off voltage DO To simplify the description only OV1 is discussed but the expression is applicable to the OV2 hence read the expression for OV1 as the OV2 unless a special explanation or instruction has been provided Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain featur...

Страница 260: ...ing TOV1 The user can find the delay timer in the OV function logic See section 2 12 5 2 12 3 Time characteristic The OV element has two characteristics between a voltage condition and an operation time hence the user should select a mode either i definite independent time characteristic delay or ii inverse dependent time characteristic delay For the definite time characteristic delay the operatio...

Страница 261: ...etting to adjust a curve If the user will require a user programmable original curve in the inverse time characteristic it is provided when the constants of k a c are set as shown in Table 2 12 2 For example the user programmable original curve in the OV1 element will be acquired when Original is set for the scheme switch OV1 Timer and when values of respective constants are set for OV1 k OV1 a an...

Страница 262: ...in the figure the time counter will not reach the trip level In the other words the operation of the OV1 element is paralyzed in the reset time set by TOV1R If a series of fault occurs repeatedly the latter in the figure and if the value of the time counter reaches at trip level the OV1 element will issue a trip command after a certain delay After issuing the trip command if a series of fault comp...

Страница 263: ...e switch OV1 UseFor Note For more information about the trip circuit see Chapter Relay application Trip circuit iii Execution of OV function Set On for scheme switch OV1 EN Otherwise set Off for the scheme switch OV1 EN if the OV1 element is not required to operate 2 12 5 Scheme logic Figure 2 12 4 shows the OV1 logic Signal connection points OV1_BLOCK are provided for the block of the operation o...

Страница 264: ..._BLOCK t 0 t 0 1 1 1 OV1 VTFBlk 1 Original OV1 Timer IDMT DT 1 8000011B62 8100011B63 8200011B64 8000011B65 OV1 UseFor Alarm Trip OV1 OPT From VTF VTF_DETECT OV1 OPT TRIP OV1 OPT ALARM OV1 OPT A OV1 OPT B OV1 OPT C 1 To Grouping logic 8000011B23 8100011B66 OV1 ARC BLOCK Figure 2 12 4 OV1 logic To TRC 1 OV1 OPT TRIP OV1 OPT AR OV1 OPT BR OV1 OPT CR OV2 OPT AR OV2 OPT BR OV2 OPT CR 1 1 OV OPT AR OV O...

Страница 265: ... OV1 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 OV1 c 0 00000 10 00000 OV1 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 Output OV1 VTFBlk Non Block OV1 operation block by VTF Non OV1 UseFor Trip Alarm OV1 used for trip or alarm Trip OV2 OV2 Timer DT IDMT Original OV2 delay type DT DT OV2 1 0 220 0 V OV2 threshold 120 0 TOV2 0 00 300 00 s OV2 operating delay time in DT mode 1 00 OV2 DPR 10 100 OV2 drop out...

Страница 266: ...tion level pick up phase B 8200011C26 OV1PU C OV1 relay operation level pick up phase C 8000011B61 OV1PU OR OV1 relay operation level pick up 3 phases OR 8000011BB0 OV1_BLOCK OV1 protection block command 8400021C20 OV2 A OV2 relay element operated phase A 8500021C21 OV2 B OV2 relay element operated phase B 8600021C22 OV2 C OV2 relay element operated phase C 8100021B65 OV2 OPT OV2 protection operat...

Страница 267: ...ng of a drop off voltage DO To simplify the description only OVS1 is discussed but the expression is applicable to OVS2 hence read the expression for OVS1 as the OVS2 stage unless a special explanation or instruction has been provided Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certa...

Страница 268: ...3 Time characteristic The OVS element has two characteristics between a voltage condition and an operation time hence the user should select a mode either i definite independent time characteristic delay or ii inverse dependent time characteristic delay For the definite time characteristic delay the operation time is a constant In the inverse time characteristic delay the operation time depends up...

Страница 269: ...ample the user programmable original curve in the OVS1 element will be acquired when Original is set for the scheme switch OVS1 Timer and when values of respective constants are set for OVS1 k OVS1 a and OVS1 C Figure 2 13 2 IDMT characteristic of OVS element Table 2 13 2 Constant value at each setting of IDMT curve Set item k a C IDMT 1 1 0 User programmable Original 0 00000 500 00000 by 0 00001 ...

Страница 270: ...the operation of the OVS1 element immediately setting zero for the settings TOVS1R is needed Consequently when a voltage falls below the reset threshold drop off the operation of the OVS1 element is reset promptly Figure 2 13 3 Faults occurrences and reset operation when IDMT being applied 2 13 4 Miscellaneous functions i OVS operation blocked by the occurrence of VT failure Blocking the OVS funct...

Страница 271: ... is provided it generates a pick up signal when the entering voltage is excesses of the threshold anytime For example in the IDMT characteristic using both monitoring points 8000011C20 and 8000011C24 can facilitate to measure the pickup time after the excess 0 00 to 300 00s t 0 TOVS1 8000011C20 On OVS1 EN 1 1 OVS1 AB BC CA 1 8100011C21 8200011C22 8000011B60 8000011C24 OVS1 PU AB BC CA 1 8100011C25...

Страница 272: ... user original curve coefficient 0 00000 OVS1 c 0 00000 10 00000 OVS1 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 Output OVS1 VTFBlk Non Block OVS1 operation block by VTF Non OVS1 UseFor Trip Alarm OVS1 used for trip or alarm Trip OVS2 OVS2 Timer DT IDMT Original OVS2 delay type DT DT OVS2 1 0 220 0 V OVS2 threshold 120 0 TOVS2 0 00 300 00 s OVS2 operating delay time in DT mode 1 00 OVS2 DPR 10 100 OV...

Страница 273: ...n level pick up phase BC 8200011C26 OVS1PU CA OVS1 relay operation level pick up phase CA 8000011B61 OVS1PU OR OVS1 relay operation level pick up 3 phases OR 8000011BB0 OVS1_BLOCK OVS1 protection block command 8400021C20 OVS2 AB OVS2 relay element operated phase AB 8500021C21 OVS2 BC OVS2 relay element operated phase BC 8600021C22 OVS2 CA OVS2 relay element operated phase CA 8100021B65 OVS2 OPT OV...

Страница 274: ...ss the third harmonic component To simplify the description only OVG1 is discussed but is applicable to OVG2 hence read the expression for OVG1 as OVG2 for the OVG 2nd stage unless a special explanation or instruction has been provided Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support cert...

Страница 275: ...OVG1 element the user can set a delay time using setting TOVG1 The user can find the delay timer in the OVG function logic See section 2 14 5 2 14 3 Time characteristic The OVG element has two characteristics between a voltage condition and an operation time hence the user should select a mode either i definite independent time characteristic delay or ii inverse dependent time characteristic delay...

Страница 276: ... voltage setting voltage and TMS time multiplier setting to adjust a curve If the user will require a user programmable original curve in the inverse time characteristic it is provided when the constants of k a c are set as shown in Table 2 14 2 For example the user programmable original curve in the OVG1 element will be acquired when Original is set for the scheme switch OVG1 Timer and when value...

Страница 277: ...evel the OVG1 element will issue a trip command after a certain delay After issuing the trip command if a series of fault completely disappears after issuing the trip command the value of the time counter will be expired after the reset time TOVG1R When the user requires resetting the operation of the OVG1 element immediately setting zero for the settings TOVG1R is needed Consequently when a volta...

Страница 278: ...of the trip command is required the user can set Alarm for the scheme switch OVG1 UseFor Note For more information of the trip circuit see Chapter Relay application Trip circuit iii Execution of OVG function Set On for scheme switch OVG1 EN Otherwise set Off for the scheme switch OVG1 EN if the OVG1 element is not required to operate 2 14 5 Scheme logic Figure 2 14 4 shows the OVG function logic S...

Страница 279: ...G1 UseFor Alarm OVG2 OPT TRIP OVG2 OPT ALARM OVG2 OPT OVG2 logic 8100021B60 8000011B23 1 1 8300011B23 8400001B61 OVG OPT TRIP OVG OPT ALARM OVG ARC BLOCK 8000021B23 8100021B61 8100021B61 8000011C27 OVG1 EN On OVG1 VTFBlk OV1 VTFBlk OVG1 BLOCK OVG1 Timer Original VTF_DETECT IDMT DT 1 1 1 OVG1 OVG1 PU 8000011C23 CB_LOSS_PHASE ...

Страница 280: ...ser original curve coefficient 0 00000 OVG1 c 0 00000 10 00000 OVG1 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 Output OVG1 VTFBlk Non Block OVG1 operation block by VTF Non OVG1 UseFor Trip Alarm OVG1 used for trip or alarm Trip OVG2 OVG2 Timer DT IDMT Original OVG2 delay type DT DT OVG2 1 0 220 0 V OVG2 threshold 20 0 TOVG2 0 00 300 00 s OVG2 operating delay time in DT mode 1 00 OVG2 DPR 10 100 OVG2 ...

Страница 281: ...nal by OVG1 protection 8000011C27 OVG1PU OVG1 relay operation level pick up 8000011BB0 OVG1_BLOCK OVG1 protection block command 8100021C23 OVG2 OVG2 relay element operated 8100021B60 OVG2 OPT OVG2 protection operated 8100021B61 OVG2 OPT ALARM Alarm signal by OVG2 protection 8000021B23 OVG2 OPT TRIP Trip signal by OVG2 protection 8100021C27 OVG2PU OVG2 relay operation level pick up 8100021BB0 OVG2_...

Страница 282: ... element is described but the expression is applicable to the UV2 hence read the expression for the UV1 element as the UV2 unless a special explanation or instruction has been provided Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feat...

Страница 283: ...t characteristic 2 15 2 Time characteristic The UV element has the relationship between an input voltage and an operation time the relationship is divided into two time characteristics i the definite time DT and ii the inverse definite minimum time IDMT i Definite time characteristic DT Setting pick up operation The user is required to set DT for scheme switch UV1 Timer when the UV1 element should...

Страница 284: ...seconds V energizing voltage voltage Vs pickup voltage setting voltage TMS time multiplier setting Except for pre programmed characteristics the user can have a user programmable original characteristic curve The user programmable original curve is obtained when the constants of k a c as shown in Table 2 15 2 are set and when Original is set for scheme switch UV1 Timer The constants are set with s...

Страница 285: ...rease corresponding to the duration of series faults When the time counter reaches the trip level then the UV1 element issues a trip signal after a certain delay After issuing the trip signal if a series of fault disappears completely the operation of the UV1 element is expired after the reset time TUV1R When the user requires resetting the operation of the UV1 element immediately setting zero for...

Страница 286: ...ircuit iii Operation of UV element The user should set On for scheme switch UV1 EN for the operation of the UV1 element Otherwise set Off for the scheme switch if the UV1 element is not required to operate iv Under voltage test Setting UV Test On is not to operate UV blocking element UVBLK for testing 2 15 4 Scheme logic Figure 2 15 4 show the logic of the UV function PLC connection points UV _BLO...

Страница 287: ... 8200011B62 On UVBLK EN On UV Test 1 1 1 Block 810002EBB0 UV2_BLOCK UV2 VTFBlk VTF_DETECT 800001EBB0 CB_APH_OPEN 1 810001EBB1 CB_BPH_OPEN 1 820001EBB2 CB_CPH_OPEN 1 1 Original UV1 Timer IDMT DT 0 00 to 300 00s t 0 TUV2 8400021C20 On UV2 EN UV2 A B C 1 8500021C21 8600021C22 8100021B60 8400021C20 UV2 PU A B C 1 8500021C25 8600021C26 8100021B61 t 0 t 0 1 1 1 8400021B62 8500021B63 8600021B64 1 1 Block...

Страница 288: ...0 00000 UV1 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 TUV1R 0 0 300 0 s UV1 definite time reset delay 0 0 Output UV1 VTFBlk Non Block UV1 operation block by VTF Non UV1 UseFor Trip Alarm UV1 used for trip or alarm Trip UV2 UV2 Timer DT IDMT Original UV2 delay type DT DT UV2 5 0 130 0 V UV2 threshold 60 0 UV2 DPR 100 120 UV2 drop out pick up ratio 100 TUV2 0 00 300 00 s UV2 operating delay time in DT...

Страница 289: ...se B 8600021C22 UV2 C UV2 relay element operated phase C 8100021B60 UV2 OR UV2 relay element operated 3 phases OR 8400021C24 UV2PU A UV2 relay operation level pick up phase A 8500021C25 UV2PU B UV2 relay operation level pick up phase B 8600021C26 UV2PU C UV2 relay operation level pick up phase C 8100021B61 UV2PU OR UV2 relay operation level pick up 3 phases OR 8400021B62 UV2 OPT A UV2 protection o...

Страница 290: ...UVS1 element is described but the expression is applicable to the UVS2 hence read the expression for the UVS1 element as the UVS2 unless a special explanation or instruction has been provided Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particul...

Страница 291: ...VS1 element characteristic 2 16 2 Time characteristic The UVS element has the relationship between an input voltage and an operation time the relationship is divided into two time characteristics i the definite time DT and ii the inverse definite minimum time IDMT i Definite time characteristic DT Setting pick up operation The user is required to set DT for scheme switch UVS1 Timer when the UVS1 e...

Страница 292: ...onds V energizing voltage voltage Vs pickup voltage setting voltage TMS time multiplier setting Except for pre programmed characteristics the user can have a user programmable original characteristic curve The user programmable original curve is obtained when the constants of k a c as shown in Table 2 16 2 are set and when Original is set for scheme switch UVS1 Timer The constants are set with set...

Страница 293: ...ase corresponding to the duration of series faults When the time counter reaches the trip level then the UVS1 element issues a trip signal after a certain delay After issuing the trip signal if a series of fault disappears completely the operation of the UVS1 element is expired after the reset time TUVS1R When the user requires resetting the operation of the UVS1 element immediately setting zero f...

Страница 294: ...ay application Trip circuit iii Operation of UVS function Set On for scheme switch UVS1 EN Otherwise set Off for the scheme switch UVS1 EN if the UVS1 element is not required to operate iv Under voltage test Setting UVS Test On is not to operate UVS blocking element UVSBLK for testing 2 16 4 Scheme logic Figure 2 16 4 show the logic of the UVS function PLC connection points UVS _BLOCK are provided...

Страница 295: ...1 8200011B62 On UVSBLK EN On UVS Test 1 1 1 Block 810002EBB0 UV2_BLOCK UVS2 VTFBlk VTF_DETECT 800001EBB0 CB_APH_OPEN 1 810001EBB1 CB_BPH_OPEN 1 820001EBB2 CB_CPH_OPEN 1 1 Original UVS1 Timer IDMT DT 0 00 to 300 00s t 0 TUVS2 8400021C20 On UVS2 EN UVS2 AB BC CA 1 8500021C21 8600021C22 8100021B60 8400021C20 UVS2 PU AB BC CA 1 8500021C25 8600021C26 8100021B61 t 0 t 0 1 1 1 8400021B62 8500021B63 86000...

Страница 296: ... 00000 10 00000 UVS1 user original curve coefficient 0 00000 TUVS1R 0 0 300 0 s UVS1 definite time reset delay 0 0 Output UVS1 VTFBlk Non Block UVS1 operation block by VTF Non UVS1 UseFor Trip Alarm UVS1 used for trip or alarm Trip UVS2 UVS2 Timer DT IDMT Original UVS2 delay type DT DT UVS2 5 0 130 0 V UVS2 threshold 60 0 UVS2 DPR 100 120 UVS2 drop out pick up ratio 100 TUVS2 0 00 300 00 s UVS2 op...

Страница 297: ...U relay operation level pick up phase BC 8200011C26 UVS1PU CA UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up phase CA 8000011B61 UVS1PU OR UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up 3 phases OR 8000011BB0 UVS1_BLOCK UVS1 protection block command 8400021C20 UVS2 AB UVS2 relay element operated phase AB 8500021C21 UVS2 BC UVS2 relay element operated phase BC 8600021C22 UVS2 CA UVS2 relay element operated phase CA ...

Страница 298: ...VS Function ID 471101 Element ID Name Description 800000EBB0 CB_APH_OPEN A phase CB open 810000EBB1 CB_BPH_OPEN B phase CB open 820000EBB2 CB_CPH_OPEN C phase CB open 800001EBB0 UVS1_BLOCK UVS1 protection block command 810002EBB0 UVS2_BLOCK UVS2 protection block command ...

Страница 299: ...to monitoring the frequency changes either a frequency rise element RISE or a frequency down element DOWN is used to monitor the frequency change To monitor the frequency change the user should select either the RISE element or the DOWN element at respective frequencies The DFRQ is used to ensure the operation of load shedding promptly when the change of frequency is very rapid To simplify the des...

Страница 300: ... scheme switch the stage 1 determines the under frequency state when an under frequency is observed Figure 2 17 1 b The user can use a delay timer to postpone to issue a trip signal using setting TFRQ1 Figure 2 17 1 Characteristics of UF and OF elements e g Stage 1 of FRQ Regarding the operation of the UF and OF elements the user should notice the element not to pick up when the measured voltage i...

Страница 301: ...C function For more information of PLC function see Chapter PLC function The under voltage block FRQBLK element is used to block the FRQ operation as mentioned earlier section 2 17 1 i FRQ1 Chara FRQ S1 OPT 8100021C23 8100021B60 0 00 300 00s TFRQ2 OF FRQ2 UF 810002EBB1 FRQ S2 OPT Alarm FRQ2 UseFor Trip 1 t 0 1 8000011C23 8000011B60 0 00 300 00s TFRQ1 OF FRQ1 UF 800001EBB1 FRQ S1 OPT 8000011BB1 Ala...

Страница 302: ... the DFRQ examines the gradient of frequency change Δf Δt in down Setting DFREQ1 is used to configure an operation threshold the operation threshold is configured with Hertz per second The operation of the RISE DOWN elements is blocked when the FRQBLK element runs That is if an obtained voltage is below the setting FRQBLK any operation of the DFRQ function is blocked The FRQBLK element is discusse...

Страница 303: ...RQ logic FFRQ1 Chara DFRQ S1 OPT 8100121C23 8100121B60 810012EBB1 FRQ S2 OPT Alarm DFRQ2 UseFor Trip 1 1 8000111C23 8000111B60 RISE DFRQ1 DOWN 800011EBB1 FRQ S1 OPT 8000111BB1 Alarm DFRQ1 UseFor Trip 1 1 1 1 8500161C23 8500161B60 850016EBB1 FRQ S6 OPT Alarm DFRQ6 UseFor Trip 1 1 DFRQ S2 OPT DFRQ S6 OPT DFRQ OPT TRIP DFRQ ARC BLOCK DFRQ OPT ALARM To TRC OverFrq UnderFrq DFRQ2 Chara OverFrq UnderFrq...

Страница 304: ...3 operating delay time 1 00 Output FRQ3 UseFor Trip Alarm FRQ3 used for trip or alarm Trip FRQ4 FRQ4 Chara OverFrq UnderFrq The selection of FRQ4 character UnderFrq FRQ4 10 00 10 00 Hz FRQ4 threshold 1 00 TFRQ4 0 00 300 00 s FRQ4 operating delay time 1 00 Output FRQ4 UseFor Trip Alarm FRQ4 used for trip or alarm Trip FRQ5 FRQ5 Chara OverFrq UnderFrq The selection of FRQ5 character UnderFrq FRQ5 10...

Страница 305: ...t Contents Default Note 1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A Output DFRQ5 UseFor Trip Alarm DFRQ5 used for trip or alarm Trip DFRQ6 DFRQ6 Chara Rise Down The selection of DFRQ6 character Down DFRQ6 0 1 15 0 Hz s DFRQ6 threshold 0 5 Output DFRQ6 UseFor Trip Alarm DFRQ6 used for trip or alarm Trip ...

Страница 306: ...6 ALARM Alarm signal by DFRQ6 protection 8500161BB1 DFRQ S6 OPT DFRQ6 protection operated 8000161B23 DFRQ S6 TRIP Trip signal by DFRQ6 protection 8000111C23 DFRQ1 DFRQ1 relay element operated 8000111B60 DFRQ1 OPT DFRQ1 element operated 8000111BB0 DFRQ1_BLOCK DFRQ1 protection block command 8100121C23 DFRQ2 DFRQ2 relay element operated 8100121B60 DFRQ2 OPT DFRQ2 element operated 8100121BB0 DFRQ2_BLO...

Страница 307: ...erated 8000011BB0 FRQ1_BLOCK FRQ1 protection block command 8100021C23 FRQ2 FRQ2 relay element operated 8100021B60 FRQ2 OPT FRQ2 element operated 8100021BB0 FRQ2_BLOCK FRQ2 protection block command 8200031C23 FRQ3 FRQ3 relay element operated 8200031B60 FRQ3 OPT FRQ3 element operated 8200031BB0 FRQ3_BLOCK FRQ3 protection block command 8300041C23 FRQ4 FRQ4 relay element operated 8300041B60 FRQ4 OPT F...

Страница 308: ... operated 830004EBB0 FRQ4_BLOCK FRQ4 protection block command 830004EBB1 FRQ S4 OPT FRQ4 protection operated 830014EBB0 DFRQ4_BLOCK DFRQ4 protection block command 830014EBB1 DFRQ S4 OPT DFRQ4 protection operated 840005EBB0 FRQ5_BLOCK FRQ5 protection block command 840005EBB1 FRQ S5 OPT FRQ5 protection operated 840015EBB0 DFRQ5_BLOCK DFRQ5 protection block command 840015EBB1 DFRQ S5 OPT DFRQ5 protec...

Страница 309: ...paration of the faulted portion upon the occurrence of synchronism being lost This occurrence is termed Out of step and the out of step tripping by distance relays OSTZ is provided to make separation of the system 2 55 0 Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To...

Страница 310: ...rces from the system and each power source can keep operating steadily and independently ii Impedance locus during out of step Figure 2 18 2 shows an example of the loci of impedance it is drawn as an arc during the out of step condition The locus is observed to swing from right to left the OSTZ function detects the out of step condition when swinging the locus is observed Figure 2 18 2 Impedance ...

Страница 311: ... user should keep in mind that the OSTZ function is not suitable to detect the transient out of step condition Additionally the OSTZ function cannot recognize the electrical center on the system being in complex Thereby the OSTZ is operated for star system rather than loop system 2 18 3 Operation zones and element characteristics The OSTZ function has three operation zones Zone A Zone B and Zone C...

Страница 312: ...igured by setting OSTZ XB XF reactive reach configured by setting OSTZ XF R1 resistive reach configured by setting OSTZ R1 R2 resistive reach configured by setting OSTZ R2 R 75 X OSTZ ZN Zone C Zone B Zone A OSTZ ZM OSTZ R1 OSTZ R2 OSTZ XB OSTZ XF Figure 2 18 4 OSTZ ZM and OSTZ ZN elements and operation zones ...

Страница 313: ...Trip to issue a trip command for the trip circuit TRC2 When the user requires outputting the trip command for the binary output circuit BO3 instead of the TRC the user should set BO the scheme switch OSTZ Output PLC connection point OSTZ BLOCK is used to blocking the OSTZ function by an external signal The PLC function4 makes possible the connection with the logic 1Note The OSTZ function also issu...

Страница 314: ...0001C25 8200001C26 OSTZ EN On 800000EBB0 OSTZ BLOCK 1 1 0 t 0 1s BO Trip OSTZ Output From FS OCMFS_OP_SEP 1 8300001B23 8200001B6A To TRC Decision logic for phase AB Decision logic for phase BC Decision logic for phase CA Figure 2 18 5 Scheme logic of OSTZ TOSTZ1 1 t 0 0 01 to 1 00s 1 1 t 0 0 01 to 1 00s 1 TOSTZ2 1 Figure 2 18 6 Decision logic for phase to phase 2 55 1 ...

Страница 315: ...STZ resistive reach at Right side 25 50 5 100 OSTZ R2 5 00 50 00 1 000 10 000 OSTZ resistive reach at Left side 12 50 2 500 OSTZ XF 5 00 250 00 1 000 50 000 OSTZ reactive reach at Forward side 30 00 6 000 OSTZ XB 1 00 50 00 0 200 10 000 OSTZ reactive reach at Backward side 5 00 1 000 TOSTZ1 0 01 1 00 s OSTZ out of step timer 0 04 TOSTZ2 0 01 1 00 s OSTZ out of step timer 0 04 OSTZ Output Trip BO O...

Страница 316: ...t operated phase BC 8100001B62 OSTZ ZM BCT OSTZ phase BC impedance viewed in ZONE A 8200001C22 OSTZ ZM CA OSTZ ZM relay element operated phase CA 8200001B64 OSTZ ZM CAT OSTZ phase CA impedance viewed in ZONE A 8000001C24 OSTZ ZN AB OSTZ ZN relay element operated phase AB 8000001B61 OSTZ ZN ABT OSTZ phase AB impedance viewed in ZONE C 8100001C25 OSTZ ZN BC OSTZ ZN relay element operated phase BC 81...

Страница 317: ...erred to other protection functions to block their operations Note The second harmonic current is present all inrush currents in three phases The proportion of the second harmonic current varies with the degree of the energizing but the ratio of the second harmonic current to the fundamental current can be about 20 or greater during energizing Note The implementation of particular features is depe...

Страница 318: ...D OC I1f 0 I2f ICD OC θ ICD 2f tanθ 100 I2f I1f ICD 2f I1f ICD OC ICD Figure 2 19 1 ICD characteristic and operation region As shown in Figure 2 19 1 the user should set both the ICD 2f and ICD OC when the second harmonic inrush current should be detected The user should set On for the scheme switch ICD EN to enable the ICD operation 2 19 2 Scheme logic Figure 2 19 2 illustrates the ICD logic When...

Страница 319: ...10 50 Sensitivity of 2f 15 ICD OC 0 10 5 00 0 50 25 00 A Threshold of fundamental current 0 50 2 50 2 19 4 Data ID Signal monitoring point ICD Function ID 480001 Element ID Name Description 8000001C20 ICD A ICD relay element operated phase A 8100001C21 ICD B ICD relay element operated phase B 8200001C22 ICD C ICD relay element operated phase C 8300001C23 ICD OR ICD relay element operated 3 phases ...

Страница 320: ...isables its element independently The FS uses the OCFS However it is possible to use the OCMF if the FS function is for the function of out of step tripping OST that is discussed separately See Chapter Relay application Out of step tripping Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support...

Страница 321: ... the operating sensitivity of OCDFS elements they can detect a fault current precisely Is IM IN Figure 2 20 1 Current change detection They can operate based on the following equation 𝐼𝑀 𝐼𝑁 𝐼𝑆 2 20 1 where IM present current IN current one cycle before Is setting OCDFS Those settings are determined by a setting OCDFS and those elements can operate when On is set for its scheme switch OCDFS EN They...

Страница 322: ...includes seven detectors placed at seven multiple levels I 0 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 D O P U 0 8 Figure 2 20 2 OCMF characteristics Figure 2 20 2 illustrates that that OCMFS includes those current level detectors LDs Table 2 20 2 shows a detector threshold between operating and resetting is fixed in each LD LD element starts operating if the current exceeds its operating threshold and the LD w...

Страница 323: ...SF EN Off has to be set for the OCMSF EN if the operation of the OCMF function should be disabled 2 20 5 Under voltage element for phase to earth UVFS Its element can measure a voltage of phase to earth Its sensitivity is determined with setting UVFS Its operation is initiated if a phase to earth voltage are below the setting On has to be set for the scheme switch UVFS EN for its operation and set...

Страница 324: ...tripping Figure 2 20 3 Soft fail scheme logic 1 8E00011C22 8C00011C20 8D00011C21 OCFS A B C 1 OCFS EN On OCFS_OP 8000011B60 TOCDFS On OCDFS EN 8A00021C22 8800021C20 8900021C21 OCDFS A B C 1 On UVFS EN 8200051C22 8000051C20 8100051C21 UVFS A B C 1 0 00 300 00s 0 t 0 t 0 t OCDFS_OP UVFS_OP 8100021B60 8800051B60 0 00 300 00s UVSFS EN TDUVFS On 8600061C22 8400061C20 8500061C21 UVSFS A B C 1 On DUVFS E...

Страница 325: ...0 On T On S Off OCMFS EN OCM FS L5 L6 L7 L4 L1 L2 L3 8200041C62 8000041C60 8100041C61 5s 8500041C65 8300041C63 8400041C64 8600041C66 1 1 FS EN OFF EFFS EN 8F00031C23 On EFFS EFFS OP EN OCMFS_OP OCMFS_OP_SEP 8000041B61 To OSTZ OCDFS_OP 8000001B23 EFFS OP OCFS OP UVFS OP DUVFS OP UVSFS OP OCMFS_OP 1 FS EN Off FSRY_OP FS EN OFF To TRC ...

Страница 326: ...me switch Off UVSFS EN Off On UVSFS scheme switch Off DUVFS EN Off On DUVFS scheme switch Off OC OCFS 0 10 50 00 0 50 250 00 A OCFS relay operating value 1 00 5 00 OCD OCDFS 0 05 0 20 0 25 1 00 A OCDFS relay operating value 0 10 0 50 TOCDFS 0 00 300 00 s Extended time of OCDFS operating 10 10 EF EFFS 0 10 50 00 0 50 250 00 A EFFS relay operating value 0 20 1 00 UV UVFS 5 0 130 0 V UVFS relay opera...

Страница 327: ...ated phase C 8000011B60 OCFS OR OCFS relay element operated 3 phase OR 8000041C60 OCMFS L1 OCFS relay element operated phase L1 8100041C61 OCMFS L2 OCFS relay element operated phase L2 8200041C62 OCMFS L3 OCFS relay element operated phase L3 8300041C63 OCMFS L4 OCFS relay element operated phase L4 8400041C64 OCMFS L5 OCFS relay element operated phase L5 8500041C65 OCMFS L6 OCFS relay element opera...

Страница 328: ... of the VTF function is reset2 Thus the blocked relays are allowed to operate again Incidentally issuing the VTF alarm is automatically removed and then the user can find resetting the VTF alarm 1Note The VTF function can block the operation in several relays but it does not block the operation in other relays To know the blocking refer sections of the respective protection functions 2Note The use...

Страница 329: ...erion for the VTF1 function is defined when the UVVTF relay operates whereas the OCD relay does not operate v Detection criterion for the VTF2 The criterion for the VTF2 function is defined when both the EFVTF relay and the OCD relay are not operated whereas the OVGVTF relay is operated 2 21 2 Operation for the VTF function When the VTF function detects the failure issuing the VTF1_DETECT signal i...

Страница 330: ...t 1 1 8100001BB1 t 0 0 015s S R 1 t 0 0 1s 1 UVVTF A B C 8000001C20 8100001C21 8200001C22 1 OCD AT From PROT CCOMMON1 OCD BT OCD CT 1 1 VTF1 EN OPT On On t 0 10 0s 1 1 1 S R 1 1 1 VTF2 EN OPT On On 1 1 S R 1 1 8800001C27 1 1 8200021C60 t 0 10 0s 8200021C60 VTF_ALARM t 0 0 015s S R 1 t 0 0 1s 1 From PROT COMMON1 1 800000B62 VTF2_ALARM To OC3 To EF3 To UV3 To UVS3 To OV3 To OVS3 To OVG3 To OCN3 To D...

Страница 331: ...ays are supplied into the IED 4Note AMF feature is used for the test To generate the AMF signal see chapter User interface Test submenu If a PLC signal is injected at the PLC connection point VTF_BLOCK the operation of the VTF function is blocked The user can program to inject an external signal for the failure detection using the PLC connection point EXTERNAL_VTF the VTF_DETECT signal is generate...

Страница 332: ...TF1 EN Off On OPT On VTF1 scheme switch On UVVTF 1 0 220 0 V Phase under voltage revel for VTF1 detection 20 0 VTF2 VTF2 EN Off On OPT On VTF2 scheme switch On OVGVTF 1 0 220 0 V Threshold of over voltage detection in zero sequence phase 20 0 EFVTF 0 10 50 00 0 50 250 00 A Threshold of over current in zero sequence phase to block VTF2 detection 0 20 1 00 ...

Страница 333: ...00001C22 UVVTF C UVVTF relay element operated Phase C 8100001B60 UVVTF OR UVVTF relay element operated 3 phases OR 8000001B62 VTF ALARM VTF alarm VTF1 ALARM VTF2 ALARM OR 8000001BB0 VTF BLOCK VTF block signal 8000001B61 VTF DETECT VTF detected VTF1 DET VTF2 DET OR 8100011C61 VTF1 ALARM VTF1 alarm 10s timer 8100011C60 VTF1 DET VTF1 detected 8200021C61 VTF2 ALARM VTF2 alarm 10s timer 8200021C60 VTF2...

Страница 334: ...wed to operate again Incidentally issuing the CTF alarm is automatically removed and then the user can find resetting the CTF alarm 1Note The CTF function can block the operation in several relays but it does not block the operation in other relays To know the blocking refer sections of the respective protection functions 2Note The user can programmable the operation using the setting and the PLC ...

Страница 335: ...erates whereas the OVGCTF element does not operate the detection criterion CTF_DETECT is applied 2 22 2 Operation for the CTF function When the CTF function detects the failure issuing the CTF_DETECT signal is continuing regardless of the operation of the OVGCTF relay provided On is set for the scheme switch CTF EN Issuing the CTF _DETECT is continued until the operation of the EFCTF relay is rese...

Страница 336: ...hapter Relay application Protection common 2Note Entering signals come from distance protections ZS ZG when the ZS ZG are available in the IED For more information see Chapter Relay application Distance protection 3Note Output signals are provided for respective relays when the relays are available See Appendix Ordering whether the relays are supplied into the IED 4Note AMF feature is used for the...

Страница 337: ...t Contents Default Note 1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A CTF EN Off On OPT On CTF scheme switch On CTF OVGCTF 1 0 220 0 V Threshold of overvoltage in zero sequence phase to stop CTF detection 20 0 EFCTF 0 10 50 00 0 50 250 00 A Threshold of overcurrent in zero sequence phase to have CTF detection 0 20 1 00 ...

Страница 338: ...LOCK CTF block operated 8100001B60 CTF DET CTF det 8000001B62 CTF DETECT CTF detect 8000001C23 EFCTF EFCTF relay element operated 8100001BB1 EXTERNAL CTF External CTF receive 8100001C27 OVGCTF OVGCTF relay element operated Connection point in PLC logic CTF Function ID 491001 Element ID Name Description 800000EBB0 CTF BLOCK CTF block signal 810000EBB1 EXTERNAL CTF External CTF receive ...

Страница 339: ...based algorithms using information at the local end of the line only 2 738a Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ordering number and check the order number for the G ...

Страница 340: ...phase faults and earth faults Hence the selection of algorithm depends upon the type of fault that occurs Note Both line impedance and rated current affect the accuracy of the FL computation If the VCT is set for 1 ampere rated current operation the accuracy of the FL computation can be maintained provided that the ratio of the reactance of the series impedance per unit length is greater than 0 05...

Страница 341: ...ult current Iα Current change before and after fault occurrence Iα Complex conjugate of Iα Ia Ib Ic Fault currents in phase a phase b and phase c ILa ILb ILc Load currents in phase a phase b and phase c I0s Zero sequence current on the local line i e Line 1 R1 Resistance component of positive sequence self impedance Z1 FL_R1 X1 Reactance component of positive sequence self impedance Z1 FL_X1 R0 Re...

Страница 342: ... 4 where k Propagation constant is pre fixed by the manufacturer of the transmission line k 0 001𝑘𝑚 1 2 66 1 4 ii Equation for phase to phase faults When the occurrence of a phase b to phase c fault is considered the distance to the fault GF χ is computed using the following equations Ibc Ib Ic 2 23 5 Vbc Vb Vc 2 23 6 If Ibc ILb ILc 2 23 7 χ Im Vbc If L 𝑅𝑒 R1 Ibc If 𝐼𝑚 X1 Ibc If Kbc 2 23 8 where I...

Страница 343: ...te If there is an error in the setting information with regard to the length of the transmission line the FL computation does not start a dash sign is displayed on the screen i Fault distance expressed in kilometers or miles The fault distance can be displayed in the user preferred unit see Figure 2 23 2 a Additionally the FL computation does not output the fault distance until a trigger signal ha...

Страница 344: ... scattering is minimal Note The FL function can determine the convergence in the computation when the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value is less than 0 2 km For the convergence decision the values are calculated three times a value calculated for the current samples a value three samples prior to the current samples and a value six samples prior to the current samples 2 66 ...

Страница 345: ...e scheme switch FL_ImpSet to Symmetrical Setting zero sequence impedance With regard to the zero sequence impedance Z0GH the user should set the value of resistance for setting FL_R0 and the value of reactance for setting FL_X0 See Figure 2 23 1 Setting positive sequence impedance With regard to the positive sequence impedance Z1GH the user should set the value of resistance for setting FL_R1 and ...

Страница 346: ...to Figure 2 23 1 when the voltage and current on a transmission line can be expressed using matrix components the user can select the following matrix setting Va Vb Vc Zaa Zab Zac Zba Zbb Zbc Zca Zcb Zcc Ia Ib Ic 2 23 18 where Zaa Phase a self impedance on line GH Zbb Zcc Zab Mutual impedances between phase a and phase b on line GH Zbc Zca Selection of matrix setting mode Prior to applying the mat...

Страница 347: ...der them in the matrix setting mode iii Assumption of fault direction The user can select the direction for the FL computation to be in either the forward or the reverse direction When the forward direction is selected other protection elements related to the FL computation should have the same direction If the user selects the reverse direction other corresponding functions should have the revers...

Страница 348: ... can be displayed when On is set for setting FL_ALL_Zone Note that the fault location will be displayed by On being set for the FL_ALL_Zone but the result for overreaching cannot be guaranteed in the FL computation thereby it must be taken carefully vii Compensation for earth faults on parallel lines When applied to parallel lines the FL computation for earth faults is compensated by introducing t...

Страница 349: ...ore the user is not required to set the scheme switch FL Z0B Off viii Trigger of data save and calculation in operation The FL requires start signals for the computation The signals are provided by the following protection functions a Distance protection b Over current protection c Carrier protection command protection d External protection With regard to the signals of the external protection fun...

Страница 350: ...laced properly For further information see section 2 23 3 iii 1 R Z1S FL DIR 310022EC61 FLZ_RecF 310022EC65 FLAZ_RecR Z1S DIR Reverse Forward Z1XS DIR Reverse Forward Z2S DIR Reverse Forward Z3S DIR Reverse Forward Z1XS Z2S Z3S 1 1 OC1 OC1 Dir Reverse Forward OC2 Dir Reverse Forward OC2 1 ZC 1 Z1G Z1G DIR Reverse Forward Z1XG DIR Reverse Forward Z2G DIR Reverse Forward Z3G DIR Reverse Forward Z1XG...

Страница 351: ...1 OC1 Dir Reverse Forward OC2 Dir Reverse Forward OC2 1 ZC 1 Z1G Z1G DIR Reverse Forward Z1XG DIR Reverse Forward Z2G DIR Reverse Forward Z3G DIR Reverse Forward Z1XG Z2G Z3G 1 1 1 Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Result signal of ZS elements Result signal of ZG elements Result signal of OC elements Result signal of ZCS and ZCG elements PLC signals FL calculation started by the result signals of re...

Страница 352: ...ne Rbc 0 10 0 01 FL_Rca 0 00 1000 00 0 00 200 00 Resistance component of line Rac 0 10 0 01 FL_X1 0 00 1000 00 0 00 200 00 Reactance component of line positive sequence impedance 10 00 2 00 FL_R1 0 00 1000 00 0 00 200 00 Resistance component of line positive sequence impedance 1 00 0 20 FL_X0 0 00 1000 00 0 00 200 00 Reactance component of line zero sequence impedance 34 00 6 80 FL_R0 0 00 1000 00...

Страница 353: ...ion ID 495001 at Common Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Note 1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A FL_Line_km 0 0 500 0 km Line length km 50 0 FL_Line_mile 0 0 310 0 mil es Line length mile 31 0 FL_AllZone Off On Display the outside of the boundary Off ...

Страница 354: ...G Fault locator update flag 3100101348 FLTLOOP Fault loop 3100101005 FLTQUALITY Quality of fault locator Connection point on PLC logic FL Z Function ID 495001 Element ID Name Description 310002EC62 FL_LOCF Fault locate start signal forward 310002EC63 FL_LOCR Description 310002EC60 FL_RECF Record start signal forward 310002EC61 FL_RECR Description ...

Страница 355: ...ility practice The suitability of a particular auto reclosing scheme may also be established by conducting a transient analysis study of the interconnected electrical network Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has be...

Страница 356: ... A x SPAR TPAR X N A x ORIGINAL X N A x ARC1 SHOT2 X N A N A ARC1 SHOT3 X N A N A ARC1 SHOT4 X N A N A ARC1 SHOT5 X N A N A x Operation is applicable N A Operation is not applicable i Breaker system The ARC function can operate in several breaker systems as shown in Figure 2 24 1 For the 1 5CB arrangement the ARC1 and ARC2 logics operate separately the user can select different reclosing scheme Fi...

Страница 357: ...TPAR The CB is tripped in single phase by the fault detection of relay applications if a single phase fault occurs the ARC function tries to reclose the CB Three phase tripping is performed if a multi phase fault occurs then the CB will be reclosed by the ARC function Note that the VCHK permission signal is required to reclose the CB in the three phase tripping i e TPAR scheme but the VCHK permiss...

Страница 358: ...ce a permission signal by PLC programming or the voltage and synchronism check signal Closing status of the CB main contact can be monitored in the PROT_COMM function the ARC function can evaluate the successful reclosing operation after issuing the shots ARC1 SHOT1 and others A failure ARC1 CLOSE FAIL is signaled if the CB 1 fails to close after issuing the ARC1 SHOT1 and others Signle shot autor...

Страница 359: ... abandons to reclose the CB 1 and CB 2 ARC1 FT or ARC2 FT CB is not ready for ARC operation Failure to issue ARC shot ARC block command has come through PLC connection points Multi phase trip in SPAR mode Evolving fault single phase to multiphase in SPAR and TPAR mode Final trip selected for 3 phase fault user settable ARC close fail Shot number over ...

Страница 360: ...the time between the instant of separation of the circuit breaker contacts and the instant of the extinction of the fault arc iv Permanent fault Signal ARC1 FT Fallen conductors tree growth tree branches that have fallen across lines as well as other causes may all produce permanent faults As the operation of the ARC function is unable to restore power transmission for permanent faults the ARC fun...

Страница 361: ...ds for respective shots1 5 ix Final trip stage to abandon CB reclosure Signal ARC1 FT and setting TRR1 TRR_MS2 5 TRR1 is the time from the ARC1 initiation to abandoning issuing the ARC1 SHOT1 In TPAR mode the permissive signal ARC1 VCHK must be issued by the VCHK function within the time interval of TRR1 at the end of the dead time i e TRR1 has not timed out otherwise the ARC function abandons the...

Страница 362: ...of the CB subsequent to fault clearance is checked by the Success check logic which checks for the signal CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE provided by the protection common function PROT_COMMON Clearing the fault automatically resets the ARC1 operation Scheme switch ARC SucChk Off With ARC SucChk set to Off timer TARCSUC may be used to check for a successful closure following the issue of the ARC1 SHOT command The...

Страница 363: ...althy line Then the minimum time setting of the TREADY reclaim timer should be longer than the time required to judge that the CB has closed successfully Another consideration required for this setting is that after the CB has gone through a successful ARC cycle the maximum allowable successive close open operations are achieved with the setting In this case the minimum time delay required before ...

Страница 364: ...logic Signals ARC1_SPAR_COND ARC1_TPAR_COND The Condition logic issues the above signals depending on the setting ARC1 MODE and the tripped phases i e signal TRIP ANYPH and others This logic is available when the setting ARC1 MODE SPAR TPAR or SPAR TPAR ...

Страница 365: ...e 2 24 4 the logics are similar for CB2 in the 1 5CB arrangement except that only a single shot is permitted in the 1 5CB arrangement Note that the logics are shown for a two 2 shot scheme for simplicity Each functional block diagram is grouped into a number of logic blocks four typical functional block diagrams are illustrated below i Issuing ARC SHOT1 and ARC SHOT2 in 1 CB of the SPAR mode ii Is...

Страница 366: ...ble 2 24 4 Setting examples in SPAR mode Categories Items Settings Corresponding logics ARC general ARC1 Mode SPAR Figure 2 24 10 ARC2 Mode Off Figure 2 24 11 ARC NUM S2 Figure 2 24 12 ARC1 TREADY 60 0s Figure 2 24 14 TSPAR1 0 80s Figure 2 24 17 TSPAR1_SUB 300 00s Figure 2 24 17 TRR1 2 00s Figure 2 24 17 TCCW1 0 20s Figure 2 24 21 ARC1 multi shot TD_MS2 20 00s Figure 2 24 20 TRR_MS2 30 00s Figure ...

Страница 367: ...RIP B ARC1 S2 COND CB1 ARC READY 800001EBB7 1 1 ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND To BO To TRC TRIP 1PH ARC START Start TRIP 1PH Condition as to CB 1 SPAR ARC1 S1 IN PROG ARC1 SPAR_COND B NO OFF ARC1 Mode input ARC1_MODE SPAR 820001EBB2 C B Shot number 1CB ARC NUM A From PROT_COMM CB SYSTEM 1CB A A SHOT1 ARC1 MODE NO OFF C TRIP MPH Multi phase Trip in SPAR1 ARC1 BLOCK COM ARC1_SPAR_COND SPAR1_START ARC SucChk CB...

Страница 368: ...re 2 24 23 Table 2 24 6 Setting examples in TPAR mode Categories Items Settings Corresponding logics ARC general ARC1 Mode TPAR Figure 2 24 10 ARC2 Mode Off Figure 2 24 11 ARC ORDER CB1 Figure 2 24 23 ARC NUM S2 Figure 2 24 12 ARC1 TREADY 60 0s Figure 2 24 14 TTPAR1 0 60s Figure 2 24 18 TTPAR1_SUB 300 00s Figure 2 24 18 TRR1 2 00s Figure 2 24 18 TCCW1 0 20s Figure 2 24 21 ARC1 multi shot TD_MS2 20...

Страница 369: ...O ARC_BLOCK 820000EBB4 1 To TRC ARC START Start TRIP ANYPH TPAR ARC1 S1 IN PROG ARC1 TPAR_COND B NO OFF ARC1 Mode input ARC1_MODE TPAR 820001EBB2 C B Shot number 1CB ARC NUM A A A SHOT1 ARC1 MODE NO OFF C ARC1_BLOCK 800001EBCF TRIP ANYPH ARC1 BLOCK COM ARC1_TAR_COND TPAR1_START ARC SucChk Failure to issue shot CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE CB1 ARC READY SHOT_1ST 800000EBB2 800000EBB1 EXT ARC_START A 800000EBB0 ...

Страница 370: ...n SPAR and TPAR mode Categories Items Settings Corresponding logics ARC general ARC1 Mode SPAR TPAR Figure 2 24 10 ARC2 Mode Off Figure 2 24 11 ARC ORDER CB1 Figure 2 24 23 ARC NUM S2 Figure 2 24 12 ARC1 TREADY 60 0s Figure 2 24 14 TSPAR1 0 80s Figure 2 24 17 TSPAR1_SUB 300 00s Figure 2 24 17 TTPAR1 0 60s Figure 2 24 19 TTPAR1_SUB 300 00s Figure 2 24 19 TRR1 2 00s Figure 2 24 19 TCCW1 0 20s Figure...

Страница 371: ... ARC START Start TRIP MPH SPAR TPAR ARC1 S1 IN PROG ARC1 SPAR_COND B NO OFF ARC1 Mode input C B Shot number 1CB ARC NUM A A A SHOT1 ARC1 MODE NO OFF C ARC1_BLOCK 800001EBCF TRIP MPH ARC1 BLOCK COM ARC1_TPAR_COND TPAR1_START ARC SucChk Failure to issue shot CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE CB1 ARC READY SHOT_1ST 800000EBB2 800000EBB1 EXT ARC_START A 800000EBB0 EXT ARC_START B EXT ARC_START C GEN TRIP A GEN TRIP C S...

Страница 372: ...ARC1 IN PROG signal is turned off Relay operation GEN TRIP ARC1 IN PROG ARC1 S1 IN PROG ARC1 SHOT1 Dead Time TTPAR1 ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND TCCW1 CB 1 status Closed Open ARC1 CLOSE SUCCESS ARC1 CLOSE FAIL CB1_ ALLPH_CLOSE Fault current ARC1 FT ARC1 S2 IN PROG ARC1 SHOT2 ARC1 S3 IN PROG ARC1 SHOT3 20ms Operated Issued Closed Figure 2 24 5 Single shot scheme ARC NUM S1 for an Arcing fault operation is su...

Страница 373: ...ustrates the behavior of the single shot scheme for a permanent fault Tripping of the CB 1 is executed correctly but a further trip occurs following the reclosure of the CB 1 Accordingly the ARC function determines that the ARC1 operation cannot restore power transmission in the single shot scheme subsequently the ARC function goes to the final trip ARC1 FT stage GEN TRIP ARC1 IN PROG ARC1 S1 IN P...

Страница 374: ...3 IN PROG ARC1 SHOT3 CB at the local end fails to open ARC RESET TRESET Fault cleared by tripping the backup CB at the remote end Relay operation Operated Issued Closed Reset Open Figure 2 24 8 Single shot scheme ARC NUM S1 for an Arcing fault remote CB tripped Note the fault is removed by the tripping of the CB at the remote end hence the fault current will no longer flow v Multi shot scheme for ...

Страница 375: ... shot scheme ARC NUM S3 for a Permanent fault Note 1 The permissive signal ARC1 VCHK is required for ARC SHOT1 operation but has been omitted for clarity in this figure 2 ARC1 VCHK permissive signal is introduced automatically in the TPAR mode For ARC SHOT2 and onwards the user must introduce the permissive signal from the VCHK function by using PLC programming 2 24 5 Autoreclosing logics i Settin...

Страница 376: ...00001EBB8 Figure 2 24 10 ARC1 MODE input logic When FT is selected the ARC function send CB1_BRIDGE signal for the TRC function to be the CB being tripped in three phases regardless of the condition of the tripped phase the operation of respective protection elements and the ARC settings the ARC function does not operate i e ARC1 FT When TPAR is selected the TRC and the ARC functions operate by th...

Страница 377: ...he various signals that is only one signal is picking up 1 CB SYSTEM 2CB CB SYSTEM 1CB ARC2_MODE OFF 800002EBB0 ARC2_MODE FT 810002EBB1 ARC2_MODE SPAR 820002EBB2 ARC2_MODE TPAR 830002EBB3 800002EBB7 ARC2_MODE S T 800001EBB7 ARC2 MODE MPAR 850002EBB5 800001EBB7 ARC2_MODE ORG 860002EBB6 1 1 1 ARC2 MODE OFF ARC2 MODE SPAR ARC2 MODE TPAR ARC2 MODE S T ARC2 MODE ORG ARC2 MODE NO OFF ARC2 MODE ON Initia...

Страница 378: ... number setting ARC NUM The ARC NUM switch is provided to set a number of reclosing CB 1 1 ARC NUM S1 ARC NUM S1 From PROT COMMON S2 S3 S4 S5 CB SYSTEM 1 CB CB SYSTEM 2 CB ARC NUM S2 ARC NUM S3 ARC NUM S4 ARC NUM S5 To Initiation for CB 1 Figure 2 24 12 Shot number ...

Страница 379: ...65 8000001B66 8100001B67 8200001B68 8300001B69 0 01s ARC NO ACT 800000EBB3 EXT ARC_START A 800000EBB0 EXT ARC_START B 810000EBB1 EXT ARC_START C 820000EBB2 Initiation Initiation Condition To Multiphase trip in SPAR To Evolving fault logic From TRC 1 Reclose sequence ARC1 MODE input ARC2 MODE input ARC1 S1 IN PROG 1 1 1 0 02s RYOP A 800000EBB5 RYOP B 810000EBB6 RYOP C 820000EBB7 1 On FT 3PFAULT 850...

Страница 380: ... ARC BLOCK signals are injected provided ARC1 IN PROG OR or ARC2 S1 IN PROG signals is being generated If with regard to the tripped poles of CBs there is not consistency between the CB 1 and the CB 2 the ARC function can generate the CB1_94TT and CB2_94TT signals when an external device is able to detect the consistency use PLC connection points F CB1_94TT and F CB2_94TT for the operation of the ...

Страница 381: ...S R ARC1 S5 IN PROG S R ARC1 SHOT2 ARC1 SHOT3 ARC1 SHOT4 ARC1 SHOT5 SHOT_2ND SHOT_3RD SHOT_4TH SHOT_5TH ARC1 NOT_IN PROG ARC1 IN PROG ARC1 UNREADY Initiation for CB 1 1 CB2 ARC READY 810002EBB8 1 8000021B60 8200021B61 ARC2 READY ARC2 S1 IN PROG CB2_ALLPH_CLOSE t 0 0 0 600 0s TREADY2 ARC2 UNREADY ARC2 MODE ON S R 1 From PROT COMMON ARC2 MODE input logic To Shot logic for CB 2 To CB 2 bridge Final t...

Страница 382: ... per phase trip signal into the three phase trip signal in the TRC function Thus the CB will be tripped in three phases forcibly even if a GEN TRIP A TRIP COMMAND A signal is only generated in the TRC function during the ARC1 UNREADY being decided as well as GEN TRIP B or GEN TRIP C ...

Страница 383: ...TEST SN TEST 1 8000001B6D 8100001B6E 8200001B6F 8300001B70 8400001B71 8500001B72 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 OFF 1 ARC2 SHOT ARC1 NOT_IN PROG Shot1 for CB 1 Initiation for CB 1 Shot2 Shot5 for CB 1 Initiation for CB 2 ARC2 NOT_IN PROG Initiation for CB 2 Shot for CB 2 Initiation for CB 1 ARC1 IN PROG 1 ARC NUM S1 ARC NUM S2 ARC NUM S3 ARC NUM S4 ARC NUM S5 Shot number ARC START Start ARC2 IN PROG 8400001B6B...

Страница 384: ...t 0 0 01 300 00s TEVLV EVOLV_FAULT TIME OVER1 8200001B6A CB2_94TT EVOLV_FAULT TIME OVER2 ARC1 IN PROG OR OFF FT MPAR ORIGINAL ARC2 MODE input ARC2 MODE SPAR TPAR SPAR TPAR 1 OFF FT MPAR ORIGINAL CB1_94TT CB2_94TT ARC1 FT MPH TRIP IN SPAR2 ARC2 FT ARC1 FT ARC2 FT Figure 2 24 16 Condition logic When a multiphase fault TRIP MPH occurs in the settings ARC1 MODE SPAR then CB1_94TT signal is generated s...

Страница 385: ...r CB 1 Issuing for CB 1 CB 2 ARC1_SPAR_COND TSPAR1 t 0 0 01 300 00 s 1 8000011B63 ARC1_SPAR Condition of CB 1 ARC1 S1 IN PROG SPAR1_START 800001EBB9 SPAR1_COND 800001EBBA SPAR1_SUB_START 800001EBBB SPAR1_SUB_COND 800001EBBC TSPAR1_SUB t 0 0 01 300 00 s Always 1 ARC2_SPAR_COND TSPAR2 t 0 0 01 300 00 s 1 8000021B63 ARC2_SPAR Condition of CB 2 ARC2 S1 IN PROG SPAR2_START 800002EBB9 SPAR2_COND 800002E...

Страница 386: ...001EBBD TPAR1_COND 810001EBBE TPAR1_SUB_START 810001EBBF TPAR1_SUB_COND 810001EBC0 TTPAR1_SUB t 0 0 01 300 00 s ARC1 VCHK From VCHK function For Issuing for CB ARC2_TPAR_COND TTPAR2 t 0 0 01 300 00 s 1 8100021B64 ARC2_TPAR From Condition in CB 2 ARC2 S1 IN PROG TPAR2_START 810002EBBE TPAR2_COND 810002EBBF TPAR2_SUB_START 810002EBC0 TPAR2_SUB_COND 810002EBC1 TTPAR2_SUB t 0 0 01 300 00 s TPAR1_START...

Страница 387: ...4 ARC2_TPAR TPAR2_START 810002EBBE TPAR2_COND 810002EBBF TPAR2_SUB_START 810002EBC0 TPAR2_SUB_COND 810002EBC1 TTPAR2_SUB t 0 0 01 300 00 s From Initiation Issuing for CB 1 ARC1_SPAR_COND TSPAR1 t 0 0 01 300 00 s 1 8000011B63 ARC1_SPAR Condition in CB 1 ARC1 S1 IN PROG SPAR1_START 800001EBB9 SPAR1_COND 800001EBBA SPAR1_SUB_START 800001EBBB SPAR1_SUB_COND 800001EBBC TSPAR1_SUB t 0 0 01 300 00 s ARC1...

Страница 388: ...PROG Initiation ARC1 S2 COND 810001EBC9 8100011B68 ARC1 S3 COND 810001EBCA 8100011B69 ARC1 S4 COND 810001EBCB 8100011B6A ARC1 S5 COND 810001EBCC S R SHOT_2ND SHOT_3RD SHOT_4TH SHOT_5TH Shot counter S R S R S R ARC NUM Shot number TD_MS2 t 0 0 01 300 00 s TD_MS3 t 0 0 01 300 00 s TD_MS4 t 0 0 01 300 00 s TD_MS5 t 0 0 01 300 00 s TRR2 t 0 0 01 310 00 s TRR3 t 0 0 01 310 00 s TRR 4 t 0 0 01 310 00 s ...

Страница 389: ...011B6C ARC1 CLOSE COMMAND 0 01 10 00s TCCW1 1 Shot1 Shot5 for CB 1 ARC1 SHOT1 ARC1 SHOT2 ARC1 SHOT3 ARC1 SHOT4 ARC1 SHOT5 CB1_MANUAL_CLOSE 800001EBCD ARC1 SHOT Success check for CB 1 To BO 8100021B68 ARC2 CLOSE COMMAND 0 01 10 00s TCCW2 1 Shot for CB 2 ARC2 SHOT CB2_MANUAL_CLOSE 810002EBCA ARC2 SHOT Success check for CB 2 To BO Figure 2 24 21 Issuing for CB 1 and CB 2 ...

Страница 390: ...LLPH_CLOSE Off On 8000011B72 ARC SucChk ARC SUCCHK OFF ARC SUCCHK ON Issuing for CB 1 From PROT_COMMON Start Initiation for CB 1 S R 1 t 0 0 10 100 00s ARC2 FT TARCSUC 8C00021B6D 0 1s ARC2 CLOSE FAIL ARC2 CLOSE SUCCESS 8000021B6E Initiation for CB 2 CB2_ALLPH_CLOSE ARC2 SHOT ARC_START ARC2 NOT_IN PROG Issuing for CB 2 Start Initiation for CB 2 CB1_94TT To TRC CB2_94TT ARC2 RS Initiation for CB 1 A...

Страница 391: ...Mode setting Setting ARC ORDER Start condition ARC1 mode TPAR or SPAR TPAR ARC2 mode TPAR or SPAR TPAR CB1 CB 1 recloses first CB2 CB 2 recloses first SIMUL Both CB 1 and CB 2 reclose simultaneously 1 TPAR1 START 810001EBBD 8000011B73 NON ARC S1_IN PROG ARC1 SHOT1 S R ARC2 SHOT Shot1 for CB 1 Shot for CB 2 S R Start ARC ORDER CB2 CB1 SIMUL 1 Not connected TPAR1_START ARC1 TPAR TPAR2 START 810002EB...

Страница 392: ...ime 300 00 TMPAR1 0 01 300 00 s Autoreclose1 MPAR dead time 1 00 TMPAR1_SUB 0 01 300 00 s Autoreclose1 sub MPAR dead time 300 00 TORGAR1 0 01 300 00 s Autoreclose1 user original ARC dead time 300 00 TORGAR1_SU B 0 01 300 00 s Autoreclose1 sub user original ARC dead time 300 00 TRR1 0 01 310 00 s Autoreclose1 reset time 2 00 TCCW1 0 01 10 00 s Autoreclose1 ARC command pulse width 0 20 ARC2 TREADY2 ...

Страница 393: ...S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 372 Test setting Function ID 441001 Items Range Unit Contents Default Note 1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A Function Test SHOTNUM TEST Off S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 ARC test shot number Off ...

Страница 394: ...AUTORECST AutoRecSt signal in RREC of IEC61580 LN 8000011BCF ARC1_BLOCK ARC1 block signal 8000011B73 ARC1_INIT ARC1 initiation 8100011BB1 ARC1_MODE FT Final trip mode for autoreclose 1 8000011BB0 ARC1_MODE OFF Off mode for autoreclose 1 8600011BB6 ARC1_MODE ORG Original mode for autoreclose 1 8400011BB4 ARC1_MODE S T Single and three phase mode for autoreclose 1 8200011BB2 ARC1_MODE SPAR Single ph...

Страница 395: ...2 ready signal for ARC2 8500021B6B CB2_94TT Discrepancy trip signal in CB2 8800021B62 CB2_BRIDGE CB2 bridge 8100021BCA CB2_MANUAL_CLOSE CB2 manual close signal 8200001B6A EVOLV FAULT TIME OVER Time over of evolved fault under S T mode 8300001B64 EXT ARC_START External ARC operation 8000001BB0 EXT ARC_START A External ARC start signal phase A 8100001BB1 EXT ARC_START B External ARC start signal pha...

Страница 396: ...R1_START For three phase ARC1 start 8100011BC0 TPAR1_SUB_COND For three phase ARC1 condition sub 8100011BBF TPAR1_SUB_START For three phase ARC1 start sub 8100021BBF TPAR2_COND For three phase ARC2 condition 8100021BBE TPAR2_START For three phase ARC2 start 8100021BC1 TPAR2_SUB_COND For three phase ARC2 condition sub 8100021BC0 TPAR2_SUB_START For three phase ARC2 start sub 8100001B67 TRIP 1PH 1 p...

Страница 397: ...screpancy trip signal in CB2 820001EBC2 ORGAR1_COND For original ARC1 condition 820001EBC1 ORGAR1_START For original ARC1 start 820001EBC4 ORGAR1_SUB_COND For original ARC1 condition sub 820001EBC3 ORGAR1_SUB_START For original ARC1 start sub 820002EBC3 ORGAR2_COND For original ARC2 condition 820002EBC2 ORGAR2_START For original ARC2 start 820002EBC5 ORGAR2_SUB_COND For original ARC2 condition sub...

Страница 398: ...Soft 031 032 377 Connection point in PLC logic ARC Function ID 4A6001 Element ID Name Description 810002EBC1 TPAR2_SUB_COND For three phase ARC2 condition sub 810002EBC0 TPAR2_SUB_START For three phase ARC2 start sub 2 69a ...

Страница 399: ...tem 1 5CB a Single breaker on system 1CB ARC1 with VCHK1 ARC2 with VCHK2 ARC1 with VCHK1 Figure 2 25 1 Single breaker and double breakers on the system As discussed above the implementation of VCHK is subjected to the ARC Thus the setting of VCHK should be in corresponding to the setting of the ARC The ARC is discussed separately See Chapter Relay application Autoreclose function Note The implemen...

Страница 400: ...n Dead condition no voltage and Line is in Live condition existing voltage This condition holds true for A1 zone If voltage condition matches with B1 zone synchronous check is carried out on VCHK1 Thus this means that Synchronous check is not carried out in A1 C1 or D1 zones C1 D1 B1 A1 0 V VCHK UVL VCHK OVL A1 C1 D1 Voltage check B1 Synchronism check VCHK UVB VCHK OVB VLLine voltage Incoming volt...

Страница 401: ...C1 D1 B1 A1 0 V VCHK UVL VCHK OVL A1 C1 D1 Voltage check B1 Synchronism check VCHK UVB VCHK OVB VLLine voltage Incoming voltage VBBus bar voltage Running voltage Dead bus and dead line DB DL Dead bus and live line DB LL Live bus and live line LB LL Live bus and dead line LB DL a VCHK1 check zone C2 D2 B2 A2 0 V VCHK UVL VCHK OVL A2 C2 D2 Voltage check B2 Synchronism check VCHK UVL2 VCHK OVL2 VLLin...

Страница 402: ...istics This function performs three checks 1 checking voltage difference 2 checking frequency difference and 3 checking phase difference The following variables represent algebraic expression used in these checking VB Bus bar voltage VL1 Line voltage VL2 Line2 voltage ΔV1 Voltage difference between Bus bar and Line ΔV2 Voltage difference between Line2 and Line fVB frequency of VB fVL frequency of ...

Страница 403: ...Dead Line VCHK OVL2 10 150 Voltage for the checking Live Line2 T_SYN1 0 01 100 00 Voltage check time SYN1 Live Bus Live Line Synchro T_SYN2 0 01 100 00 Voltage check time SYN2 Live Line2 Live Line Synchro The VCHK can have the decision of synchronism between the running voltage and the incoming voltage when the following items i to iv are satisfied i Voltage magnitudes The magnitude of the running...

Страница 404: ...ion from synchronism requirements Similarly the frequency difference condition is not valid when SYN2 dfEN Off iv Phase angle difference The phase differences between the running voltage and the incoming voltage θ1 and θ2 are smaller than the SYN1 and SYN2 settings For SYN1 setting VB VL cosθ1 0 VB VL sin SYN1 Angle VB VL sin θ1 For SYN2 setting VL2 VL cosθ2 0 VL2 VL sin SYN2 Angle VL2 VL sin θ2 v...

Страница 405: ...nism 1 f Hz 2 25 2 Time length for getting a synchronism Time 2 Setting SYN1 Angle 360 1 f Hz 2 25 3 Check time for the synchronism Setting T_SYN1 2 Setting SYN1 Angle 360 1 f Hz 2 25 4 Equations rearrangements Setting T_SYN1 Setting SYN1 Angle 180 1 f Hz 2 25 5 1 𝑓 𝐻𝑧 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 T_SYN1 Setting SYN1 Angle 1 180 2 25 6 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 T_SYN1 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 SYN1 Angle 180 1 𝑓 𝐻𝑧 2 25 7 ...

Страница 406: ...0 00Hz 50 02Hz 0 02Hz 10s time VB Δf VB fVB 50 00Hz VL fVL 50 02Hz Δf Δf VL 50s SYN1 Angle Synchronism zone Figure 2 25 5 Synchronism between VB and VL when system frequency 50Hz Note Settings SYN2 Angle and T_SYN2 are also applicable for these calculations ...

Страница 407: ...input voltage s The following are the setting examples when VCHK is used in 1CB system 1Note For more information on VCT see Chapter Technical description Transfer module For external connection see Appendix Typical external connection Table 2 25 6 VCHK line selection setting Scheme switch Set Comment SYN VBus V L1 V L2 V L3 V L12 V L23 V L31 V2 L1 V2 L2 V2 L3 V2 L12 V2 L23 V2 L31 V3 V4 Selection ...

Страница 408: ...former module 2Note VBus bar is Running voltage 3Note VLine is Incoming voltage Figure 2 25 6 shows the VCT input voltages and phases from Bus bar and Line and shows the phase relationship between the running voltage and the incoming voltage In this case configure the settings in accordance with Figure 2 25 6 and Table 2 25 7 Table 2 25 7 Setting for example 1 Output voltage at VT Bus bar VT Three...

Страница 409: ...is Running voltage 2Note VLine is Incoming voltage Similarly Figure 2 25 7 shows the VCT input voltages and phases from Bus bar and Line In this case configure the settings in accordance with Figure 2 25 7 and Table 2 25 8 Table 2 25 8 Setting for example 2 Output voltage at VT Bus bar VT Three phase Line VT Phase BC Input voltage at VCHK Running voltage Vb and c Phase B and C Bus bar VT Incoming ...

Страница 410: ...Note VBus bar is Running voltage 2Note VLine is Incoming voltage The configuration of inputs voltages and phases is done as shown in Figure 2 25 8 In this case configure the settings in accordance with Figure 2 25 8 and Table 2 25 9 Table 2 25 9 Setting for example 3 Output voltage at VT Bus bar VT Phase C Line VT Three phase Input voltage at VCT Running voltage Vs Phase C Bus bar VT Incoming volt...

Страница 411: ... diagram in Line b Phasor diagram in Bus c Phasor diagram in Line2 Va V L1 Vb V L2 Vc V L3 Vs V3 Vs2 V4 VBus bar Vs VLine Vb d Phasor diagram in SYN11 e Phasor diagram in SYN22 VLine Vb VLine2 Vs2 Figure 2 25 9 Input voltages and respective phasor diagram for SYN1 and SYN2 1Note VBus bar is Running voltage VLine is Incoming voltage 2Note VLine2 is Running voltage VLine is Incoming voltage ...

Страница 412: ...HK Setting3 SYN VBus V3 SYN VLine V L2 SYN VLine2 V4 3Note Set V L2 for the scheme switch SYN VLine This is because V3 and VL2 are in the same phase Set V4 for the scheme switch SYN VLine2 This is because V3 and V4 are in the same phase Table 2 25 11 VCHK line1 and line2 selection setting Scheme switch Set Comment SYN VBus V L1 V L2 V L3 V L12 V L23 V L31 V2 L1 V2 L2 V2 L3 V2 L12 V2 L23 V2 L31 V3 ...

Страница 413: ...Off is set for other scheme switches As a result the system is energized in the direction from line to bus with ARC1 As shown in Figure 2 25 11 the operation of the VCHK2 is also applicable in accordance with Figure 2 25 3 similar to VCHK1 Note that the SYN1 df and SYN2 df operations are nullified when Off are set for the SYN1 dfEN and SYN2 dfEN L3 OVL OVB 8200011B62 1 ARC1 LB_DL OVB UVB OVL L1 L2...

Страница 414: ...T_DL2_LL t 0 0 01 100 00S T_DL2_DL t 0 0 01 100 00S ARC2 DL2_LL ON ON 8024001001 8124011001 ARC2 DL2_DL ON 8200021B6A 8100021B23 ARC2 VCHK OVL2 OVL SYN2 dƟ SYN2 dV SYN2 df T_SYN2 t 0 0 01 100 00S ARC2 SYN2 ON 8300021B6C ARC2 NOVCHK ON 8400021B62 8500021B63 8600021B64 8300021B6B SYN2 dfEN OFF 1 Figure 2 25 11 Logic of VCHK2 ...

Страница 415: ...RC1 Off ARC1 DB_DL Off On Voltage check Dead Bus Dead Line is applied to ARC1 Off ARC1 SYN1 Off On Voltage check SYN1 is applied to ARC1 Off ARC1 NOVCHK Off On Voltage check is not applied to ARC1 On T_LB_DL 0 01 100 00 s Voltage check time Live Bus and Dead Line 0 05 T_DB_LL 0 01 100 00 s Voltage check time Dead Bus and Live Line 0 05 T_DB_DL 0 01 100 00 s Voltage check time Dead Bus and Dead Lin...

Страница 416: ... rating 1A 5A ARC2 NOVCHK Off On Voltage check is not applied to ARC2 On T_LL2_DL 0 01 100 00 s Voltage check time Live Line2 and Dead Line 0 05 T_DL2_LL 0 01 100 00 s Voltage check time Dead Line2 and Live Line 0 05 T_DL2_DL 0 01 100 00 s Voltage check time Dead Line2 and Dead Line 0 05 T_SYN2 0 01 100 00 s Voltage check time SYN2 1 00 ...

Страница 417: ...d 8B00011B6C SYN1 V5PER SYN1 Voltage check V5per 8300021B6B SYN2 Synchronous voltage 2 before timer 8400021B62 SYN2 ANGLE SYN2 Angle relay element operated 8800021B66 SYN2 ANGLE LOSS SYN2 Angle check loss 8700021B65 SYN2 ANGLE ZERO SYN2 Angle check zero 8600021B64 SYN2 DF SYN2 df relay element operated 8500021B63 SYN2 DV SYN2 dV relay element operated 8B00021B67 SYN2 V5PER SYN2 Voltage check V5per...

Страница 418: ...sing the check signal as an input to the TRC logic i e fail safe operation is realized by the operation of the additional relay Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED o...

Страница 419: ...ration logic operates to provide a trigger signal for the recording function Note The internal connection between the TRC function and the BIO module should be performed using the BIO settings or the PLC programming The user can program the connection the PLC monitoring point TRIP COMMAND1 A 8000001B20 etc with preferred BO circuits using the settings Input signal1 etc of each BO on the BIO module...

Страница 420: ...ARC BLOCK FC1 OPT ALARM FC1 OPT AR FC1 OPT BR FC1 OPT CR FC1 OPT ABR FC1 OPT BCR FC1 OPT CAR FC1 OPT TRIP A FC2 FC2 OPT TRIP B FC2 OPT TRIP C FC2 OPT TRIP FC2 ARC BLOCK FC2 OPT ALARM FC2 OPT AR FC2 OPT BR FC2 OPT CR FC2 OPT ABR FC2 OPT BCR FC2 OPT CAR FC2 OPT TRIP A OPT TRIP A OPT TRIP B OPT TRIP C OPT TRIP FC40 OPT TRIP A etc CBF1_ARC BLOCK FC40 CBF1_RETRIP A CB 2 center CB Transmission line BO2 ...

Страница 421: ...A N A N A N A N A N A 2 N A N A N A N A N A N A 3 N A N A N A N A N A N A 4 N A N A N A N A N A N A 5 N A N A N A N A N A N A 6 N A N A N A N A N A N A 7 N A N A N A N A N A N A 8 N A N A N A N A N A ZS 9 X X ZS SOTF 10 X X ZG 11 X X X X ZG SOTF 12 X DISCAR 13 X X X X DEFCAR 14 X X X X OSTZ 15 X X SOTF OC 16 X X STUB OC 17 X X OC 18 X X EF 19 X X OCN 20 X X UC 21 X X THM 22 X X BCD 23 X X N A 24 N...

Страница 422: ...ion of relay functions Hence the user should figure out actual inputs using Table 2 26 2 together with the characteristics of respective protection functions Note the TRC outputs will be influenced by the signals generated in the ARC function That is when a CB1_BRIDGE or a CB1_94TT signal is generated and it is injected into the TRC function the TRC function is instructed to output a three phase t...

Страница 423: ... TRIP COMMAND1 B TRIP COMMAND1 C TRIP COMMAND2 B TRIP COMMAND2 C FC _OPT TRIP C FC _OPT TRIP A TRIP COMMAND1 C TRIP COMMAND1 A TRIP COMMAND2 C TRIP COMMAND2 A FC _OPT TRIP A FC _OPT TRIP B FC _OPT TRIP C TRIP COMMAND1 A TRIP COMMAND1 B TRIP COMMAND1 C TRIP COMMAND2 A TRIP COMMAND2 B TRIP COMMAND2 C Note the tripping phase does not have the match with the phase of an input signal for 1 PHASE or 3 P...

Страница 424: ... N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 3 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 4 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 5 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 6 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 7 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 8 N A N A N A N A N A N A N A ZS 9 X X X ZS SOTF 10 X X X ZG 11 X X X ZG SOTF 12 X X X DISCAR 13 X X X X X X DEFCAR 14 X X X OSTZ 15 SOTF OC 16 X X X STUB OC 17 X X X OC 18 X X X X EF 19 X OCN 20 X...

Страница 425: ... FC01 FC02 FC40 800000EBB3 TRIP A_ADD FC OPT TRIP_A FC OPT TRIP_B FC OPT TRIP_C FC OPT TRIP Figure 2 26 2 Scheme logic for Trip signal collection ii General trip signal production Figure 2 26 3 illustrates the general trip signal production logic The user can program the generation of trip signals using the PLC connection point ADD_OPT_COM when trip signals are not available from the relay functio...

Страница 426: ...281001 8014291001 80142A1001 80142C1001 80142D1001 80142E1001 TRIP COMMAND2 B TRIP COMMAND2 C TRIP COMMAND2 A To CB 2 TRIP COMMAND1 A GEN TRIP B GEN TRIP C To ARC GEN TRIP To ZG TRIP COMMAND1 A TRIP COMMAND1 B TRIP COMMAND1 C TRIP COMMAND CB2 B TRIP COMMAND CB2 A TRIP COMMAND CB2 C To Recording function Figure 2 26 3 Logic for general trip and CB trip signals Acquisition of fail safe signal provid...

Страница 427: ... of signals TRIP COMMMAND1 A CB trip in phase A TRIP COMMMAND1 B CB trip in phase B TRIP COMMMAND1 C CB trip in phase C CBs trip signals for 1 5CB system When the TRC function can operate in a single and a half breaker system 1 5CB the other TRIP COMMMAND2 A B C signals also should be connected with other BO circuits Table 2 26 8 summarizes the outputs signals of the TRC function in the 1 5CB syst...

Страница 428: ...n functions FC01 FC02 FC40 FC OPT AR 1 FC OPT ABR 1 FC OPT BCR 1 FC OPT CAR 1 FC _OPT ALARM FC OPT BR FC OPT CR 840000EBB7 OPT ALARM_ADD 880000EBB8 OPT P A_ADD 890000EBB9 OPT P B_ADD 8A0000EBBA OPT P C_ADD 8D0000EBBC OPT P BC_ADD 8E0000EBBD OPT P CA_ADD 8C0000EBBB OPT P AB_ADD 8000001B66 OPT AR 8100001B67 OPT BR 8200001B68 OPT CR 8400001B64 GEN ALARM To Recording function OPT BCR 8500001B6A OPT CA...

Страница 429: ...Line LL fault and others is provided externally the user can also record it as the alarm by the use of PLC connection points OPT P A_ADD and others If the additional relay being designed to operate for a ground fault is available use the alternative PLC connection point OPT P N_ADD ...

Страница 430: ...915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 409 2 26 4 Setting TRC Function ID 4A0001 Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Note 1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A TP MODE 1 Phase 3 Phase Per Phase Trip mode selection Per Phase ...

Страница 431: ...0001BBB OPT P AB_ADD Additional operated phase AB command 8800001BB8 OPT P A_ADD Additional operated phase A command 8D00001BBC OPT P BC_ADD Additional operated phase BC command 8900001BB9 OPT P B_ADD Additional operated phase B command 8E00001BBD OPT P CA_ADD Additional operated phase CA command 8A00001BBA OPT P C_ADD Additional operated phase C command 8000001BBE OPT P N_ADD Additional operated ...

Страница 432: ...ed phase A command 8D0000EBBC OPT P BC_ADD Additional operated phase BC command 890000EBB9 OPT P B_ADD Additional operated phase B command 8E0000EBBD OPT P CA_ADD Additional operated phase CA command 8A0000EBBA OPT P C_ADD Additional operated phase C command 800000EBBE OPT P N_ADD Additional operated phase N command 800000EBB0 TPMODE_3PH 3 phases trip permissive command 800000EBB3 TRIP A_ADD Addit...

Страница 433: ...COMMON function is operated as the common function Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ordering number and check the order number for the G T position whilst referri...

Страница 434: ... set the rule for the decision When the N O signal is generated but the N C signal is not generated set NO for the scheme switch CB1 Contact so that the PROT_COMMON function can decide the CB state using only the N O Conversely the decision should be made with only the N C NC is set for this scheme switch When both N O and the N C used set Both for the scheme switch CB1 Contact Note When the IED o...

Страница 435: ...CB decision logic Figure 2 27 1 shows the decision logic of the PROT_COMMON and outputs the decision state of the CB CB A_CLOSE CB B_CLOSE and others For the operation the user should inject signals of CB states for the following PLC connection points CB1 A NO CONT CB1 A NC CONT and others Note that a common point is ready for the CB designed to three phase tripping CB1 NO CONT and CB1 NC CONT ...

Страница 436: ...CB2_ALLPH_OPEN 1 1 1 0 00 to 0 10s t 0 8900001B91 1 8800001B90 CB_ANYPH_CLOSE CB_LOSS_PHASE 8400001B8C 8500001B8D 8600001B8E 8700001B8F CB System 2CB 1CB CB2 CONTACT BOTH CB SYSTEM 1CB CB SYSTEM 2CB TCBLOSPH CB SV On 0 100S t 0 8000001BB0 8000001B87 1 1 1 1 1 1 8400001BB3 8400001B8A 8500001BB4 8500001B8B 8600001BB5 8600001B8C TCBSV 1 t 0 t 0 CB1 FAIL 8300001B96 CB1 C_FAIL CB1 B_FAIL 8100001B94 CB1...

Страница 437: ... required The supervision period has to be set between 0 to 100 seconds for the setting TDSSV iii Logic Figure 2 27 2 shows the logic used to determine DS status and generates the output signal of the DS state DS_CLOSE or DS_OPEN The supervision scheme logic to supervise the status of the DS auxiliary switch contacts This scheme logic is applied when BOTH is set for the scheme switch DS Contact Fo...

Страница 438: ...scheme switch DLDbyCB for the decision 2 84 3 2 iii Detection time The examining period for DLD detection is required to set using the setting TDSSV the value of the detection time can be set between 0 to 100 seconds 2 84 3 3 iv Dead line detection logic Figure 2 27 3 shows the scheme logic for the detection of an under voltage condition It is also used to determine whether the line is dead or not...

Страница 439: ...uation 2 27 1 𝐼𝑀 𝐼𝑁 𝐼𝑠 2 27 1 where a criteria for the decision is given by the pick up threshold value Is The pick up threshold is defined using setting OCD which is from 0 05 A to 0 20 A at 1 A rating At 5 A rating 0 25 A to 1 00 A is applied IM IN IS Figure 2 27 4 Current change detection ii OCD logic Figure 2 27 5 shows the OCD logic and its output signals 8000001B66 OCD A B C 8100001B67 82000...

Страница 440: ...xxxxxx1 XXXX_XXXX1 xxxxxxxx2 XXXX_XXXX2 xxxxxxxx3 XXXX_XXXX3 PLC logic 1 made by the user 8200001C65 S3 UserLogicSW2 USR_LG2_S1 8100001C64 S2 8000001C63 S1 USR_LG2_S2 USR_LG2_S3 xxxxxxxx1 XXXX_XXXX1 xxxxxxxx2 XXXX_XXXX2 xxxxxxxx3 XXXX_XXXX3 PLC logic 2 made by the user 8200001C68 S3 UserLogicSW3 USR_LG3_S1 8100001C67 S2 8000001C66 S1 USR_LG3_S2 USR_LG3_S3 xxxxxxxx1 XXXX_XXXX1 xxxxxxxx2 XXXX_XXXX2 ...

Страница 441: ...ontact NO TCBLOSPH 0 00 0 10 s CB loss phase time 0 03 CB SV Off On CB contact supervisor enable Off TCBSV 0 100 s CB contact supervisor time 10 DS DS Contact NO NC Both Kind of injected DS contact NO DS SV Off On DS contact supervisor enable Off TDSSV 0 100 s DS contact supervisor time 60 DL DLDbyUV Off On Dead line detection by under voltage Off DLDbyCB Off On Dead line detection by CB open Off ...

Страница 442: ... CB1 C_NO_CONT Aux normally open contact in phase C of CB1 8600001B79 CB1 C_OPEN Main contact opening in phase C of CB1 8300001B76 CB1_ALLPH_CLOSE Main contact closed in three phases of CB1 8700001B7A CB1_ALLPH_OPEN Main contact opening in three phases of CB1 8300001B96 CB1_FAIL States of the CB1 not to be defined in three phase 8300001BBF CB1_NC_CONT Aux normally close contact in three phase of C...

Страница 443: ...e A 8900001B6B UVLG AND UVLG elements operated in three phase 8100001B61 UVLG B UVLG element operated in phase B 8200001B62 UVLG C UVLG element operated in phase C 8800001B6A UVLG OR Any UVLG element operated in three phases 8400001B63 UVLS AB UVLS elements operated in phase AB 8D00001B6D UVLS AND UVLS elements operated in three phase 8500001B64 UVLS BC UVLS elements operated in phase BC 8600001B6...

Страница 444: ...01BA7 CB1 B_OPCNT IEC61850 OpCnt of CB1 B in XCBR 3000001B9F CB1 B_POS IEC61580 Pos signal of CB1 B in XCBR of LN 2200001BA8 CB1 C_OPCNT IEC61850 OpCnt of CB1 C in XCBR 3000001BA0 CB1 C_POS IEC61580 Pos signal of CB1 C in XCBR of LN 2200001BA9 CB1_OPCNT IEC61850 OpCnt in three phase of CB1 in XCBR 3000001BA1 CB1_POS LN Pos signal of three phase of CB1 in XCBR 2200001BAA CB2 A_OPCNT IEC61850 OpCnt ...

Страница 445: ...oups that discriminate between the inrush current on cold load restoration and the fault current For instance the function of overcurrent protection OC with the CLP is immune during the inrush period The OC is discussed separately See chapter Relay application Overcurrent protection The CLP can have eight setting groups for cold load state in order that the CLP can follows the transition from one ...

Страница 446: ...heme moves into STATE_3 Cold road reset timer TCLP runs at STATE_3 If the CB re opens while the TCLP is running the scheme returns into STATE_2 If the TCLP is time out the scheme moves into STATE_0 where the load is considered as warm and the setting of normal operation is applied again At STATE_2 and STATE_3 the setting group of the CLP is applied The operation of the CLP is forbidden by placing ...

Страница 447: ...load protection 1 1 Change to STATE 2 Change to STATE 0 t 0 0 10000s 0 00 100 00s TCLP_DO TCLP_RESET t 0 Change to STATE 3 Change to STATE 1 1 1 8100001C21 8200001022 8000001C20 ON CLP EN ON CLP DOEN 8000001B60 8100001B61 8200001B62 8300001B63 CB_ALLPH_OPEN CB_ANYPH_CLOSE TCLP_EN 0 10000s t 0 CLP Test 1 CLP SG Group8 Group7 Group6 Group5 Group4 Group3 Group2 Group1 Change to Setting Group8 Change ...

Страница 448: ...pplied setting group at cold load mode Group1 TCLP EN 0 10000 s Cold load enable time 100 TCLP RESET 0 10000 s Cold load reset time 100 DOEN CLP DOEN Off On Cold load drop out enable Off OCCLP 0 02 3 00 0 10 15 00 A Cold load drop out current threshold 0 50 2 50 TCLP DO 0 00 100 00 s Cold load drop out time 0 00 Test tool Function ID 481001 Item Range Unit Contents Default Note 1A rating 5A rating...

Страница 449: ... operated phase A 8100001C21 OCCLP B OCCLP relay element operated phase B 8200001C22 OCCLP C OCCLP relay element operated phase C 8000001B60 CLP STATE0 The scheme is in STATE0 8100001B61 CLP STATE1 The scheme is in STATE1 8200001B62 CLP STATE2 The scheme is in STATE2 8300001B63 CLP STATE3 The scheme is in STATE3 3100001B64 CLP STATE2OR3 The scheme is in STATE2OR3 ...

Страница 450: ...rchy 436 Local control 450 Control level and control point 437 Mode control function MDCTRL 487 Control right 437 Select before operation mode SBO 433 Control scheme 430 PLC_BIT UNIT BOOL signals 442 Counter function for the general GCNT 467 Programmable logic control PLC 450 Direct operation mode DIR 434 Remote control 450 Double command blocking DCB 440 ...

Страница 451: ...waiting and receiving stages loop around at the receipt of every command Failed Failed Do nothing Failed Wait for a command Waiting stage Selection stage Success Receiving select command Select logic Wait for next command Success Receiving cancel command Cancel logic Cancel of Select command Success Receiving operate command Operate logic Operation completed Figure 3 1 1 Stages in control function...

Страница 452: ...ogic Remote OFF control Select logic Local On control Select logic Local OFF control Select logic PLC On control Select logic PLC OFF control F S When On is issued from the remote end Select logic Remote On control When Off is issued from the remote end When On is issued from the local end When Off is issued from the local end When Off is issued by the PLC function When On is issued by the PLC fun...

Страница 453: ...e for receipt of a new select command Failed Wait for a command Release of select command Return to Wait for a command Receiving Operate command Operate logic Remote On control Operate logic Remote OFF control Operate logic Local On control Operate logic Local OFF control Operate logic PLC On control Operate logic PLC OFF control Failed Success F S Receiving Select command Select logic Remote OFF ...

Страница 454: ...exemplifies the exchange of commands and responses the server receives a response answer 1 from the IED with regard to a SBOw command Then provided that the response answer 1 received from the IED is satisfied the server can send an Oper request to the IED to control the device If the target device completes the operation successfully the server will receive an operation result Figure 3 2 1 shows ...

Страница 455: ...Figure 3 2 3 illustrates the server sending the Oper request to the IED the server receives a response answer 1 from the IED The result is notified when the operation of the target device is complete The result includes status information it informs whether the target device has operated normally or not Note that the control start of the target device is initiated regardless of the state of the ta...

Страница 456: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 435 SAS Server IED Control function Target device Control Operation Answer 1 Command Response Process Figure 3 2 4 Direct control with normal security ...

Страница 457: ... Either control command of three control points is permitted so that the other commands will be forbidden in the system On this account no collision of control points exists within the system Network level Control point in RCC Communication OWS EWS Station level Selector switch 43R Bay level Control right Local L Remote R Selector switch 43BCU RCC EWS OWS Switchgear and others Control point in OWS...

Страница 458: ...ternatively suppose that the position Remote R is selected at the 43BCU switch In this case the issuing of the control command from the LCD is not possible 3 3 3 Programming of control right distributions Figure 3 3 2 illustrates that the PLC function provides the means to distribute the control right for the control functions The part 1 and 2 logics are programmed so that the control right signal...

Страница 459: ...erate condition logic To SPOS01 To other control functions 1 Checking the bay level 2 Distribution of the control right DOUT_BOOL FID DTYPE DID ST DI DPSY01IN_TMP_28 511001 820201ED50 DPSY01_CTRL_RIGHT Select condition logic Operate condition logic To DPSY01 DOUT_BOOL FID DTYPE DID ST DI DPSY02IN_TMP_28 511001 820202ED50 DPSY02_CTRL_RIGHT Select condition logic Operate condition logic To DPSY02 DO...

Страница 460: ...ementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ordering number and check the order number for the G T position whilst referring to the comparison table below For more information see Append...

Страница 461: ...ck SPOS01 function Reception of DCB Output of StSeld SPOS02 function SPOS01_STD_RPT SPOS03 function SPOS02_STD_RPT SPOS03_STD_RPT SPOS20_STD_RPT SPOS20 function DPOS01 function Reception of DCB Output of StSeld DPOS01_STD_RPT DPOS72_STD_RPT DPOS72 function 1 CMNCTRL1 function DCB SND OR 510001 0008001F42 To 61850 communication SPOS function DPOS function DPSY function TPOS function SOFTSW function...

Страница 462: ... network constructed for the SAS IED 1 IED 2 2 1 2 IED 3 2 IED 10 stVal message CB1 CB2 CB3 CB10 Figure 3 4 2 Sending and reception of stVal message Figure 3 4 3 demonstrates how the GOOSE publish destination is set with regard to the DCB message The user is required to set the destination for each respective IED by selecting the signal DCB SND OR corresponding to the GOOSE publish this must be pe...

Страница 463: ...is not ready to be controlled The unready condition might be due to the target device already being in operation e g CB tripping or a failure of the device may have occurred thus the IED has to drop the select command If this occurs the IED is required to send a message stating the reason to the SAS Table 3 4 2 lists the messages generated in the CMNCTRL1 function describing the failure Table 3 4 ...

Страница 464: ...t device and its control execution is made the selection will be canceled automatically after the setting time EXEWAIT if the control result is not received at the IED from the target device The setting time ranges from 30 to 300sec in 1 sec steps 5 Counter limit The maximum value of the counters can be set between 9 and 2 147 483 647 using CNTVALMAX The default setting is 999 999 6 Quality signal...

Страница 465: ...he same direction Off CNTRV 0 1 Next value of the counter CNTVALMAX level 0 TSC 30 300 Selection cancel time out timer 30 EXEWAIT 30 300 Waiting execute operation time out timer 30 CNTVALMAX 9 2147483647 Upper limit level of the counter 999999 QBLK Off On Behavior of quality for DCB Off TRV BLK Off On To block non selectable behavior on TRAVELLING Off ...

Страница 466: ...ING_PLC travelling signal for PLC PLC monitoring point CMNCTRL Function ID 5A0001 Element ID Name Description 0008001F45 AUTO SEL LOCK OR SEL Lock OR for AUTOSEQ 0008001F43 CNT CTRL OR CNT CTRL OR for Event Message 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR DCB RCV OR for SEL Lock 0008001F42 DCB SND OR DCB SND OR for GOOSE 8008001FB7 LAN_CONN_FAIL 0008001F44 OPE_TIME RST OR Operation Time RST OR for Event Message 0008...

Страница 467: ...ion 1 800001EF40 PLC_BIT_0002 PLC event bit information 2 800002EF40 PLC_BIT_0003 PLC event bit information 3 800003EF40 PLC_BIT_0004 PLC event bit information 4 800004EF40 PLC_BIT_0005 PLC event bit information 5 800005EF40 PLC_BIT_0006 PLC event bit information 6 800006EF40 PLC_BIT_0007 PLC event bit information 7 800007EF40 PLC_BIT_0008 PLC event bit information 8 800008EF40 PLC_BIT_0009 PLC ev...

Страница 468: ...C_UINT_9 PLC event unit information 9 310009EF41 PLC_UINT_10 PLC event unit information 10 310010EF41 PLC_UINT_11 PLC event unit information 11 310011EF41 PLC_UINT_12 PLC event unit information 12 310012EF41 PLC_UINT_13 PLC event unit information 13 310013EF41 PLC_UINT_14 PLC event unit information 14 310014EF41 PLC_UINT_15 PLC event unit information 15 310015EF41 PLC_UINT_16 PLC event uint32 info...

Страница 469: ...t bit output 1 8000011F40 PLC_O_BIT_002 PLC event bit output 2 8000021F40 PLC_O_BIT_003 PLC event bit output 3 8000031F40 PLC_O_BIT_004 PLC event bit output 4 8000041F40 PLC_O_BIT_005 PLC event bit output 5 8000051F40 PLC_O_BIT_006 PLC event bit output 6 8000061F40 PLC_O_BIT_007 PLC event bit output 7 8000071F40 PLC_O_BIT_008 PLC event bit output 8 8000081F40 PLC_O_BIT_009 PLC event bit output 9 8...

Страница 470: ...logic by PLC LRSW01_LR_ST 530001 3109001001 1 1 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01 530001 800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02 530001 800901EDE1 LRSW01_CH_LR_LCD From KEYINPUT function L R CHG 240001 31000A1735 If the user does not touch the operation function keys on the front panel within 35 min in the local control the IED will be changed for the remote control unconditionally Figure 3 5 1 LOCRMT logic Note The implement...

Страница 471: ...ters in the communication protocol Note that the parameters vary depending upon the respective protocol used such as IEC61850 and others For IEC61850 Table 3 5 2 shows the parameters defined the rule for control direction can be found in ctlVal the command publisher is recognized using the parameter origin For more information about the parameters see Appendix IEC61850 MICS PICS PIXIT and TICS Tab...

Страница 472: ...ns that the user cannot change the state of the signal Table 3 5 3 PLC connection point Input point for LOCRMT Signal Number Signal Name Description M O 240001 31000A1735 L R CHG L R key push N A 530001 800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01 Disable condition by PLC O 530001 800901EDE1 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02 User configurable condition by PLC O Table 3 5 4 Mapping points for LOCRMT Signal Number Signal Name Descri...

Страница 473: ...t ID Name Description 3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST S43BCU state 3009011001 LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT S43BCU state for SAS Connection points in PLC logic LOCRMT_SW Function ID 530001 Element ID Name Description 800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01 PLC signal 1 PLC use 800901EDE1 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02 PLC signal 2 change mode LOCAL or REMOTE ...

Страница 474: ...te For the operation see Chapter User interface Outline Note that pressing the CLEAR key causes the Reset of the LEDs 2Note For more information see Chapter Engineering tool Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has bee...

Страница 475: ... not performed correctly We will discuss how to map the input points for the IEC61850 communication in section 3 6 5 LEDR function Function ID 528001 LEDR01_NSD_CSF 528001 8307011F41 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Command Reset Either SBO mode or DIR mode e g ctlmodel in IEC61850 Failed 528001 7007016D08 Input Output Selection logic in LEDR 0 2s 0 t 0 3s 0 t Automatic sequence control function AQEQ in progres...

Страница 476: ...Command blocking 1 S4301 defines Blocked Double Command Blocking detected 2 Other devices traveling detected 3 DCB RCV OR Traveling OR ASEQ_MULTI_SEL LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT 528001 820701ED50 SERI_ERR 1 Unmatched condition detected 4 Figure 3 6 3 Select condition logic in LEDR 6 1Note command blocking disables any operation except its own the command blocking is initiated by the status of S4301 in a sof...

Страница 477: ...the input point of the LEDR function see Table 3 6 2 Table 3 6 2 Input signals for condition logic Signal Number Signal Name Description M O 522001 000A011001 S4301_STATE Command Blocking status Off Blocked N A 5A0001 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR Double Command Blocking DCB is in progress N A 5A0001 0008001F40 Traveling OR Travelling events are detected N A 5A0101 3100001F43 SERI_ERR Serious Error detect...

Страница 478: ... logic Command Reset from the remote end Select logic Wait for a next command Figure 3 6 4 Outline of cancel command from the remote end ii Input signal required mapping Figure 3 6 6 depicts the cancel logic when a Cancel command Remote Cancel signal is applied to the LEDR function The input point LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ is the same the same as that for the signal as shown in Figure 3 6 2 LEDR function...

Страница 479: ...put signal Figure 3 6 7 illustrates the operate logic when an Operation command reset signal is applied to the LEDR function The input point LEDR_CONTROL_REQ is used for the reception of the Operation command reset signal Pressing CLEAR key or the operation on GR TIEMS will reset LEDs LEDR function Function ID 528001 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Command Operating reset 528001 7007016D08 From KEYINPUT Input ...

Страница 480: ...301 in a software controller SOFTSW The IEC 61850 standard defines the command blocking function as CmdBlk For more information on S4301 see Chapter Control and monitoring application Software switch control function See the signal S4301_STATE of Table 3 6 2 2Note Double Command Blocking DCB is an operation philosophy in the common control function CMNCTRL It can be used to protect the substation ...

Страница 481: ..._CMD with the LED logic Note For more information on LED logics see Chapter Technical description Human machine interface LED indicators i Settings using GR TIEMS Figure 3 6 9 shows how to connect the reset signal LED_RST_CMD for the LED 03 logic The user can assign a reset signal for the respective LED logics by the drag and drop operation The user should also select Latch for the behavior from t...

Страница 482: ...tep2 Mapping output data Step3 Mapping input data i Editing Logical Node The user will need to create a logical node LN for the LEDR function Figure 3 6 10 exemplifies the editing of a LN the LN logical node zero LLN0 is chosen for the LERD function Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode should be chosen in the editing for the LN SBO defined in LN Figure 3 6 10 Defining LEDRs object in LLN0 logic nod...

Страница 483: ...gic node saved as LLN0 In the DIR mode the following three items should be selected using GR TIEMS Oper origin ctlmodel choice DOes or DOns Figure 3 6 12 LN editing for DIR mode for example ii Mapping output data The user should group the LEDR signals with regard to GOOSE and Report the user should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR TIEMS Figure 3 6 13 illustrates how to map a signal for...

Страница 484: ... LEDRs stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5280010007011001 LEDR01_STSELD Note Status ST is defined in the function constraint FC of the IEC 61850 Figure 3 6 13 orCat attribute mapped for LEDRs object of LLN0 iii Mapping input data The LEDR function can receive three commands select operate and cancel Thus the user should map the input point LED01_CONTROL_REQ to the IEC61850 communication Table 3 6 6 shows the inpu...

Страница 485: ...80017007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Ctrl LLN0 LEDRs Oper ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl LLN0 LEDRs Oper T Timestamp CO Ctrl LLN0 LEDRs Oper Test BOOLEAN CO Ctrl LLN0 LEDRs Oper Check Check CO Ctrl LLN0 LEDRs Oper origin orCat orCategory CO Ctrl LLN0 LEDRs Oper origin orIdent Octet64 CO Ctrl LLN0 LEDRs ctlModel ctlModel CF Ctrl LLN0 LEDRs sboClass sboClass CF Drag and drop Figure 3 6 14 Input point mapped for ...

Страница 486: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 465 3 6 6 Setting Reset Control Function ID 528001 Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Note LEDDR1 EN Off On LEDR01 Reset Control Enable Off ...

Страница 487: ...r MCTLEDR_SC001 8607011F46 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG1 Signal before MCTLEDR_SC001 8307011F41 LEDR01_NSD_CSF Signal after KC_LEDR_SA001 8607011F45 LEDR01_TMP3 Signal after KC_LEDR_SC001 8007011F42 LEDR01_FSE_RCV Signal before LC_LEDR_SA002 8B07011F44 LEDR01_CTR_SGU Signal before KC_LEDR_SC001 8207011F40 LEDR01_TMP1 Signal before KC_LEDR_SA001 8707011F48 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG2 Signal before MCTLEDR_SC002 8F07...

Страница 488: ...ommands Status signals GCNT01 GCNT06 GCNT32 Inputs GCNT01_ CNT_ VAL Count objects GCNT functions Signals generated GCNT01_ PLC_ SGNL 540001 800E01EDE0 320E011D20 GCNT06_ PLC_ SGNL 540001 800E06EDE0 GCNT32_ PLC_ SGNL 540001 800E20EDE0 320E061D20 320E201D20 GCNT06_ CNT_ VAL GCNT32_ CNT_ VAL Figure 3 7 1 Reception of signals at GCNT functions Note The implementation of particular features is dependen...

Страница 489: ...ount timing is grouped into three as shown in Figure 3 7 2 a b and c When the user wishes to count the On Closed set On for the scheme switch GCNT01 CNTS conversely set Off for the scheme switch when the Off Open is to be counted Additionally OnOff is provided for counting the number of pulses If the GCNT01 function is not required set NA for the scheme switch a On Closed signals Counter 1 2 n On ...

Страница 490: ...er Max set by GCNT01 CNTMAX Initial value set by GCNT01 CNTRV Time Figure 3 7 3 Maximum value and initial value iv Setting for the report Dead band The counter value can be reported to the remote end the user can set the report timing using the setting GCNT01 SDB For example if the counter value is to be reported for every change the user should set 0 for the setting GCNT01 SDB When five 5 is set ...

Страница 491: ... Input point required mapping Figure 3 7 6 shows the select logic when a Select command Reset Remote Reset Control signal is applied to the GCNT01 function The logic has an input point GCNT01_CMM_REQ for the reception of the select command That is the input point must be mapped for IEC61850 communication The function will fail to operate if mapping is not performed correctly We will discuss how to...

Страница 492: ...ect Reset in GCNT01 Note A select condition signal is provided from the select condition logic For more information see Figure 3 7 7 Note An automatic sequence control ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control The GCNT01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it is in operation For more information on the ASEQ function see Chapter Control and monitoring applicatio...

Страница 493: ...except its own the command blocking is initiated by the status of S4301 in a software switch controller function SOFTSW The IEC 61850 standard defines Command Blocking as CmdBlk For more information on S4301 see Chapter Control and monitoring application Software switch control function Table 3 7 3 2Note Double Command Blocking DCB is an operation philosophy It can be used to protect the substatio...

Страница 494: ... Command Blocking DCB is in progress N A 5A0001 0008001F40 Traveling OR Travelling events are detected N A 5A0101 3100001F43 SERI_ERR Serious Error detected N A Table 3 7 4 PLC Connection point Input signals from the control hierarchy logic Signal Number Signal Name Description M O 540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 Control hierarchy for GCNT01 32 M Table 3 7 5 PLC Monitoring points Signal select c...

Страница 495: ... SAS 540001 000E201D91 GCNT32_TMP_01 GCNT32 count change selected signal stSeld for SAS iv Setting names Table 3 7 7 Settings of select logics for GCNT01 to GCNT32 Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value GCNTxx EN Activation of the GCNTxx function On Off On GCNTxx HMI Counter is used for the HMI operation in the GCNTxx function Off Off On ...

Страница 496: ... point required mapping Figure 3 7 9 depicts the cancel logic when a Cancel command Remote Cancel signal is applied to the GCNT01 function The input point GCNT01_CMM_REQ is the same as that for the signal Select command Reset Remote Reset Control Output signal to BO The GCNT01 function can issue a Success to cancel signal at the monitoring point GCNT01_CC_SSCN when the GCNT01 function has determin...

Страница 497: ...onitoring points Output signal for cancel logic Signal Number Signal Name Description 540001 840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal 540001 840E021E95 GCNT02_CC_SSCN GCNT02 cancel success signal 540001 840E031E95 GCNT03_CC_SSCN GCNT03 cancel success signal 540001 840E201E95 GCNT32_CC_SSCN GCNT32 cancel success signal ...

Страница 498: ...erate command Reset Remote Reset Control signal is applied to the GCNT01 function The input point GCNT01_CMM_REQ is used for the reception of the Operate command Reset Remote Reset Control Output signal to BO The GCNT01 function in Figure 3 7 11 can provide a signal at the point GCNT01_OK_CSC when the GCNT01 function determines that the signal Remote Reset Control is true GCNT01 function Function ...

Страница 499: ...ed Operate logic Signal output Figure 3 7 12 Outline of Operate command Reset New counter value Figure 3 7 13 shows that the user can set a new value for the counter using the statics sub menu The new value is applied into Statics counter point in Figure 3 7 11 Counter 10 48 1 8 COUNT1 No Assign 0 COUNT2 No Assign 0 COUNT3 No Assign 0 Figure 3 7 13 Counter menu in the statics sub menu Note For the...

Страница 500: ...ERI_ERR 1 Unmatched condition detected 4 Serious error detection From SOTFSW 1 S4301_STATE Command blocking 1 S4301 defines Blocked DPOS01 EN On Figure 3 7 14 Operate condition logic for GCNT01 1 5Note The signals and settings in Figure 3 7 14 are same as the signals shown in Figure 3 7 7 iv Signal names and number Table 3 7 9 PLC monitoring points Output signal for BIO Signal Number Signal Name D...

Страница 501: ...Node Step2 Mapping output data Step3 Mapping input data i Editing Logical Node The user will need to create a logical node LN for the GCNT01 function Figure 3 7 15 exemplifies the editing of a LN the LN Integer Status controller ISCSO is chosen for the GCNT01 function After the user has defined an object ISCSO the GCNT01 logical node can be saved with the name GIGO plus LN Instance Create a defini...

Страница 502: ...Origin stSeld sboClass choice operate once ctlmodel choice SBOes or SBOns sboClass can be found by scrolling down Figure 3 7 16 LN editing screen for SBO mode for example Defining DIR mode Figure 3 7 17 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as save as GIGO3302 in the DIR mode the following three items should be selected using GR TIEMS Oper Origin ctlmodel choice SBOes or SBOns Figure 3 7 17 LN e...

Страница 503: ...stVal INT32 ST 540001320e011D20 GCNT01_CNT_VAL Ctrl GGIO3302 ISCSO q Quality ST 3010013110041005 Qual_Val Ctrl GGIO3302 ISCSO t Timestamp ST 2003019010001006 SYS_TIME Ctrl GGIO3302 ISCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 540001000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01 Note Status ST is defined in the function constraint FC of the IEC 61850 Drag and drop Figure 3 7 18 orCat attribute mapped into ISCSO object of GIGO3302 iii Mappin...

Страница 504: ...T01_CMM_REQ Ctrl GGIO3302 ISCSO Oper ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl GGIO3302 ISCSO Oper T Timestamp CO Ctrl GGIO3302 ISCSO Oper Test BOOLEAN CO Ctrl GGIO3302 ISCSO Oper Check Check CO Ctrl GGIO3302 ISCSO Oper origin orCat orCategory CO Ctrl GGIO3302 ISCSO Oper origin orIdent Octet64 CO Ctrl GGIO3302 ISCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF Ctrl GGIO3302 ISCSO sboClass sboClass CF Drag and drop Check Input Figure 3 7 19 I...

Страница 505: ...ff Condition to count at GCNT03 NA GCNT03 SDB 0 999 Value about Sending Dead Band at Counter03 0 GCNT03 CNTRV 0 1 Set number when the counter is rolled up 0 GCNT03 CNTMAX 9 2147483647 Largest number for counting 999999 GCNT03 DEVNAME Preferred name Name of Counter03 Count3 Not Assigned GCNT03 HMI Off On Display switch of Counter03 Off Counter 31 GCNT31 CNTS NA On Off OnOff Condition to count at GC...

Страница 506: ... fail condition signal 820E011E84 GCNT01_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT01 execute command OK condition signal 8A0E011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 selected condition signal 8B0E011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select fail condition signal 000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01 GCNT01 count change selected signal stSeld for SAS Connection points in PLC logics in GCNT01 GCNT Function ID 540001 Element ID Name Description 800E00ED5A G...

Страница 507: ...at the fifth digit from the ID i e 1 Step 3 Choose a new device number i e pick the number 2 for the 2nd device Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth digit with the new device number i e get new ID 890E021EA2 of GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN The ID is expressed in hexadecimal notation Thus the user must change the device number from decimal notation to hexadecimal notation ...

Страница 508: ...n of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ordering number and check the order number for the G T position whilst referring to the comparison table below For more information see Appendix Orderi...

Страница 509: ...ceived at the communication interface Note that control operations from a SAS is only taken account Table 3 8 2 Values of mode and behavior in IEC 61850 Value Mode Definition in IEC 61850 1 On The application represented by the LN works All communication services work and get updated values 3 Test The application represented by the LN works All communication services work and get updated values Da...

Страница 510: ...8 1exemplifies LN editing the LN LLNO is chosen for the MDCTRL01 for IEC61850 communication After the user defining an object MOD the MDCTRL01 logical node can be saved with the name LLNO Make a definition of the object MOD in MDCTRL01 logical node Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the LN editing Figure 3 8 1 Defining MOD object in LLNO logic node Defining SBO mode Figure 3 8 2 ...

Страница 511: ...R mode the following three items should be selected using the GR TIEMS Oper origin ctlmodel choice DOes or DOns Figure 3 8 3 LN editing screen for DIR mode for example ii Mapping output data The user should group the MDCTRL01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT the user should map them for the IEC 61850 communication using GR TIEMS Table 3 8 4 shows the required mapping signals in MDCTRL01 fun...

Страница 512: ...1_SLD_RPT Drag and drop Figure 3 8 4 orCat attribute mapped into MOD object of LLNO iii Mapping input data The MDCTRL01 function can receive three commands select operate and cancel Thus the user should map the input point MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ Table 3 8 5 shows the input point MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ and the Object reference System LLN0 Mod the user should map the Object reference having attributes C...

Страница 513: ...System LLN0 Mod Oper T Timestamp CO System LLN0 Mod Oper Test BOOLEAN CO System LLN0 Mod Oper Check Check CO System LLN0 Mod Oper origin orCat orCategory CO System LLN0 Mod Oper origin orIdent Octet64 CO System LLN0 Mod Cancel ctlVal Mod CO System LLN0 Mod Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO System LLN0 Mod Cancel T Timestamp CO System LLN0 Mod Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO System LLN0 Mod Cancel origin orCat orCateg...

Страница 514: ... Note MDCTRL EN Off On Switch for Mode change operation Off MDCTRL SELRST 10 100 s Selection cancel time out timer 30 MDCTRL EXERST 10 100 s Waiting execute operation time out timer 30 Note The user can set an item on Test sub menu see Chapter Communication and maintenance Test operations or User interface Test sub menu ...

Страница 515: ...DCTRL01 cancel command fail factor condition signal 8313011E9D MODE01_CTR_SGN MDCTRL01 control logic stage unselected 8B13011EA2 MODE01_CTR_SGU MDCTRL01 control logic stage under selection 8113011E9A MODE01_ECF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 execute command fail factor signalcheck 8013011E93 MODE01_EX_CMP MDCTRL01 execute complete signal 8F13011F58 MODE01_EX_CMP_TMO MDCTRL01 timeout after execute completion 891...

Страница 516: ...ed condition signal 04 8E13011F57 MODE01_SLD_TMO MDCTRL01 time out after selected 8113011E7B MODE01_SLF_CS MDCTRL01 select fail condition signal 8713011E98 MODE01_SLF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal 8613011F62 MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03 8713011F63 MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG04 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 04 8813011F6B MODE01_SLF_...

Страница 517: ...ng time reset OPTIM 647 Double pos control with SYNDIF DPSY 548 Single position control SPOS 497 Double position control DPOS 718 Switch control by software SOFTSW 612 Event detection using BIs GENBI 864 Synch check for difference SYNDIF 674 Interlock with software ILK 701 Three position control TPOS 784 Total time measurement TOTALTIM 661 ...

Страница 518: ...nctions are identical to the SPOS01 function Note Binary IO module has binary input circuits BIs and binary output circuits BOs the user makes the connection between the SPOS01 function and the binary IO module using a signal number is made of a function ID and an Element ID The signal name and number of the SPOS01 function are listed later Tips If the user wishes to apply the SPOS function quickl...

Страница 519: ...a command Operate logic Operate command Cancel logic Operate logic Select command Off from remote end Select command On from local end Select command Off from local end Select command On by the PLC function Select command Off by the PLC function Figure 4 1 1 Outline of select command On Input point required mapping Figure 4 1 2 shows the select logic when a Select command ON Remote ON Control sign...

Страница 520: ...n criteria is defined by the ILK function itself i e the user cannot set the condition Note A select condition signal is provided from the select condition scheme For more information see Figure 4 1 13 Note An Automatic sequence control ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control The SPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function being in the operation For more informatio...

Страница 521: ...nt DEV01_CONTROL_REQ SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF 510001_8A01011DC4 SPOS01 function Function ID 510001 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Command Remote Off Control ILK condition Off passed Either SBO mode or DIR mode e g ctlmodel in IEC61850 In SBO operate In DIR operate Selection Failed 510001_7001016D08 SPOS01 Off To BO connection Input Output Selection logic in SPOS01 0 1s 0 t 0 6s 0 t Selection success Automatic sequenc...

Страница 522: ...ection logic Selection logics Cancel logic Wait for a next command Cancel command Wait for a command Operate logic Operate command Cancel logic Operate logic Select command Off from remote end Select command Off from front panel Select command On by the PLC Select command Off by the PLC Select command On from remote end Figure 4 1 5 Outline of selection command On Input signal generated at the loc...

Страница 523: ...K function is possible using Interlock bypassing Interlock bypassing is indicated by the status ICB in a software switch controller SOFTSW Note A select condition signal is provided from the select condition scheme For more information see Figure 4 1 13 Note An Automatic sequence control ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control The SPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ...

Страница 524: ...n The signal is provided when the user presses a OFF key on the IED front panel the user is not required to map the signal from IEC61850 communication Input Output Select logic in SPOS01 Command Local Off Control 1 SPOS01 CTRAHMI SBO SPOS01 function Function ID 510001 SBO DIR 1 0 1s 0 0 6s 0 SPOS01 Off ILK condition Off passed ILK bypassing Interlock Bypass ICB_STATE Either SBO mode or DIR mode e ...

Страница 525: ...ure 4 1 9 outlines the reception of the select command On by the PLC function PLC logic programmed by the user Select command On by PLC function Signal output Select decision Success Failed Selection logic Selection logics Cancel logic Wait for a next command Cancel command Wait for a command Operate logic Operate command Cancel logic Operate logic Select command Off from remote end Select command...

Страница 526: ...C 2 connection point Operate command with ILK condition For DIR operation For DIR operation SPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF 510001_8601011DC6 Selection Failed To BO connection Selection success To Wait for a command To Wait for a next command Figure 4 1 10 Select On using the PLC function in SPOS01 Note The software interlocking ILK function can provide the operation criteria for On The ILK function is discusse...

Страница 527: ...from remote end Select command Off from front panel Select command On from front panel Select command On by the PLC function Figure 4 1 11 Outline of select command Off Input signal from the PLC function Figure 4 1 12 shows the select logic when a Select command Off PLC OFF Control signal is generated by the PLC function There are two input points for the reception of this signal like in the signa...

Страница 528: ...user cannot set the condition Note To identify the input and output points of the other SPOS logic see Table 4 1 3 for the input PLC 1 and PLC 2 and Table 4 1 9 for the outputs Output signal to BO The SPOS01 function in Figure 4 1 12 can issue a Select success signal at the output point SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF 1 1Note The output point SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF is the same signal as shown in Figure 4 1 4 vii Sel...

Страница 529: ...N_TMP_31 510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_32 510001 810101EE62 SPOS01IN_TMP_28 510001 820101ED50 SERI_ERR Command ON control received Command OFF control received received SPOS01_STATE 1 1 Unmatched condition detected 5 Event suppression detected 6 SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP BI board connection error detected 7 SPOS01_F_BI_ERR 510001 810101F59 510001 820101F5A 510001 0001011001 From CMNCTRL serious error dete...

Страница 530: ...also required to connect the logic condition with the select condition logic using the connection point SPOS01IN_TMP_28 For more information see chapter Control and monitoring application Control hierarchy see PLC 3 of Table 4 1 7 10Note To identify the input point of the other SPOS see Table 4 1 7 for PLC 1 and PLC 2 viii Signal name and number Note The user should note the following descriptions...

Страница 531: ...dition for Off control N A 570001 3101141DA0 SPOS020 Off SPOS20 interlock condition for Off control N A 570001 3101011DA2 SPOS01 On SPOS01 interlock condition for On control N A 570001 3101021DA2 SPOS02 On SPOS02 interlock condition for On control N A 570001 3101031DA2 SPOS03 On SPOS03 interlock condition for On control N A 570001 3101141DA2 SPOS20 On SPOS20 interlock condition for On control N A ...

Страница 532: ...001 8001021F54 SPOS02_SC_ST_ERR SPOS02 select command mode is invalid 510001 8001031F54 SPOS03_SC_ST_ERR SPOS03 select command mode is invalid 510001 8001141F54 SPOS20_SC_ST_ERR SPOS20 select command mode is invalid 510001 8101011F59 SPOS01_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected SPOS01 510001 8101021F59 SPOS02_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected SPOS02 510001 8101031F59 SPOS03_F_QLT_SPP Event suppr...

Страница 533: ... 03 The suffix xx can be represented from 01 to 20 Table 4 1 10 Setting of SBO control in SPOSxx Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value SPOSxx CTREN Activate control function in SPOSxx On Off On SPOSxx LGSLFFCT Logic selector for select condition in SPOSxx Fixedlogic Fixedlogic PLC SPOSxx CTRAHMI Activate local panel control in SPOSxx SBO DIR SBO ...

Страница 534: ...n by the PLC function Select command Off by the PLC function Wait for a next command Figure 4 1 14 Outline of cancel command from the remote end Input point required mapping Figure 4 1 15 depicts the cancel logic when a Cancel command Remote Cancel signal is applied to the SPOS01 function The input point DEV01_CONTROL_REQ is the same as that for the signal Select command On Remote On Control SPOS0...

Страница 535: ...rom the local end Input signal generated at the local end Figure 4 1 17 depicts the cancel logic when a Cancel command Local cancel signal is applied to the SPOS01 function The signal is generated when the Cancel key is pressed on the IED front panel the user is not required to take account of mapping When the logic receives the Local cancel signal the logic is able to output a result signal provi...

Страница 536: ...rements of the user it can be replaced with another logic using the connection point User Configurable condition 1 Connect the user customized logic with the SPOS01IN_TMP_46 2 Set scheme switch SPOS01 LGCNFFCT to PLC iv Signal name and number Note The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column M O in each table O indicates that the signal is provided for optional use M indicat...

Страница 537: ... SPOS02_CC_FS Cancel failed in SPOS02 510001 8701031E96 SPOS03_CC_FS Cancel failed in SPOS03 510001 8701141E96 SPOS20_CC_FS Cancel failed in SPOS20 v Setting name Note The xx within of SPOSxx represents the SPOS function number e g if SPOS03 is considered the xx is equal to 03 The numbers used for xx can be represented by 01 to 20 Table 4 1 13 Setting for Cancel in SPOSxx Setting Name Description ...

Страница 538: ...l Off control from front panel Off control from remote end On control by PLC function Off control by PLC function Wait for a next command Select logics Select command Off from remote end Select command On from remote end Select command Off from front panel Select command On from front panel Select command On by the PLC function Select command Off by the PLC function Figure 4 1 19 Outline of operat...

Страница 539: ...or ON Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic see Figure 4 1 29 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch SPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative Operate condition is required it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate condition logic The alternative Operate condition can be connected to the above logic using connec...

Страница 540: ... programmed logic is connected internally to the signal Operate completed hence this signal is now generated by the user programmed logic at connection point 2 user configurable condition That is set the scheme switch SPOS01 LGCFEXOT to PLC and use SPOS01IN_TMP_42 Output signal to BO The SPOS01 function in Figure 4 1 20 can issue an Operate signal at the output point SPOS01_OEX_BO when the SPOS01 ...

Страница 541: ...e Off Control signal is applied to the SPOS01 logic The input point DEV01_CONTROL_REQ is used for the reception of the Operate command Off Remote Off Control SPOS01 function Function ID 510001 Assign to BOs Operate Cmd with ILK condition SPOS01 PLSM Var Fix S R Operation Failed 0 t 1 0s 100 0s 0 1 50 0 s SPOS01 RST SPOS01 CPW Operation Cmd without ILK condition Operate condition SPOS01 LGCTRCON Fi...

Страница 542: ...gic is connected internally to the signal Operate completed Hence this signal is now generated by the user programmed logic at connection point 2 user configurable condition That is set the scheme switch SPOS01 LGCFEXOT to PLC and use SPOS01IN_TMP_42 Note The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control Note The user can set the type of the output signal When Var is set for s...

Страница 543: ...e SPOS01 function The signal is generated when Execution of On is keyed on the IED front panel SPOS1 function Function ID 510001 Assign to BOs Operate Cmd with ILK condition SPOS01 PLSM Var Fix Latch S R S R Operation Failed 0 1 50 0 s SPOS01 RST SPOS01 CPW Operation Cmd without ILK condition Operate condition SPOS01 LGCTRCON Fixedlogic Fixedlogic SPOS01 LGCFEXOT PLC 2 Command Local On Control ILK...

Страница 544: ...ignal ceases when the 43 switch is changed When Latch is set the output signal is kept issuing until the reception of Command Off Note To identify the input and output signal points of the other SPOS logics see Table 4 1 14 Table 4 1 15 Table 4 1 19 and Table 4 1 20 Note The Operate failed signal is issued when the state change is not detected until after reaching the time set by the SPOS01 RST No...

Страница 545: ...unction Operate command Off by the PLC function Wait for a next command Select stage Select command Off from the remote end Select command On from the remote end Select command Off from the local end Select command On from the local end Select command On by the PLC function Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command On from remote end Figure 4 1 25 Outline of operate command Off Input ...

Страница 546: ...set for scheme switch SPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative Operate condition is required it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operated condition logic The alternative Operate condition can be connected to the above logic using connection point 3 User configurable condition That is set the scheme switch SPOS01 LGCTRCON to PLC and use SPOS01IN_TMP_34...

Страница 547: ...med by the user On control by PLC function Do nothing Operate decision Success Failed Operate logic Signal output Figure 4 1 27 Outline of operate command for On Figure 4 1 27 outlines the reception of the operate command On with the PLC function it describes the operate logic when an Operate command On PLC On Control signal is generated by the PLC function There are two input points for reception...

Страница 548: ...signal Operate Command On PLC On Control That is if an inter lock check is required apply the signal at connection point PLC 3 i e DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK If on the other hand an interlock check is not required apply the signal at connection point PLC 4 i e DEV01_OP_COMMAND PLC 1 an PLC 2 shown in Table 4 1 3 should be treated as PLC 3 and PLC 4 here Note that the user should set PLC for scheme switch ...

Страница 549: ...gic SPOS01 LGEXFFCT To selection logic Control hierarchy e g 43RL PLC connection point 9 SPOS01 CTREN On Additional condition PLC 1 connection point SPOS01IN_TMP_31 510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_41 510001 810101EE66 SPOS01IN_TMP_28 510001 820101ED50 Command ON control received Command OFF control received received 1 1 SPOS01_STATE SPOS01 function Function ID 510001 Function Automatic sequence con...

Страница 550: ...ogic When the user sets off for scheme switch SCDEN operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation direction compared with the previous operation direction Alternatively if On is set for the scheme switch the logic is not blocked 9Note The user must program the PLC logic for Control hierarchy condition The user must connect the Control hierarchy condition to the se...

Страница 551: ...O 510001 800101EE61 SPOS01IN_TMP_31 SPOS01 additional failure condition PLC 1 O 510001 800102EE61 SPOS02IN_TMP_31 SPOS02 additional failure condition PLC 1 O 510001 800103EE61 SPOS03IN_TMP_31 SPOS03 additional failure condition PLC 1 O 510001 800114EE61 SPOS20IN_TMP_31 SPOS20 additional failure condition PLC 1 O 510001 810101EE66 SPOS01IN_TMP_41 SPOS01 user configurable operate condition PLC 2 O 5...

Страница 552: ...l signal by fixedlogic 510001 8601021E91 SPOS02_EX_FFL SPOS02 execute fail signal by fixedlogic 510001 8601031E91 SPOS03_EX_FFL SPOS03 execute fail signal by fixedlogic 510001 8601141E91 SPOS20_EX_FFL SPOS20 execute fail signal by fixedlogic ix Setting names Note The xx of SPOSxx represents the SPOS function number e g if the SPOS03 is considered the xx is equal to 03 The suffix xx can be represen...

Страница 553: ...heme switch SPOS01 NSOSGI On in order that the input signal should be decided in inversion Connection with Binary input circuit Suppose an input signal is provided on the first BI circuit at IO 1 slot In this case the user should set the input point 200B01 8001001110 for the setting SPOS01 NOPSG otherwise the SPOS01 function cannot run correctly Signals by Binary input circuits Output Signal acqui...

Страница 554: ...is because the function can count the iterative number of incoming signals Detection commences at Time A the setting SPOS NELD is provided so that the suppression commences at Time B The setting SPOS TELD is pertains to the operation of the detection function from Time A e g Time A to Time C The event suppression ceases when the iterative signals stop The user can adjust the point at which event s...

Страница 555: ...e Operate command On and the Operate command Off signal is issued at BO2 or BO3 BO2_SOURCE 200B01 310201E11D SPOS01_OEX_BO 510001_8201011DD3 Operate logic in SPOS01 PLC connection point in BO2 Operate logic for Operate command On 1 BO2_CPL Off On DRIVER BO2 Signal designated by setting Input signal 1 Input signal 2 Input signal 3 Input signal 4 Input signal 5 Input signal 6 Input signal 7 Input si...

Страница 556: ...s connected to the BO1 circuit for the issuing of the command the user can connect point BO1 RB with the contact health check function using the setting SPOS01 SLBORD Do not key the point SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG 510001_8501011F76 Selection logic in SPOS01 Signal connected by setting SPOS01 SLBORD BO1 RB 200B01_8002001113 BO1 circuit at IO_SLOT1 Contact health check logic in SPOS01 Result...

Страница 557: ...at the settings are physically matched with the BO contacts Table 4 1 22 Setting example for contact health check Example 1 Health check setting for Example 1 SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG is connected to BO1 at IO 1 200B01 8002001113 BO1 RB set for SPOS01 SLBORD OK SPOS01_OEX_BO_CSF is connected to BO2 at IO 1 200B01 8102011113 BO2 RB set for SPOS01 OEXBORD OK SPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF is connected to BO3 at IO 1 200...

Страница 558: ...signated with 200B01_8202021113 SW2 driven with BO2 at IO_SLOT1 SW3 driven with BO3 at IO_SLOT1 Remote Local end Plus SW 3 SW 2 SW 1 Minus 43SW On Command Off Command Select Command ON OFF Operate On command Operate Off command Figure 4 1 38 Contact health check setting and 43SW diagram for example 2 Setting for extra contact health check special setting example 3 Figure 4 1 39 shows an additional...

Страница 559: ...sion detected SPOS02 510001 8101031F59 SPOS03_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected SPOS03 510001 8101141F59 SPOS20_F_QLT_SPP Event suppression detected SPOS20 Table 4 1 26 PLC monitoring points Output of select signal in SPOSxx Signal Number Signal Name Description 510001 8501011F76 SPOS01_SL_BO_FLG Select command signal in SPOS01 510001 8501021F76 SPOS02_SL_BO_FLG Select command signal in SPOS02 ...

Страница 560: ...S01 20 On Off On SPOSxx NOPSG BI position for SPOS01 20 none BI signal SPOSxx SPPEN Activate event suppression for SPOS01 20 On Off On SPOS NELD Number of change to lock status 10 0 99 SPOS TELD Time to lock status sliding window 10 sec 1 99 sec SPOS TELR Time to unlock status sliding window 10 sec 1 99 sec Table 4 1 29 Settings for health check function in SPOSxx Setting Name Description Default ...

Страница 561: ...ll need to create a logical node LN for the SPOS01 function Figure 4 1 40 exemplifies the editing of a LN the LN General Input output GGIO is chosen for the SPOS01 function After the user has defined an object SPCSO the SPOS01 logical node can be available with the name GGIO plus LN Instance Create a definition of the object SPCSO in the SPOS01 logical node Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can ...

Страница 562: ...as GGIO1501 In the DIR mode the following three items should be selected using GR TIEMS Oper origin ctlmodel choice DOes or DOns Figure 4 1 42 LN editing screen for DIR mode for example ii Mapping output data The user should group the SPOS01 signals with regard to GOOSE and Report the user should map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR TIEMS Figure 4 1 43 illustrates how to map a signal it i...

Страница 563: ...001 9001011006 SPOS01_TIMESTAMP Ctrl GGIO1501 SPCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 510001 0001011D90 SPOS01_STD_RPT Note Status ST is defined in the function constraint FC of the IEC 61850 standard Drag and drop Figure 4 1 43 ocCat attribute mapped for SPCSO object of GGIO1501 iii Mapping input data The SPOS01 function can receive three commands select operate and cancel Thus the user should map the input poin...

Страница 564: ...trl GGIO1501 SPCSO Oper T Timestamp CO Ctrl GGIO1501 SPCSO Oper Test BOOLEAN CO Ctrl GGIO1501 SPCSO Oper Check Check CO Ctrl GGIO1501 SPCSO Oper origin orCat orCategory CO Ctrl GGIO1501 SPCSO Oper origin orIdent Octet64 CO Ctrl GGIO1501 SPCSO Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO Ctrl GGIO1501 SPCSO Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl GGIO1501 SPCSO Cancel T Timestamp CO Ctrl GGIO1501 SPCSO Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO Ctrl...

Страница 565: ...rection execute binary output read data DataID Not Assigned SPOS01 FEXBORD Preferred Signal off direction execute binary output read data DataID Not Assigned SPOS01 OFEXBORD Preferred Signal on off direction execute binary output read data DataID Not Assigned SPOS01 LGCTRCON FixedLogic PLC Change logic about control condition FixedLogic SPOS01 LGSLFFCT FixedLogic PLC Change logic about select fail...

Страница 566: ...ute command by PLC 8001011E76 SPOS01_SLD_CS SPOS01 selected condition signal 8001011E7D SPOS01_SLR_CS SPOS01 select release condition signal 8001011E7E SPOS01_FEC_OK_CSF SPOS01 off direction execute command OK condition signal by fixedlogic 8001011E7F SPOS01_OEC_OK_CSF SPOS01 on direction execute command OK condition signal by fixedlogic 8001011E81 SPOS01_FEC_OK_CS SPOS01 off direction execute com...

Страница 567: ...fail factor signal by fixedlogic 07 8901011DC0 SPOS01_NSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic 8901011F6C SPOS01_EX_CS01 SPOS01 execute condition signal 01 8901011F72 SPOS01_SLF_FCT_FLG08 SPOS01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 08 8A01011DC4 SPOS01_FSL_BO_CSF SPOS01 off direction select binary output condition signal by fixedlogic 8A01011F61 SPOS01_FSL_CS20 SPOS...

Страница 568: ...o improve readability Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the Element IDs and their names for the other devices Rule The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device hence the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices For example when the user wishes to find the SPOS01_SC_OWS point for the 2nd device use the description of SPOS01_SC_OWS...

Страница 569: ...e SYNDIF function see Chapter Control and monitoring application Synchronizing check for different network The BO circuits are used for issuing commands the BI circuits are used for receiving responses hence the user should set the BIO together with the DPSY function The DPSY function includes three logic groups 1 Selection logic 2 Cancel logic and 3 Operate logic Tips If the user wishes to apply ...

Страница 570: ...1 outlines the reception of the select command Closing from the remote end Signal reception IEC61850 Select command Closing from the remote end Signal output Select decision Success Failed Selection logic Select stage Cancel logic Wait for a next command Cancel command Wait for a command Operate logic Operate command Cancel logic Operate logic Select command Open from the remote end Select command...

Страница 571: ...ate In DIR operate Select condition Timer From SYNCHK SYNC01 SLD_VCS 560001 840B011F58 To Wait for a next command Figure 4 2 2 Select logic Closing from the remote end in DPSY01 Note The Software interlocking ILK function can provide the operation criteria for Closing The ILK function is discussed separately note that the operation criteria is defined by the ILK function itself i e the user cannot...

Страница 572: ...L_BO_FLG when the DPSY01 function determines that the Remote Closing Control signal received is true If the DPSY01 function determines that the Remote Closing Control signal is not true the DPSY01 function returns to the Wait for a command stage The user should note that the operation decision of the SYNDIF01 function is required for the DPSY01 function the operation decision is determined by the ...

Страница 573: ... command Remote Open Control signal DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG 511001 8A02011DC4 DPSY01 function Function ID 511001 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Command Remote Open Control ILK condition Open passed Either SBO mode or DIR mode e g ctlmodel in IEC61850 In SBO operate In DIR operate Select Failed 511001_7002016D08 DPSY01 Open To BO connection Input Output Selection logic in DPSY01 0 1s 0 t 0 6s 0 t Select success Autom...

Страница 574: ...nel Select command Closing from the local end Signal output Select decision Success Failed Select logic Select stage Cancel logic Wait for a next command Cancel command Wait for a command Operate logic Operate command Cancel logic Operate logic Select command Open from the remote end Select command Open from the local end Select command Closing by the PLC function Select command Open by the PLC fu...

Страница 575: ...passing is indicated by the status ICB in a software switch controller SOFTSW Note A select condition signal is provided from the select condition scheme For more information see Figure 4 2 13 Note An Automatic sequence control ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control The DPSY01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it is in operation For more information regard...

Страница 576: ... The signal is provided when the user presses a Selection for Open key on the IED front panel the user is not required to map the signal from IEC61850 communication Input Output Selection logic in DPSY01 Command Local Open Control 1 DPSY01 CTRAHMI SBO DPSY01 function Function ID 511001 SBO DIR 1 0 1s 0 0 6s 0 DPSY01 Open ILK condition Open passed ILK bypassing ICB_STATE Either SBO mode or DIR mode...

Страница 577: ...d Open from the remote end Select command Open by the PLC function Select command Closing from the remote end Select command Open from the local end Select command Closing from the local end Figure 4 2 9 Outline of select command Closing Input signal from the PLC function Figure 4 2 10 shows the select logic when a Select command Closing PLC Closing Control signal is generated by the PLC function ...

Страница 578: ...led To BO connection 0 1s 0 t 0 6s 0 t Select Closing To Wait for a command 0 0 to 5 0 s t 0 Timer From SYNCHK SYNC01 SLD_VCS 560001 840B011F58 To Wait for a next command Figure 4 2 10 Select Closing using the PLC function in DPSY01 Note To identify the input and output signals of the DPSY02 logic see Table 4 2 3 and Table 4 2 10 Note The Software interlocking ILK function can provide the operatio...

Страница 579: ...Select command Closing PLC Closing Control where four are available That is if interlock checking is required use the connection point PLC 1 e g DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK Alternatively if the interlock check is not required use the connection point PLC 2 e g DEV01_OP_COMMAND PLC 1 and the PLC 2 are shown in Table 4 2 4 DPSY01 function Function ID 511001 DPSY01_FSL_BO_CSF 511001_8A02011DC4 DEV01_OP_INTERL...

Страница 580: ...ce the original logic with alternative logic 2 The user can add additional logic to the original logic How to replace the original logic If the user wishes to replace the select condition logic completely the user can replace it using the PLC connection point User Configurable Condition 1 Connect the user customized logic using DPSY01IN_TMP_32 which is listed as PLC 2 in Table 4 2 8 2 Set the sche...

Страница 581: ...on logic for Closing Open in DPSY01 10 1Note Command Blocking disables any operation except its own the Command Blocking is initiated by the status of CBK in a software switch controller SOTFSW The IEC 61850 standard defines Command Blocking as CmdBlk For more information on CBK see Chapter Control and monitoring application Software switch controller See the signal S4301_STATE of Table 4 2 7 2Not...

Страница 582: ... user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used N A indicates that the user cannot change the state of the signal Table 4 2 3 PLC connection points Input points for Command Closing Signal Number Signal Name Description M O 5A0101 800527EF40 DEV01_CL_SYNC_INTER DPSY01 PLC Close control checking with interlock Sync PLC 1 O 5A0101 800551EF40 DEV02_CL_SYNC_INTER DPSY02 PLC...

Страница 583: ...rror detected N A Table 4 2 8 PLC connection points Input signals for select condition logic Signal Number Signal Name Description M O 511001 800531EF40 DPSY01IN_TMP_31 DPSY01 additional failure condition PLC 1 O 511001 800554EF40 DPSY02IN_TMP_31 DPSY02 additional failure condition PLC 1 O 511001 800532EF40 DPSY01IN_TMP_32 DPSY01 user configurable select condition PLC 2 O 511001 800555EF40 DPSY02I...

Страница 584: ... Activate control function Close Open Close DPSY01 LGSLFFCT Logic selector for select condition Fixedlogic Fixedlogic PLC DPSY01 CTRAHMI Activate local panel control SBO DIR SBO DPSY02 CTREN Activate control function Close Open Close DPSY02 LGSLFFCT Logic selector for select condition Fixedlogic Fixedlogic PLC DPSY02 CTRAHMI Activate local panel control SBO DIR SBO ...

Страница 585: ...mote end Select command Open from the local end Select command Closing from the local end Select command Closing by the PLC function Select command Open by the PLC function Wait for a next command Figure 4 2 14 Outline of cancel command from the remote end Input point required mapping Figure 4 2 15 depicts the cancel logic when a Cancel command Remote Cancel signal is applied to the DPSY01 functio...

Страница 586: ...en from the local end Selecting Closing from the local end Selecting Closing by the PLC function Selecting Open by the PLC function Cancel from the remote end Wait for a next command Figure 4 2 16 Outline of cancel command from the local end Input signal generated at the local end Figure 4 2 17 depicts the cancel logic when a Cancel command Local cancel signal is applied to the DPSY01 function The...

Страница 587: ...tus in the cancel command is not identical to the IED test status 2Note With the exception of the above cancel logic there is an operate condition logic within the DPSY01 function the operate condition logic will always checks conditions That is the user is only required to set either the operate condition or the cancel condition logic If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of t...

Страница 588: ...ame Description 511001 8602011E95 DPSY01_CC_SS DPSY01 cancel succeed 511001 8602021E95 DPSY02_CC_SS DPSY02 cancel succeed 511001 8702011E96 DPSY01_CC_FS DPSY01 cancel failed 511001 8702021E96 DPSY02_CC_FS DPSY02 cancel failed v Setting name Note The xx within DPSYxx represents the DPSY function number e g if DPSY01 is considered the xx is equal to 01 The numbers used for xx can be represented by e...

Страница 589: ...the local end Operate command Open from the remote end Operate command Closing by the PLC function Operate command Open by the PLC function Wait for a next command Select stage Select command Open from the remote end Select command Closing from the remote end Select command Open from the local end Select command Closing from the local end Select command Closing by the PLC function Select command O...

Страница 590: ... R Detection of state change in a device DPSY01_EX_CMP 511001 8002011E93 Figure 4 2 20 Operate Closing from the remote end in DPSY01 Note The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for Closing Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic see Figure 4 2 31 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch DPSY01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition is required ...

Страница 591: ...cts the reception of the operate command Open from the remote end Signal reception in IEC61850 Operate command Open from the remote end Do nothing Operation decision Success Failed Operate logic Wait for a command Signal output Operate command Closing l from the local end Operate command Open from the local end Operate command Closing from the remote end Operate command Closing by the PLC function...

Страница 592: ...e operate condition logic see Figure 4 2 31 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch DPSY01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition is required it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operated condition logic The alternative operate condition can be connected to the above logic using connection point 3 User configurable condition That is set the...

Страница 593: ...from the local end Operate command Closing from the remote end Operate command Closing by the PLC function Operate command Open by the PLC function Wait for a next command Select stage Select command Open from the remote end Select command Closing from the remote end Select command Open from the local end Select command Closing from the local end Select command Closing by the PLC function Select c...

Страница 594: ...nge in a device DPSY01_EX_CMP 511001 8002011E93 Figure 4 2 24 Operate closing on the front panel in DPSY01 Note The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for Closing Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic see Figure 4 2 31 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch DPSY01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition is required it can be programmed by th...

Страница 595: ...r Open from the front panel These input and output signals and the procedure are highlighted in the figure below Do nothing Operation decision Success Failed Operate logic Wait for a command Signal output Operate command Closing l from the local end Operate command Open from the local end Operate command Closing from the remote end Operate command Closing by the PLC function Operate command Open b...

Страница 596: ... in the operate condition logic see Figure 4 2 31 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch DPSY01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition is required it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operated condition logic The alternative operate condition can be connected to the above logic using connection point 3 User configurable condition That is s...

Страница 597: ...end Figure 4 2 27 Outline of operate command closing Input signal from the PLC function Figure 4 2 28 describes the operate logic when an Operate command Closing PLC Closing Control signal is generated by the PLC function There are four input points for reception of the signal operate command closing The input point is selected in accordance with one of the following four conditions for the first ...

Страница 598: ...lock check PLC 3 connection point DEV01_CL_COMMAND 511001 800201EE32 Closing control command with no check PLC 4 connection point From SYNCHK SYNC01 SYN_CLC 560001 850B011F59 S R Detection of state change in a device DPSY01_EX_CMP 511001 8002011E93 Figure 4 2 28 Closing operation logic with PLC in DPSY01 Note The ILK function can provide the criteria for operation for Closing control Note An opera...

Страница 599: ... logic Wait for a command Signal output Operate command Closing from the local end Operate command Closing from the remote end Operate command Open with the PLC function Operate command Closing with the PLC function Wait for a next command Select stage Select command Open from the remote end Select command Closing from the remote end Select command Open from the local end Select command Closing fr...

Страница 600: ...logic by PLC in DPSY01 Note The ILK function can provide the criteria for operation for control of the Open operation Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic see Figure 4 2 31 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch DPSY01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition programmed by the user is required in place of the signal generated by the original operated con...

Страница 601: ... add another signal to the original logic Replacing the original logic If the user wishes to replace the operate condition logic completely it can be achieved using PLC connection point User configurable condition 1 Connect the user customized logic using DPSY01IN_TMP_41 listed as PLC 2 in Table 4 2 18 2 Set scheme switch DPSY01 LGEXFFCT to PLC Adding another operate condition signal If the additi...

Страница 602: ...in DPSY01 1Note Command Blocking disables any operation except for itself Command Blocking is implemented as CBK in a software switch controller SOTFSW The IEC 61850 standard defines Command Blocking as CmdBlk For more information on CBK see Chapter Control and monitoring application Software switch controller See the signal S4301_STATE in Table 4 2 7 2Note Double Command Blocking DCB is an operat...

Страница 603: ...provided for optional use M signifies that the user should map set configure the signal otherwise the user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used N A signifies that the user cannot change the state of the signal Table 4 2 15 PLC connection points Input point for PLC 1 user a configurable condition Signal Number Signal Name Description M O 511001 810201EE57 DPSY01IN_...

Страница 604: ... direction execute command 511001 8002011E7E DPSY01_FEC_OK_CSF DPSY01 Open direction execute command 511001 8002021E7E DPSY02_FEC_OK_CSF DPSY02 Open direction execute command 511001 8002011E7E DPSY01_FEC_OK_CS DPSY01 Open direction execute command 511001 8002021E7E DPSY02_FEC_OK_CS DPSY02 Open direction execute command Table 4 2 21 PLC monitoring points Output signal for response Signal Number Sig...

Страница 605: ...en the counter value is incremented C OnOff Counting up occurs when any state change occurs Open to Closed and Closed to Open NA Stops the count function Note The operation counter value is not cleared when power is removed from the IED This counter is available in the DPSY01 and DPSY02 functions Closed Open Figure 4 2 32 Device Signal The user can change the value of the operation counter from ei...

Страница 606: ...te end in DPSY01 Note The operate condition signal is provided from the operate condition logic shown in Figure 4 2 36 Note The user can apply other counter change commands for phase A B and C as shown in Table 4 2 24 The resultant signals for the DPSY02 logic are shown in Table 4 2 25 Output signal to BO The DPSY01 function can issue a Result signal at output point DPSY01_SLD_CSCN The counter val...

Страница 607: ...ounter in DPSY01 1Note Command Blocking disables all operation except for its own the Command Blocking function is initiated by the status of CBK in a software switch controller SOTFSW The IEC 61850 standard defines the Command Blocking function as CmdBlk For more information on CBK see Chapter Control and monitoring application Software switch controller See the signal S4301_STATE of Table 4 2 7 ...

Страница 608: ...l Number Signal Name Description 511001 8A02011F88 DPSY01_SLD_CSCN DPSY01 select command for Binary Output 511001 3202011D20 DPSY01_CNT_VAL DPSY01 operation counter value 511001 3202011D24 DPSY01A_CNT_VAL DPSY01 phase A operation counter value 511001 3202011D28 DPSY01B_CNT_VAL DPSY01 phase B operation counter value 511001 3202011D2C DPSY01C_CNT_VAL DPSY01 phase C operation counter value 511001 8A0...

Страница 609: ...nsed End Switch status is changed from Intermediate to Open OT3 Start Signal DPSY01_OEX_BO sensed End Switch status is changed from Open to Intermediate OT4 Start Switch status Intermediate sensed End Switch status is changed from Intermediate to Closed Note The function operation time measurement is also available in the DPSY02 function Signal DPSY01_FEX_BO OT1 OT2 Sensing Intermediate state Devi...

Страница 610: ...g points Signal Number Signal Name Description 511001 7002016D0D DEV01_RESET_REQ DPSY01 operation time reset command received Mapping Data 511001 7002026D0D DEV02_RESET_REQ DPSY02 operation time reset command received Mapping Data ii Setting names Table 4 2 30 Setting of operation time function in DPSY Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value DPSY01 OPETMEN Activation of the operatio...

Страница 611: ...ly an input signal corresponding to phase A is generated using a normally open contact NO and a normally closed contact NC If a NO and a NC contact are exchanged the input signal should be determined by inversion that is the user is required to set On for both scheme switches DPSY01A NOPSGI and DPSY01A NCLSGI Note The state signal acquired can be monitored For more information see Chapter Automati...

Страница 612: ... 511001 8102011F5F BI circuit and DPSY01 Figure 4 2 40 Acquisition of a state signal Note The user should set the actual input points See chapter Technical description Binary IO module Note In Figure 4 2 40 two signals can be issued DPSY01_3PH_STATE and DPSY01_F_QLT_SPP One is used in the select condition logic and operate condition logic see Figure 4 2 13 and Figure 4 2 28 Another is used for ope...

Страница 613: ...Figure 4 2 40 Event suppression If the status of a device chatters for a short time the DPSY function will receive iterative signals from the device Such iterative signals can cause extra burden for the DPSY function hence event suppression can be required to reduce the additional burden created 1 3 5 7 Signal from device 2 4 6 8 DPSY TELD DPSY TELR DPSY NELD Suppressed signal A C D E B Time Figur...

Страница 614: ...setting Input signal 1 Input signal 2 Input signal 3 Input signal 4 Input signal 5 Input signal 6 Input signal 7 Input signal 8 Select Command Closing 1 BO1 200B01_8002001112 BO1 RB 200B01_8002001113 BO1 circuit at IO 1 Function ID 200B01 Terminal and wire To contact health check Connected by Programming To contact health check BO2_SOURCE 200B01 310201E11D PLC connection point on BO2 1 BO2_CPL Off...

Страница 615: ...nal 3 Input signal 4 Input signal 5 Input signal 6 Input signal 7 Input signal 8 1 BO4 200B01_8302031112 BO4 RB 200B01_8302031113 To contact health check To contact health check To contact health check Connected by Programming Connected by Programming Operate command Open to the device Figure 4 2 44 Example of operate commands connected with BO2 and BO3 at IO 1 Note Table 4 2 36 shows the remainin...

Страница 616: ... Figure 4 2 45 Example connection of Select command Closing for the health check feature Setting the Select command Open Similar to select command Closing the point DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG is connected with the BO2 circuit the user is required to key point BO2 RB for the setting DPSY01 FSLBORD Do not key the point DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG 511001 8A02011DC4 Selection logic in DPSY01 Signal con...

Страница 617: ... connection of Operate command Closing for the health check feature Setting for Operate command Open Similarly the point BO4 RB must be applied for the setting DPSY01 FEXBORD Selection logic in DPSY01 Signal designated by setting DPSY01 FEXBORD BO4 circuit at IO 1 Contact health check logic in DPSY01 Result of contact health check DPSY01_FEX_BO 511001 8102011DD0 BO4 RB 200B01_8302031113 Connection...

Страница 618: ...nected to BO2 at IO 1 DPSY01 FSLBORD 200B018102011113 BO2 RB OK DPSY01_OEX_BO_CSF is connected to BO3 at IO 1 DPSY01 OEXBORD 200B018202021113 BO3 RB OK DPSY01_FEX_BO_CSF is connected to BO4 at IO 1 DPSY01 OEXBORD 200B018302031113 BO4 RB OK Plus DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG 511001 8602011DC6 SW1 is driven with BO1 at IO 1 BO1 Drivers Select Closing command BO1 RB 200B01_8002001113 BO3 Operate Closing command ...

Страница 619: ... FSLBORD 200B018102011113 BO2 RB OK DPSY01_OEX_BO_CSF is connected to BO3 Close SLOT1 DPSY01 OEXBORD 200B018202021113 BO3 RB OK DPSY01_FEX_BO_CSF is connected to BO4 Close SLOT1 DPSY01 OEXBORD 200B018302031113 BO4 RB OK Plus SW1 is driven with BO1 at IO 1 BO1 Drivers BO3 BO4 RB 200B01_8302031113 BO4 BO3 RB 200B01_8202021113 SW2 is driven with BO2 at IO 1 SW4 is driven with BO4 at IO 1 Local remote...

Страница 620: ...ocal Remote end SW 3 SW 1 Minus BIO module 43SW SW 2 SW 4 SW3 is driven with BO3 at IO 1 SW1 is not driven with any BO SW2 is not driven with any BO Physical BOs are virtualized DPSY01_OSL_BO_FLG 511001 8602011DC6 Select command Closing Operate command Closing DPSY01_OEX_BO 511001 8202011DD3 Operate command Open DPSY01_FEX_BO 511001 8102011DD0 Closing command Select command Open DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG ...

Страница 621: ...IR SBO DPSY02 EN Activate monitoring function DPSY02 Close Open Close DPSY02 DEVTYPE Phase selector switch 3 pole 3 pole 1 pile switch DPSY02 OPC Activate monitoring function DPSY02 Close Open Close DPSY02 CPC Activate monitoring function DPSY02 Close Open Close DPSY02A NOPSG BI position for DPSY02 none BI signal DPSY02A NCLSG BI position for DPSY02 none BI signal DPSY02B NOPSG BI position for DPS...

Страница 622: ...e user will need to create a logical node LN for the DPSY01 function Figure 4 2 52 exemplifies the editing of a LN the LN Common Switch controller CSWI is chosen for the DPSY01 function After the user has defined an object DPC the DPSY01 logical node can be saved with the name CSWI plus LN Instance Create a definition of object DPC in the DPSY01 logical node Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode sho...

Страница 623: ...s CSWI1 In the DIR mode the following three items should be selected using GR TIEMS Oper origin ctlmodel choice DOes or DOns Figure 4 2 54 LN editing screen for DIR mode ii Mapping output data The user should group the DPSY01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT the user should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR TIEMS Figure 4 2 55 illustrates how to map a signal it indicates that the...

Страница 624: ...WI1 Pos stSeld BOOLEAN ST 511001 0002011D90 DPSY01_STD_RPT Note Status ST is defined in the function constraint FC of the IEC 61850 Drag and drop Figure 4 2 55 orCat attribute mapped into DPC object of CSWI1 iii Mapping input data The DPSY01 function can receive three commands select operate and cancel Thus the user should map the input point DEV01_CONTROL_REQ to the IEC 61850 configuration Table ...

Страница 625: ...CO Ctrl CSWI1 Pos Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO Ctrl CSWI1 Pos Oper ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl CSWI1 Pos Oper T Timestamp CO Ctrl CSWI1 Pos Oper Test BOOLEAN CO Ctrl CSWI1 Pos Oper Check Check CO Ctrl CSWI1 Pos Oper origin orCat orCategory CO Ctrl CSWI1 Pos Oper origin orIdent Octet64 CO Ctrl CSWI1 Pos Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO Ctrl CSWI1 Pos Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl CSWI1 Pos Cancel T Timestamp CO Ctrl CSWI...

Страница 626: ...ed signal Normally Open Signal of phase C Not Assigned DPSY01C NOPSGI Off On Signal inverse or not Off DPSY01C NCLSG Preferred signal Normally Close Signal of phase C Not Assigned DPSY01C NCLSGI Off On Signal inverse or not Off DPSY01 OPC And Or Normally Open contact grouping And DPSY01 CLC And Or Normally Close contact grouping Or DPSY01 SPPEN Off On Automatic event suppression function Off DPSY0...

Страница 627: ...gic DPSY01 LGCNFFCT FixedLogic PLC Change logic about cancel command fail factor FixedLogic DPSY01 PLSM Fix Var pulse mode Fix DPSY01 CPW 0 1 50 0 s control pulse width 1 0 DPSY01 RST 1 0 100 0 s response check timer 30 0 DPSY01 CNTS NA C On C Off C OnOff count status NA DPSY01 OPETMEN Off On Operation Time Measurement enable Off DPSY01 APBD Process Bay status change origin Process DPSY01 CTRDIR O...

Страница 628: ...etected 8402011F4A DPSY01B_UDF_STA DPSY01 B phase Undefined Start 0002011FB8 DPSY01C_CNT_SEL DPSY01 C count change selected signal stSeld for SAS 3202011D2C DPSY01C_CNT_VAL DPSY01 C phase count value 8702011F51 DPSY01C_FLT_DET DPSY01 C phase Faulty Detected 8702011F50 DPSY01C_FLT_STA DPSY01 C phase Faulty Start 3102011D1E DPSY01C_LCD_ST DPSY01 C phase state for LCD 8602011F4F DPSY01C_UDF_DET DPSY0...

Страница 629: ...nary output signal 8102011F41 DPSY01_FLT_DET0 DPSY01 Faulty Detected 8102011F45 DPSY01_FLT_DET1 DPSY01 Faulty Detected 3 phase concentration data only 8102011F44 DPSY01_FLT_STA DPSY01 Faulty Start 8A02011DC4 DPSY01_FSL_BO_FLG DPSY01 off direction select binary output signal 8A02011F81 DPSY01_FSL_CS19 DPSY01 select receive open signal check answer 8202011F60 DPSY01_F_BI_ERR DPSY01 Inside of connect...

Страница 630: ...ignal 06 8A02011F88 DPSY01_SLD_CSCN DPSY01 count change selected condition signal 8A02011F8C DPSY01_SLD_CSRS DPSY01 reset time selected condition signal 0002011D90 DPSY01_SLD_RPT DPSY01 selected signal stSeld for SAS 8E02011F5D DPSY01_SLD_TMO DPSY01 time out after selected 8A02011F9F DPSY01_SLD_TMOCN DPSY01 count change time out after selected 8A02011FA5 DPSY01_SLD_TMORS DPSY01 reset time out afte...

Страница 631: ...nfo for control 8002011F40 DPSY01_UDF_DET0 DPSY01 Undefined Detected 8002011F43 DPSY01_UDF_DET1 DPSY01 Undefined Detected 3 phase concentration data only 8002011F42 DPSY01_UDF_STA DPSY01 Undefined Start Connection point in PLC logic DPSY Function ID 511001 Element ID Name Description 800201EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND dev01 close command 800201EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK dev01 close command with interlock by...

Страница 632: ...wishes to obtain the Element IDs and their names for the other devices Rule The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device hence the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices For example when the user wishes to find the DPSY01_SC_OWS point for the 2nd device use the description of DPSY01_SC_OWS in place of DPSY02_SC_OWS The user can obtain the ID value of DP...

Страница 633: ...B functions On the other hand switches S43 01 to S43 61 are provided for general purpose usage Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ordering number and check the orde...

Страница 634: ... the user wishes to avoid the control of devices by mistake during test and maintenance the user can use the command blocking function so that mal operation can be avoided The execution of command blocking is available from the IED front panel Additionally the IEC 61850 standard provides command blocking CmdBlk for remote operation and the CBK function is defined at the logical node LN given in IE...

Страница 635: ...ser wishes control applications to bypass synchronizing conditions if the user executes the control applications from the IED front panel If the SCB is executed all control processes operated from the IED front panel will bypass their respective synchronizing conditions Note that the bypass operation is available for five minutes following initiation of the SCB function For operation of the SCB fu...

Страница 636: ...FTSW output status Table 4 3 2 shows the list of output signals of the SOFTSW functions Table 4 3 2 Output signals of SOFTSW function Signal Number Signal Name Description 522001 000A011001 CBK_STATE CBK status Off Blocked 522001 000A021001 ICB_STATE IBK switch status 522001 000A031001 SCB_STATE SCB switch status 522001 000A041001 S4301_STATE S43 01 switch status 522001 000A051001 S4302_STATE S43 ...

Страница 637: ..._CONTROL_REQ Command Remote On Control Either SBO mode or DIR mode e g ctlmodel in IEC61850 In SBO operate In DIR operate Select Failed 522001_700A046D08 510001 7001016D08 For monitoring Input Output Select logic in SOFTSW1 0 1s 0 t 0 6s 0 t Select success Automatic sequence control function AQEQ in progress ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Select condition 1 Select command Operate command For SBO operation For DIR...

Страница 638: ...ode e g ctlmodel in IEC61850 In SBO operate In DIR operate Select Failed 522001_700A046D08 For monitoring Input Output Select logic in SOFTSW1 0 1s 0 t 0 6s 0 t Select success Automatic sequence control function AQEQ in progress ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Select condition 1 Select command Operate command For SBO operation For DIR operation To Wait for a command Figure 4 3 7 Select logic for OFF operation from...

Страница 639: ...ait for a command Select command Operate command For SBO operation For DIR operation Figure 4 3 8 Select logic for ON operation at the IED locally in SOFTSW1 Note To identify the output points of the other SOFTSW logics see Table 4 3 9 Note Signal select condition is provided See Figure 4 3 12 Note The SOFTSW1 function is blocked when the ASEQ function is in operation Output signal for monitoring ...

Страница 640: ...TSW logics see Table 4 3 9 Note Signal select condition is provided See Figure 4 3 12 Output signal for monitoring When the state of select condition is true the SOFTSW1 function can issue a Select success signal at the output point S4301_FSD_CSF Note The S4301_FSD_CSF signal is the same as the signal shown in Figure 4 3 7 That is this signal of the logic appears at the same PLC monitoring point I...

Страница 641: ... S4301_OSD_CSF is the same as the signal shown in Figure 4 3 6 vi Receiving Select command for Off operation using PLC function Input signal required to connect Figure 4 3 11 shows the SOFTSW1 logic for a Select command PLC OFF Control signal The input signal is generated using the user programmed PLC logic the user can connect the signal for the PLC connection point S4301_CHG_TO_OFF SOFTSW1 funct...

Страница 642: ...p DCB RCV OR Traveling OR ASEQ_MULTI_SEL GEN TRIP S4301_CTRL_RIGHT 522001 820A04ED50 SERI_ERR Command ON control received Command OFF control received received S4301_STATE 1 Unmatched condition detected 5 522001 000A411001 Figure 4 3 12 Select condition logic for ON OFF in SOFTSW1 1Note Command Blocking disables any operation except its own see the signal CBK_STATE Table 4 3 2 as the state of Comm...

Страница 643: ...50A05EDE1 S4302_CHG_TO_ON PLC ON control for SOFTSW2 S43 02 O 522001 850A06EDE1 S4303_CHG_TO_ON PLC ON control for SOFTSW3 S43 03 O 522001 850A40EDE1 S4361_CHG_TO_ON PLC ON control for SOFTSW61 S43 61 O Table 4 3 4 PLC connection point 2 Input points for Off control Signal Number Signal Name Description M O 522001 860A01EDE0 CBK_CHG_TO_OFF PLC OFF control for CBK O 522001 860A02EDE0 ICB_CHG_TO_OFF...

Страница 644: ...03 M 522001 000A401D90 S4361_STSELD Selection completed signal in SOFTSW61 S43 61 M Table 4 3 8 Input signals for condition logic Signal Number Signal Name Description M O 5A0001 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR Double Command Blocking DCB is in progress N A 5A0001 0008001F40 Traveling OR Travelling events are detected N A 4A0001 8300001B6F GEN TRIP General trip N A 5A0001 3108003F40 SDCEN This is setting of...

Страница 645: ... On S4301 EN Function activation in SOFTSW1 S43 01 On Off On S4302 EN Function activation in SOFTSW2 S43 02 On Off On S4303 EN Function activation in SOFTSW3 S43 03 On Off On S4361 EN Function activation in SOFTSW61 S43 61 On Off On CBK CTRAHMI HMI activation in CBK On Off On ICB CTRAHMI HMI activation in ICB On Off On SCB CTRAHMI HMI activation in SCB On Off On S4301 CTRAHMI HMI activation in SOF...

Страница 646: ...nd is not identical to the IED test status ii Receiving Cancel from local end Figure 4 3 14 shows the logic when a Cancel command Local cancel signal is applied to the SOFTSW1 function The input signal is provided when the Cancel key is pressed on the IED front panel the user is not required to map it When the logic receives input Local cancel signal the logic is able to output a result signal pro...

Страница 647: ... condition signal is provided from operate condition scheme For more information see Figure 4 3 21 Note The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control ii Receiving operate command Off from remote end Figure 4 3 16 shows the logic when an Operate command Remote Off Control signal is applied to the SOFTSW1 logic The input point S4301_CONTROL_REQ is used for the reception of t...

Страница 648: ...l in SOFTSW1 Note To identify the input and output signal points of the other SOFTSW logics see Table 4 3 11 Table 4 3 13 and Table 4 3 15 Note operate condition signal is provided from operate condition scheme For more information see Figure 4 3 21 Note The ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control iv Receiving operate command Off from the local end Figure 4 3 18 shows th...

Страница 649: ...utput Operate logic in SOFTSW1 S4301_OEC_CHG_PLC 522001_8C0A041F5D 522001_810A041D03 S4301_ST_ON Operate completed S4301_PLC_CTRL_FAIL 522001_870A041F62 Operate failed d S4301_CHG_TO_ON 522001 850A04EDE1 ON control command PLC connection point 1 S4301_EX_SS 522001_870A041F62 1 0s 0 t Figure 4 3 19 ON Operation logic using PLC logic Note To identify the input and output signal points of the other S...

Страница 650: ...ii Operate condition Figure 4 3 21 shows the operate condition logic of the SOFTSW1 function The SOFTSW1 function can examine an operate condition using Command Blocking signal1 operate condition SOFTSW1 function Function ID 522001 Same Directional Controlling Event To operate logic Control hierarchy e g 43RL PLC connection point 3 6 IED serious error detected S4301 EN On Users must setup this con...

Страница 651: ... note the meaning of the following abbreviations as shown in column M O of each table O indicates that the signal is provided for the optional use M indicates that the user should map set configure the signal otherwise the user may experience an operational failure if the default settings is used N A indicates that the user cannot change the state of the signal Table 4 3 11 Output signals on start...

Страница 652: ...atus of SOFTSW1 S43 01 522001 830A051D02 S4302_ST_OFF Off status of SOFTSW2 S43 02 522001 830A061D02 S4303_ST_OFF Off status of SOFTSW3 S43 03 522001 830A401D02 S4361_ST_OFF Off status of SOFTSW61 S43 61 Table 4 3 15 ON status signals on the operation Signal Number Signal Name Description 522001 810A011D03 CBK_ST_ON On status of CBK 522001 810A021D03 ICB_ST_ON On status of ICB 522001 810A031D03 SC...

Страница 653: ...03_OEC_CHG_PLC SOFTSW3 signal after KC_S43_SA022 522001 8B0A401F9C S4361_OEC_CHG_PLC SOFTSW61 signal after KC_S43_SA022 Table 4 3 18 Output signals on starting operation On to Off by PLC Signal Number Signal Name Description 522001 8C0A011F5D CBK_FEC_CHG_PLC CBK signal after KC_S43_SA023 522001 8C0A021F5D ICB_FEC_CHG_PLC ICB signal after KC_S43_SA023 522001 8C0A031F5D SCB_FEC_CHG_PLC SCB signal af...

Страница 654: ...e LN for the SOFTSW1 function Figure 4 3 22 exemplifies the editing of a LN the LN General Input Output GGIO is chosen for the SOFTSW1 function for IEC 61850 communication After the user has defined an object SPCSO the SOFTSW1 logical node can be saved with the name GGIO plus LN Instance Create a definition of the object SPCSO in SOFTSW1 logical node Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chos...

Страница 655: ...es the settings in LN GGIO701 when the DIR mode is required for the SOFTSW1 function In the DIR mode the following three items should be selected using GR TIEMS Oper origin ctlmodel choice DOes or DOns Figure 4 3 24 LN editing screen for DIR mode for example ii Mapping output data The user should group the SOFTSW1 S4301 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT the user should map them for IEC 61850...

Страница 656: ... Timestamp ST 522001 900A041006 S4301_TIME Ctrl GGIO701 SPCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 522001 000A041D90 S4301_STSELD Note Status ST is defined in the function constraint FC of the IEC 61850 standard Figure 4 3 25 orCat attribute mapped into SPCSO object of GGIO701 iii Mapping input data The SOFTSW1 function can receive three commands select operate and cancel Thus the user should map the input point S43...

Страница 657: ...GIO701 SPCSO Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO Ctrl GGIO701 SPCSO Oper ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl GGIO701 SPCSO Oper T Timestamp CO Ctrl GGIO701 SPCSO Oper Test BOOLEAN CO Ctrl GGIO701 SPCSO Oper Check Check CO Ctrl GGIO701 SPCSO Oper origin orCat orCategory CO Ctrl GGIO701 SPCSO Oper origin orIdent Octet64 CO Ctrl GGIO701 SPCSO Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO Ctrl GGIO701 SPCSO Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl GGIO701 SPCSO ...

Страница 658: ...ct or SBO by HMI SBO S43 SW1 S4301 SWNAME Preferred text item name of soft 43 switch signal SOFTSW1 S4301 OFFNAME Preferred text state name of state off Off S4301 ONNAME Preferred text state name of state on On S4301 CTRMENU Off On control by MENU enable Off S4301 CTRAHMI DIR SBO control action Direct or SBO by HMI SBO SW2 S4302 SWNAME Preferred text item name of soft 43 switch signal SOFTSW2 S430...

Страница 659: ..._TMP7 CMDBLK signal before KC_S43_SA005 850A011F4A CBK_TMP8 CMDBLK signal before KC_S43_SA006 850A011F5E CBK_TMP11 CMDBLK signal before KC_S43_SA013 860A011F43 CBK_TMP3 CMDBLK signal after KC_S43_SA002 860A011F4E CBK_SLF_FCT_FLG01 CMDBLK signal before MCTS43_SC001 870A011F50 CBK_SLF_FCT_FLG02 CMDBLK signal before MCTS43_SC002 870A011F60 CBK_TMP13 CMDBLK signal before KC_S43_SA014 870A011F62 CBK_EX...

Страница 660: ...43_SA005 850A021F4A ICB_TMP8 ILKBYP signal before KC_S43_SA006 850A021F5E ICB_TMP11 ILKBYP signal before KC_S43_SA013 860A021F43 ICB_TMP3 ILKBYP signal after KC_S43_SA002 860A021F4E ICB_SLF_FCT_FLG01 ILKBYP signal before MCTS43_SC001 870A021F50 ICB_SLF_FCT_FLG02 ILKBYP signal before MCTS43_SC002 870A021F60 ICB_TMP13 ILKBYP signal before KC_S43_SA014 870A021F62 ICB_EX_SS ILKBYP signal execute succe...

Страница 661: ...SCB_SC_RCC SYNCBYP select command by RCC 8E0A031F4F SCB_SLD_TM0 SYNCBYP signal after MCTS43_SC001 860A031F4E SCB_SLF_FCT_FLG01 SYNCBYP signal before MCTS43_SC001 870A031F50 SCB_SLF_FCT_FLG02 SYNCBYP signal before MCTS43_SC002 000A031001 SCB_STATE SYNCBYP status 310A031D01 SCB_STS SYNCBYP status 000A031D90 SCB_STSELD SYNCBYP the controllable data is in the status 310A031D00 SCB_STS_MIMIC SYNCBYP st...

Страница 662: ..._S43_SA013 860A041F43 S4301_TMP3 SOFT 43 switch1 signal after KC_S43_SA002 860A041F4E S4301_SLF_FCT_FLG01 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before MCTS43_SC001 870A041F50 S4301_SLF_FCT_FLG02 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before MCTS43_SC002 870A041F60 S4301_TMP13 SOFT 43 switch1 signal before KC_S43_SA014 870A041F62 S4301_EX_SS SOFT 43 switch1 signal execute success 880A041F4B S4301_TMP9 SOFT 43 switch1 signal afte...

Страница 663: ...F_FCT_FLG02 SOFT 43 switch2 signal before MCTS43_SC002 870A051F60 S4302_TMP13 SOFT 43 switch2 signal before KC_S43_SA014 870A051F62 S4302_EX_SS SOFT 43 switch2 signal execute success 880A051F4B S4302_TMP9 SOFT 43 switch2 signal after KC_S43_SA006 880A051F4D S4302_TMP10 SOFT 43 switch2 signal after KC_S43_SC001 880A051F5F S4302_TMP12 SOFT 43 switch2 signal after KC_S43_SA013 890A051F5A S4302_OEC_CH...

Страница 664: ...061F62 S4303_EX_SS SOFT 43 switch3 signal execute success 880A061F4B S4303_TMP9 SOFT 43 switch3 signal after KC_S43_SA006 880A061F4D S4303_TMP10 SOFT 43 switch3 signal after KC_S43_SC001 880A061F5F S4303_TMP12 SOFT 43 switch3 signal after KC_S43_SA013 890A061F5A S4303_OEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch3 signal after KC_S43_SA011 890A061F61 S4303_TMP14 SOFT 43 switch3 signal after KC_S43_SA014 8A0A061F47 S4303...

Страница 665: ... 880A3F1F4D S4360_TMP10 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SC001 880A3F1F5F S4360_TMP12 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA013 890A3F1F5A S4360_OEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA011 890A3F1F61 S4360_TMP14 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA014 8A0A3F1F47 S4360_TMP6 SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA004 8A0A3F1F5B S4360_FEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch60 signal after KC_S43_SA012 ...

Страница 666: ...T 43 switch61 signal after KC_S43_SC001 880A401F5F S4361_TMP12 SOFT 43 switch61 signal after KC_S43_SA013 890A401F5A S4361_OEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch61 signal after KC_S43_SA011 890A401F61 S4361_TMP14 SOFT 43 switch61 signal after KC_S43_SA014 8A0A401F47 S4361_TMP6 SOFT 43 switch61 signal after KC_S43_SA004 8A0A401F5B S4361_FEC_CHG SOFT 43 switch61 signal after KC_S43_SA012 8B0A401F4C S4361_CTR_SGU SO...

Страница 667: ...the table above the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st device but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the SOFTSW function We have omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve readability Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the Element IDs and their names for the other devices Rule The same types of signal monitor...

Страница 668: ... Clearing measured time intervals OT1 OT2 OT3 and OT4 DPOS01 function Clearing measured time intervals OT1 OT2 OT3 and OT4 Clearing measured time intervals OT1 OT2 OT3 and OT4 TPOS01 function Sending reset command OPTR01_RST_CMD Sending reset command OPTR01_RST_CMD Sending reset command OPTR01_RST_CMD DPSY01 function Figure 4 4 1 Reception of a reset command Note For more information with regard t...

Страница 669: ...g On control OT3 OT4 Device status for On Off Intermediate On Sensing intermediate state Figure 4 4 3 Two intervals OT3 and OT4 for On control event Tips If the user wishes to implement the OPTIM function quickly go to section 4 4 4 which discusses how to map signal points for the IEC 61850 communication Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and...

Страница 670: ...y We discuss how to map the input points for the IEC61850 communication in section 4 4 4 OPTIM function Function ID 529001 OPTR01_NSD_CSF 529001 830C011F41 OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ Command Reset Either SBO mode or DIR mode e g ctlmodel in IEC61850 Failed 529001 700C016D08 Input Output Select logic in OPTR 0 2s 0 t 0 3s 0 t Automatic sequence control function AQEQ in progress ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Select condit...

Страница 671: ...ted 2 Other devices traveling detected 3 DCB RCV OR Traveling OR ASEQ_MULTI_SEL OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT 529001 820C01ED50 SERI_ERR 1 Unmatched condition detected 4 Figure 4 4 6 Select condition logic in the OPTIM function 6 1Note The command blocking disables any operation except for itself the command blocking is stated with CBK in a software controller SOFTSW The IEC61850 defines the command blocking ...

Страница 672: ...le 4 4 2 Input signal for condition logic Signal Number Signal Name Description M O 522001 000A011001 CBK_STATE Command Blocking status Off Blocked N A 5A0001 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR Double Command Blocking DCB is in progress N A 5A0001 0008001F40 Traveling OR Travelling events are detected N A 5A0101 3100001F43 SERI_ERR Serious Error detected N A 523001 000D001F40 ASEQ_MULTI_SEL Automatic sequence ...

Страница 673: ...e command Operate logic Command Reset from the remote end Select logic Wait for a next command Figure 4 4 7 Outline of cancel command from the remote end ii Input point required mapping Figure 4 4 8 shows the cancel logic when a Cancel command Remote Cancel signal enters the OPTIM function The input point OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ is the same point of the Figure 4 4 5 OPTIM function Function ID 529001 OP...

Страница 674: ...ure 4 4 10 shows the operate logic when an Operation command Reset signal enters the OPTIM function The input point OPTR_CONTROL_REQ is used for the reception of the Operation command Reset signal which is the same point of the select logic OPTIM function Function ID 529001 OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ Command Operating reset 529001 700C016D08 From the operation on the front panel Input Output Selection log...

Страница 675: ...5 IED serious error detected OPTR1_EN On Users must setup this condition correctly Function Automatic sequence control is in progress CBK_STATE Command blocking 1 Double Command Blocking detected 2 Other devices traveling detected 3 DCB RCV OR Traveling OR ASEQ_MULTI_SEL OPTR01_CTRL_RIGHT 529001 820C01ED50 SERI_ERR 1 Unmatched condition detected 4 Figure 4 4 11 Operate condition logic in OPTIM 1to...

Страница 676: ...ep2 Mapping output data Step3 Mapping input data i Editing Logical Node The user should make a logical node LN for the OPTIM function Figure 4 4 12 exemplifies LN editing the LN General Input Output GGIO is chosen for the OPTIM function After the user defining an object SPCSO the OPTIM logical node can be saved with the name GIGO plus LN Instance Make a definition of the object SPCSO in the OPTIM ...

Страница 677: ...w Oper Cancel Origin stSeld sboClass choice operate once ctlmodel choice SBOes or SBOns sboClass can be found by scrolling down Figure 4 4 13 LN editing for SBO for example Defining DIR mode Figure 4 4 14 exemplifies the OPTIM logic node saved as GGIO3302 In the DIR mode the following three items should be selected using the GR TIEMS Oper origin ctlmodel choice DOes or DOns Figure 4 4 14 LN editin...

Страница 678: ...SPCSO1 origin orIdent Octet64 ST 529001 310C01170A OPTR01_ORIDENT Ctrl GGIO3302 SPCSO1 stVal BOOLEAN ST 529001 310C011EA1 OPT_RST_CMD Ctrl GGIO3302 SPCSO1 Q Quality ST 301001 3110041005 Qual_Val Ctrl GGIO3302 SPCSO1 T Timestamp ST 200301 9010001006 SYS_TIME Ctrl GGIO3302 SPCSO1 stSeld BOOLEAN ST 529001 000C011D90 OPTR01_STSELD Note Status ST is defined in the function constraint FC of the IEC 6185...

Страница 679: ...bject_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name Ctrl GGIO3302 SPCSO1 Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO 529001 700C016D08 OPTR01_CONTROL_REQ Ctrl GGIO3302 SPCSO1 Oper ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl GGIO3302 SPCSO1 Oper T Timestamp CO Ctrl GGIO3302 SPCSO1 Oper Test BOOLEAN CO Ctrl GGIO3302 SPCSO1 Oper Check Check CO Ctrl GGIO3302 SPCSO1 Oper origin orCat orCategory CO Ctrl GGIO3302 SPCSO1 Oper origin orIdent...

Страница 680: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 659 4 4 5 Setting OPTIMRSTCTRL Function ID 529001 Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Note OPTR01 EN Off On Reset Control Enable in OPTR Off ...

Страница 681: ...and 800C011D51 OPTR01_SC_OWS OPTR01 select command by OWS HMI 800C011D52 OPTR01_SC_RCC OPTR01 select command by RCC 8E0C011F47 OPTR01_SLD_TM0 OPTR01 signal after MCTOPTR_SC001 860C011F46 OPTR01_SLF_FCT_FLG1 OPTR01 signal before MCTOPTR_SC001 870C011F48 OPTR01_SLF_FCT_FLG2 OPTR01 signal before MCTOPTR_SC002 000C011D90 OPTR01_STSELD OPTR01 the controllable data is in the status selected StSeld 820C0...

Страница 682: ...ime i e TTIM01 to TTIM12 For simplicity the TTIM01 is only discussed but the other schemes are identical to the TTIM01 scheme Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ord...

Страница 683: ... counter reaches the maximum value 60sec TOTALTIM process The TOTALTIM function checks the state of the operation signal every second If the operation signal is in the On state TOTALTIM accumulates the On time Figure 4 5 1 Cumulative time process ii Acquisition of operation signal The user should connect the binary input circuit BI to the TOTALTIM function Figure 4 5 2 illustrates that 12 signals ...

Страница 684: ...ated data every cycle that is defined with the setting TTIM SDB For example if the user wishes to report the operation time about the device 1 the user should set 1 to the setting TTIM01 SDB provided the report cycle is required every one second Table 4 5 2 Setting for data revision Scheme switch Set Comment TTIM01 SDB 1 to 720sec Data revision period for operating signal 1 TTIM02 SDB 1 to 720sec ...

Страница 685: ...is enabled when the user sets TTIM EN On Table 4 5 3 TOTALTIM operation Scheme switch Set Comment TTIM01 EN On Off Operation enable for operating signal 1 TTIM02 EN On Off Operation enable for operating signal 2 omitted omitted omitted TTIM12 EN On Off Operation enable for operating signal 12 ...

Страница 686: ...ifies LN editing LN GGIO1301 is selected for the TTIM01 function for IEC 61850 communication After the user has defined an object ISCSO1 the TTIM01 logical node can be saved with the name GGIO1301 Define the object ISCSO1 in the TTIM01 logical node Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen when editing the LN SBO defined in LN Figure 4 5 3 Defining ISCSO1 object in GGIO1301 logic node Defi...

Страница 687: ... is required for the TTIM01 function In the DIR mode the following three items should be selected using GR TIEMS Oper origin ctlmodel choice DOes or DOns Figure 4 5 5 LN editing screen for DIR mode for example ii Mapping output data The user should group the TTIM01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT the user should map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR TIEMS Table 4 5 4 shows the mapp...

Страница 688: ...SEC_VAL Ctrl GGIO1301 AnIn1 q Quality MX 5410013115011D21 TTIM01_TIM_QLT Ctrl GGIO1301 AnIn1 t Timestamp MX 5410019015011D22 TTIM01_TIM_TIM Note Status ST and Measurement MX are defined in the function constraint FC of the IEC 61850 standard Drag and drop Figure 4 5 6 orCat attribute mapped into ISCSO1 object of GGIO1301 iii Mapping input data The TTIM01 function can receive three commands select ...

Страница 689: ...O1301 ISCSO1 Oper ctlVal INT32 CO Ctrl GGIO1301 ISCSO1 Oper ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl GGIO1301 ISCSO1 Oper T Timestamp CO Ctrl GGIO1301 ISCSO1 Oper Test BOOLEAN CO Ctrl GGIO1301 ISCSO1 Oper Check Check CO Ctrl GGIO1301 ISCSO1 Oper origin orCat orCategory CO Ctrl GGIO1301 ISCSO1 Oper origin orIdent Octet64 CO Ctrl GGIO1301 ISCSO1 Cancel ctlVal INT32 CO Ctrl GGIO1301 ISCSO1 Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl GG...

Страница 690: ...me for Total Time2 TOTAL TIME 2 03 TTIM03 SDB 0 720 Sending Dead Band number 0 TTIM03 DEVNAME Preferred name Device name for Total Time3 TOTAL TIME 3 04 TTIM04 SDB 0 720 Sending Dead Band number 0 TTIM04 DEVNAME Preferred name Device name for Total Time4 TOTAL TIME 4 05 TTIM05 SDB 0 720 Sending Dead Band number 0 TTIM05 DEVNAME Preferred name Device name for Total Time5 TOTAL TIME 5 06 TTIM06 SDB ...

Страница 691: ...IM02_CTR_SGU TTIM02 control logic stage under selection 8315021E8B TTIM02_EC_F_CS TTIM02 execute command fail condition signal 8215021E84 TTIM02_EC_OK_CS TTIM02 execute command OK condition signal 8A15021E76 TTIM02_SLD_CS TTIM02 selected condition signal 8B15021E7B TTIM02_SLF_CS TTIM02 select fail condition signal 3215021F41 TTIM02_TIM_MIN TTIM02 total time minutes 0015021D91 TTIM02_TMP_01 TTIM02 ...

Страница 692: ...M07 select fail condition signal 3215071F41 TTIM07_TIM_MIN TTIM07 total time minutes 0015071D91 TTIM07_TMP_01 TTIM07 total time change selected signal stSeld for SAS 8415081E95 TTIM08_CC_SS TTIM08 cancel success signal 8915081EA2 TTIM08_CTR_SGU TTIM08 control logic stage under selection 8315081E8B TTIM08_EC_F_CS TTIM08 execute command fail condition signal 8215081E84 TTIM08_EC_OK_CS TTIM08 execute...

Страница 693: ...al 8B150C1E7B TTIM12_SLF_CS TTIM12 select fail condition signal 32150C1F41 TTIM12_TIM_MIN TTIM12 total time minutes 00150C1D91 TTIM12_TMP_01 TTIM12 total time change selected signal stSeld for SAS Connection points in PLC logic TOTALTIM Function ID 541001 Element ID Name Description 801500ED5A TOTAL00IN_TMP_51 TOTAL00IN_TMP_51 801501EDE0 TOTAL01_PLC_SGNL TOTAL01 plc signal 801502EDE0 TOTAL02_PLC_S...

Страница 694: ...mm 7015076D08 TOTAL07_CMM_REQ TOTAL07 correction request from cmm 7015086D08 TOTAL08_CMM_REQ TOTAL08 correction request from cmm 7015096D08 TOTAL09_CMM_REQ TOTAL09 correction request from cmm 70150A6D08 TOTAL10_CMM_REQ TOTAL10 correction request from cmm 70150B6D08 TOTAL11_CMM_REQ TOTAL11 correction request from cmm 70150C6D08 TOTAL12_CMM_REQ TOTAL12 correction request from cmm ...

Страница 695: ... SYNCHK02 The group function consists of two logic elements the former part is to check for the voltage presence or absence on an incoming line and a running line the latter part is to check the synchronizing condition between two energized lines Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not s...

Страница 696: ...cation Double position controller with synchronizing check Note To simplify the description only the SYNCHK1 SYNCHK_Ry1 function is discussed however the same description is applicable to the SYNCHK2 SYNCHK_Ry2 function The user should read the expression for SYNCHK1 as SYNCHK2 unless a special explanation or instruction has been provided e g the user can reason by analogy that the feature in the ...

Страница 697: ...i1 are provided to determine the absence of voltage on the running and incoming lines In Figure 4 6 2 the hatched area depicts the operating area of the UV characteristic The UVr1 element is used to check for the absence of voltage on the running line similarly the UVi1 element is used to check for the absence of voltage on the incoming line The user can set drop off thresholds using the settings ...

Страница 698: ...nction continuously monitors the Δθ ΔV and Δf subsequently the SYNCHK function issues an operate permission signal to the DPSY function when the variance is less than the permissible range For this purpose synchronism relays SyncRy1 dV SyncRy1 df SyncRy1 dθ are provided the user can set them in accordance with their specific requirements Figure 4 6 4 shows the angle variance between Vi and Vr the ...

Страница 699: ...Seconds SYNC01_TSYN Sync check timer for loop system 10s 0 00 to 100 00 s SyncRy1 dfEN Diff frequency for the checking SyncRy1 enable Off Off On i Synchronism relays SyncRy1 dV SyncRy1 df SyncRy1 dθ Synchronism relays SyncRy1 dV SyncRy1 df and SyncRy1 dθ are provided the setting ranges for these relays are shown in Table 4 6 3 Voltage variance ΔV see Figure 4 6 3 The voltage variance between Vr an...

Страница 700: ... f fVi fVr setting SyncRy1 df 4 6 6 where fVr Frequency of Vr fVi Frequency of Vi Δf Frequency variance between Vr and Vi Notice and tips If the frequency variance between the Vr and the Vi is shown very large the SYNCHK may fail to make the decision of the synchronism although Off is set for the setting SyncRy1 dfEN to abandon to checking the frequency variance This is because the vector passes t...

Страница 701: ...rrangements Setting SYNC01_TSYN Setting SyncR1 Angle 180 1 f Hz 4 6 11 1 𝑓 𝐻𝑧 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 SYNC01_TSYN Setting SyncR1 Angle 1 180 4 6 12 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 SYNC01_TSYN 𝑆𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 SyncR1 Angle 180 1 𝑓 𝐻𝑧 4 6 13 Example Δf f1 f2 50 02Hz 50 00Hz 0 02Hz 50s time Vr Δf Vr Frequency f1 Vi Frequency f2 Δf Δf Vi 50s SyncR1 Angle Synchronism zone Figure 4 6 5 Synchronism between Vi and Vr when system frequency 50Hz ...

Страница 702: ... prediction of coincident timing between the running Vr and the incoming Vi voltages can be introduced Figure 4 6 6 c shows the coincident point zero point Check for slip cycle Checking the decrease in Δθ is a suitable means for controlling the issue of a closure command to a CB at the requisite timing The SyncRy1 θless element calculates the for reducing Δθ it assists in the computation of the Sy...

Страница 703: ...α β Setting TCB Vr Vi c Beat wave provided by Vr Vi d Advance time and CB closing command Tolerance for synchronism Zero point Δθ 0 CB closed point CB closing command issued CB closing command CB contact Start to close CB End of closing CB Figure 4 6 6 Advance time to close CB for an asynchronous system ...

Страница 704: ...her in service or out of service the four zones are illustrated in Figure 4 6 7 DRDI LRDI LRLI DRLI Setting UVI1 Setting OVI1 Setting UVR1 Vi on the incoming line Vr on the running line Setting OVR1 Figure 4 6 7 Four voltage conditions examined in SYNCHK_Ry1 For example DRLI zone covers the case when the running line is out of service DR and the incoming line is in service LI Table 4 6 4 exemplifi...

Страница 705: ... 6 9 Line outage check logic in SYNCHK_Ry2 Table 4 6 5 Voltage condition settings in SYNCHK1 Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value SYNC01_TLRDIDRLI Voltage check timer LRDI DRLI 5s 0 00 to 5 00s SYNC01_TDRDI Voltage check timer DRDI 5s 0 00 to 5 00s SYNC01_LRDIEN CB close enable for LRDI On Off On SYNC01_DRLIEN CB close enable for DRLI On Off On SYNC01_DRDIEN CB close enable for D...

Страница 706: ... DRLIEN SYNC01 DRDIEN On 560001 880B011F63 560001 8A0B011F65 560001 8B0B011F66 560001 830B011F6A 560001 840B011F6B 560001 850B011F6C 560001 820B011F69 t 0 0 5s t 0 SYNC01_TLRDIDRLI t 0 0 0 to 5 0s t 0 0 0 to 5 0s SYNC01_TLRDIDRLI 560001 840B011F58 Select permission 560001 850B011F59 SYNC01_SYN_CLC Operate permission DPSY01 Function ID 511001 511001 8002011E45 DPSY01_OSE_RCV From DPSY01 To DPSY01 O...

Страница 707: ...N On 560001 880B021F63 560001 8A0B021F65 560001 8B0B021F66 560001 830B021F6A 560001 840B021F6B 560001 850B021F6C 560001 820B021F69 t 0 0 5s t 0 SYNC02_TLRDIDRLI t 0 0 0 to 5 0s t 0 0 0 to 5 0s SYNC02_TLRDIDRLI 560001 840B021F58 SYNC02_SLD_VCS Select permission 560001 850B021F59 SYNC02_SYN_CLC Operate permission DPSY02 Function ID 511001 511001 8002021E45 DPSY02_OSE_RCV From DPSY02 To DPSY02 OVi UV...

Страница 708: ...SYN_CLC signal is input to the DPSY01 operate closing logic as a permissive signal The DPSY01 function is allowed to operate when any voltage conditions except LRLI is satisfied in the DPSY01 operation Note This signal is required only for CB closing in the operate closing logic For more information see separate section DPSY Operate logics iii Adding other voltage conditions using PLC signals The ...

Страница 709: ... being near zero between Running and Incoming SyncRy1 Ɵ less ΔƟ1 less Reducing in phase valiance 56001 8701001B6A 56001 8401001B64 56001 8501001B65 56001 8601001B65 56001 8801001B6B To check for Synchronous network To check for Asynchronous network Figure 4 6 12 Synchronization check relays in SYNCHK_Ry1 ΔƟ2 Phase variance of Running and Incoming ΔV2 Voltage variance of Running and Incoming Δf2 Fr...

Страница 710: ...C01 SYNCHK1EN 560001 870B011F62 560001 850B011F60 SYNC01_TSYN2 t 0 0 0 to 100 0s SYNC01_TSYN 560001 8C0B011F67 SYNC01_SYN_CLC Sync success SYNC01_SBP DPSY01 Function ID 511001 511001 8B02011E48 DPSY01_OEC_RCV From DPSY01 To DPSY01 SYNC01_SCK_CS09 SYNC01_SCK_CS04 SYNC01_SCK_CS03 SYNC01_SCK_CS02 SyncRy1 Ɵ 0 SyncRy1 dƟ SyncRy1 dV SyncRy1 df SyncRy1 Ɵ less ΔƟ1 less ΔƟ1 ΔƟ1 0 Δf1 ΔV1 SyncRy2 Ɵ 0 SyncRy...

Страница 711: ... bypass From SYNCHK2 SYNCHK2 Function ID 560001 560001 870B021F77 560001 880B021F78 SYNC02_Ry_Ang_0Time SYNC02_Ry_Ang_RDC 560001 820B021F56 560001 850B021F59 560001 800B021F54 SYNC02_SCK_CS16 560001 840B021F5F Check for synchronous network Close command Operate Check for asynchronous network SYNC02_SBP_SSP 560001 800B02EDE1 Bypassing condition On SyncRy1 dfEN SyncRy2 dfEN On SYNC02_SBK_CSP 560001 ...

Страница 712: ...s When required a user preferred sync condition can be added to the SYNCHK function using the PLC connection points For the SYNCHK1 logic points SYNC01_SCL_F_ECP _LPS_CL_ECP and _SPS_CL_ECP are provided Similar points are also provided in the SYNCHK2 function vii Relay selection using PLC signals As described in 4 6 3 iv either the SYNCHK_Ry1 or SYNCHK_Ry2 function can be chosen for check synchron...

Страница 713: ...1 function DS1 open DS2 closed DS1 closed Relay selection logic programmed by the user using the PLC function SYNCHK_Ry2_selection SYNC01_RY2_USE_STS Figure 4 6 16 Relay selection signal provided by DPSY function an example Note The relationship between the injected voltage signals and the SYNCHK_Ry function is discussed in section 4 6 6 Note The user should also connect the SYNCHK_Ry2_selection s...

Страница 714: ...D PLC signals for relay selection relating to SYNCHK2 SYNC02_RY2_USE_STS 560001 800B02EDEE SYNCHK2 Function ID 560001 SYNC02_SYN_CLC Sync success To DPSY02 560001 850B021F59 SYNC01_SYN_CLC Sync success To DPSY01 560001 850B011F59 Selection signals are injected by PLC logic made by the user Figure 4 6 17 Relay selection made using PLC signals Table 4 6 7 PLC connection point Relay selection Signal ...

Страница 715: ...HK_ Ry2 Scheme switches SyncRy2 VR etc select a running voltage and an incoming voltage Relays for incoming voltage Relays for running voltage V2a V2b V2c VCT Setting names Figure 4 6 18 Voltage signals selected using scheme switches Note For the actual terminal arrangement and signals injected see chapter Technical description Transformer module for AC analog input Figure 4 6 18 illustrates that ...

Страница 716: ...resent the running voltage VR and the incoming voltage VI respectively Consequently V L1 and V2 L1 are set for the scheme switches SyncRy1 VR and SyncRy1 VI respectively Table 4 6 8 shows the setting example for this arrangement Table 4 6 8 Setting example Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value SyncRy1 VR Selection of running voltage V L1 Either of V L1 V L2 V L3 SyncRy1 VI Selecti...

Страница 717: ...e enable Off SYNC01_LRDIEN Off On SYNC DEV1 Live Run Dead Incom close mode enable On SYNC01_DRLIEN Off On SYNC DEV1 Dead Run Live Incom close mode enable On SYNC01_DRDIEN Off On SYNC DEV1 Dead Run Dead Incom close mode enable On SYNC 02 SYNC02_TLRDIDRLI 0 00 5 00 s V check timer Live Run Dead Incom Dead Run Live Incom 5 00 SYNC02_TDRDI 0 00 5 00 s V check timer Dead Run Dead Incom 5 00 SYNC02_TSYN...

Страница 718: ...or the checking SyncRy1 150 SyncRy1 df 0 01 2 00 Hz Difference frequency for the checking SyncRy1 1 00 SyncRy1 TCB 10 500 ms CB Operate timer for SyncRy1 100 Synchronizing check relay 2 SyncRy2 VR V L1 V L2 V L3 V L12 V L23 V L31 V2 L1 V2 L2 V2 L3 V2 L12 V2 L23 V2 L31 V3 V4 Running Voltage V4 SyncRy2 VI V L1 V L2 V L3 V L12 V L23 V L31 V2 L1 V2 L2 V2 L3 V2 L12 V2 L23 V2 L31 V3 V4 Incoming Voltage ...

Страница 719: ...n signal 09 8E0B011F68 SYNC01_SCK_CS10 SYNC DEV1 synchronism check condition signal 10 820B011F69 SYNC01_SCK_CS11 SYNC DEV1 synchronism check condition signal 11 830B011F6A SYNC01_SCK_CS12 SYNC DEV1 synchronism check condition signal 12 840B011F6B SYNC01_SCK_CS13 SYNC DEV1 synchronism check condition signal 13 850B011F6C SYNC01_SCK_CS14 SYNC DEV1 synchronism check condition signal 14 870B011F6D SY...

Страница 720: ...ynchronism check condition signal 09 8E0B021F68 SYNC02_SCK_CS10 SYNC DEV2 synchronism check condition signal 10 820B021F69 SYNC02_SCK_CS11 SYNC DEV2 synchronism check condition signal 11 830B021F6A SYNC02_SCK_CS12 SYNC DEV2 synchronism check condition signal 12 840B021F6B SYNC02_SCK_CS13 SYNC DEV2 synchronism check condition signal 13 850B021F6C SYNC02_SCK_CS14 SYNC DEV2 synchronism check conditio...

Страница 721: ... SYNC DEV1 synchronism close success condition signal from PLC 800B01EDE5 SYNC01_SPS_CL_ECP SYNC DEV1 split SYNC close enable condition signal from PLC 800B01EDEC SYNC01_SS_VCS_PLC SYNC DEV1 success voltage condition signal from PLC 800B02EDEA SYNC02_DDV_CL_ECP SYNC DEV2 27Vr 27Vi close enable condition signal from PLC 800B02EDE9 SYNC02_DLV_CL_ECP SYNC DEV2 27Vr 84Vi close enable condition signal ...

Страница 722: ...n information the OK NG decision information is transferred to the control functions which control the external devices Following which the control functions can commence with the control of the selected devices in response to the respective OK NG decision information Note Details of SPOS DPSY and TPOS features are discussed separately elsewhere in the instruction manual under the Chapter Control ...

Страница 723: ...its Device status Circuit breaker CB Dis connector DS Device status Interlock Control Function ILK Device GOOSE transmission data Other IEDs GOOSE receiving information OK NG decision Binary Output circuits Device control Control GOOSE subscription data Interlock formulas PC GR TIEMS SPOS DPOS and others Device status Figure 4 7 1 Interlock check process 4 7 1 ILK specification i Maximum number of...

Страница 724: ...ith the arrangement of the devices shown in Figure 4 7 2 interlock check formulae can be configured from equations 4 7 1 to 4 7 9 The status of respective devices stVal and interlock operators and are placed on the right hand side of the equations and the interlock condition e g Q0 Closing is placed on the left hand side of the equations The interlock operators are also shown in Table 4 7 2 Q1 Q0 ...

Страница 725: ...ate of under voltage relay On state means no voltage F52VT State of VT MCB switch Sign Interlock operator AND Sign Interlock operator OR Note When CB 𝑄0 is open logic level of 𝑄0 is 1 On the other hand when CB 𝑄0 is closed logic level of 𝑄0 is 1 Note For example on the left hand side of equation 4 7 5 Opening reflects the control direction of CB 𝑄0 For example in equation 4 7 12 the interlock cond...

Страница 726: ...ent controllable objects Note For further information see section 4 7 3 iii 4 7 3 Interlock check method i Node and input output signals A node is represented by an interlock operator input signals stVal and Quality and output signals stVal and Quality For example Figure 4 7 3 shows a node with an OR interlock operator input signals and an output signal When stVal and Quality are applied to the in...

Страница 727: ...e 5 Node 2 Node 4 Node 6 Output Signal monitoring point Users can see signals at signal monitoring points using the GR TIEMS Users can see signals by IED screens OR AND AND AND OR Input A Input B Input C Input D Input E Input F Input G Input H Input I Input J Figure 4 7 4 Operation of interlock check We can see that equation 4 7 10 is a representation of Figure 4 7 4 This equation is computed in a...

Страница 728: ...the interlock operator AND the AND operator outputs the quality information intact That is the output quality information is not affected by device status stVal Table 4 7 4 shows two input signals A B and the output signal for AND Table 4 7 4 Output signals stVal Quality for AND Input B stVal Quality 0 OK 0 NG 1 OK 1 NG Input A stVal Quality 0 OK 0 OK 0 NG 0 OK 0 NG 1 OK 0 OK 0 NG 1 OK 1 NG 0 OK 0...

Страница 729: ...al for all input signals and if the quality information of NG is given for an input signal then the output signal Quality is represented as NG On the other hand if all input signals stVal are represented by 1 and if the quality information for the input signals stVal 1 is given then the representation OK can be weighted for the output signal Quality Note that quality information OK for input signa...

Страница 730: ...NOR the NOR operator outputs the quality information intact That is the NOR interlock operator outputs quality information which is not influenced by device status stVal Table 4 7 6 shows an input signal A and the output signal for the NOR interlock operator Table 4 7 6 Output signals stVal Quality of NOT Output stVal Quality Input A stVal Quality 0 OK 1 OK 0 NG 1 NG 1 OK 0 OK 1 NG 0 NG Figure 4 7...

Страница 731: ... signal which can be represented by equations 4 7 17 and 4 7 18 stVal stVa A COMP stVa B 4 7 17 Quality Quality A 4 7 18 Note Input signal B does not have quality information because its signal is a threshold value stVal Quality stVal Quality Output Input A Input B stVal COMP Figure 4 7 8 Interlock operator COMP and Input Output signals Device status output by control functions transposed As shown...

Страница 732: ... BI signal 0 off 0 Note Values are altered when AND OR or NOT is applied as an interlock operator Note Values are altered when COMP is applied as an interlock operator Note Values are altered when the DPOS output is an inverted signal 4 7 4 Configuration of Interlock formulae Interlock check formulae should be stored in the Interlock database as shown in Figure 4 7 1 These formulae are configured ...

Страница 733: ...direction at SPOS DEV10 31010A1DA2 SPOS10 ON Result of interlock judgement in On closed direction at SPOS DEV10 31010B1DA0 SPOS11 OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF open direction at SPOS DEV11 31010B1DA2 SPOS11 ON Result of interlock judgement in On closed direction at SPOS DEV11 31010C1DA0 SPOS12 OFF Result of interlock judgement in OFF open direction at SPOS DEV12 31010C1DA2 SPOS12 ON Res...

Страница 734: ...10 OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV10 31030A1DA2 DPOS10 CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV10 31030B1DA0 DPOS11 OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV11 31030B1DA2 DPOS11 CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV11 31030C1DA0 DPOS12 OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction ...

Страница 735: ...S32 OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV32 3103201DA2 DPOS32 CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV32 3103211DA0 DPOS33 OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV33 3103211DA2 DPOS33 CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV33 3103221DA0 DPOS34 OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction...

Страница 736: ...S54 OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV54 3103361DA2 DPOS54 CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV54 3103371DA0 DPOS55 OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction at DPOS DEV55 3103371DA2 DPOS55 CLOSE Result of interlock judgement in close direction at DPOS DEV55 3103381DA0 DPOS56 OPEN Result of interlock judgement in open direction...

Страница 737: ... switch for P3 at TPOS DEV02 3104031DA0 TPOS3 P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV03 3104031DA2 TPOS3 P2 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P2 at TPOS DEV03 3104031DA4 TPOS3 P3 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P3 at TPOS DEV03 3104041DA0 TPOS4 P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV04 3104041DA2 TPOS4 P2 Result of interlock judgeme...

Страница 738: ...1DA2 TPOS17 P2 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P2 at TPOS DEV17 3104111DA4 TPOS17 P3 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P3 at TPOS DEV17 3104121DA0 TPOS18 P1 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P1 at TPOS DEV18 3104121DA2 TPOS18 P2 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P2 at TPOS DEV18 3104121DA4 TPOS18 P3 Result of interlock judgement to switch for P3 at TPOS DE...

Страница 739: ...ures in the other DPOS02 72 functions are identical to the DPOS01 function Note A binary IO module has binary input circuits BIs and binary output circuits BOs the user makes the connection between the DPOS01 function and the binary IO module using a signal number is made of a Function ID and an Element ID The signal name and number of the DPOS01 function are listed later Tips If the user wishes t...

Страница 740: ... local end Select command On by the PLC function Select command Off by the PLC function Figure 4 8 1 Outline of Select command On Input point required mapping Figure 4 8 2 shows the Select logic when a Select command On Remote ON Control signal is applied to the DPOS01 function The logic has the input point DEV01_CONTROL_REQ for the reception of the select command That is the input point must be m...

Страница 741: ...e end in DPOS01 Note The software interlocking ILK function provides the operation criteria for On The ILK function is discussed separately note that the operation criteria is defined by the ILK function itself i e the user cannot set the condition Note A select condition signal is provided from the select condition scheme For more information see Figure 4 8 13 Note An automatic sequence control A...

Страница 742: ... Select command Off from the local end Select command On by the PLC function Select command Off by the PLC function Figure 4 8 3 Outline of Select command Off Input point mapped from the communication Figure 4 8 4 shows the Select logic when a Select command Off Remote OFF Control signal is applied at the input point DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Output signal to BO The DPOS01 function in Figure 4 8 4 can iss...

Страница 743: ...K condition Operate command without ILK condition For SBO operation For DIR operation To Wait for a command For DIR operation For SBO operation Figure 4 8 4 Select Off from the remote end in DPOS01 Note The ILK function provides the operation criteria for Off Note A select condition signal is provided from the select condition scheme For more information see Figure 4 8 13 Note An automatic sequenc...

Страница 744: ...5 Outline of Select command On Input signal generated at the local end Figure 4 8 6 shows the Select logic when Select command On Local ON Control signal is applied to the DPOS01 function The signal is provided when an On key is pressed on the IED front panel the user is not required to take account of mapping Note that the user should set the scheme switch DPOS01 CTRAHMI to SBO when operation fro...

Страница 745: ...for a next command Figure 4 8 6 Select On on the front panel in DPOS01 Note The ILK function provides the operation criterion for On For testing nullifying the ILK function is possible using Interlock bypassing Interlock bypassing is indicated by the status ICB in a software switch controller SOFTSW Note A select condition signal is provided from the select condition scheme For more information se...

Страница 746: ...nd Off by the PLC function Select command Off from the remote end Figure 4 8 7 Outline of Select command Off Input signal generated at the local end Figure 4 8 8 shows the Select logic when a Select command Off Local OFF Control signal is received is applied to the DPOS01 function The signal is provided when the user presses the OFF key on the IED front panel the user is not required to map the si...

Страница 747: ...ith ILK condition Operate command with ILK condition For SBO operation For DIR operation Figure 4 8 8 Select Off on the front panel in DPOS01 Note The ILK function provides the operation criteria for Off Note A select condition signal is provided from the select condition scheme For more information see Figure 4 8 13 Note An automatic sequence control ASEQ function can provide sequential signals f...

Страница 748: ...l signal is generated by the PLC function There are two input points for reception of this signal the former connection point PLC 1 is used for the reception of the select command requiring the interlock check the later connection point PLC 2 is used for the reception of the select command not requiring the interlock check That is for the DPOS01 function when the Select command On PLC ON Control s...

Страница 749: ...operation For DIR operation DPOS01_OSL_BO_CSF 512001_8603011DC6 Select Failed To BO connection Select success To Wait for a command To Wait for a next command Figure 4 8 10 Select On using the PLC function in DPOS01 Note The software interlocking ILK function provides the operation criteria for On The ILK function is discussed separately note that the operation criteria is defined in the ILK funct...

Страница 750: ... command On by the PLC function Figure 4 8 11 Outline of Select command Off Input signal from the PLC function Figure 4 8 12 shows the Select logic when a select command Off PLC Off Control signal is generated by the PLC function There are two input points for the reception of this signal like in signal select command On PLC On Control That is if interlock checking is required use the connection p...

Страница 751: ...1_OP_COMMAND 512001 800301EE30 OFF control command requiring no ILK checking PLC 2 connection point Operate command with ILK condition DPOS01 Open Select Failed To BO connection Select success To Wait for a command For DIR operation Figure 4 8 12 Select Off by the PLC function in DPOS01 Note The ILK function provides the operation criteria for Off Note A select condition signal is provided from th...

Страница 752: ...ogic to the original logic How to replace the original logic If the user wishes to replace the select condition logic the user can replace it using the PLC connection point User configurable condition 1 Connect the user customized logic using DPOS01IN_TMP_31 which is listed as PLC 2 in Table 4 8 7 2 Set the scheme switch DPOS01 LGSLFFCT to PLC How to add another select condition signal If adding a...

Страница 753: ...ing disables any operation except its own the Command Blocking is initiated by the status CBK in a software switch controller SOTFSW The IEC61850 standard defines Command Blocking as CmdBlk For more information on CBK see Chapter Control and monitoring application Software switch controller See the signal CBK_STATE of Table 4 8 6 2Note Double Command Blocking DCB is an operation philosophy in the ...

Страница 754: ... is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation direction compared with the previous operation direction i e when on off is performed sequentially On the other hand if On is set for the scheme switch the logic is not blocked 9Note The user will need to program the PLC logic Control hierarchy condition The user is also required to connect the logic condition with the select condition logi...

Страница 755: ...for Command Off Signal Number Signal Name Description M O 512001 800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND DPOS01 PLC Off control checking with interlock PLC 1 O 512001 800302EE30 DEV02_OP_COMMAND DPOS02 PLC Off control checking with interlock PLC 1 O 512001 800303EE30 DEV03_OP_COMMAND DPOS03 PLC Off control checking with interlock PLC 1 O 512001 800348EE30 DEV72_OP_COMMAND DPOS72 PLC Off control checking with ...

Страница 756: ..._TMP_32 DPOS72 additional failure condition PLC 1 O 512001 800301EE61 DPOS01IN_TMP_31 DPOS01 user configurable select condition PLC 2 O 512001 800302EE61 DPOS02IN_TMP_31 DPOS02 user configurable select condition PLC 2 O 512001 800303EE61 DPOS03IN_TMP_31 DPOS03 user configurable select condition PLC 2 O 512001 800348EE61 DPOS72IN_TMP_31 DPOS72 user configurable select condition PLC 2 O 512001 82030...

Страница 757: ...OS01_OSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 select ON command for Binary Output 512001 8603021DC6 DPOS02_OSL_BO_FLG DPOS02 select ON command for Binary Output 512001 8603031DC6 DPOS03_OSL_BO_FLG DPOS03 select ON command for Binary Output 512001 8603481DC6 DPOS72_OSL_BO_FLG DPOS72 select On command for Binary Output ix Setting names Note The xx within DPOSxx represents the DPOS function number e g if DPOS03 is consider...

Страница 758: ...the remote end Select command On from the remote end Select command Off from the local end Select command On from the local end Select command On by the PLC function Select command Off by the PLC function Wait for a next command Figure 4 8 14 Outline of cancel command from the remote end Input point required mapping Figure 4 8 15 depicts the cancel logic when a Cancel command Remote Cancel signal ...

Страница 759: ...othing Cancel decision Success Failed Cancel logic Wait for a command Operate logic Operate command Operate logic Select logics Selecting Off from remote end Selecting On from remote end Selecting Off from front panel Selecting On from front panel Selecting On by the PLC function Selecting Off by the PLC function Cancel from the remote end Wait for a next command Figure 4 8 16 Outline of cancel co...

Страница 760: ...1 LGCNFFCT DPOS01 function Function ID 512001 User configurable condition PLC connection point Fixedlogic DPOS01 LGCNFFCT To cancel logic in DPOS01 Unmatched condition detected 1 DPOS01IN_TMP_44 512001 800301EE69 1 PLC 1 Figure 4 8 18 Logic Cancel condition in DPOS01 1Note The criteria unmatched conditions are determined when the Test bit status in the cancel command is not identical to the IED te...

Страница 761: ...ndition O O 512001 800348EE69 DPOS72IN_TMP_44 DPOS72 user configurable cancel condition O Table 4 8 12 PLC monitoring points Output signal for cancel condition Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 8603011E95 DPOS01_CC_SS DPOS01 cancel success 512001 8603021E95 DPOS02_CC_SS DPOS02 cancel success 512001 8603031E95 DPOS03_CC_SS DPOS03 cancel success 512001 8603481E95 DPOS72_CC_SS DPOS72 cance...

Страница 762: ... Operate command Off by the PLC function Wait for a next command Select stage Select command Off from the remote end Select command On from the remote end Select command Off from the local end Select command On from the local end Select command On by the PLC function Select command Off by the PLC function Figure 4 8 19 Outline of Operate command On Mapping required for Input point Figure 4 8 20 il...

Страница 763: ...ignal is generated in the operate condition logic see Figure 4 8 31 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch DPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition is required it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate condition logic The alternative operate condition can be connected to the above logic using connection point 1 user configurable co...

Страница 764: ...e local end Operate command On from the remote end Operate command On by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC function Wait for a next command Select stage Select command Off from the remote end Select command On from the remote end Select command Off from the local end Select command On from the local end Select command On by the PLC function Select command Off by the PLC function Figu...

Страница 765: ...erate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic see Figure 4 8 31 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch DPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition is required it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate condition logic The alternative operate condition can be connected to the above logic using connection point 3 Use...

Страница 766: ...nd Off from the local end Operate command On by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC function Wait for a next command Select stage Select command Off from the remote end Select command On from the remote end Select command Off from the local end Select command On from the local end Select command On by the PLC function Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command On from the l...

Страница 767: ... An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic see Figure 4 8 31 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch DPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition is required it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate condition logic The alternative operate condition can be connected to the above using connection point 1 use...

Страница 768: ...d Off from remote end Operate command On by the PLC function Operate command Off by the PLC function Wait for a next command Select stage Select command Off from the remote end Select command On from the remote end Select command Off from the local end Select command On from the local end Select command On by the PLC function Select command Off by the PLC function Operate command On from remote en...

Страница 769: ...on signal is generated in the operate condition logic see Figure 4 8 31 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch DPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition is required it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate condition logic The alternative operate condition can be connected to the above logic using connection point 3 User configurabl...

Страница 770: ...ed Operate logic Signal output Figure 4 8 27 Outline of Operate command On Input signal from the PLC function Figure 4 8 28 describes the operate logic when an Operate command On PLC On control signal is generated by the PLC function There are two input points for reception of the signal Operate command On PLC On control the former connection point PLC 3 is used for the reception of the operate co...

Страница 771: ...512001 800301EE32 Figure 4 8 28 Operate On by the PLC function in DPOS01 Note The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for On Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic see Figure 4 8 31 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch DPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition programmed by the user is required in place of the signal generated by the or...

Страница 772: ...Select command On by the PLC Select command Off by the PLC Operate command On from the remote end Operate command On from the local end PLC logic programmed by the user l Operate command Off by the PLC Do nothing Operation decision Success Failed Operate logic Signal output Figure 4 8 29 Outline of Operate command Off Input signal from the PLC function Figure 4 8 30 depicts the operate logic when ...

Страница 773: ... PLC function in DPOS01 Note The ILK function can provide the criteria for operation for control of the Off operation Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic see Figure 4 8 31 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch DPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition programmed by the user is required in place of the signal generated by the original operate cond...

Страница 774: ... functionality of the original logic does not meet with user requirements the following alternatives are available 3 The user can replace the original logic with alternative logic 4 The user can add another signal to the original logic Replacing the original logic If the user wishes to replace the operate condition logic completely it can be achieved using connection point User configurable condit...

Страница 775: ...d Blocking disables all operation except for its own Command Blocking is implemented as CBK in a software switch controller SOTFSW The IEC61850 standard defines Command Blocking as CmdBlk For more information on CBK see Chapter Control and monitoring application Software switch controller See the signal CBK_STATE in Table 4 8 6 2Note Double Command Blocking DCB is an operation philosophy in the co...

Страница 776: ...ates that the signal is provided for optional use M indicated that the user should map set configure the signal otherwise the user experience an operational failure if the default settings are used N A indicates that that the user cannot change the state of the signal Table 4 8 14 PLC connection points Input point for PLC 1 User configurable condition Signal Number Signal Name Description M O 5120...

Страница 777: ...mmand for Binary Output 512001 8203031DD3 DPOS03_OEX_BO DPOS03 operate ON command for Binary Output 512001 8203481DD3 DPOS72_OEX_BO DPOS72 operate ON command for Binary Output 512001 8103011DD0 DPOS01_FEX_BO DPOS01 operate OFF command for Binary Output 512001 8103021DD0 DPOS02_FEX_BO DPOS02 operate OFF command for Binary Output 512001 8103031DD0 DPOS03_FEX_BO DPOS03 operate OFF command for Binary ...

Страница 778: ...ntrol 512001 8603031E91 DPOS03_EX_FFL DPOS03 failed control 512001 8603481E91 DPOS72_EX_FFL DPOS72 failed control ix Setting names Note The xx of DPOSxx represents the DPOS function number e g if the DPOS03 is considered the xx is equal to 03 The suffix xx can be represented by 01 to 72 Table 4 8 21 Setting of Operate in DPOSxx Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value DPOSxx PLSM Met...

Страница 779: ...om On to Off the counter value is incremented C OnOff Counting up occurs when any state change occurs that is Off to On or On to Off NA Stop the count function Note The operation counter value is not cleared when power is removed from the IED The operation counter is available in the DPOS01 to DPOS72 functions On state Off state Figure 4 8 32 Device signal The user can change the value of the oper...

Страница 780: ...m the remote end in DPOS01 Note The operate condition signal is provided from the operate condition logic of Figure 4 8 36 Note The user can apply other counter change commands for phase A B and C as shown in Table 4 8 23 The resultant signals for the other DPOS02 72 logics are shown in Table 4 8 24 Output signal to BO The DPOS01 function can issue a Result signal at output point DPOS01_SLD_CSCN i...

Страница 781: ...plication Software switch controller See the signal CBK_STATE of Table 4 8 6 2Note Double Command Blocking DCB is an operation philosophy in the common control function CMNCTRL It can be used to protect the substation The user can program it using GR TIEMS The DCB operating signal is denoted as DCB RCV OR in Table 4 8 6 For more information see Chapter Control and monitoring application Common con...

Страница 782: ...12001 7003486D0B DEV72_BPH_REQ DPOS72 change command received Mapping Data for B phase counter value 512001 7003016D0C DEV01_CPH_REQ DPOS01 change command received Mapping Data for C phase counter value 512001 7003026D0C DEV02_CPH_REQ DPOS02 change command received Mapping Data for C phase counter value 512001 7003036D0C DEV03_CPH_REQ DPOS03 change command received Mapping Data for C phase counter...

Страница 783: ...End Switch status is changed from On to Intermediate OT2 Start Device status Intermediate sensed End Switch status is changed from Intermediate to Off OT3 Start Signal DPOS01_OEX_BO sensed End Switch status is changed from Off to Intermediate OT4 Start Device status Intermediate sensed End Switch status is changed from Intermediate to On Note The function operation time measurement is available in...

Страница 784: ...nd numbers Table 4 8 27 Mapping points Signal Number Signal Name Description 512001 7003006D0D DEV01_RESET_REQ DPOS01 operation time reset command received Mapping Data 512001 7003016D0D DEV02_RESET_REQ DPOS02 operation time reset command received Mapping Data 512001 7003026D0D DEV03_RESET_REQ DPOS03 operation time reset command received Mapping Data 512001 7003486D0D DEV48_RESET_REQ DPOS72 operat...

Страница 785: ...ponding to phase A is generated using a normally open contact NO and a normally closed contact NC If a NO and a NC contact are exchanged the input signal should be determined by inversion that is the user is required to set On for both scheme switches DPOS01A NOPSGI and DPOS01A NCLSGI Note The state signal acquired can be monitored For more information see Chapter Automatic supervision Grouping th...

Страница 786: ... DPOS01_ F_QLT_SPP 512001 8103011F5F BI circuit and DPOS01 Figure 4 8 40 Acquisition of a state signal Note The user should set the actual input points See chapter Technical description Binary IO module Note In Figure 4 8 40 two signals can be issued DPOS01_3PH_STATE and DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP One is used in the select condition logic and the operate condition logic see Figure 4 8 13 and Figure 4 8 28 A...

Страница 787: ... 41 two signals can be issued DPOS01_3PH_STATE and DPOS01_F_QLT_SPP which are the same as the ones of the Figure 4 8 40 Event suppression If the status of a device chatters for a short time the DPOS function will receive iterative signals from the device Such iterative signals can cause extra burden for the DPOS function hence event suppression can be required to reduce additional burden created T...

Страница 788: ...LG as a result the Select command On and the Select command Off signals are issued at BO1 and BO2 respectively BO1_SOURCE 200B01 310200E11D Select logic in DPOS01 PLC connection point on BO1 Select logic for select command On in DPOS01 Select logic for select command Off in DPOS01 1 BO1_CPL Off On DRIVER BO1 Signal captured by setting Input signal 1 Input signal 2 Input signal 3 Input signal 4 Inp...

Страница 789: ...command Off 1 BO4_CPL Off On DRIVER BO4 Signal captured by setting Input signal 1 Input signal 2 Input signal 3 Input signal 4 Input signal 5 Input signal 6 Input signal 7 Input signal 8 1 BO4 200B01_8302031112 BO4 RB 200B01_8302031113 To contact health check To contact health check To contact health check Connected by Programming Connected by Programming Operate command Off to the device Figure 4...

Страница 790: ...esult of contact health check Connection made by the user Figure 4 8 45 Example connection of Select command On for the health check feature Setting for Select command Off Similar to select command On the point DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG is connected with the BO2 circuit the user is required to key point BO2 RB for the setting DPOS01 FSLBORD Do not key the point DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG 55120018...

Страница 791: ...021113 Connection made by the user Figure 4 8 47 Example connection of Operate command On for the health check feature Setting for Operate command Off Similarly the point BO4 RB must be applied for the setting DPOS01 FEXBORD Operate logic in DPOS01 Signal designated by setting DPOS01 FEXBORD BO4 circuit at IO 1 Contact health check logic in DPOS01 Result of contact health check DPOS01_FEX_BO 51200...

Страница 792: ...nected to BO2 at IO 1 200B01 8102011113 BO2 RB set for DPOS01 FSLBORD OK DPOS01_OEX_BO_CSF is connected to BO3 at IO 1 200B01 8202021113 BO3 RB set for DPOS01 OEXBORD OK DPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF is connected to BO4 atIO 1 200B01 8302031113 BO4 RB set for DPOS01 FEXBORD OK Plus DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG 512001 8603011DC6 SW1 driven with BO1 at IO 1 BO1 Drivers Select command On BO1 RB 200B01_8002001113 BO3 DPOS01...

Страница 793: ...1 8102011113 BO2 RB set for DPOS01 FSLBORD OK DPOS01_OEX_BO_CSF is connected to BO3 at IO 1 200B01 8202021113 BO3 RB set for DPOS01 OEXBORD OK DPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF is connected to BO4 at IO 1 200B01 8302031113 BO4 RB set for DPOS01 FEXBORD OK Plus DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG 512001 8603011DC6 SW1 is driven with BO1 at IO 1 BO1 Drivers BO3 DPOS01_OEX_BO 512001 8203011DD3 BO4 RB 200B01_8302031113 BO4 DPOS01_FEX_...

Страница 794: ...any BO DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG set for DPOS01 OSLBORD OK DPOS01_FSL_BO_FLG is not connected to any BO DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG set for DPOS01 FSLBORD OK DPOS01_OEX_BO_CSF is connected to BO3 at IO 1 200B01 8102011113 BO2 RB set for DPOS01 OEXBORD OK DPOS01_FEX_BO_CSF is connected to BO4 at IO 1 200B01 8202021113 BO3 RB set for DPOS01 FEXBORD OK Plus DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG 512001 8603011DC6 Drivers BO3 DPOS01_OEX_BO...

Страница 795: ...IR SBO DPOSxx EN Activate monitoring function of DPOS01 72 On Off On DPOSxx DEVTYPE Selection of device type 3 pole 3 pole 1 pile switch DPOSxx OPC Activate monitoring function of DPOS01 72 On Off On DPOSxx CPC Activate monitoring function of DPOS01 72 On Off On DPOSxxA NOPSG BI position for DPOS01 72 none BI signal DPOSxxA NCLSG BI position for DPOS01 72 none BI signal DPOSxxB NOPSG BI position f...

Страница 796: ...cal Node Step2 Mapping output data Step3 Mapping input data i Editing Logical Node The user will need to create a logical node LN for the DPOS01 function Figure 4 8 52 exemplifies the editing of a LN the LN Common Switch controller CSWI is chosen for the DPOS01 function After the user has defined an object DPC the DPOS01 logical node can be saved with the name CSWI plus LN Instance Create a defini...

Страница 797: ...igin stSeld sboClass choice operate once ctlmodel choice SBOes or SBOns sboClass can be found by scrolling down Figure 4 8 53 LN editing screen for SBO mode for example Defining DIR mode Figure 4 8 54 exemplifies the DPOS01 logic node saved as save as CSWI4 In the DIR mode the following three items should be selected using GR TIEMS Oper origin ctlmodel choice DOes or DOns Figure 4 8 54 LN editing ...

Страница 798: ...03011001 DPOS01_3PH_STATE Ctrl CSWI4 Pos q Quality ST 512001 3103011005 DPOS01_3PH_QUALITY Ctrl CSWI4 Pos t Timestamp ST 512001 9003011006 DPOS01_3PH_TIMESTAMP Ctrl CSWI4 Pos stSeld BOOLEAN ST 512001 0003011D90 DPOS01_STD_RPT Note Status ST is defined in the function constraint FC of the IEC 61850 standard Drag and drop Figure 4 8 55 Attribute mapped into DPCSO object of CSWI4 iii Mapping input da...

Страница 799: ... CO Ctrl CSWI4 Pos Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO Ctrl CSWI4 Pos Oper ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl CSWI4 Pos Oper T Timestamp CO Ctrl CSWI4 Pos Oper Test BOOLEAN CO Ctrl CSWI4 Pos Oper Check Check CO Ctrl CSWI4 Pos Oper origin orCat orCategory CO Ctrl CSWI4 Pos Oper origin orIdent Octet64 CO Ctrl CSWI4 Pos Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO Ctrl CSWI4 Pos Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl CSWI4 Pos Cancel T Timestamp CO Ctrl CSW...

Страница 800: ...not Off DPOS01C NOPSG Preferred signal Normally Open Signal of phase C Not assigned DPOS01C NOPSGI Off On Signal inverse or not Off DPOS01C NCLSG Preferred signal Normally Close Signal of phase C Not assigned DPOS01C NCLSGI Off On Signal inverse or not Off DPOS01 OPC And Or Normally Open contact grouping And DPOS01 CLC And Or Normally Close contact grouping Or DPOS01 SPPEN Off On Automatic event s...

Страница 801: ... output FixedLogic DPOS01 LGCNFFCT FixedLogic PLC Change logic about cancel command fail factor FixedLogic DPOS01 PLSM Fix Var pulse mode Fix DPOS01 CPW 0 1 50 0 s control pulse width 1 0 DPOS01 RST 1 0 100 0 s response check timer 30 0 DPOS01 CNTS NA C On C Off C OnOff count status NA DPOS01 OPETMEN Off On Operation Time Measurement enable Off DPOS01 APBD Process Bay status change origin Process ...

Страница 802: ...DPOS01 state for MIMIC 8903011DC0 DPOS01_NSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 select binary output signal 8603011F7E DPOS01_NSL_CS07 DPOS01 select receive signal check answer 8103011E82 DPOS01_OEC_OK_CS DPOS01 on direction execute command OK condition signal 8203011DD3 DPOS01_OEX_BO DPOS01 on direction execute binary output signal 8603011DC6 DPOS01_OSL_BO_FLG DPOS01 on direction select binary output signal 8803011F7...

Страница 803: ...C count change selected signal stSeld for SAS 3203011D2C DPOS01C_CNT_VAL DPOS01 C phase count value Common signal monitoring points DPOS01 Function ID 512001 Element ID Name Description 800301EE32 DEV01_CL_COMMAND dev01 close command 800301EE33 DEV01_CL_INTERLOCK dev01 close command with interlock bypass 800301EE30 DEV01_OP_COMMAND dev01 open command 800301EE31 DEV01_OP_INTERLOCK dev01 open comman...

Страница 804: ... ones for all of the other devices For example when the user wishes to find the DPOS02A_FLT_DET point provided for the 2nd device use the description of DPOS01A_FLT_DET The user can obtain the ID value of DPOS02A_FLT_DET by using the following steps Step 1 Find the element ID for DPOS01A_FLT_DET i e 8303011F49 Step 2 Identify the numbers at the fifth and sixth digit from the ID i e 01 Step 3 Choos...

Страница 805: ...the TPOS function are used for issuing commands the BI circuits are used for receiving responses hence the user should connect the BO and BI circuits with the TPOS function The TPOS function includes three logic groups 1 Select logic 2 Cancel logic and 3 Operate logic EDS devices 43 switches can be controlled separately i e the function has a number of separate sets for control i e TPOS01 TPOS02 e...

Страница 806: ...s To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ordering number and check the order number at the G T position referring to the comparison table below For more information see Appendix Ordering Table 4 9 1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers Sec Feature Ordering No at G T 31 32 Main features NA Number of functions 24 Applicable NA Not ap...

Страница 807: ...rom the local end P1 control by the PLC function P2 control by the PLC function P3 control by the PLC function Select stage Cancel logic Wait for a next command Cancel command Wait for a command Operate logic Operate command Cancel logic Operate logic P2 control from the remote end Figure 4 9 2 Outline of select command P1 control Input point required mapping Figure 4 9 3 shows the select logic wh...

Страница 808: ...ria is defined by the ILK function itself i e the user cannot set the condition Note A select condition signal is provided from the select condition scheme For more information see Figure 4 9 20 Note An automatic sequence control ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control The TPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function being in the operation For more information of th...

Страница 809: ...ect logic when a Select command P2 Remote P2 Control signal is received at the input point DEV01_CONTROL_REQ TPOS01 function Function ID 513001 TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG 513001 8A04011DC6 DEV01_CONTROL_REQ Command P2 Control from the remote ILK condition P2 passed Either SBO mode or DIR mode e g ctlmodel in IEC61850 In SBO operate In DIR operate Select Failed 513001 7004016D08 TPOS1 P2 To BO connection I...

Страница 810: ...urns to the Wait for a command stage iii Receiving select command P3 control from the remote end Figure 4 9 6 outlines the reception of the select command e in P3 control from the remote end Signal reception IEC61850 P3 control from the remote end Signal output Select decision Success Failed Selection logic P2control from the remote end P1 control from the local end P2 control from the local end P...

Страница 811: ...n Figure 4 9 7 Select P3 control from the remote end in TPOS01 Note The ILK function provides the operation criteria for P3 control Note To identify the input and output points of the other TPOS logics see Table 4 9 5 Table 4 9 7 and Table 4 9 10 Note An automatic sequence control ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control The TPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ functi...

Страница 812: ...n Select stage Cancel logic Wait for a command Cancel command Wait for a command Operate logic Operate command Cancel logic Operate logic P1 control from the remote end Figure 4 9 8 Outline of select command P1 control Input signal generated at the local end Figure 4 9 9 shows the select logic when a Select command Local P1 Control signal is applied to the TPOS01 function The signal is provided wh...

Страница 813: ... provided from the select condition scheme For more information see Figure 4 9 20 Note An automatic sequence control ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control The TPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it is in operation For more information regarding the ASEQ function see Chapter Control and monitoring application Automatic sequence control function Note T...

Страница 814: ...ded when the user presses a Local P2 control key on the IED front panel the user is not required to take account of mapping Input Output Selection logic in TPOS01 Command Local P2 Control TPOS1 P2 ILK condition P2 passed ILK bypassing 1 ICB_STATE TPOS01 CTRAHMI SBO TPOS01 function Function ID 513001 SBO DIR 1 0 1s 0 t 0 6s 0 t Either SBO mode or DIR mode e g ctlmodel in IEC61850 Automatic sequence...

Страница 815: ...ect command P3 control from the local end Figure 4 9 12 outlines the reception of the select command P3 control from the local end Keying Select command P3control from the local end Signal output Select decision Success Failed Selection logic P2 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end P1 control from the local end P2 control from the local end P1 control by the PLC function P2 c...

Страница 816: ...ther TPOS logics see Table 4 9 6 Table 4 9 7 and Table 4 9 10 Note A select condition signal is provided from the select condition scheme For more information see Figure 4 9 20 Note An automatic sequence control ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control The TPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it is in operation For more information regarding the ASEQ fun...

Страница 817: ... Figure 4 9 15 shows the select logic when a Select command P1 Control PLC P1 Control signal is generated by the PLC function There are two input points for the reception the former connection point PLC 1 is used for the reception of the select command when the interlock check is required the later connection point PLC 2 is used for the reception of the select command when the interlock check is n...

Страница 818: ...heme For more information see Figure 4 9 20 Note An automatic sequence control ASEQ function can provide sequential signals for automatic control The TPOS01 operation is blocked for the ASEQ function when it is in operation For more information regarding the ASEQ function see Chapter Control and monitoring application Automatic sequence control function Note The TPOS01 function can run in either t...

Страница 819: ...and Operate logic Operate command Cancel logic Operate logic P1 control from the remote end Figure 4 9 16 Outline of select command P2 control Input signal from the PLC function Figure 4 9 17 shows the select logic when a signal Selection command P2 Control PLC P2 Control is generated by the PLC function There are two input points for the reception like in the Select command P1 Control PLC P1 Cont...

Страница 820: ...ed To BO connection Select success To Wait for a command Figure 4 9 17 Select logic P2 control using the PLC function in TPOS01 Note To identify the input and output points of the other TPOS logics see Table 4 9 3 for PLC 1 and 2 and Table 4 9 10 for the outputs Note The ILK function provides the operation criteria for P2 control Note A select condition signal is provided from the select condition...

Страница 821: ...perate logic Operate command Cancel logic Operate logic P1 control from the remote end Figure 4 9 18 Outline of select command P3 control Input signal from the PLC function Figure 4 9 9 shows the select logic when a Select command P3 Control PLC P3 Control signal is generated by the PLC function There are two input points for the reception of this signal like in the Select Command P1 Control PLC P...

Страница 822: ...d Table 4 9 10 for the outputs Output signal to BO The TPOS01 function in Figure 4 9 19 can issue a Select success signal at the output point TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG 1 1Note The output point TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG is the same as the signal shown in Figure 4 9 7 x Select condition Figure 4 9 20 shows the select condition logic in the TPOS01 function The TPOS01 function can check the condition for the select...

Страница 823: ...S01IN_TMP_24 513001 800401EE61 TPOS01IN_TMP_25 513001 810401EE62 TPOS01IN_TMP_21 513001 820401ED50 SERI_ERR 1 1 Unmatched condition detected 5 Event suppression detected 6 TPOS01_QLT_SPP BI board connection error detected 7 TPOS01_QLT_BI_ERR 513001 8204011F59 513001 8604011F5A OFF SCDEN 8 Same Directional Controlling Event P1 control command received TPOS01_ST_P1 TPOS01_ST_P2 P2 control command re...

Страница 824: ...vision of the Binary IO module can detect connection errors for BI circuits 8Note The Common control CMNCTRL function can test or check the P1 P3 control operations performed by the logic When the user sets Off for scheme switch SCDEN the operation of the logic is blocked if the logic is running in the same operation direction compared with the previous operation direction On the other hand if On ...

Страница 825: ...scription M O 513001 800401EE33 DEV01_P2_INTERLOCK P2 control checking with interlock in TPOS01 for PLC 1 O 513001 800402EE33 DEV02_P2_INTERLOCK P2 control checking with interlock in TPOS02 for PLC 1 O 513001 800403EE33 DEV03_P2_INTERLOCK P2 control checking with interlock in TPOS03 for PLC 1 513001 800418EE33 DEV24_P2_INTERLOCK P2 control checking with interlock in TPOS24 for PLC 1 O 513001 80040...

Страница 826: ...570001 3104181DA0 TPOS24 P1 Interlock condition for P1 control in TPOS24 N A 570001 3104011DA2 TPOS1 P2 Interlock condition for P2 control in TPOS01 N A 570001 3104021DA2 TPOS2 P2 Interlock condition for P2 control in TPOS02 N A 570001 3104031DA2 TPOS3 P2 Interlock condition for P2 control in TPOS03 N A 570001 3104181DA2 TPOS24 P2 Interlock condition for P2 control in TPOS24 N A 570001 3104011DA4 ...

Страница 827: ... Select command P1 for Binary Output in TPOS01 513001 8A04021DC4 TPOS02_P1SL_BO_FLG Select command P1 for Binary Output in TPOS02 513001 8A04021DC4 TPOS03_P1SL_BO_FLG Select command P1 for Binary Output in TPOS03 513001 8A04181DC4 TPOS241SL_BO_FLG Select command P1 for Binary Output in TPOS24 513001 8A04011DC6 TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG Select command P2 for Binary Output in TPOS01 513001 8A04021DC6 TPOS0...

Страница 828: ...e PLC function Wait for a command Operate logic Operate command Operate logic P1 control from the remote end P3 control by the PLC function Select stage Cancel from the local end Wait for a next command Figure 4 9 21 Outline of cancel command from remote end Input point required mapping Figure 4 9 22 depicts the cancel logic when a Cancel command Remote Cancel signal is applied to the TPOS01 funct...

Страница 829: ... Operate logic P1 control from remote end P3 control by PLC function Select stage Cancel from the remote end Wait for a next command Figure 4 9 23 Outline of cancel command from the local end Input signal Figure 4 9 24 depicts the cancel logic when a Cancel command Local cancel signal is applied to the TPOS01 function The signal is generated when the Cancel key is pressed on the IED front panel th...

Страница 830: ...ll always checks conditions That is the user is required to set either the Operate condition or the cancel condition logic If the original logic does not meet with the requirements of the user it can be replaced using the connection point User Configurable condition Connect the user customized logic with the TPOS01IN_TMP_40 which is listed in Table 4 9 12 Set scheme switch TPOS01 LGCNFFCT to PLC i...

Страница 831: ...513001 8604181E95 TPOS24_CC_SS Cancel succeed in TPOS24 513001 8704011E96 TPOS01_CC_FS Cancel failed in TPOS01 513001 8704021E96 TPOS02_CC_FS Cancel failed in TPOS02 513001 8704031E96 TPOS03_CC_FS Cancel failed in TPOS03 513001 8704181E96 TPOS24_CC_FS Cancel failed in TPOS24 v Setting name Note The xx within TPOSxx represents the TPOS function number e g if TPOS03 is considered the xx is equal to ...

Страница 832: ...ntrol by the PLC function P3 control from the local end P2 control by the PLC function Wait for a command P1 control from the remote end P3 control by the PLC function Select stage Signal output P1 control from the local end P2 control from the local end P2 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end P3 control from the local end P1 control by the PLC function P2 control by the PLC ...

Страница 833: ...the operation criteria for P1 control Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic Figure 4 9 44 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch TPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition signal is required it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal the signal generated by the original operate condition logic The alternative operate condition ca...

Страница 834: ...reception in IEC61850 P2 control from the remote end Do nothing Operation decision Success Failed Operate logic P1 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end P1 control from the local end P2 control from the local end P1 control by the PLC function P3 control from the local end P2 control by the PLC function Wait for a command P2 control from the remote end P3 control by the PLC fu...

Страница 835: ...iteria for P2 control Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic Figure 4 9 44 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch TPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition signal is required it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate condition logic The alternative operate condition can be connected to the above...

Страница 836: ...ion decision Success Failed Control logic P1 control from the remote end P2 control from the remote end P1 control from the local end P2 control from the local end P1 control by the PLC function P3 control from the local end P2 control by the PLC function Wait for a command P3 control from the remote end P3 control by the PLC function Select logics Signal output P1 control from the local end P2 co...

Страница 837: ...n criteria for P3 control Note To identify the input and output signals of the other TPOS logics see Table 4 9 16 for PLC 2 Table 4 9 18 for PLC 4 and Table 4 9 20 for the outputs Note An operate condition signal is generated inthe operate condition logic Figure 4 9 44 when Fix logic is set for scheme switch TPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition is required it can be programmed by th...

Страница 838: ...anel P1 control from the local end Do nothing Operation decision Success Failed Operate logic P1 control from the remote end P2 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end P2 control from the local end P1 control by the PLC function P3 control from the local end P2 control by the PLC function Wait for a command P1 control from the local end P3 control by the PLC function Select logi...

Страница 839: ...rol on the front panel TPOS01 Note The ILK function can provide the operation criteria for P1 control Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic Figure 4 9 44 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch TPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition is required it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate condit...

Страница 840: ... P2 control from the local end Signal reception from the front panel P2 control from the local end Do nothing Operation decision Success Failed Operate logic P1 control from the remote end P2 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end P1 control from the local end P1 control by the PLC function P3 control from the local end P2 control by the PLC function Wait for a command P2 contr...

Страница 841: ...ide the operation criteria for P2 control Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic Figure 4 9 44 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch TPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition is required it can be programmed by the user and used to replace the signal generated by the original operate condition logic The alternative operate condition can be connected...

Страница 842: ...from the local end Do nothing Operation decision Success Failed Operate logic P1 control from the remote end P2 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end P1 control from the local end P1 control by the PLC function P2 control from the local end P2 control by the PLC function Wait for a command P3 control from the local end P3 control by the PLC function Select logics Signal output...

Страница 843: ...e operation criteria for P3 control Note To identify the input and output signals of the other TPOS logics see Table 4 9 16 for PLC 2 Table 4 9 18 for PLC 4 and Table 4 9 20 for the outputs Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic Figure 4 9 44 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switch TPOS01 LGCTRCON If an alternative operate condition is required it can be progra...

Страница 844: ...ontrol from the local end P2 control by the PLC function Wait for a command P1 control by the PLC function P3 control by the PLC function Select logics Signal output P3 control from the remote end P1 control from the local end P1 control from the remote end P2 control from the remote end P2 control from the local end P3 control from the local end P2 control by the PLC function P3 control by the PL...

Страница 845: ... 5130018004011E93 Operate Completed 1 0s 100 0s 0 t DEV01_P1_INTERLOCK 513001 800401EE31 Command PLC P1 Control not requiring ILK check PLC 4 connection point DEV01_P1_COMMAND 513001 800401EE30 Figure 4 9 39 Operate P1 control using the PLC function in TPOS01 Note The ILK function can provide the criteria for operation for P1 control Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate con...

Страница 846: ...eration decision Success Failed Operate logic P1 control from the remote end P2 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end P1 control from the local end P3 control from the local end P2 control from the local end P1 control by the PLC function Wait for a command P2 control by the PLC function P3 control by the PLC function Select logics Signal output P3 control from the remote end ...

Страница 847: ...INTERLOCK 513001 800401EE33 Command PLC P2 Control not requiring ILK check PLC 4 connection point DEV01_P2_COMMAND 513001 800401EE32 Figure 4 9 41 Operate P2 Control by the PLC function in TPOS01 Note The ILK function can provide the criteria foe operation for P2 control Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condition logic Figure 4 9 44 when Fixlogic is set for scheme switc...

Страница 848: ...end P2 control from the remote end P3 control from the remote end P1 control from the local end P3 control from the local end P2 control from the local end P1 control by the PLC function Wait for a command P2 control by the PLC function P3 control by the PLC function Select logics Signal output P3 control from the remote end P1 control from the local end P1 control from the remote end P2 control f...

Страница 849: ...oint DEV01_P3_COMMAND 513001 800401EE36 Figure 4 9 43 Operate P3 control using the PLC function TPOS01 Note The ILK function can provide the criteria for operation for P3 control Note To identify the input and output signals of the other TPOS logics see Table 4 9 16 for PLC 2 Table 4 9 18 for PLC 4 and Table 4 9 20 for the outputs Note An operate condition signal is generated in the operate condit...

Страница 850: ...d Figure 4 9 44 illustrates the logic to examine an operate condition The operate condition is determined by signal TPOS01_STATE If the functionality of the original logic does not meet with user requirements the following alternatives are provided 1 The user can replace the original logic with alternative logic 2 The user can add another signal to the original logic Replacing the original logic I...

Страница 851: ...S01_ST_P3 P3 control command received TPOS01 DEVTYPE 9 EDS 513001 8304011D02 513001 8104011D03 513001 8504011D04 EDS never permit to control from P1 to P3 and P3 to P1 Figure 4 9 44 Operate condition logic for P1 3 control in TPOS01 11 1Note Command Blocking disables any operation except for itself Command blocking is implemented as CBK in a software switch controller SOFTSW The IEC 61850 defines ...

Страница 852: ...C 3 of Table 4 9 8 11Note To identify the input points of the other TPOS see Table 4 9 8 for PLC 1 to 3 Note that the logic outputs are generated separately for P1 P2 and P3 control xi Signal name and number Note The user should note the meaning of the following abbreviations as shown in column M O of each table O signifies that the signal is provided for the optional use M signifies that the user...

Страница 853: ...l Name Description M O 513001 800401EE65 TPOS01IN_TMP_33 Condition added by the user in TPOS01 for PLC 1 O 513001 800402EE65 TPOS02IN_TMP_33 Condition added by the user in TPOS02 for PLC 1 O 513001 800403EE65 TPOS03IN_TMP_33 Condition added by the user in TPOS03 for PLC 1 O 513001 800418EE65 TPOS24IN_TMP_33 Condition added by the user in TPOS24 for PLC 1 O 513001 810401EE66 TPOS01IN_TMP_34 Conditi...

Страница 854: ...24_P1EC_OK_CS TPOS24 P1 direction execute command 513001 8304011E82 TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CS TPOS01 P2 direction execute command 513001 8304021E82 TPOS02_P2EC_OK_CS TPOS02 P2 direction execute command 513001 8304031E82 TPOS03_P2EC_OK_CS TPOS03 P2 direction execute command 513001 8304181E82 TPOS24_P2EC_OK_CS TPOS24 P2 direction execute command 513001 8404011E83 TPOS01_P3EC_OK_CS TPOS01 P3 direction execut...

Страница 855: ...r for operate condition TPOS01 24 Fixedlogic Fixedlogic PLC TPOSxx LGP1EXOT Logic selector for command output TPOS01 24 Fixedlogic Fixedlogic PLC TPOSxx LGP2EXOT Logic selector for command output TPOS01 24 Fixedlogic Fixedlogic PLC TPOSxx LGP3EXOT Logic selector for command output TPOS01 24 Fixedlogic Fixedlogic PLC TPOSxx LGEXFFCT Logic selector for operate condition TPOS01 24 Fixedlogic Fixedlog...

Страница 856: ...ed when a signal changes to open OFF When the signal is changed from Closed to Open the counter value is incremented C OnOff Counting up is made when any state change occurs Open to Closed and Closed to Open NA Stop the count function Note The operation counter value is not cleared when power is removed from the IED This counter is available in the TPOS01 to TPOS03 functions Closed Open Figure 4 9...

Страница 857: ...c in TPOS01 Operate condition Figure 4 9 47 Change counter value in net counter by the remote end in TPOS01 Note The operate condition signal is provided from the operate condition logic shown in Figure 4 9 49 Note The user can apply the other counter change commands for P1 control P2 control and P3 control as shown in Table 4 9 24 The resultant signals for the other TPOS02 24 logics are shown in ...

Страница 858: ...ll operation except for its own the Command blocking function is initiated by the status of CBK in a software switch controller SOFTSW The IEC 61850 standard defines the Command Blocking function as CmdBlk For more information on CBK see Chapter Control and monitoring application Software switch control function See the signal CBK_STATE of Table 4 9 6 2Note Double Command Blocking DCB is an operat...

Страница 859: ...OS03 counter correction request for P2 counter value 513001 7004186D0B DEV24_P2CNT_REQ TPOS24 counter correction request for P2 counter value 513001 7004016D0C DEV01_P3CNT_REQ TPOS01 counter correction request for P3 counter value 513001 7004026D0C DEV02_P3CNT_REQ TPOS02 counter correction request for P3 counter value 513001 7004036D0C DEV03_P3CNT_REQ TPOS03 counter correction request for P3 count...

Страница 860: ...on P1 to P2 b Operate command and signals with regard to the switch motion P1 to P2 Intermediate P3 Figure 4 9 50 Two Intervals OT1 and OT2 for P2 control Signal TPOS01_PT_P1 Signal TPOS01_PT_P2 Signal TPOS01_PT_P3 Signal TPOS01_P1EX_BO OT3 OT4 Sensing intermediate state P1 P1 control P2 Intermediate a Switch motion P2 to P1 b Operate command and signals with regard to the switch motion P2 to P1 I...

Страница 861: ...Signal TPOS01_P1EX_BO sensed End Signal TPOS01_PT_P2 unsensed OT4 Start Signal TPOS01_PT_P2 is sensed End Signal TPOS01_PT_P1 unsensed OT5 Start Signal TPOS01_P2EX_BO sensed End Signal TPOS01_PT_P3 unsensed OT6 Start Signal TPOS01_PT_P3 sensed End Signal TPOS01_PT_P2 unsensed OT7 Start Signal TPOS01_P3EX_BO sensed End Signal TPOS01_PT_P2 unsensed OT8 Start Signal TPOS01_PT_P2 sensed End Signal TPO...

Страница 862: ...nd Mapping Data 513001 7004036D0D DEV03_RESET_REQ TPOS03 operation time reset command Mapping Data 513001 7004186D0D DEV24_RESET_REQ TPOS24 operation time reset command Mapping Data ii Setting names Table 4 9 29 Setting of operation time function in TPOSxx Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value TPOSxx OPETMEN Activation of the operation time measurement in TPOSxx On Off On TPOS1 OT...

Страница 863: ... TPOS01 P1NOPSGI to On in order that the P1 input signal is inverted Note The state signal acquired can be monitored For more information see Chapter Automatic supervision Connection with Binary input circuits For example as shown in Figure 4 9 1 suppose three kinds of signals P1 P2 or P3 are provided on the first BI1 second BI2 and third BI BI3 circuits at IO 1 slot In this case the user should s...

Страница 864: ... standstill thus the decision is given as Intermediate the value 3 is given at the connection point TPOS01_STATE If On On On signals are applied to the BI1 BI3 circuits the decision cannot be made because the earth switch may be broken hence the value 7 is given Table 4 9 30 Decision made by the TPOS01 function Input signals at IO 1 200B01 Decision by TPOS01 Generated value TPOS01_STATE 513001 310...

Страница 865: ...tion can count the iterative number of incoming signals Detection commences at Time A the setting TPOS NELD is provided so that the suppression commences at Time B The setting TPOS TELD is pertains to the operation of the detection function from Time A e g Time A to Time C The event suppression ceases when the iterative signal stops The user can adjust the point at which event suppression stops us...

Страница 866: ...Input signal 8 1 BO2 200B01_8102011112 BO2 RB 200B01_8102011113 BO2 circuit at IO 1 Function ID 200B01 Terminal and wire To contact health check Connected by Programming To contact health check TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG 513001 8A04011DC4 TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG 513001 8A04011DC6 Select command P2 BO3_SOURCE 200B01 310202E11D PLC connection point on BO3 1 BO3_CPL Off On DRIVER BO3 Signal captured by setting In...

Страница 867: ...point in BO6 Operate logic for P3 control in TPOS01 1 BO6_CPL Off On DRIVER BO6 Signal designated by setting Input signal 1 Input signal 2 Input signal 3 Input signal 4 Input signal 5 Input signal 6 Input signal 7 Input signal 8 Operate command P3 1 BO6 200B01_8502051112 BO6 RB 200B01_8502051113 To contact health check To contact health check Connected by Programming Figure 4 9 58 Example of opera...

Страница 868: ... contact health check of P3 select in TPOS01 Connection made by the user Figure 4 9 59 Example contact health check feature for P1 P3 select commands Setting for Operate command P1 P2 P3 Similarly the points BO4 RB and BO6 RB are required to be set for the settings TPOS01 P1EXBORD to TPOS01 P3EXBORD Signal connected by setting TPOS01 P2EXBORD BO5 circuit at IO_SLOT1 Result of contact health check ...

Страница 869: ...ting example for contact health check Example 1 Health check settings for example 1 TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG is connected to BO1 at IO 1 200B01 8002001113 BO1 RB set for TPOS01 P1SLBORD OK TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG is connected to BO2 at IO 1 200B01 8102011113 BO2 RB set for TPOS01 P2SLBORD OK TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG is connected to BO3 at IO 1 200B01 8202021113 BO3 RB set for TPOS01 P3SLBORD OK TPOS01_P1EX_BO is c...

Страница 870: ...3 BO5 RB 200B01 8402041113 TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG 513001 8A04011DC8 BO3 P3 select command BO3 RB 200B01 8202021113 BO6 P3 operate command TPOS01_P3EX_BO 513001 8204031DD3 BO6 RB 200B01 8502051113 EDS Figure 4 9 61 Contact health check setting and EDS scheme for example 1 Setting for erroneous in contact health check improper setting example 2 Figure 4 9 62 shows a setting example for an improper setti...

Страница 871: ...1 select command BO4 P1 operate command TPOS01_P1EX_BO 513001 8104011DD0 BO4 RB 200B01 8302031113 Remote Local end P1 Operate P1 Selection BIO module P2 Operate P2 Selection P3 Operate P3 Selection Minus TPOS01_P2SL_BO_FLG 513001 8A04011DC6 BO2 P2 select command BO2 RB 200B01 8102011113 BO5 P2 operate command TPOS01_P2EX_BO 513001 8204011DD3 BO5 RB 200B01 8402041113 TPOS01_P3SL_BO_FLG 513001 8A040...

Страница 872: ...113 BO5 RB set for TPOS01 P2EXBORD OK TPOS01_P3EX_BO is connected to BO6 on SLOT1 200B01 8502051113 BO6 RB set for TPOS01 P3EXBORD OK Plus TPOS01_P1SL_BO_FLG 513001 8A04011DC4 Drivers P1 select command BO4 P1 operate command TPOS01_P1EX_BO 513001 8104011DD0 BO4 RB 200B01 8302031113 Remote Local end P1 Operate BOs are not connected but virtualized BIO module P2 Operate P3 Operate Minus TPOS01_P2SL_...

Страница 873: ... 03 The suffix xx can be represented from 01 to 24 Table 4 9 36 Setting for Binary input signals in TPOSxx Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value TPOSxx EN Activate monitoring function of TPOS01 24 On Off On TPOSxx DEVTYPE Equipment type selector switch switch EDS TPOSxxP1 NOPSG BI position for TPOS01 24 none BI signal TPOSxxP2 NOPSG BI position for TPOS01 24 none BI signal TPOSxxP...

Страница 874: ... create a logical node LN for the TPOS01 function Figure 4 9 64 exemplifies the editing of a LN the LN Integer Status Controllable Status Output ISCSO is chosen for the TPOS01 function After the user defined an object ISCSO the TPOS01 logical node can be available with the name GGIO plus LN Instance Create a definition of the object ISCSO in the TPOS01 logical node Either the SBO mode or the DIR m...

Страница 875: ... GGIO2701 In the DIR mode the following three items should be selected using GR TIEMS Oper origin ctlmodel choice DOes or DOns Figure 4 9 66 LN editing screen for DIR mode for example ii Mapping output data The user should group the TPOS01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT the user should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR TIEMS Figure 4 9 43 illustrates how to map a signal it indi...

Страница 876: ...3001 0004011D90 TPOS01_SLD_RPT Note Status ST is defined in the function constraint FC of the IEC 61850 standard Drag and drop Figure 4 9 67 ocCat attribute mapped for ISCSO object of GGIO2701 iii Mapping input data The TPOS01 function can receive three commands select operate and cancel Thus the user should map the input point DEV01_CONTROL_REQ to the IEC61850 communication Table 4 9 39 shows the...

Страница 877: ... ISCSO Oper ctlVal INT32 CO Ctrl GGIO2701 ISCSO Oper ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl GGIO2701 ISCSO Oper T Timestamp CO Ctrl GGIO2701 ISCSO Oper Test BOOLEAN CO Ctrl GGIO2701 ISCSO Oper Check Check CO Ctrl GGIO2701 ISCSO Oper origin orCat orCategory CO Ctrl GGIO2701 ISCSO Oper origin orIdent Octet64 CO Ctrl GGIO2701 ISCSO Cancel ctlVal INT32 CO Ctrl GGIO2701 ISCSO Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl GGIO2701 ISCSO C...

Страница 878: ...d TPOS01 P3NOPSGI Off On Signal inverse or not Off TPOS01 SPPEN Off On Automatic event suppression function Off TPOS01 UDFEN Off On CHKONLY undefined pallet check function Off TPOS01 UDFTIM 0 1 100 0 s palette undefined check timer 30 0 TPOS01 FLTEN Off On CHKONLY faulty pallet check function Off TPOS01 FLTTIM 0 1 100 0 s palette faulty check timer 30 0 TPOS01 CTREN Off On control mode control ena...

Страница 879: ...01 LGCNFFCT FixedLogic PLC Change logic about cancel command fail factor FixedLogic TPOS01 PLSM Fix Var pulse mode Fix TPOS01 CPW 0 1 50 0 s control pulse width 1 0 TPOS01 RST 1 0 100 0 s response check timer 30 0 TPOS01 CTRDIR P1 P2 P3 Capable control direction P2 TPOS01 P1CNTS Off On P1 count status Off TPOS01 P2CNTS Off On P2 count status Off TPOS01 P3CNTS Off On P3 count status Off TPOS01 OPET...

Страница 880: ...GUCN TPOS01 count change selected signal 8904011FB1 TPOS01_CTR_SGURS TPOS01 reset time selected signal 8004011EA1 TPOS01_CTR_SGW TPOS01 control logic stage wait for change 8104011E9A TPOS01_ECF_FCT_EIS TPOS01 execute command fail factor signal except interlock synchronism check 8004011D58 TPOS01_EC_LCD TPOS01 execute command by LCD 8004011D55 TPOS01_EC_OWS TPOS01 execute command by OWS HMI 8004011...

Страница 881: ... SAS 3204011D24 TPOS01_P1_CNT_VAL TPOS01 P1phase count value 8104011E86 TPOS01_P2EC_F_CSF TPOS01 P2 direction execute command fail condition signal 8304011E82 TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CS TPOS01 P2 direction execute command OK condition signal 8004011E7F TPOS01_P2EC_OK_CSF TPOS01 P2 direction execute command OK condition signal 8204011DD3 TPOS01_P2EX_BO TPOS01 P2 direction execute binary output signal 8A0401...

Страница 882: ...l by fixedlogic 03 8804011FB3 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F03RS TPOS01 reset time select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03 8704011FAE TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F04CN TPOS01 count change select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 04 8704011FB4 TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F04RS TPOS01 reset time select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 04 8304011FAC TPOS01_SLF_FCT_F07CN TPOS01 count change selected timer for a check 8304011FB2 TPOS01_SLF...

Страница 883: ...4 810401EE62 TPOS01IN_TMP_25 TPOS01IN_TMP_25 800401EE55 TPOS01IN_TMP_26 TPOS01IN_TMP_26 800401EE56 TPOS01IN_TMP_27 TPOS01IN_TMP_27 810401EE57 TPOS01IN_TMP_28 TPOS01IN_TMP_28 840401EE58 TPOS01IN_TMP_29 TPOS01IN_TMP_29 820401EE5A TPOS01IN_TMP_30 TPOS01IN_TMP_30 830401EE5B TPOS01IN_TMP_31 TPOS01IN_TMP_31 850401EE5C TPOS01IN_TMP_32 TPOS01IN_TMP_32 800401EE65 TPOS01IN_TMP_33 TPOS01IN_TMP_33 810401EE66 ...

Страница 884: ...user can obtain the ID value of TPOS02_SC_OWS by using the following steps Step 1 Find the element ID for TPOS01_SC_OWS i e 8001011D51 Step 2 identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID i e 1 Step 3 Choose a new device number i e pick the number 2 for the 2nd device Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth digit with the new device number i e get new ID 8001021D51 of TPOS02_SC_OWS...

Страница 885: ...on at state changed Suppression when appearance of repetitive signals GENBI for slot 1 Output signal of BI1 Output from BI1 State data current value Time data time stamp Quality information accumulated Binary input circuit n Output from BI2 Output from BIn BIO module Slot 2 GENBI for slot 2 Output from BI1 to BIn BIO module Slot n GENBI for slot n Output from BI1 to BIn Output signal of BI2 Output...

Страница 886: ...ion BI1 Filter CPL Binary input circuit 1 BI1 NC BI1 CPL Binary IO module BIO Binary input circuit 2 Binary input circuit 32 IED IO_SLOT 1 BI1 SLOT1 GBI01 SG SLOT1 GBI02 SG SLOT1 GBI32 SG IO 1 Function ID 200B001 Function Fun Fun 800100111 8001001110 8001001172 0010001001 0010011001 SLOT1 GBI01_STATE SLOT1 GBI02_STATE 00101F1001 SLOT1 GBI32_STATE GEN_BI Function ID 580001 Figure 4 10 2 Setting met...

Страница 887: ...ing to the detection period of the repetitive signals point A to point C For example the user can set the value 10 for the scheme switch GBI NELD period A C is set for the setting GBI TELD The GENBI function should remove event suppressed operation when the repetitive signals disappear that is the operation of the device is steady event suppression operation is cleared when no repetitive signal is...

Страница 888: ...GBI02 SPPEN Off On SLOT 2 BI 2 Automatic event suppression function SLOT2 GBI32 SPPEN Off On SLOT 2 BI 32 Automatic event suppression function SLOTnGBI01 SPPEN Off On SLOT n BI 1 Automatic event suppression function SLOTnGBI02 SPPEN Off On SLOT n BI 2 Automatic event suppression function SLOTnGBI32 SPPEN Off On SLOT n BI 32 Automatic event suppression function Note The specification and the number...

Страница 889: ...Mapping output data With the IEC 61850 communications standard a GOOSE message can be used to send a signal to a client The user will need to collect the signals corresponding to the GENBI function and then map them for IEC 61850 communication using GR TIEMS Table 4 10 5 shows the mapping signals that are required within the GENBI function for IEC 61850 communications Figure 4 10 5 shows how to ma...

Страница 890: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 869 Drag and drop Figure 4 10 5 Quality signal being mapped into Ind1 object of GGIO101 ...

Страница 891: ...LOT2 GBI31 SPPEN Off On Switch to suppress events by itself at BI circuit On BI 32 SLOT2 GBI32 BIEVT Off On Switch to detect an event on BI circuit32 at SLOT2 Off SLOT2 GBI32 SPPEN Off On Switch to suppress events by itself at BI circuit On IO 3 BI 1 SLOT3 GBI01 BIEVT Off On Switch to detect an event on BI circuit01 at SLOT3 Off SLOT3 GBI01 SPPEN Off On Switch to suppress events by itself at BI ci...

Страница 892: ...2_STATE SLOT1 GBI32 state 9010001006 SLOT1 GBI01_TIMESTAM SLOT1 GBI01 timestamp 9010011006 SLOT1 GBI02_TIMESTAM SLOT1 GBI02 timestamp 9010021006 SLOT1 GBI03_TIMESTAM SLOT1 GBI03 timestamp 90101F1006 SLOT1 GBI32_TIMESTAM SLOT1 GBI32 timestamp Note In the table above the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st slot but a 2nd and other slots are also provided in the GENBI function...

Страница 893: ...er 1 for the 2nd circuit Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth and sixth digits with the new device number i e get new ID 0010111001 of SLOT2 GBI02_STATE The ID is expressed in hexadecimal notation Thus the user must change the device number from decimal notation to hexadecimal notation ...

Страница 894: ...tc functions i e ASEQ01 ASEQ02 and others Therefore some PLC functions are controlled by the ASEQ functions at the same time For simplicity only the ASEQ01 function is discussed here the features in the other ASEQ02 etc functions are identical to the ASEQ01 function Note The implementation of such features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED m...

Страница 895: ...re the user should program the logic to generate an operation result signal in case of the emergency stop signal being applied in the logic See section 4 11 5 for the emergency operation Note PLC connection point ASEQ01_EXEC_RESET is provided for stopping the ASEQ01 operation as shown in Table 4 11 4 Device ASEQ01_ EXEC_START Driver ASEQ01_ EXEC_STOP OUT2 OUT1 ASEQ01 User programming logic for CB ...

Страница 896: ...Q15 operation Table 4 11 6 PLC monitoring points Outputs to stop ASEQ operation Signal Number Signal Name Description 523001 810D011F51 ASEQ01_EXEC_STOP Stop instruction provided for ASEQ01 operation 523001 810D021F51 ASEQ02_EXEC_STOP Stop instruction provided for ASEQ02 operation 523001 810D031F51 ASEQ03_EXEC_STOP Stop instruction provided for ASEQ03 operation 523001 810D0F1F51 ASEQ15_EXEC_STOP S...

Страница 897: ...1DEV2PLCCTRLFAIL 1DEV3PLCCTRLFAIL Temporary signal 002 4ASEQ01 in execution 1 Output signals 5Reset of ASEQ01 execution Termination of ASEQ01 at level 1 5Reset of ASEQ01 execution Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_1 In closing switch at device 2 In selecting device 2 Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_1 Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_2 Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_2 Termination of ASEQ01 on Level_2 Clo...

Страница 898: ...ear the operation if the control logic can determine that the operation of Device 3 is complete Figure 4 11 3 shows that Device 3 unable to operate following reception of the stop command 3The operating state turns to OFF when the operation of Device 3 finishes following the reception of a stop command from the ASEQ01 function Operating state Selection signal for Device 2 Selection signal for Devi...

Страница 899: ...ons Signal Number Signal Name Description M O 523001 820D01ED50 ASEQ01IN_TMP_28 ASEQ01 control hierarchy condition M 523001 820D02ED50 ASEQ02IN_TMP_28 ASEQ02 control hierarchy condition M 523001 820D03ED50 ASEQ03IN_TMP_28 ASEQ03 control hierarchy condition M 523001 820D0FED50 ASEQ15IN_TMP_28 ASEQ15 control hierarchy condition M Table 4 11 9 Control hierarchy point for Emergency stop Signal Number ...

Страница 900: ...LCD_ST State signal about LCD screen 523001 310D0D1D00 EMERSTOP_MMC_ST State signal about MIMIC screen 523001 800D0D1D54 EMERSTOP_SC_LCD Select command generated on the LCD 523001 800D0D1D51 EMERSTOP_SC_OWS Select command generated at OWS HMI 523001 800D0D1D52 EMERSTOP_SC_RCC Select command generated at RCC 523001 800D0D1D53 EMERSTOP_SC_RMT Select command generated at Remote ...

Страница 901: ... implement a logical node LN for the ASEQ01 function Figure 4 11 5 exemplifies LN editing the LN GAPC1 is chosen for the ASEQ01 function After the user has defined an object SPCSO1 the ASEQ01 logical node is saved with the name SPCSO1 plus LN Instance A definition for the object SPCSO1 is made in the ASEQ01 logical node Choose either the SBO mode or the DIR mode when editing the LN SBO defined in ...

Страница 902: ...d for the ASEQ01 function In the DIR mode the following three items should be selected using the GR TIEMS software Oper Origin ctlmodel choice DOes or DOns Figure 4 11 7 LN editing screen for DIR mode for example ii Mapping output data The user should group the ASEQ01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT the user should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR TIEMS Table 4 11 11 shows the ...

Страница 903: ...N ST 523001 000D011D90 ASEQ01_STSELD Note Status ST is defined in the function constraint FC of the IEC 61850 standard Drag and drop Figure 4 11 8 orCat attribute mapped into SPCSO1 object of GAPC1 iii Mapping input data The ASEQ1 function can receive three commands select operate and cancel Thus the user should map the input point ASEQ01_CONTROL_REQ Table 4 11 12 shows the input point ASEQ01_CONT...

Страница 904: ...Ctrl GAPC1 SPCSO1 Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO Ctrl GAPC1 SPCSO1 Oper ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl GAPC1 SPCSO1 Oper T Timestamp CO Ctrl GAPC1 SPCSO1 Oper Test BOOLEAN CO Ctrl GAPC1 SPCSO1 Oper Check Check CO Ctrl GAPC1 SPCSO1 Oper origin orCat orCategory CO Ctrl GAPC1 SPCSO1 Oper origin orIdent Octet64 CO Ctrl GAPC1 SPCSO1 Cancel ctlVal BOOLEAN CO Ctrl GAPC1 SPCSO1 Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO Ctrl GAPC1 SPCSO1 Canc...

Страница 905: ... MENU enable Off ASEQ01 CTRAHMI DIR SBO control action Direct or SBO by HMI SBO ASEQ02 ASEQ02 DEVNAME Preferred name item name of Auto Control Seqence02 ASC2 ASEQ02 OFFNAME Preferred name state name of state off Stop ASEQ02 ONNAME Preferred name state name of state on Start ASEQ02 CTRMENU Off On control by MENU enable Off ASEQ02 CTRAHMI DIR SBO control action Direct or SBO by HMI SBO ASEQ03 ASEQ03...

Страница 906: ... of an emergency signal to stop the operation 000D0D1D90 EMERSTOP_STSELD EMERSTOP selected signal stSeld for SAS 310D0D1D00 EMERSTOP_MMC_ST EMERSTOP state for MIMIC 310D0D1D01 EMERSTOP_LCD_ST EMERSTOP state for LCD 800D0D1D51 EMERSTOP_SC_OWS EMERSTOP select command from OWS HMI 800D0D1D52 EMERSTOP_SC_RCC EMERSTOP select command from RCC 800D0D1D53 EMERSTOP_SC_RMT EMERSTOP select command by Remote ...

Страница 907: ...e when the user wishes to find the ASEQ01_EC_LCD point for the 2nd device use the description of ASEQ02_EC_LCD in place of ASEQ01_EC_LCD The user can obtain the ID value of ASEQ02_EC_LCD by using the following steps Step 1 Find the element ID for ASEQ01_EC_LCD i e 800D011D58 Step 2 Identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID i e 1 Step 3 Choose a new device number i e pick the number 2 for ...

Страница 908: ...O 921 Group setting for relays 984 Input circuits 923 Input features 922 LED indicators 962 Output circuits 936 Output features 934 Monitoring jacks 972 BI1A module 942 BI2A module 942 Operation keys 974 BI3A module 942 BO1A module 943 Power supply module PWS 956 BO2A module 943 BIO1A module 944 Transformer module for AC VCT 903 BIO2A module 944 1CB setting 911 BIO3A module 945 1 5CB setting 911 C...

Страница 909: ...ware block diagram The module structure depends on the GR series models IED cases and the customer specification Therefore the user should check and confirm the actual modules with the ordering number in advance The description of IED case helps to understand the IED structure and its functions Based on slot reference terminal block slot reference GR Series selects different cases VCT CPU BI BO an...

Страница 910: ...18 Auxiliary relay 18 I V BO Binary output Tele communication system HMI LEDs Operation keys Monitoring jacks Function Key LCD MIMIC Local PC PWS LAN I F USB I F BI Binary input Power BIO Photo coupler 18 Auxiliary relay 18 Binary output Binary input Figure 5 2 Hardware Block Diagram for example ...

Страница 911: ... designed with Compression plug type terminal block used at BIO and PWS modules The latter is designed with Ring type terminal block Figure 5 1 1 illustrates the difference of them Figure 5 1 1 Terminal type and case structure 1 2 size case back view Compression plug type terminal Ring type terminal Type using compression terminals Type using ring terminals VCT PWS BIOs VCT BIOs PWS ...

Страница 912: ...With respect to BIs BOs and BIOs their terminal blocks are designed with upper terminal and lower one and they are labeled with alpha numeric reference T1 T2 and so on The upper and lower terminals are provided in the form of one terminal block for respective BIs BOs or BIOs Terminal screw numbers for each terminal block relate to individual binary circuits The user should check respective configu...

Страница 913: ...0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 FG FGE FGD FGC FGB FGA E FG1 C12 C13 C14 C15 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30...

Страница 914: ... 3 4 size case constructed with type using type using compression terminals a IED internal structure seen from the front b Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear and c schematic diagram PWS terminal blocks is placed at the far left side which is located at alpha numeric reference T7 ...

Страница 915: ...4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 ...

Страница 916: ...of the 1 2 size case constructed with type using compression terminals a IED internal structure seen from the front b Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear and c schematic diagram PWS terminal blocks is placed at the far left side which is located at alpha numeric reference T4 ...

Страница 917: ... 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 T4 T3 T2 VC1 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 T1 T2 T3 T4 VC1 T1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24...

Страница 918: ...cal external connection Viewing from the rear side Figure 5 1 2 b The terminal blocks for the case viewed from the rear is shown They are labeled with alpha numeric reference T1 T2 and so on Terminal screw numbers relate to circuits individually and the user has to check their circuits see section 5 4 or later A BIO module is identified by its alpha numeric reference or slot reference on the IED c...

Страница 919: ...8 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 1 3 ...

Страница 920: ...ams of the 3 4size case constructed with type using ring terminals a IED internal structure seen from the front b Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear and c schematic diagram PWS terminal block is placed on the far left side which is located at alpha numeric reference T5 ...

Страница 921: ... 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 2 4 6 8 10 ...

Страница 922: ... diagrams of the 1 2 size case with type using ring terminals a IED internal structure seen from the front b Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear and c schematic diagram PWS terminal block is placed on the far left side which is located at alpha numeric reference T2 ...

Страница 923: ... C14 C15 FG1 E FGA FG T2 VC1 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 T1 T2 T3 VC1 T1 FGB T3 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 FG ...

Страница 924: ... numbers Ch when settings as to the ratio and others are required The figure below shows the operation screen for the AC analog input which we shall discuss later The term AI 1 in the below figure represents the VC alpha numeric references discussed in the preceding section The blow figures exemplify the ratio settings for respective channels on the VCT For more information about the operation of ...

Страница 925: ...We shall discuss later in section Setting VCT ratio 2 Note In 5A rated operation jumpers are inserted on all CTs whereas no jumper is inserted for 1A rated To change it see section Shifting VCT rated current 3 Note For the destination of input signals see Appendix Matrix between VCT terminals and relay applications 4 Note Reference voltage either Vs or Vs2 is used in the Voltage check VCHK functio...

Страница 926: ...t bar by default Figure 5 2 4 VC1 terminals Rear view 1Note Short bar between the screw No 30 and FG is connected by the manufacturer 2Note The figure is just drawn for general instruction about VCT structure The number of VTs and CTs on VCT is dependent on the VCT type that the user has ordered Module type VC1 terminal Schematic diagram VCT Alpha numeric reference Frame ground terminal on the cas...

Страница 927: ..._Ratio 1 000 to 20 000 000 For AC analog input ch 1 at VCT 1 1 000 alpha numeric AI1_Ch2_Ratio 1 000 to 20 000 000 For AC analog input ch 2 at VCT 1 1 000 reference AI1_Ch3_Ratio 1 000 to 20 000 000 For AC analog input ch 3 at VCT 1 1 000 AI1_Ch4_Ratio 1 000 to 20 000 000 For AC analog input ch 4 at VCT 1 1 000 AI1_Ch5_Ratio 1 000 to 20 000 000 For AC analog input ch 5 at VCT 1 1 000 AI1_Ch6_Ratio...

Страница 928: ...umpers are provided to determine the CT rated current 1 or 5A on the VCT circuit Figure 5 2 5 shows the locations of the rating jumpers They are identified with marks W1 to W14 on the VCT circuit board W letters correspond to the AC analog input channel numbers which have been discussed previously receptacle header 5 A rated setting Jumper closed header VCT Photograph Rating jumpers W1 W2 W3 W4 W5...

Страница 929: ...ted current at CH 9 DEP AI1_Ch10_Rating DEP 1A 5A Rated current at CH 10 DEP AI1_Ch11_Rating DEP 1A 5A Rated current at CH 11 DEP AI1_Ch12_Rating DEP 1A 5A Rated current at CH 12 DEP AI1_Ch13_Rating DEP 1A 5A Rated current at CH 13 DEP AI1_Ch14_Rating DEP 1A 5A Rated current at CH 14 DEP Note Channel numbers for rated settings are dependent on VCT type 1A and 5A are shown above but neglect them Th...

Страница 930: ... W14 Tr 1 Tr 2 Tr 4 Tr 3 Tr 5 Tr 6 Tr 7 Tr 8 Tr 12 Tr 13 AI 1 10 48 1 2 AI1_Ch6_Ratio 2000 AI1_Ch6_Rating DEP LCD screen I O setting sub menu VCT circuit board Figure 5 2 6 Rating jumpers and settings for VCT12B Note The W12 and W13 are linked with CH14 and Ch9 respectively Configuration switch Change the CPU to the constrained mode see Section Signal processing and communication module Writing se...

Страница 931: ... Change Figure 5 2 7 APPL VCT setting screen i Setting APPL Ves2 Ve Set Ve for the setting APPL VTes2 when the residual voltage transform is provided Figure 5 2 8 illustrates the signals from the VTs on the feeder are injected for the Ve terminal on the VCT A C B VCT VTs on feeder IED VT Va VL1 VL2 VL3 VCHK function Vs2 Ve Vb Vc Residual voltage Setting APPL Ves2 Ve Vs Reference voltage VT on busb...

Страница 932: ... can set Off for the setting APPL VTes2 A C B VCT VTs on feeder IED VT Va VL1 VL2 VL3 Relay application Vs2 Ve Vb Vc Setting APPL Ves2 Off Vs Reference voltage VTs on busbar Busbar Feeder Three phase voltages V3 Computation CB 1 Zero sequence phase voltage 3V0 Figure 5 2 10 Connection with one VT on the busbar iv Settings CT polarity setting in 1CB or 1 5CB The user can reverse the CT polarity usi...

Страница 933: ...t For example in 1 5CB arrangement the user should have Paralleling connected CTs i e summation The user can also change the polarity in Ie Iem as shown in Table 5 2 1 Table 5 2 1 VCT settings provided with FEP_COMMON FEP_COMMON Function ID 7F0001 Settings in VCT12B Note Setting item Range Uni ts Contents APPL Ves2 Off Ve Vs2 Voltage input either Ve pr Vs Vs2 Polarity Pol 1CT Negative Positive 1CT...

Страница 934: ...4 COM 5 Figure 5 3 1 CUP and their communication modules COM 1 to COM 5 Note The implementation of COM 1 to 5 may vary according to circumstances 5 3 1 Signal processing The operation of relay and control applications are achieved with the CPU on the CP1M board The CPU board has SDRAM MRAM and NOR Flash the NOR Flash is used to store setting data and recording data the MRAM is used to store severa...

Страница 935: ...close either Pin 1 2 or Pin 3 4 using a jumper Optional EP 221 COM 2 CPM2 COM 1 CPU COM 3 COM 4 COM 5 W5 2 1 4 3 W8 2 1 4 3 W6 1 2 W6 3 4 Jumper Configuration mode Open Open Default normal mode i e manufacture setting mode Closed Open Constrained mode 1A rated Open Closed Constrained mode 5A rated CPU 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 W6 2 1 4 3 W7 2 1 4 3 Figure 5 3 3 Configuration switch Note Alter the co...

Страница 936: ...ation system and others Substation automation system and others Symbol 100 1000 BASE T RX TX 100BASE ＦX 1000 BASE LX Table 5 3 2 Communication modules for Miscellaneous Module RS485 Fiber optic interface IRIG B Connector PCB connector ST type PCB connector Medium Shielded twist pair Fiber optic GI Shielded twist pair Usage Data transfer in IEC103 Data transfer in IEC103 2km class Time synchronizat...

Страница 937: ...e can be used for the GR TIEMS operation or the LAN communication Use SM mode fiber when long distance is required C11 C12 Figure 5 3 6 1000Base LX module 4 RS485 module RS485 module has a PCB connector The module should be connected with a shielded twisted pair cable it is used for the communication of the IEC60870 5 103 The terminal arrangement and references are shown below The cable sheath sho...

Страница 938: ...tal signal TTL only i e the reception of AM signal is not applicable This module is isolated using a photo coupler the user should note A2 and B2 connectors are not used The peak value of IRIG B000 signal should be greater than 3 5 volts the IRIG B000 module has the input resistor about 3k ohm Thus the terminal resistor can be required when the IRIG B000 signal is delivered for several devices the...

Страница 939: ...ance of the external clocks For setting of time synchronization see Chapter Technical Description Clock function C11 C12 Figure 5 3 9 IRIG B000 module Bottom Top a View from connector edge b Port circuit A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 A1 A2 A3 B1 B2 B3 SIG Disuse GND PCB connector Disuse ...

Страница 940: ...85 and IRIG B modules are located at C13 and C15 Figure 5 3 10 Modules structure 6C code at E F pos Note The modules and their locations are dependent on actual ordering codes In the above example an IRIG B is placed at C15 but the user can see differences if another ordering code is given To find actual locations read a practical ordering code in Appendix Ordering see page 1459 100BASE FX C11 C12...

Страница 941: ...IG B000 modules Figure 5 3 11 Modules structure 9D code at E F pos 100BASE FX C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 VC1 FG1 E FGE VCT VC1 VCT SLOT Schematic diagram 100BASE FX C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 FG1 Com SLOT IRIG B000 Practical communication modules RS485 Blank Blank A3 B3 COMM A2 B2 COM B A1 B1 COM A 485 100BASE FX 100BASE FX ...

Страница 942: ... 2 BI2A Variable 12 0 0 0 0 0 3 BI3A Standard 32 0 0 0 0 0 4 BO1A Standard 0 0 6 0 12 0 5 BO2A Standard 0 0 0 16 0 0 6 BIO1A Standard 7 0 6 0 3 1 7 BIO2A Standard 12 0 3 0 1 1 8 BIO3A Standard 8 6 0 0 1 1 1Note PWS module supplies a DC voltage for binary IO modules 48Vdc or 220Vdc Hence the BIOs output circuits operate with the supplied DC voltage Dual voltages output i e 48Vdc and 220Vdc is not p...

Страница 943: ...ent circuit 2 BI2A Isolated using photo coupler Polarity dependent Independent circuit Variable threshold 3 BI3A Isolated using photo coupler Polarity dependent Sharing common connections 4 BIO1A Same as BI1A Same as BI1A and BI2A 5 BIO2A 6 BIO3A The user can find the connector of binary IO modules the terminal number and arrangement of the binary input circuits in section 5 4 5 BI1 Circuit number...

Страница 944: ...the off delay timer 0 000 INVERSE SW Normal Inverse Inversion operation of BI1 signal Normal BI2_CPL Off On Switch of programmable operation in BI2 Off BI2 On Delay Timer 0 000 to 300 000 s Value in the on delay timer 0 000 Off Delay Timer 0 000 to 300 000 s Value in the off delay timer 0 000 INVERSE SW Normal Inverse Inversion operation of BI2 signal Normal BI3_CPL Off On Switch of programmable o...

Страница 945: ...f Delay Timer 0 000 to 300 000 s Value in the off delay timer 0 000 INVERSE SW Normal Inverse Inversion operation of BI2 signal Normal BI3_CPL Off On Switch for programmable operation in BI 3 Off BI3 On Delay Timer 0 000 to 300 000 s Value in the on delay timer 0 000 Off Delay Timer 0 000 to 300 000 s Value in the off delay timer 0 000 INVERSE SW Normal Inverse Inversion operation of BI3 signal No...

Страница 946: ...101011110 8201021110 8001001172 8101011172 8201021172 BI1 NC BI2 NC BI3 NC BIn NC BI1 BI2 BIn BI3 BI1 CPL BI2 CPL BI3 CPL BIn CPL 8 For Relay and control functions From External devices 1 1 1 Figure 5 4 1 Common programmable logic for the BI1A module Respective element IDs i e 8001001172 and others designate respective signal monitoring points of the binary input circuits i e BI1 CPL and others Th...

Страница 947: ...ified by the function ID 200B001 Therefore when the user wishes to program the signal BI1 CPL on the BI1A at IO 1 the user should designate its signal using the function ID 200B001 and Element ID 8001001172 On the other hand when the signal BI2 CPL on the BI1A at IO 2 is required to program the user should designate that signal using the function ID 200B002 and Element ID 8001001172 For more infor...

Страница 948: ...lection switch Table 5 4 5 Threshold voltage of picking up dropping off for binary inputs a In the case of DC rated voltage 110 250 Vdc Voltage level Threshold voltage of picking up dropping off for binary inputs How to set Note High Typical 136V Selection switch THRES_Lvl High Low Typical 71V Selection switch THRES_Lvl Low This is default b In the case of DC rated voltage 24 60 Vdc Voltage level ...

Страница 949: ...age at the power supply unit to determine the degree of the power failure see Chapter Technical description Power supply module Table 5 4 6 Recommended setting for the voltage level a In the case of DC rated voltage 110 250 Vdc Voltage value to input to binary inputs Recommended setting for the voltage level 250V 220V High 125V 110V Low b In the case of DC rated voltage 24 60 Vdc Voltage value to ...

Страница 950: ...KUP is used for 7 to 9 binary input circuits and finally the setting BI10 12_PICKUP is used for 10 to 12 binary input circuits 1Note The threshold value is fixed for all types of BIO modules except the BI2A The user should notice that binary IO module voltage type influences these values see the 1st note in Table 5 4 1 These particular values are found when 220V dc type is used 2Note In the variab...

Страница 951: ...4 4 61 6 68 0 80 to 83 79 7 66 4 73 0 84 to 88 83 7 70 1 76 9 89 to 92 88 2 74 0 81 1 93 to 99 92 3 77 8 85 0 100 to 106 99 4 84 2 91 8 107 to 111 106 4 90 6 98 5 112 to 113 111 4 95 0 103 2 114 to 119 114 0 97 4 105 7 120 119 3 102 3 110 8 121 to 127 121 0 103 8 112 4 128 to 130 128 0 110 1 119 0 131 130 1 112 0 121 0 132 to 135 131 9 113 7 122 8 136 to 137 135 9 117 3 126 6 138 to 141 137 1 118 ...

Страница 952: ...parison feature for contact chatter The input circuit incorporates a comparison feature that protects against contact chatter and this feature is configured using the setting CMP_NUM Figure 5 4 3 illustrates this feature the comparison feature removes contact chatter The period t applied for the removal of contact chatter can be configured by setting a value for CMP_NUM The formula for the calcula...

Страница 953: ...set their respective time values for settings On Delay Timer and Off Delay Timer v Logic level inversion The Logic inversion function can invert the input signal and is provided for each binary input circuit the user can invert an input signal by setting Inverse for scheme switch INVERSE SW A setting of Normal is also provided when inversion is not required vi How to set the settings for binary in...

Страница 954: ...ircuits 1 to 18 from IO_SLOT1 setting table On the other hand for the BIO1A module the user should choose the setting items of reference i e binary input circuits 1 to 7 from IO_SLOT3 setting table The IO_SLOT3 setting table for the binary input circuits are shown in sec 5 4 6 The setting operation via the IED screen is discussed later See chapter User interface I O setting sub menu IO 1 IO 2 IO 3...

Страница 955: ...rovided which are suitable for controlling the speed and capacity of current in a variety of external devices as listed below 1 Fast operating 2 Semi fast operating 3 Hybrid 4 Auxiliary 5 BO with Form C The arrangement of the BO types is determined for every binary IO module as shown in Table 5 4 1 and Table 5 4 8 The difference in the types and number of BOs are also found in section 5 4 5 ...

Страница 956: ...for high current up to 10A Consisting of an IGBT device and a contact Make and carry 8A cont Break 10A at 220 110Vdc OP Time 1ms BO2A 4 Auxiliary Normally open N O Dry contact Normal speed closure Make and carry 8A cont Break 0 1A at 250Vdc 0 2A at 125Vdc OP Time 8ms typical BO1A BIO1A BIO2A BIO3A 5 Form C Uses a N C and a N O contact Shares a common connections Make and carry 8A cont Break 0 1A a...

Страница 957: ...for Latch Not assigned1 BO2_CPL Off On Switch On for programmable operation Off BO2 Input signal1 Preferred Data ID Set a Data ID at the first input on BO2 Not assigned1 Input signal8 Preferred Data ID Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO2 Not assigned1 LOGIC SW AND OR XOR Switch for logic gate operation on BO2 AND On Delay Timer 0 000 to 300 000 s Set a value for an on delay timer on BO2 0 000...

Страница 958: ... signal 3 Input signal 8 AND OR XOR 1 1 DRIVER 810201112 810201113 BO2 RB BO2 Reset signal BO2 SOURCE 310201E11D Contact 0 t Logic Timer Off Dwell Latch Delay 0 000 300 000s 1 F F 1 1 INVERSE SW t 0 0 000 300 000s On Delay Timer 0 t 0 000 300 000s Off Delay Timer TIMER SW Inverse Normal BO3 Input signal 1 LOGIC SW 1 BO3_CPL Off On Input signal 2 Input signal 3 Input signal 8 AND OR XOR 1 1 DRIVER ...

Страница 959: ...e BO1A module is selected the number of CPLs is 18 Note that the subsequent PLC settings described later require that Off be set for the scheme switch ii Selection of input signals Since a binary input circuit is operated by commands introduced from other functions eight ports for input signals are provided designated as input signal1 to input signal8 The user must ensure that input signal1 to inp...

Страница 960: ...scheme switch TIMER SW and set the value of the pulse width using setting Logic timer Dwell type For instance if the user requires a binary output signal as a one shot pulse the user should set Dwell for scheme switch TIMER SW and set the value of the pulse width using setting Logic timer If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value in the setting Logic timer the pulse ...

Страница 961: ...A at locations IO 2 and IO 3 The user should key the CPL settings from the setting tables for the IO2_SLOT and IO3_SLOT The setting table is available for all binary IO modules thus the user should understand and select setting points that are relevant to the BO1A and BIO1A That is for the BO1A the user should choose the setting terms of reference i e binary output circuits 1 to 18 from IO 1 IO 2 ...

Страница 962: ...cture of binary IO Module Binary IO modules consist of a number of module types and their arrangements of respective input and output circuits are particular to respective binary IO module types as shown in Figure 5 4 7 Figure 5 4 9 Figure 5 4 10 shows a diagram of how an actual terminal block connects with circuits of the module The use can identify the correspondence using the left side block fi...

Страница 963: ...BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI19 BI20 BI21 BI22 BI23 BI24 BI25 BI26 BI27 BI28 BI29 BI30 BI31 BI32 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 BI2A BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 1 2 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 17 18 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 21 22 25 26 27 28 31 32 33 34 37 38 FG Figure 5 4 7 Input arrangements for BI1A BI2A and BI3A Note For more detailed circuit information ...

Страница 964: ...BO15 BO16 BO17 BO18 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 BO1 H BO2 H BO3 H BO4 H BO5 H BO6 H BO7 H BO8 H BO9 H BO10 H BO11 H BO12 H BO13 H BO14 H BO15 H BO16 H 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 Figure 5 4 8 Output arrangements in BO1A and BO2A Note For more detailed circuit information refer to Table 5 4 2 or Table 5 4 8 ...

Страница 965: ...6 BI7 BI8 BI9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 23 24 25 26 BI10 BI11 BI12 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 37 36 38 BO1 SF BO2 SF BO3 SF BO4 BO5 BIO3A BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 37 36 38 BO1 F BO2 F BO3 F BO4 F BO5 F BO6 F BO7 BO8 Figure 5 4 9 Input and output arrangements in BIO1A BIO2A and BIO3A ...

Страница 966: ...ber T Terminal blocks Compression plug type terminal Terminal screw numbers are denoted with the same one T 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 Figure 5 4 10 IO module corresponded with ring or compression terminal Note Terminal block for Type using compression terminals is manufactured by PHOENIX CONTACT its model is described in FRON...

Страница 967: ...7 38 40 BI2A Compression plug type terminal BI2A BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 1 2 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 17 18 BI7 BI8 BI9 FG BI10 BI11 BI12 21 22 25 26 27 28 30 31 32 33 34 37 38 Ring type terminal 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 FG cable Figure 5 4 11 The BI2A and its frame ground screw Note The BI2A is earthed to the frame s ground screw FG using a short wire Bold line Note ...

Страница 968: ...ed Setting item Range Unit s Contents Default setting value Notes Common THRES_Lvl Low High Determination of input threshold Low THRES_Grp1 10 220 V Threshold through BI1 to BI3 Applicable only in BI 2 module and BIO 4 module 75 THRES_Grp2 10 220 V Threshold through BI4 to BI6 Applicable only in BI 2 module and BIO 4 module 75 THRES_Grp3 10 220 V Threshold through BI7 to BI9 Applicable only in BI ...

Страница 969: ...n at IO 2 to IO n Function ID 200B02 to 200B0n For the standard type being furnished Setting table is the same as the table for the IO 1 in previous section i 1 For the variable type being furnished Setting table is the same as the table for the IO 2 in previous section i 2 ...

Страница 970: ...without filter 8F010F1111 BI16 NC BI15 signal without filter 8001101111 BI17 NC BI17 signal without filter 8101111111 BI18 NC BI18 signal without filter 8201121111 BI19 NC BI19 signal without filter 8301131111 BI20 NC BI20 signal without filter 8401141111 BI21 NC BI21 signal without filter 8501151111 BI22 NC BI22 signal without filter 8601161111 BI23 NC BI23 signal without filter 8701171111 BI24 N...

Страница 971: ...th filter 8C011C1110 BI29 BI29 signal with filter 8D011D1110 BI30 BI30 signal with filter 8E011E1110 BI31 BI31 signal with filter 8F011F1110 BI32 BI32 signal with filter The ends of binary input circuits Signal monitoring points at the end of binary input circuit Element ID Name Description 8001001172 BI1 CPL BI1 signal with filter and programmable logic 8101011172 BI2 CPL BI2 signal with filter a...

Страница 972: ...le logic 8701171172 BI24 CPL BI24 signal with filter and programmable logic 8801181172 BI25 CPL BI25 signal with filter and programmable logic 8901191172 BI26 CPL BI26 signal with filter and programmable logic 8A011A1172 BI27 CPL BI27 signal with filter and programmable logic 8B011B1172 BI28 CPL BI28 signal with filter and programmable logic 8C011C1172 BI29 CPL BI29 signal with filter and programm...

Страница 973: ...ut signal2 ditto Keying Data ID 2 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned Input signal3 ditto Keying Data ID 3 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned Input signal4 ditto Keying Data ID 4 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned Input signal5 ditto Keying Data ID 5 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned Input signal6 ditto Keying Data ID 6 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigne...

Страница 974: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 953 ii Setting tables IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn at IO 2 to IO n Function ID 200B02 to 200B0n Setting table is the same as the table for the IO 1 in section i ...

Страница 975: ...nal 8102111112 BO18 BO18 signal After the contact driver Signal monitoring points after the contact driver Element ID Name Description 8002001113 BO1 RB BO1 driver read signal 8102011113 BO2 RB BO2 driver read signal 8202021113 BO3 RB BO3 driver read signal 8302031113 BO4 RB BO4 driver read signal 8402041113 BO5 RB BO5 driver read signal 8502051113 BO6 RB BO6 driver read signal 8602061113 BO7 RB B...

Страница 976: ...09E11D BO10 SOURCE BO10 output command by PLC logic 31020AE11D BO11 SOURCE BO11 output command by PLC logic 31020BE11D BO12 SOURCE BO12 output command by PLC logic 31020CE11D BO13 SOURCE BO13 output command by PLC logic 31020DE11D BO14 SOURCE BO14 output command by PLC logic 31020EE11D BO15 SOURCE BO15 output command by PLC logic 31020FE11D BO16 SOURCE BO16 output command by PLC logic 310210E11D B...

Страница 977: ...of the rated voltage 110V 80 to 250V 120 24 60 Vdc 19 2 72 Vdc Input voltage 24 48 60Vdc is available where the voltage varies in 20 of the rated voltage 24V 80 to 60V 120 Note The IED composed of a PWS module whose DC rated voltage is 110 250 Vdc can run on AC power supply 100 220Vac However it is recommended to input AC power only for temporary operations such as tests where DC power cannot be i...

Страница 978: ... 1 FG E 1 Short bar Ring plug type terminal block T 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 FG Short wire E Type using compression terminals Type using ring terminals Figure 5 5 1 Schematic diagram and relationship of PWS terminal block CAUTION 1Note For installation the user should connect the case earth screw labeled E to the protective ...

Страница 979: ...s N C contact of FAIL1 9 Same as N O contact of FAIL1 Other items As shown in Table 5 5 4 there are differences between the IED case structures Type using compression terminals and Type using ring terminals Table 5 5 4 Other items of PWS Items Terminal screw No Remarks Type using compression terminals Shot wire 35 37 The connection has been installed by the manufacturer Read Appendix Notes for the...

Страница 980: ...nnector Table 5 5 5 Threshold voltage for detection non detection of the power error a In the case of DC rated voltage 110 250 Vdc Voltage level Threshold voltage for detection non detection of the power error How to set Note High Typical 170V 3 2 1 Insert a shunt connector to position 1 2 at JP4 Low Typical 85V 3 2 1 Insert a shunt connector to position 2 3 at JP4 This is default b In the case of...

Страница 981: ... the threshold voltage about the picking up dropping off of the binary input see Chapter Technical description Binary IO module BI BO and BIO Table 5 5 6 Recommended setting for the voltage level a In the case of DC rated voltage 110 250 Vdc Voltage value to input to PWS Recommended setting for the voltage level 250V 220V High 125V 110V Low b In the case of DC rated voltage 24 60 Vdc Voltage value...

Страница 982: ...cle The LCD can display information e g IED operation menu status setting data monitoring fault records and others We shall see the menus on the display in Chapter User interface later A USB receptacle in B type is provided for the connection to the PC Thus the user can connect the engineering tools GR TIEMS or the PLC editor MULTIPLOG with the IED using the USB receptacle LED indicators 1 26 Indi...

Страница 983: ...rs 4 to 26 is the same as the 3 Table 5 6 1 shows the LED indicator settings Table 5 6 2 shows the signal monitoring points on all LED indicator logics Note Setting menus of the LED indicator are also discussed in Chapter User interface I O setting sub menu i Selection of input signals The LED indicator 3 is lit by entering signals from other functions eight ports are provided for the entering sig...

Страница 984: ...rse Normal t 0 0 000 300 000s 0 t 0 000 300 000s On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 1 1 INVERSE SW Inverse Normal t 0 0 000 300 000s 0 t 0 000 300 000s On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 1 1 INVERSE SW Inverse Normal t 0 0 000 300 000s 0 t 0 000 300 000s On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 1 Figure 5 6 2 LED indicator logics 3 to 26 iii Delayed pick up delayed drop off signal For the LED indicator logic 3 the ...

Страница 985: ... the pulse width using setting Logic timer If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value in the setting Logic timer the pulse width will be equal to the setting value On the other hand if the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value the pulse width will be equal to the width of the input signals Latch type If the user requires lighting the LED ...

Страница 986: ...ED 4 No Assigned Input signal6 Preferred Data ID Set a Data ID at the sixth input on LED 4 No Assigned Input signal7 Preferred Data ID Set a Data ID at the seventh input on LED 4 No Assigned Input signal8 Preferred Data ID Set a Data ID at the eighth input on LED 4 No Assigned LOGIC SW AND OR XOR Switch for logic gate operation on LED 4 AND On Delay Timer 0 00 300 00 s Set a value for an on delay ...

Страница 987: ... signal of the LED indicator 11 31000C1001 LED 12 Output signal of the LED indicator 12 31000D1001 LED 13 Output signal of the LED indicator 13 31000E1001 LED 14 Output signal of the LED indicator 14 31000F1001 LED 15 Output signal of the LED indicator 15 3100101001 LED 16 Output signal of the LED indicator 16 3100111001 LED 17 Output signal of the LED indicator 17 3100121001 LED 18 Output signal ...

Страница 988: ... using the settings i Screen jump pressing the function key The user can program the F1 to F7 keys as the user preferred jump keys For example when the user wishes to use the F1 key to jump to another screen set Screen jump for scheme switch Function in the F1 key see Table 5 6 6 We shall see the setting in Chapter User interface Setting sub menu Configuration of Function keys ii Binary signal gen...

Страница 989: ...LC connection point of the BO1 SOURCE 200B01 31200E11D at the IO 1 slot the user should set the BO1 SOURCE 200B01 31200E11D for the setting Signal of the F1 key Then set Off for the scheme switch BO1_CPL The user can select either Toggle or Instant modes for the signal generation using scheme switch LOGIC as shown in Table 5 6 4 Thus the user can substitute F1 SIGNAL 240001 310001737 for the FUNC ...

Страница 990: ... 300 000s 0 t 0 000 300 000s On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 1 1 INVERSE SW Inverse Normal t 0 0 000 300 000s 0 t 0 000 300 000s On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 1 Figure 5 6 4 LED logics on the function keys F1 to F7 Table 5 6 5 Settings of Function keys Function ID 240001 Setting items Range Units Contents Default setting value F1 Function Screen Jump Assign Signal No Assign Operation mode for the ...

Страница 991: ...igned Input signal6 Preferred Data ID Set a Data ID at the sixth input on F2 No Assigned Input signal7 Preferred Data ID Set a Data ID at the seventh input on F2 No Assigned Input signal8 Preferred Data ID Set a Data ID at the eighth input on F2 No Assigned Reset signal Preferred Data ID Setting Data ID for Latch circuit No Assigned LOGIC SW AND OR XOR Switch for logic gate operation on F2 AND INV...

Страница 992: ...ated directly when pressing F1 3100011730 FUNC KEY2 Signal generated directly when pressing F2 3100021730 FUNC KEY3 Signal generated directly when pressing F3 3100031730 FUNC KEY4 Signal generated directly when pressing F4 3100041730 FUNC KEY5 Signal generated directly when pressing F5 3100051730 FUNC KEY6 Signal generated directly when pressing F6 3100061730 FUNC KEY7 Signal generated directly wh...

Страница 993: ...ting Term A as shown in Figure 5 6 5 Consequently the OC1 operating signal is outputted to the jack at the Term A The LED at the Term A is also lit in step with the output signal The user can use to monitor the phase B and phase C signals using by settings respective Data IDs for the Term B and Term C We shall see the menus for the Term A to Term C in Chapter User interface Test sub menu Signal mo...

Страница 994: ...eferred Data ID Select a signal for Term A No Assigned Term B Preferred Data ID Select a signal for Term B No Assigned Term C Preferred Data ID Select a signal for Term C No Assigned Table 5 6 11 Signal monitoring points for monitoring jack LEDs Function ID 201B01 Element ID Name Description 3100221001 TEST A TEST A 3100231001 TEST B TEST B 3100241001 TEST C TEST C ...

Страница 995: ...on keys F1 to F7 the operation keys can provide signals when pressing the keys the user can monitor the signals at the signal monitoring points in Table 5 6 13 Table 5 6 13 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT Function ID 240001 Element ID Name Description 3100081730 CANCEL Key situation of CANCEL 31000E1730 CLEAR Key situation of CLEAR 31000D1730 CLOSE Key situation of CLOSE 31000F1730 DOWN Key ...

Страница 996: ...1 Clock setting The user can set the time using the time sub menu as shown in Figure 5 7 1 The user also can set the time using the GR TIEMS Clock 10 00 1 2 Time 2012 11 21 10 00 05 Format YYYY MM DD HH mm ss ActiveSyncSrc SNTP Figure 5 7 1 Time sub menu in Clock menu Note Make the calibration the when the clock is set using the GR TIMES This is because the transmission time is required from the P...

Страница 997: ... the address of a time server using settings Server1 The settings Server2 Server3 and Server4 are provided for other time servers 3 Check that the SNTP is shown under the ActivSyncSrc as shown in Figure 5 7 4 4 Check to see that the time zone and the DST are set correctly see 5 7 4 and 5 7 5 Clock 10 00 1 2 Time 2012 11 21 10 00 05 Format YYYY MM DD HH mm ss ActiveSyncSrc SNTP Check SNTP being sho...

Страница 998: ...ncSrc as shown in Figure 5 7 6 Clock 10 00 1 2 Time 2012 11 21 10 00 05 Format YYYY MM DD HH mm ss ActiveSyncSrc IRIG B Check IRIG B being shown under ActiveSyncSrc Figure 5 7 6 Time setting for IRIG B Setting year in IRIG B When the IRIG B data is generated in the IEEE C37 118 IRIG B000 format the user should set On for setting USE_BCDYEAR Conversely when the IRIG B data with absence the C37 118 ...

Страница 999: ...s transferred using a binary input circuit BI Example of time synchronization via BI circuit Figure 5 7 7 exemplifies that the 1Hz square wave is provided via the BI1 circuit BI1A BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 BI9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 BI10 BI11 BI12 BI13 BI14 BI15 BI16 BI17 BI18 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 1Hz squire wave IED BI1 200B01 800100111...

Страница 1000: ...mple set a value e g 0 050s for setting SYNC ADJ The setting is used when the clock function should be synchronized before reaching the 1Hz square wave due to the propagation or the operating time on the BI circuit Clock 10 00 1 2 Time 2012 11 21 10 00 05 Format YYYY MM DD HH mm ss ActiveSyncSrc BI Check BI being shown under ActiveSyncSrc Figure 5 7 8 Time setting for BI Table 5 7 3 Setting items ...

Страница 1001: ...Peru United States EST UTC 04 30 Venezuela UTC 04 00 Bolivia Brazil Dominican Republic Puerto Rico Barbados UTC 03 00 Argentina Brazil Bahia Pernambuco Chile UTC 02 00 Brazil Fernando de Noronha UTC 00 00 United kingdom Iceland Ireland Senegal Saint Helena Mali UTC 01 00 Germany Hungary Italy France Montenegro UTC 02 00 Egypt Estonia Finland Slovenia Greece UTC 03 00 Ethiopia Iraq Kenya Madagascar...

Страница 1002: ...4 5 6 7 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 5 29 30 March Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 5 29 30 31 March Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 October Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...

Страница 1003: ... Figure 5 7 11 DST setting examples by the day 1st or 15th of month iii Time shift After setting the DST the clock is forwarded by 1 hour at the DST start the clock is backed by 1 hour at the DST end Table 5 7 6 DST settings Setting item Range Contents Setting example Notes Summer time On Off Enabling DST operation On Start_Month 1 to 12 Set the beginning of DST in the month 3 Start_Week 1 to 5 Se...

Страница 1004: ...Week 1 5 End week 5 End_Wday Sun Mon Tue Wed Thr Fri Sat End day of week Sun End_Hour 0 23 End hour 1 Setting of SNTP_SYNC Function ID 200A01 Setting item Range Unit s Contents Default setting value Notes SNTP Off On Enabling SNTP synchronization On Server1 0 255 IP address 1 0 0 0 0 Server2 0 255 IP address 2 0 0 0 0 Server3 0 255 IP address 3 0 0 0 0 Server4 0 255 IP address 4 0 0 0 0 Setting of...

Страница 1005: ...ction settings i Changing group number by menu operation The user can change the group number using the menu on the IED screen See the Chapter User interface Setting sub menu ii Changing group number by user programming Another changing method is provided by programing PLC logics For more information about PLC programing see the Chapter PLC function Figure 5 8 2 exemplifies a PLC logic changing gr...

Страница 1006: ...1A0 PLC basic function SEL BI1 1 in BOOL Entering Leaving Binary selection Operation of changing 2 in UNIT 0 in BOOL 1 in UNIT A group number enters to Setting function FunctionID 201400 BI1 GR200 IED BI2 8101011110 8001001110 BI2 FID DTYPE DID 1 DIN_BOOL DO ST FID DTYPE DID 2 RS Q1 SET RESET1 PLC basic function Flip Flop Figure 5 8 2 Example for changing a group setting4 1Note Function block for ...

Страница 1007: ...NT 16 2 MUL UDINT 16 4 MUL ADD ADD UDINT 16 1 DOUT_UNIT_1 TON IN PT Q ET Delay time XX ms TON IN PT Q ET Delay time XX ms TON IN PT Q ET Delay time XX ms PLC basic function Ondelay Figure 5 8 3 Logic for changing a group setting iii Setting PF Function ID 201400 at Setting Protection Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Note Active Group 1 to 8 Selection of a setting group number 1 iv Signal ...

Страница 1008: ...n of settings 990 Settings for Event recorder 992 Configuration in IEC 61850 992 Setting of Interlock ILK 992 Configuration in IEC 60870 5 103 992 Signal monitor 990 Connection with PC 989 Status monitor 990 Double command blocking DCB 990 Tool for Fault recorder 991 Tool for Disturbance recorder 991 Tool for Event recorder 991 Label creator 990 Logging management 990 MIMIC configuration 992 Proje...

Страница 1009: ...so program the IED using the GR TIEMS Figure 6 1 1 GR TIEMS screen on PC Table 6 1 1 Information on the GR TIEMS Information Displaying format Display of voltage and current waveform Oscillograph vector display Symmetrical component analysis On arbitrary time span Harmonic analysis On arbitrary time span Frequency analysis On arbitrary time span The GR TIEMS is software to retrieve and analyze pow...

Страница 1010: ...ble to the LAN port if available in the IED In Figure 6 2 2 when using the LAN port the user has to select the communications option which can be found from the Main menu in GR TIEMS go to Tool Option Option dialog will be displayed change communications option with the second tab Communication Tip See Chapter Communication protocol USB Cable Personal Computer IED LAN Figure 6 2 1 USB Communicatio...

Страница 1011: ...he user can also find operation recorded when an operator engineer logs into the IED analyzing a problem is possible when an error is detected during the IED operations v Double command block For controlling there is a principle that a first receiving command shall be carried out primarily In other words succeeding receiving commands cannot have the right to run until the first receiving command i...

Страница 1012: ...enerate events information file in the CSV the user can retrieve events data file into the IED to view when the file is in the CSV Note In the IED the date and time is clocked in the coordinated universal time UTC when the clock is selected to operate in UTC In the record tools within the PC the date and time is treated in the UTC Notice that the time in the UTC is converted for the local time whe...

Страница 1013: ...ol IEC 61850 communication Note The configuration is possible when the IED software has the IEC61850 protocol To confirmed the implementation of IEC61850 protocol the user needs to check the IED ordering code for more information see Appendix Ordering IEC 60870 5 103 configuration tool The user can edit the data of the IEC 60870 5 103 protocol to perform communications between IEDs The IEC 60870 5...

Страница 1014: ...er 995 BIT Boolean type 995 Error check 994 USINT Unsigned short integer type 997 IED screen information 994 UNIT Unsigned integer type 997 UDINT Unsigned double integer type 998 SINT Short integer type 998 INT Integer type 998 DINT Double integer type 998 Timer variable setting 999 Setting UTM1 UTM24 1001 ...

Страница 1015: ... the PC the user shall purchase a software license EP 261 see Appendix Ordering from Toshiba sales representative For more information of PLC and MULTIPROG see separate manual Basic manual Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor 6F2S1904 PLC data error The Automatic supervision reports the error information when an error occurs in PLC logic The error information is shown in the Monitoring sub...

Страница 1016: ...t for users 8010111BB0 BIT_02_0 General PLC monitoring point for users 8110111BB1 BIT_02_1 General PLC monitoring point for users 8210111BB2 BIT_02_2 General PLC monitoring point for users 8310111BB3 BIT_02_3 General PLC monitoring point for users 8710111BB7 BIT_02_7 General PLC monitoring point for users 8810111BB8 BIT_03_0 General PLC monitoring point for users 8910111BB9 BIT_03_1 General PLC mo...

Страница 1017: ...oring point for users 8710141BB7 BIT_08_7 General PLC monitoring point for users 8810141BB8 BIT_09_0 General PLC monitoring point for users 8910141BB9 BIT_09_1 General PLC monitoring point for users 8A10141BBA BIT_09_2 General PLC monitoring point for users 8B10141BBB BIT_09_3 General PLC monitoring point for users 8F10141BBF BIT_09_7 General PLC monitoring point for users 8010151BB0 BIT_10_0 Gene...

Страница 1018: ...171BB9 BIT_15_1 General PLC monitoring point for users 8A10171BBA BIT_15_2 General PLC monitoring point for users 8B10171BBB BIT_15_3 General PLC monitoring point for users 8F10171BBF BIT_15_7 General PLC monitoring point for users ii USINT type Monitoring point at PLC Driver PLC_DRV in USINT type Function ID 230302 Element ID Name Description 3011001BB0 U08_00 General PLC monitoring point for use...

Страница 1019: ... users 2014031BB0 S08_03 General PLC monitoring point for users 2014311BB0 S08_31 General PLC monitoring point for users vi INT type Monitoring point at PLC Driver PLC_DRV in UINT type Function ID 230302 Element ID Name Description 2115001BB0 S16_00 General PLC monitoring point for users 2115011BB0 S16_01 General PLC monitoring point for users 2115021BB0 S16_02 General PLC monitoring point for use...

Страница 1020: ...s in the PLC logic but the user can set new value using the setting UTM1 e g the user can change 500ms to 200ms on the LCD Since an internal IED memory is able to access the UTM1 the IED can operate with new value of the UTM1 when new one is set IED memory A timer value inputted 500 ms or 200 ms Timer FB Constant value set Fixed PLC 500ms PLC driver FB Function ID 230302 Element ID 3200013001 Vari...

Страница 1021: ...does not make the timer counter reset if the timer counter is running Example of timer action2 Supposed that the timer was set the UTM2 30 Signal is inputted in the FB for 45 ms so the timer counter is running at 45 ms However if the user changes the setting UTM2 to 60 at 45 ms the FB output still remain i e the counter is not reset 0 Counter 15 30 45 Timer counter millisecond 60 UTM2 30 ms Stop R...

Страница 1022: ...TMxx PLC timer settings UTM1 UTM24 Figure 7 4 4 UTMxx timer setting menu GR TIMES operation Setting 10 48 1 8 Record Metering Communication Protection Control Statistic Setting 10 48 1 3 Common Active Group Copy Group A B Group1 Group2 Group3 Common 10 48 1 3 CLP Fault Locator PLC Timer PLC Timer 10 48 1 24 UTM1 0 ms UTM2 0 ms UTM3 0 ms UTM24 0 ms Figure 7 4 5 Timer setting menu LCD operation ...

Страница 1023: ...0 10 000 000 ms Value setting for delay timer 10 0 UTM11 0 10 000 000 ms Value setting for delay timer 11 0 UTM12 0 10 000 000 ms Value setting for delay timer 12 0 UTM13 0 10 000 000 ms Value setting for delay timer 13 0 UTM14 0 10 000 000 ms Value setting for delay timer 14 0 UTM15 0 10 000 000 ms Value setting for delay timer 15 0 UTM16 0 10 000 000 ms Value setting for delay timer 16 0 UTM17 0...

Страница 1024: ...01 UTM10 Input point for the delay timer UTM10 230302 32000B3001 UTM11 Input point for the delay timer UTM11 230302 32000C3001 UTM12 Input point for the delay timer UTM12 230302 32000D3001 UTM13 Input point for the delay timer UTM13 230302 32000E3001 UTM14 Input point for the delay timer UTM14 230302 32000F3001 UTM15 Input point for the delay timer UTM15 230302 3200103001 UTM16 Input point for the...

Страница 1025: ...1025 Setup 1019 Maximum number of recording 1022 Trigger signals 1013 Recording signals 1022 Trigger modes 1018 Recording time and capacities 1021 Fault recorder 1005 Relays within disturbance recorder 1021 Screen information 1007 Trigger settings for PLC 1025 Setup 1008 Types of recording information 1023 Transferring recording information 1029 ...

Страница 1026: ...result if the FL function operates Evolving faults if the ARC function operates Fault and pre fault quantities 8 1 1 Types of recording information The fault recorder can cyclically memory past eight faults the oldest memory will be erased cyclically if another fault occurs The memorized information has 1ms accuracy If a fault occurs the fault recorder is directed to operate to memory operating mo...

Страница 1027: ...re information see Chapter Relay application Autoreclose vi Fault quantities and pre fault quantities Several quantity items amplitude and phase angle of current etc are memorized in the fault recorder as shown in Table 8 1 1 Quantities just before the fault are also memorized The pre fault quantities are captured 10 seconds before tripping but it is possible to take back longer using the setting ...

Страница 1028: ...he lines d show how tripping occurred The lines f have the information about evolving faults which is able to memory up to 32 developing faults Quantitates when the fault occurred are shown below messages g h Fault Record 1 10 48 1 222 2012 07 25 10 48 21 223 Phase AB OC1 OC2 OC3 OC4 SOTF OC FL 0 0km Fault Record 10 48 1 6 1 2012 07 25 10 48 21 223 2 2012 07 21 01 15 55 018 3 2012 07 21 13 11 29 6...

Страница 1029: ... 2 issued e FL calculation results Evolving fault 2 abandoning to reclose CB i e Final Trip Figure 8 1 2 Screen structure about the information 1 8 1 3 Setup for the fault recorder i Operation identifiers ID1 ID128 The user can select the operation identifies arbitrarily using the settings OP Mode ID1 etc For example when the operation result with regard to the overcurrent relay element i e OC1 in...

Страница 1030: ...g the OP Mode Name265 iii Additional triggers for the recording Wishing to start the fault recorder except for the trip instruction the user can use the PLC connection points ADD_F RECORD_TRIG1 to ADD_F RECORD_TRIG4 respectively iv Time setting for Pre fault The instant before the trip is programmable using the setting Pre Fault Time among 10s 50s 100s 200s 300s v Unit setting for the quantities T...

Страница 1031: ... Not assigned OP Mode ID214 Not assigned OP Mode Name214 Not assigned OP Mode ID47 Not assigned OP Mode Name47 Not assigned OP Mode ID215 Not assigned OP Mode Name215 Not assigned OP Mode ID48 Not assigned OP Mode Name48 Not assigned OP Mode ID216 Not assigned OP Mode Name216 Not assigned OP Mode ID49 Not assigned OP Mode Name49 Not assigned OP Mode ID217 Not assigned OP Mode Name217 Not assigned ...

Страница 1032: ...nals FC _OPT_ coming from protection functions FC are detected changing the logic level 0 Un operated to 1 Operated 1 1s 0 01s 1 0 t 0 1s 1 Drop Off OPT PHASE A OPT PHASE B OPT PHASE C OPT PHASE N OPT PHASE A OPT PHASE B OPT PHASE C OPT PHASE N 0 01s Drop Off Pick Up Drop Off Tripping in phase A Tripping in phase B Tripping in phase C Trip phases in CB1 Tripping in phase A Tripping in phase B Trip...

Страница 1033: ...Preferred DataID Signal of the operation identifier264 8 1 6 Signal Data ID Signal monitoring point FAULT_RECORD Function ID 200602 Name Element ID Description ADD_F RECORD_TRIG1 8020001001 Receiving Trigger1 ADD_F RECORD_TRIG2 8120011001 Receiving Trigger2 ADD_F RECORD_TRIG3 8220021001 Receiving Trigger3 ADD_F RECORD_TRIG4 8320031001 Receiving Trigger4 FAULT RECORD TRIG1 8000011001 TRIG1 signal g...

Страница 1034: ...grouping the user can adjust the size of the Event Record1 group using the End of E Record 1 The next Event Record2 group is set with the End of E Record 2 The remains are set for the Event Record3 group Remember that the Trigger ID1 etc are required to set together with the Event Name1 etc user s preferred names should be less than 18 letters FR_CLR 3000001001 Setting Trigger ID14 200602 30000010...

Страница 1035: ...in mind that the event names are set by the Event Name7 and Event Name14 Table 8 2 1 to Table 8 2 3 tabulates the ones for the 31 32 models Note The GR TIEMS uses terms Level1 Level2 and Level3 to represent the Event Record1 Event Record2 and Event Record3 The scope of each level is the same as the scope of each group The GR TIEMS does not show unused triggers and Trigger ID numbers automatically ...

Страница 1036: ...A_CLOSE Trigger ID222 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID43 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID133 48A001 8100001B7D On Off CB2 B_CLOSE Trigger ID223 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID44 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID134 48A001 8200001B7E On Off CB2 C_CLOSE Trigger ID224 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID45 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID135 48A001 8E00001B85 On Off DS_CLOSE Trigger ID225 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID46 Not Assigned Of...

Страница 1037: ...7 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID477 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID298 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID388 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID478 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID299 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID389 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID479 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID300 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID390 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID480 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID301 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID391 Not Assigned Off Trigger I...

Страница 1038: ...ned Off Trigger ID552 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID642 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID732 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID553 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID643 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID733 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID554 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID644 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID734 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID555 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID645 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID735 Not Assigned Off Trigger ID556 Not As...

Страница 1039: ... at On mode ii Off mode The Off mode is the other way of the On mode set Off for the operation Pulse train On Off Triggers generated Triggers generated Triggers generated Figure 8 2 3 Trigger generated at Off mode iii On Off mode In the On Off mode the trigger signal is generated when the pulse train is changed from On to Off and Off to On both as shown in Figure 8 2 4 Set On Off for the operation...

Страница 1040: ...u Event Record1 10 48 1 4 1 2012 07 26 12 34 51 223 F Record clear On 2 2012 07 25 10 56 12 021 Set group change 4 3 2012 07 25 10 31 12 159 F Record clear On 4 2012 07 23 23 56 12 159 a Event record1 list b The latest event 1 c Trigger information d Trigger mode information Screen scroll down e Event 2 f Event 3 g Event 4 Figure 8 2 5 Event information grouped in the Event record1 8 2 4 Setup for...

Страница 1041: ...ignal1 Trigger ID2 Preferred DataID Trigger signal2 for the operation Tigger Mode2 On Off On Off Change Mode setting for the detection Event name2 Preferred name Name of the trigger signal2 Trigger ID768 Preferred DataID Trigger signal768 for the operation Tigger Mode768 On Off On Off Change Mode setting for the detection Event name768 Preferred name Name of the trigger signal768 8 2 6 Signal Data...

Страница 1042: ...unt i Time settings Period of the recording is set using the Record Time The disturbance recorder can operate before the occurrence of the fault the time before the fault occurrence can be set using the Pre fault Time The user can choose a time among 0 1 sec to 10 0 sec Pre fault information Trip command issued Fault End of recording Start of recording Succeeding formation Setting Record Time Sett...

Страница 1043: ...er for recording the disturbance phenomena depends on the recording time and the sampling rate Table 8 3 1 illustrates the maximum number For example the 77 phenomena can be memorized in the disturbance recorder when the Record Time 1 and the Sampling Rate 7 5 elec if the IED operates in 50Hz system The user can also check the maximum number on the IED screen See Figure 8 3 2 Table 8 3 1 Max numbe...

Страница 1044: ...can hold the traces of logic signals during the recording time Using settings Binary Signal the user can select 256 logic signal arbitrary The logic signals that the user has selected should be termed with user s preferred names using settings Binary Sig Name For example CB1 A_CLOSE signal of the PROT_COMM function may be chosen to record using the setting Binary Signal1 we should term it CB1 A_CL...

Страница 1045: ...0041B63 Z4G ORX ZG Binary Signal128 Not Assigned Binary Signal228 Not Assigned Binary Signal39 431001 8B00051B63 Z5G ORX ZG Binary Signal129 Not Assigned Binary Signal229 Not Assigned Binary Signal40 431001 8000011B69 Z1G OPT ZG Binary Signal130 Not Assigned Binary Signal230 Not Assigned Binary Signal41 431001 8100061B69 Z1XG OPT ZG Binary Signal131 Not Assigned Binary Signal231 Not Assigned Binar...

Страница 1046: ...been memorized in the IED Max recording number for Disturbance phenomena Disturbance Record 10 48 1 2 _Record List Number of items 5 77 Clear Records Operating counter Figure 8 3 2 Running counter and Max number in the disturbance recorder Disturbance Record 10 48 1 5 1 2012 07 25 10 48 21 223 2 2012 07 21 01 15 55 018 3 2012 07 21 13 11 29 621 4 2012 07 02 23 32 09 015 5 2012 06 20 09 37 48 915 S...

Страница 1047: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1026 Figure 8 3 4 Screen shot from GR TIEMS ...

Страница 1048: ...rred name Name of the logic signal2 Binary Signal3 Preferred DataID Logic signal3 for the operation Binary Sig Name3 Preferred name Name of the logic signal3 Binary Signal256 Preferred DataID Mode setting for the detection Binary Sig Name256 Preferred name Name of the trigger signal768 DRT_LP Function ID 4B0001 Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Note 1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A OC DRT EN Off ...

Страница 1049: ... operated phase A 8900031C21 UV DRT B UV DRT relay element operated phase B 8A00031C22 UV DRT C UV DRT relay element operated phase C 8C00041C20 UVS DRT AB UVS DRT relay element operated phase AB 8D00041C21 UVS DRT BC UVS DRT relay element operated phase BC 8E00041C22 UVS DRT CA UVS DRT relay element operated phase CA Signal monitoring point DISTURB_REC Function ID 200401 Element ID Name Descripti...

Страница 1050: ... can transfer the information during the fault in the IEC61850 communication Note The transferring is only available in the IEC61850 Editon1 with option or Editon2 For the information about the option see Chapter Communication protocol IEC 61850 communication About protocol separately ...

Страница 1051: ...FLTMS0022 A I2 Primary FLTMS0025 A I0 Primary FLTMS0028 A Iem Primary FLTMS0061 A Va Primary FLTMS0064 V Vb Primary FLTMS0067 V Vc Primary FLTMS0070 V Vab Primary FLTMS0073 V Vbc Primary FLTMS0076 V Vca Primary FLTMS0079 V V1 Primary FLTMS0082 V V2 Primary FLTMS0085 V V0 Primary FLTMS0088 V Vs Primary FLTMS0091 V Vs2 Primary FLTMS0094 V Ra Primary FLTMS0164 ohm Rb Primary FLTMS0166 ohm Rc Primary ...

Страница 1052: ...perated at phase A FLT_OP_A Relay element operated at phase B FLT_OP_B Relay element operated at phase C FLT_OP_C 8 4 3 Transferred state information Information collected by setting OP Mode ID can transferred with the signals in Table 8 4 3 For more information about the statuses see sections 8 1 3 i and ii Table 8 4 3 Transferred information by OP mode settings Items Signal names State taken by ...

Страница 1053: ... the fault 0004 4330041001 FLTMS0005 Value taken during the fault 0005 4330051001 FLTMS0006 Value taken during the fault 0006 4330061001 FLTMS0007 Value taken during the fault 0007 4330071001 FLTMS0008 Value taken during the fault 0008 4330081001 FLTMS0009 Value taken during the fault 0009 4330091001 FLTMS0010 Value taken during the fault 0010 43300A1001 FLTMS0011 Value taken during the fault 0011...

Страница 1054: ...44 43302C1001 FLTMS0045 Value taken during the fault 0045 43302D1001 FLTMS0046 Value taken during the fault 0046 43302E1001 FLTMS0047 Value taken during the fault 0047 43302F1001 FLTMS0048 Value taken during the fault 0048 4330301001 FLTMS0049 Value taken during the fault 0049 4330311001 FLTMS0050 Value taken during the fault 0050 4330321001 FLTMS0051 Value taken during the fault 0051 4330331001 F...

Страница 1055: ...88 4330581001 FLTMS0089 Value taken during the fault 0089 4330591001 FLTMS0090 Value taken during the fault 0090 43305A1001 FLTMS0091 Value taken during the fault 0091 43305B1001 FLTMS0092 Value taken during the fault 0092 43305C1001 FLTMS0093 Value taken during the fault 0093 43305D1001 FLTMS0094 Value taken during the fault 0094 43305E1001 FLTMS0095 Value taken during the fault 0095 43305F1001 F...

Страница 1056: ...32 4330841001 FLTMS0133 Value taken during the fault 0133 4330851001 FLTMS0134 Value taken during the fault 0134 4330861001 FLTMS0135 Value taken during the fault 0135 4330871001 FLTMS0136 Value taken during the fault 0136 4330881001 FLTMS0137 Value taken during the fault 0137 4330891001 FLTMS0138 Value taken during the fault 0138 43308A1001 FLTMS0139 Value taken during the fault 0139 43308B1001 F...

Страница 1057: ...76 4330B01001 FLTMS0177 Value taken during the fault 0177 4330B11001 FLTMS0178 Value taken during the fault 0178 4330B21001 FLTMS0179 Value taken during the fault 0179 4330B31001 FLTMS0180 Value taken during the fault 0180 4330B41001 FLTMS0181 Value taken during the fault 0181 4330B51001 FLTMS0182 Value taken during the fault 0182 4330B61001 FLTMS0183 Value taken during the fault 0183 4330B71001 F...

Страница 1058: ...20 4330DC1001 FLTMS0221 Value taken during the fault 0221 4330DD1001 FLTMS0222 Value taken during the fault 0222 4330DE1001 FLTMS0223 Value taken during the fault 0223 4330DF1001 FLTMS0224 Value taken during the fault 0224 4330E01001 FLTMS0225 Value taken during the fault 0225 4330E11001 FLTMS0226 Value taken during the fault 0226 4330E21001 FLTMS0227 Value taken during the fault 0227 4330E31001 F...

Страница 1059: ...09 Status at Operation identifier ID9 8950091135 FLTOPM010 Status at Operation identifier ID10 8A500A1135 FLTOPM011 Status at Operation identifier ID11 8B500B1135 FLTOPM012 Status at Operation identifier ID12 8C500C1135 FLTOPM013 Status at Operation identifier ID13 8D500D1135 FLTOPM014 Status at Operation identifier ID14 8E500E1135 FLTOPM015 Status at Operation identifier ID15 8F500F1135 FLTOPM016...

Страница 1060: ...0341135 FLTOPM053 Status at Operation identifier ID53 8550351135 FLTOPM054 Status at Operation identifier ID54 8650361135 FLTOPM055 Status at Operation identifier ID55 8750371135 FLTOPM056 Status at Operation identifier ID56 8850381135 FLTOPM057 Status at Operation identifier ID57 8950391135 FLTOPM058 Status at Operation identifier ID58 8A503A1135 FLTOPM059 Status at Operation identifier ID59 8B50...

Страница 1061: ...OPM097 Status at Operation identifier ID97 8150611135 FLTOPM098 Status at Operation identifier ID98 8250621135 FLTOPM099 Status at Operation identifier ID99 8350631135 FLTOPM100 Status at Operation identifier ID100 8450641135 FLTOPM101 Status at Operation identifier ID101 8550651135 FLTOPM102 Status at Operation identifier ID102 8650661135 FLTOPM103 Status at Operation identifier ID103 8750671135 ...

Страница 1062: ...r ID213 8D508D1135 FLTOPM214 Status at Logical operation identifier ID214 8E508E1135 FLTOPM215 Status at Logical operation identifier ID215 8F508F1135 FLTOPM216 Status at Logical operation identifier ID216 8050901135 FLTOPM217 Status at Logical operation identifier ID217 8150911135 FLTOPM218 Status at Logical operation identifier ID218 8250921135 FLTOPM219 Status at Logical operation identifier ID...

Страница 1063: ...48 8050B01135 FLTOPM249 Status at Logical operation identifier ID249 8150B11135 FLTOPM250 Status at Logical operation identifier ID250 8250B21135 FLTOPM251 Status at Logical operation identifier ID251 8350B31135 FLTOPM252 Status at Logical operation identifier ID252 8450B41135 FLTOPM253 Status at Logical operation identifier ID253 8550B51135 FLTOPM254 Status at Logical operation identifier ID254 8...

Страница 1064: ...ycle 1054 Resetting data in demand features 1054 Max Min Ave information 1054 Dead band features V I P Q S PF Frequency 1049 Wh Varh Phase Voltage difference 1049 GCNT 1057 TOTALTIM 1059 Metering features Information 1045 Diminishing small value 1047 Flow settings for P Q S 1047 Measurement settings 1046 Information on the screen 1045 Polarity setting for PF 1048 Peak Demand features Max Min Ave i...

Страница 1065: ...d within the VCT and BI circuits When the measuring instruments start measures power quantities mathematical means is applied to the data from the VCT so that the data are shown accurately on the IED screen The monitoring function has several screens together Note The VCT BIO structures and their features are discussed in Chapter Technical description ...

Страница 1066: ...Vab Vbc Vca V1 V2 V0 2 One or two reference busbar voltages Vs Vs2 Frequency f 3 Active real power in phase a b c three phase Pa Pb Pc P Reactive power in phase a b c three phase Qa Qb Qc Q Complex apparent power in phase a b c three phase Sa Sb Sc S Power factors in phase a b c three phase PFa PFb PFc PF Watt hour plus minus var hour plus minus Wh varh Rate of frequency change Df dt 4 Rate of the...

Страница 1067: ...when Secondary is set Figure 9 2 2 Metering setting in the setting screen Note For the operation of the menu see Chapter User interface Setting sub menu Table 9 2 2 Significant digits for metering Metering screen Settings Maximum number of significant digits after decimal point Current Voltage Phase angle Voltage Primary 1 1 Secontray Current Primary 2 Secontray 3 ii Unit setting The user can sele...

Страница 1068: ...the metering P Q and S i Metering in active power P When the metering function measures the value for supplying power the user should set Send for the Power Conversely if the metering function should operate for absorbing power set Receive for the setting Figure 9 2 3 illustrates the sign of the active power P which is polarized with the voltage V In Figure 9 2 3 a exemplifies the metering functio...

Страница 1069: ...ive power Q ruled by setting Current 9 2 5 Polarity setting for power factor values The power factor PF value is shown by the rule to align the plus minus sign of the P value i e setting PF_sign AP default setting However the user can change the rule i e setting PF_sign AP RP as a result the PF value will have the plus sign provided both the P value and the Q value have the same plus sign or minus...

Страница 1070: ...he metering function will be sent to the network upward but the data sent may give the network a heavy burden because the amount of the data sent could be larger Thus the dead band SD feature is designed not to send unnecessary data will not be sent say the dead band feature regulates not to send the same data repeatedly In practice the analog values in the metering are not always the same hence t...

Страница 1071: ...s If the entering current in Figure 9 2 7 is required to send promptly when the entering current is beyond the limits set 0 for the setting Period SD iii Setting bands for the operation As illustrated in Figure 9 2 7 with regard to the entering current the user can define the upper limit and lower limit using the setting ISD in The limit size of the SD feature is calculated based on the amount of ...

Страница 1072: ...00 to 50 00 Note The values are derived in the VCHK function For more information see Chapter Relay application Voltage check for autoreclose function Figure 9 2 8 Metering setting in the setting screen Note For the operation of the menu see Chapter User interface Setting sub menu Metering 10 48 1 8 ISD 5 00 VSD 0 60 dVSD 0 60 ...

Страница 1073: ...hour Varh Display Unit Kilo var hour kvarh or Mega var hour Mvarh 9 3 3 Regulation of power values The number of digits for the power value can be reduced based on the units kWh MWh and kvarh For instance when the power is measured as 123 456kWh then it is displayed as 123MWh If this value has to be changed then the user can key in a new compensated value For example if 78MWh should be displayed o...

Страница 1074: ...e Voltage applied at phase c Max Min and Averaged data Vc Max Vc Min Vc Ave Voltage applied between phases a to b Max Min and Averaged data Vab Max Vab Min Vab Ave Voltage applied between phases b to b Max Min and Averaged data Vbc Max Vbc Min Vbc Ave Voltage applied between phases c to a Max Min and Averaged data Vca Max Vca Min Vca Ave Zero sequence voltage Max Min and Averaged data V0 Max V0 Mi...

Страница 1075: ...ter period the data is taken into the absolute value calculation that is 100W 100W 200W 200W 2 100W 9 4 3 Demand cycle The data is taken into the memory every second the demand feature will calculate the Max Min Ave values by the function by collecting the latest data in the memory When setting 15 minutes for the Demand_period for example the calculation is done using the data during the latest 15...

Страница 1076: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1055 Figure 9 4 3 Reset menu for Demand values Demand Value 10 48 1 2 Demand Value Reset All Values ...

Страница 1077: ...nd feature will have the largest data If the present data is larger than the past one with the peak demand feature will replace the past one for the present one The maximum value will be cleared when the data is reset ii Minimum value Similarly for the minimum value the IED displays the smallest data after energizing the data will be replaced when the present data is smaller than the past one iii ...

Страница 1078: ...T09 COUNT10 Not assigned GCNT10 COUNT32 Not assigned GCNT32 Note See Chapter General control function Counter function for the general GCNT Note See Chapter Relay application Autoreclose for more information 9 6 1 Count information on the screen The user can see the count number in the counter group Figure 9 6 1 illustrates the count numbers provided by the ARC function Figure 9 6 1 Example of Cou...

Страница 1079: ...e user can see the overall time on the Accumulated Time screen The time will be cleared when the IED is switched off Figure 9 7 1 Example of Accumulated Time screen Note The user can also clear the Accumulated time in the screen menu For key operation see Chapter User interface Monitoring sub menu Statistics sub menu Accumulated Time 10 48 1 1 ACT_TIME d h m ...

Страница 1080: ...ter Control and monitoring application Total time measurement function 9 8 1 Time information on the screen The user can see the total times on the IED screen Figure 9 8 1 Example of Total Time screen Note See Chapter User interface Monitoring sub menu Statistics sub menu 9 8 2 Report setting for TOTALTIM Dead band feature The data collected with the TOTALTIM function will be sent to the network t...

Страница 1081: ...apter Communication protocol LAN communication The hardware information is discussed in Chapter Technical description Signal processing and communication module iii Binary IO For more information about the menu operation see Chapter User interface Monitoring sub menu Binary I O The structure and its operation is discussed in Chapter Technical description Binary IO module iv Goose monitoring For mo...

Страница 1082: ...nction ID 710001 Setting item Range Unit s Contents Default setting value Notes Wh Display Unit kWh MWh Watt hour shown in Kilo or Mega Wh MWh varh Display Unit kvarh Mvarh Var hour shown in Kilo or Mega varh Mvarh Demand settings in MES Function ID 712001 Setting item Range Unit s Contents Default setting value Notes Demand_period 1min 5min 10min 15min 30min 60min Period of demand calculation 10m...

Страница 1083: ...711001 4302051076 711001 4202651076 711001 4302351076 Vab Angle Vab measurement angle deg 711001 4302051051 711001 4202651051 711001 4302351051 Vbc Vbc measurement primary V 711001 4302051078 711001 4202651078 711001 4302351078 Vbc Angle Vbc measurement angle deg 711001 4302051053 711001 4202651053 711001 4302351053 Vca Vca measurement primary V 711001 430205107A 711001 420265107A 711001 430235107...

Страница 1084: ...07C N A N A V0 Min Minimum of primary V0 V 714001 431226107C N A N A V0 Ave Average of primary V0 V 714001 431236107C N A N A Vs Max Maximum of primary Vs V 714001 431217107C N A N A Vs Min Minimum of primary Vs V 714001 431227107C N A N A Vs Ave Average of primary Vs V 714001 431237107C N A N A Vs2 Max Maximum of primary Vs2 V 714001 431218107C N A N A Vs2 Min Minimum of primary Vs2 V 714001 4312...

Страница 1085: ...37107C N A N A Vs2 Max Peak maximum of primary Vs2 V 714001 432218107C N A N A Vs2 Min Peak minimum of primary Vs2 V 714001 432228107C N A N A Vs2 Ave Peak average of primary Vs2 V 714001 432238107C N A N A Ia Max Maximum of secondary Ia A 714001 4311101050 N A N A Ia Min Minimum of secondary Ia A 714001 4311201050 N A N A Ia Ave Average of secondary Ia A 714001 4311301050 N A N A Ib Max Maximum o...

Страница 1086: ...surement primary V 711001 430209107C 711001 420268107C 711001 43023A107C Vs Angle Vs measurement angle deg 711001 4302081057 711001 4202671057 711001 4302391057 Vs2 Angle Vs2 measurement angle deg 711001 4302091057 711001 4202681057 711001 43023A1057 Ia Ia measurement secondary A 711001 4301001050 N A 711001 4301301050 Ib Ib measurement secondary A 711001 4301001052 N A 711001 4301301052 Ic Ic mea...

Страница 1087: ... A Va Max Peak maximum of secondary Va V 714001 4322141050 N A N A Va Min Peak minimum of secondary Va V 714001 4322241050 N A N A Va Ave Peak average of secondary Va V 714001 4322341050 N A N A Vb Max Peak maximum of secondary Vb V 714001 4322141052 N A N A Vb Min Peak minimum of secondary Vb V 714001 4322241052 N A N A Vb Ave Peak average of secondary Vb V 714001 4322341052 N A N A Vc Max Peak m...

Страница 1088: ...ondary Ie A 714001 4311331056 N A N A Iem Max Maximum of secondary Iem A 714001 4311121056 N A N A Iem Min Minimum of secondary Iem A 714001 4311221056 N A N A Iem Ave Average of secondary Iem A 714001 4311321056 N A N A Va Max Maximum of secondary Va V 714001 4312141050 N A N A Va Min Minimum of secondary Va V 714001 4312241050 N A N A Va Ave Average of secondary Va V 714001 4312341050 N A N A Vb...

Страница 1089: ...rogram code error 1080 BIO module 6 error 1097 RAM error 1076 BIO module 7 error 1098 ROM and RAM mismatch 1074 BIO module 8 error 1099 RUN error 1081 CB failure 1105 Sampling error 1083 CB interruption capability error 1136 Setting error 1084 Check sum error 1075 Sigma Iy error 1138 Clock error 1085 Trip circuit error 1132 Communication setting error 1110 Trip circuit supervision task 1128 CT ope...

Страница 1090: ...he results of the supervision functions are grouped and they are classified into five error levels to identify the error degree directly warning level 5 the minor error to the serious error level 1 the critical error Incidentally zero level 0 can be identified as no error Table 10 1 1 shows the errors grouped by the error degree The grouping is provided for setting the degree of error the user can...

Страница 1091: ...tion which the user can examine carefully using the hexadecimal number When two or more errors occur at the same time an error code is given by the summation of the error codes That is when X and Y errors e g X error code 00000002 and Y error code 00000004 occur the sum value 00000006 is screened CP1M ROM RAM error 10 48 Serious error 1 1 00000011 01234567 01234567 01234567 01234567 00000000 Top l...

Страница 1092: ...n normally closed contact N C on FAIL1 and FAIL2 terminals is closed On the other hand the N O contact is open on the serious error as shown in Table 10 1 4 Locking out of BO circuit operation BO is locked out to operate when serious error Level1 occurs Serious error stops trip signal generations to the BO circuit When serious error is removed the operation will be recovered Note See Chapter Techn...

Страница 1093: ...n of A D accuracy on VCT 1 AI 1 ACC error Displayed 1 ON 10 2 14 Abnormal current flowing in CT CT error N A 3 ON 10 2 15 Current transformer failure CT fail N A 3 ON 10 2 16 Supervision of current in zero sequence I0 error N A 3 ON 10 2 17 Supervision of voltage in negative sequence V2 error N A 3 ON 10 2 18 Supervision of voltage in zero sequence VZ error N A 3 ON 10 2 19 Supervision of binary I...

Страница 1094: ...ed 3 ON 10 2 38 Aux contacts monitoring DPSY DOPS TOPS faulty or undefined Displayed 3 ON Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ordering number and check the order num...

Страница 1095: ...r Technical description Signal processing and communication module Processing module ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 3 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ROMRAM Message and level Meaning of the information CP _ ROM RAM error Mismatch between the RAM and ROM detected on the following module instructe...

Страница 1096: ...cussed in Chapter Technical description Signal processing and communication module Processing module ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 5 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SUM Message and level Meaning of the information CP _ SUM error Sum error in the memory detected on the following module CP1M CPU ...

Страница 1097: ...ote The CPU module is discussed in Chapter Technical description Signal processing and communication module Processing module ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 7 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RAM Message and level Meaning of the information CP _ RAM error Error detection in the RAM located on the...

Страница 1098: ... can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 9 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ECC Message and level Meaning of the information CP _ ECC error Error in the ECC is detected on the following module instructed with CP _ as follows CP1M CPU module Error level Serious error Level 1 Table 10 2 10 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ECC Display area Meaning of the ...

Страница 1099: ...e is discussed in Chapter Technical description Signal processing and communication module Processing module ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 11 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_MRAM Message and level Meaning of the information CP _ MRAM error Error detection in the MRAM located on the following mo...

Страница 1100: ...detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 13 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_FPGA Message and level Meaning of the information CP _ FPAG error Problem detected in the FPGA on the following module instructed with CP _ as follows CP1M CPU module Error level Serious error Level 1 Table 10 2 14 Detailed information in Hexadecimal i...

Страница 1101: ...description Signal processing and communication module Processing module ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 15 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PROGRAM Message and level Meaning of the information CP _ CPU error Error detection in the RAM and ROM located on the following module CP1M CPU module Error ...

Страница 1102: ...stopped task in the IED Error level Serious error Level 1 Table 10 2 18 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in MNT_LOGIC Display area Meaning of the detailed information Left column Right column Top row 10000000 Supervision function itself 20000000 Idle task 1 40000000 Idle task 2 WW XX YY ZZ WW FB index in SSP2 2 XX FB index in SSP2 1 YY FB index in SSP1 2 YY FB index in SSP1 1 Middle row WW XX Y...

Страница 1103: ...de promptly when the error is cleared 1Note The CPU module is discussed in Chapter Technical description Signal processing and communication module Processing module ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 19 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_NMI Message and level Meaning of the information CP _ NMI error ...

Страница 1104: ...cussed in Chapter Technical description Signal processing and communication module Processing module ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 21 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SAMPLING Message and level Meaning of the information CP _ SMP error Sampling error detected on the following module instructed w...

Страница 1105: ...ssage When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 23 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SETTING Message and level Meaning of the information CP _ Setting error Setting error detected on the following module instructed with CP _ as follows CP1M CPU module Error level Serious error Level 1 Table 10 2 24 Detailed information expre...

Страница 1106: ...in ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 25 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RTC Message and level Meaning of the information CP _ RTC error Error detection is performed on the RTC on the following module CP1M CPU module Error level Minor error Level 3 Table 10 2 26 Detailed information expressed in Hex...

Страница 1107: ...f the IED is stopped forcibly when the error is detected 2Note The location of the VCT is discussed in Alpha numerical references See chapter Technical description IED case and module slot ii Error message When the function operates and detects error an error message can be shown at the LED and the LCD screen Table 10 2 27 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ACC Message and level Mean...

Страница 1108: ...ated current by 20 i Error level Generally the default error level has been set at level 3 Minor error but the user can program the level using setting CHK_CT LVl then set On for the setting CHK_CT Sw The time for the detection can be set using CHK_CT Timer which is set for 15 seconds as default After the error is cleared resetting will be performed after the elapse of setting time ii Error messag...

Страница 1109: ...has been set at level 3 Minor error but the user can program the level using setting CHK_CTF LVl then set On for the setting CHK_CTF Sw The manufacturer sets ten 10 seconds to detect the failure it is reset instantly when the failure is cleared ii Error message When the function operates and detects error an error message can be shown at the LED and the LCD screen Table 10 2 31 Error messages prov...

Страница 1110: ...ormer module for AC analog input i Error level Generally the default error level has been set at level 3 Minor error but the user can program the level using setting CHK_IZ LVl then set On for the settings CHK_IZ Sw The time to detect can be set using CHK_IZ Timer which is set for 15 seconds as default If the error is cleared resetting will be performed after the elapse of setting time ii Error me...

Страница 1111: ...i Error level Generally the default error level has been set at level 3 Minor error but the user can program the level using setting CHK_V2 LVl then set On for the setting CHK_V2 Sw The time for the detection can be set using CHK_V2 Timer which is set for 15 seconds as default After the error is cleared resetting will be performed after the elapse of setting time ii Error message When the function...

Страница 1112: ...LVl then set On for the setting CHK_VZ Sw The time for the detection can be set using CHK_VZ Timer which is set for 15 seconds as default After the error is cleared it is reset in the time that is the same as the setting time to the detection ii Error message When the function operates and detects error an error message can be shown at the LED and the LCD screen Table 10 2 37 Error messages provid...

Страница 1113: ...nd when the failure is cleared 1Note When the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly 2Note The location of the IO slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description IED case and module slot ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 39 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO1 Mess...

Страница 1114: ...nd when the failure is cleared 1Note When the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly 2Note The location of the IO slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description IED case and module slot ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 41 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO2 Mess...

Страница 1115: ...nd when the failure is cleared 1Note when the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly 2Note The location of the IO slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description IED case and module slot ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 43 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO3 Mess...

Страница 1116: ...d when the failure is cleared 1Note The entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly when the error is detected 2Note The location of the IO slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description IED case and module slot ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 45 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO4 Messa...

Страница 1117: ...nd when the failure is cleared 1Note When the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly 2Note The location of the IO slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description IED case and module slot ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 47 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO5 Mess...

Страница 1118: ...nd when the failure is cleared 1Note when the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly 2Note The location of the IO slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description IED case and module slot ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 49 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO6 Mess...

Страница 1119: ...ond when the failure is cleared 1Note When the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly 2Note The location of the IO slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description IED case and module slot ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 51 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO7 Mes...

Страница 1120: ...ond when the failure is cleared 1Note When the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly 2Note The location of the IO slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description IED case and module slot ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 53 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO8 Mes...

Страница 1121: ...n machine interface ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 55 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_HMI Message and level Meaning of the information HMI error Detection of the HMI failure Error level Minor error Level 3 Table 10 2 56 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_HMI Display area Meaning of the d...

Страница 1122: ...e Power error occurs anytime i Error level The default error level has been set at level 3 Minor error but the user can program the level using setting CHK_POWER LVl Set On for the setting CHK_POWER Sw The manufacturer sets one 1 second to detect the failure and it is reset with in a second when the failure is cleared ii Error message When detecting an error an error message can be shown on the LC...

Страница 1123: ...K_PLC_DAT Sw The manufacturer sets one hundred twenty 120 second to detect the failure it is reset within 60 seconds when the failure is cleared ii Error message When detecting an error an error message will be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 59 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PLC_DAT Message and level Meaning of the information PLC data error Detection of the...

Страница 1124: ... 00000010 PLC stopped 00000011 No PLC stop Identifier 00000012 Output string is too short 00000013 Input string is too short 00000014 Invalid input parameter 00000015 2nd is of the output string 00000016 Invalid string comparison 00000017 Unsupported type in conversion 00000018 Error in the format string 00000019 Invalid input for format string 0000001A Error during string conversion 0000001B Mism...

Страница 1125: ...has been set at level 3 Minor error but the user can program the level using setting CHK_VTF LVl then set On for the setting CHK_VTF Sw The manufacturer sets ten 10 seconds to detect the failure it is reset instantly when the failure is cleared ii Error message When the function operates and detects error an error message can be shown at the LED and the LCD screen Table 10 2 61 Error messages prov...

Страница 1126: ...has been set at level 3 Minor error as default but the user can program the level using settings CHK_CB1 LVl etc then set On for the setting CHK_CB1 Sw or whatever required The time to detect can be set using TCBSV which is provided in the PROT_COMM function If the error is cleared it is reset instantly ii Error message When the function operates and detects error an error message can be shown at ...

Страница 1127: ... level has been set at level 3 Minor error but the user can program the level using settings CHK_DS LVl then set On for the setting CHK_DS Sw The time for the detection can be set using TDSSV which is provided in the PROT_COMM function It is reset instantly when the error is cleared ii Error message When the function operates and detects error an error message can be shown at the LED and the LCD s...

Страница 1128: ...rror Detection of the failure on the module instructed with LAN as follows LAN1 Communication module COM 1 at C11 LAN2 Communication module COM 2 at C12 Error level Serious error Level 1 Table 10 2 68 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_LAN Display area Meaning of the detailed information Left column Right column Top row 00000001 LAN does not exist 00000010 MAC address error 00000100 Connec...

Страница 1129: ...urer sets one hundred 100 second to detect the failure it is reset in 20 seconds when the failure is cleared ii Error message When detecting errors an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 69 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PING Message and level Meaning of the information LAN ping error Detection of the pinging failure instructed with LAN as fo...

Страница 1130: ...cting an error an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 71 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_LRE Message and level Meaning of the information CP _ LRE error Detection of the failure in the LRE instructed with CP _ as follows CP1M CPU module Error level Serious error Level 1 Table 10 2 72 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_LRE Display area ...

Страница 1131: ...of the failure in the settings Error level Minor error Level 3 iii Setting error information If a signal mapping has not been performed correctly error messages be shown in Hexadecimal codes Table 10 2 74 61850 setting error information in CHK_CMLV Display area Meaning of the detailed information Left column Right column Top row 0001xxxx IEC61850 error 0010xxxx IEC60870 5 103 error Number high ord...

Страница 1132: ...r found 000D Erroneous index being used in the data for the protocol stack designated 0003 Failure occurred on going through the selection process with regard to the protocol 000E Time out 0004 Failure occurred during initialization of protocol process 000F Going through the process 0005 Failure for opening file 0010 Found invalid arguments 0006 Failure of access 0011 Found the data type not being...

Страница 1133: ... When detecting errors an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit Table 10 2 76 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_GOOSERCV Message and level Meaning of the information LAN GOOSE error Detection of the failure in GOOSE Error level Minor error Level 3 Table 10 2 77 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_GOOSERCV Display area Meaning of the detailed informati...

Страница 1134: ...ter Technical description 2Note The preliminary logic is designed to acquire a signal coming from the BI circuit and to sort the signal into the Open Fault Undefined and Closed states The preliminary logic is furnished in every control functions For example we can find the logic in section Setup for BIO module in Chapter Control and monitoring application Double position controller with synchroniz...

Страница 1135: ...OSSYN1 Sw iii Error message When the function operates and detects error an error message can be shown at the LED and the LCD screen Table 10 2 79 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_DPOSSYN _DPOS _TPOS Message and level Meaning of the information XXXX undefine Undefine detected at of the XXXX function Error level Minor error Level 3 for Faulty Alarm Level 4 for Undefine Table 10 2 80...

Страница 1136: ...erious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level Minor error Setting of CHK_ACC Function ID 220E01 Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Note s CHK_ACC1 Sw Off On Enable switch On CHK_ ACC 1 Lvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level Serious error Setting of CHK_BIO Function ID 221101 to 221108 Setting item Range Contents Default set...

Страница 1137: ... Notes CHK_IZ Sw Off On Enable switch On CHK_IZ Lvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level Minor error CHK_IZ Timer 10s 60s Checking timer 15s Setting of CHK_V2 Function ID 221A01 Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Note s CHK_V2 Sw Off On Enable switch On CHK_V2 Lvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level Minor error CHK...

Страница 1138: ...rm Warning Error level Minor error CHK_ CB2 Sw Off On Enable switch On CHK_ CB2 Lvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level Minor error Setting of CHK_DS Function ID 221101 Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Note s CHK_DS Sw Off On Enable switch On CHK_DS Lvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level Minor error Setting of ...

Страница 1139: ... Minor error Alarm Warning Error level Minor error PING_IP_ADRS 0 255 Ping target IP address 192 PING_IP_ADRS2 0 255 168 PING_IP_ADRS3 0 255 1 PING_IP_ADRS4 0 255 1 Setting of CHK_CMLV Function ID 224001 Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes CHK_CMLV_DAT Sw Off On Enable switch On CHK_CMLV_DAT Lvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level Minor error ...

Страница 1140: ...error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level for undefined error at DPOS02 Alarm CHK_DPOS2 FLvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level for faulty error at DPOS02 Minor error CHK_DPOS3 Sw Off On Enable switch to supervising the DPOS03 On CHK_DPOS3 ULvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level for undefined error at DPOS03 Alarm CHK_D...

Страница 1141: ...S03 Alarm CHK_TPOS3 FLvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level for faulty error at TPOS03 Minor error CHK_TPOS24 Sw Off On Enable switch to supervising the TPOS24 On CHK_TPOS24 ULvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level for undefined error at TPOS24 Alarm CHK_TPOS24 FLvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Err...

Страница 1142: ...vice led 3110501001 LCK_STA Supervisor locked 3110121001 MINR_ERR Minor error 3110111001 SERI_ERR Serious error Signal monitoring point CHK_ROMRAM Function ID 220101 Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT Executing counter 3210001001 RESULT Check result 3210011001 RES_INST Check result instant Signal monitoring point CHK_SUM Function ID 220201 Element ID Name Description 3210101001 CHECKS...

Страница 1143: ...001 CHKPOINT test point 3210021001 ECC_SECNT ECC single error cnt 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant Signal monitoring point CHK_ECC Function ID 220602 Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant Signal monitoring point CHK_ SAMPLI...

Страница 1144: ...ck result 3210021001 RES_FAST check result fast 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant Signal monitoring point CHK_MRAM Function ID 220F01 Element ID Name Description 32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant Signal monitoring point CHK_ BIO Function ID 221101 to 221108 Element ID Name Description ...

Страница 1145: ... Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant Signal monitoring point CHK_IZ Function ID 221901 Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant Signal monitoring point CHK_V2 Function ID 221A01 Element ID Name Descrip...

Страница 1146: ...on 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant Signal monitoring point CHK_DS Function ID 221101 Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant Signal monitoring point CHK_DPOSSYN Function ID 229001 Element ID Name Description 32110111B0 CDS1_...

Страница 1147: ...EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant Signal monitoring point CHK_PLC_DAT Function ID 223202 Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant 3210001001 RESULT check result Signal monitoring point CHK_PING Function ID 223601 and 223602 Element ID Name Description EXEC_CNT 32FFFF10...

Страница 1148: ... GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1127 Signal monitoring point PRP_LER Function ID 224101 Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant ...

Страница 1149: ...sion Detailed Error Sec No Supervision items Screen message Info Lvl LED 10 3 1 Trip circuit error TC error N A 3 On Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED models do not support certain features To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED identify the IED ordering num...

Страница 1150: ...c TCS6 scheme logic same as TCS1 scheme logic 8100021B60 8200031B60 8300041B60 8400051B60 8500061B60 1 TC1_FAIL_COND 800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 800001EBB0 Figure 10 3 1 Six sets of TCS scheme logic Note If the user wishes to add a user programmed condition for the TCS1 decision set OPT On and connect the user programmed signal at PLC connection point TC1_FAIL_COND The ...

Страница 1151: ... module because the BI circuits of both of these modules can have lower threshold voltages than the BI circuits that are available in other modules Trip coil 52a 52b Protection relay Trip circuit LCP GIS 1 BI1 BI2 1 1 TCS1 EN OPT On On Binary input circuit Binary input circuit t 0 0 4s 0 t 0 4s TC1_FAIL TC1_FAIL_COND 800001EBB2 8000011BB0 8000011BB1 8000011BB2 8000011B60 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 800001EBB...

Страница 1152: ... LCP GIS 1 BI1 1 1 TCS1 EN OPT On On Binary input circuit t 0 0 4s 0 t 0 4s TC1_FAIL TC1_FAIL_COND 800001EBB2 8000011BB0 8000011BB1 8000011BB2 8000011B60 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 800001EBB1 R CB closed status signal Figure 10 3 3 Connection Example2 for TCS1 logic ...

Страница 1153: ... 6 using settings CHK_TCS1 LVL to CHK_TCS6 LVL then set On for the setting CHK_TCS1 Sw to CHK_TCS6 Sw ii Error message When the function operates and detects error an error message can be shown at the LED and the LCD screen Table 10 3 3 Error messages provided by the supervisor in TCS Item Meaning of the information TCx error Detection of an error located at x Error level Minor error Level 3 Table...

Страница 1154: ...Off On OPT On TCS4 Trip Circuit Supervision 4 enable Off TCS5 EN Off On OPT On TCS5 Trip Circuit Supervision 5 enable Off TCS6 EN Off On OPT On TCS6 Trip Circuit Supervision 6 enable Off Setting of CHK_TCS Function ID 223B01 to 223B06 Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes CHK_TCS1 Sw Off On Enable switch On CHK_ TCS1 Lvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning ...

Страница 1155: ...C5_FAIL_SIGNAL1 Trip circuit5 fail signal1 8400051BB1 TC5_FAIL_SIGNAL2 Trip circuit5 fail signal2 8400051BB2 TC5_FAIL_COND TC5 fail condition 8500061B60 TC6_FAIL Trip circuit6 fail 8500061BB0 TC6_FAIL_SIGNAL1 Trip circuit6 fail signal1 8500061BB1 TC6_FAIL_SIGNAL2 Trip circuit6 fail signal2 8500061BB2 TC6_FAIL_COND TC6 fail condition 8F00001B60 TC_FAIL Trip circuit fail Signal Connection point TCS ...

Страница 1156: ... signal2 850006EBB2 TC6_FAIL_COND TC6 fail condition 850006EBB0 TC6_FAIL_SIGNAL1 Trip circuit6 fail signal1 850006EBB1 TC6_FAIL_SIGNAL2 Trip circuit6 fail signal2 Signal monitoring point CHK_TCS Function ID 223B01 to 223B06 Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant ...

Страница 1157: ...ion Displaying error message founded by the sigma_Iy function is shown in Table 10 4 1 Table 10 4 1 Supervision items and error levels for Sigma_Iy Detailed Error Sec No Supervision items Screen message Info Lvl LED 10 4 1 Sigma Iy error CHK_SGMIY error N A 3 On Note The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of hardware and the configuration of functions Several IED...

Страница 1158: ...ther hand the user can be required to set a less value say 1 0 for the SIGMA_IY Y when a special CB is required that is for the high voltage system Figure 10 4 1 Concept of Sigma_Iy function The sigma_Iy function can designed to issue an alarm when the synthesized broken current value reaches an alarm level set by SIGMA_IY Alarm issuing an alarm is ready when the user sets On for scheme switch SIG...

Страница 1159: ...CHK_SGMIY C LVL in respective phase A B and C then set On for the setting CHK_SGMIY A Sw to CHK_SGMIY C Sw ii Error message When the function operates and detects error an error message can be shown at the LED and the LCD screen Table 10 4 3 Error messages provided by the supervisor in SIGMIY Item Meaning of the information CHK_SGMIY x error Detection of an error located at x phase Error level Min...

Страница 1160: ...to 2 0 Y parameter for in Sigma Iy 1 0 Setting of CHK_SGMIY Function ID 223A01 to 223A03 Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes CHK_SGMIY A Sw Off On Enable switch On CHK_SGMIY A Lvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Error level Minor error CHK_SGMIY B Sw Off On Enable switch On CHK_SGMIY B Lvl Serious error Serious error Comm Minor error Alarm Warning Err...

Страница 1161: ...A_IY relay element output phase A 8100001C21 SGMIY B Monitoring SIGMA_IY relay element output phase B 8200001C22 SGMIY C Monitoring SIGMA_IY relay element output phase C Signal monitoring point CHK_SGMIY A to C Function ID 223A01 to 223A03 Element ID Name Description 32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter 3210001001 RESULT check result 3210011001 RES_INST check result instant ...

Страница 1162: ...50 Editon1 option 1166 61850 Editon2 1166 Note The implementation of such protocols depends on the selection of protocols Several IED models do not have the protocols To determine whether the protocols are implemented in an IED locate its IED ordering code and check it at the U position referring to the comparison table below For more information see Appendix Ordering Table Comparative table in re...

Страница 1163: ...TOCOL 10 48 1 4 IEC61850 IEC103 DNP3 0 Modbus Figure 11 1 1 SLAVE PROTOCOL setting Note Selection and operation is dependent on the IED configurations which the customer has determined with the ordering code Accordingly the selection and operation can be unavailable if the protocol is not provided see p 1141 To examine the IED configuration check your ordering code referring Appendix Ordering Neit...

Страница 1164: ... IED Table 11 2 1 TCP IP settings at LAN modules Ports Setting items Range Setting meaning Default value Port A at C11 IPADDRESS1 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 First IP address 192 l68 1 11 SUBNETMASK1 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 GATEWAY1 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Default gateway 192 168 1 1 Port B at C12 IPADDRESS2 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Second IP address 192 l68 1 12 SUBNETMASK2 0...

Страница 1165: ...he redundant set Fixed for the RedundantMode Port B located at C12 if provided can only operate for the connection with the engineering tool GR TIEMS or the PLC editor MULTIPLOG Note See Chapter Technical description Signal processing and communication module i Overview For the Hot standby communication the first communication module for Network is used as the primary port i e Port A at C11 while ...

Страница 1166: ...on setting Setting Items Range Meaning Default RedundantMode Fixed Hot_Standby Fixed Hot standby is not activated Hot_Standby Hot standby activated Fixed DownTime 0 10000ms A timer starts upon the occurrence of the communication failure link down The standby port commences communication in the DownTime 5ms PrimaryPort None Port1 Port2 Selection of priority port None No selection for the priority p...

Страница 1167: ...e for any value of time less than that required by the auto negotiation function in response to the system requirement i e the user can set DownTime to be zero milliseconds In this case switching between the primary and secondary ports is performed immediately i e prior to the auto negotiation function running If switching between ports is not required before the completion of the auto negotiation...

Страница 1168: ...itoring point Using_CH 3100081001 of the HOTST function Value 1 is provided when the Port A is running whereas value 2 is provided when the Port B is running Monitor setting The Hot standby HOTST function can send PING packets to remote devices thus enabling the Hot standby function to monitor the state of the network The Hot standby function checks for a response signal from the remote device If ...

Страница 1169: ...k monitoring could increase the burden on the network This is because a number of PING packets are repeatedly transmitted over the network Thus the user should choose the setting values carefully in accordance with the network capacity the burden and the required time Examples 1 and 2 below show the respective results using the network monitoring function with for different settings Example1 There...

Страница 1170: ...Hot standby function sends a Ping packet to every remote device every 10 second i e the IED sends a ping packet to a remote device every 30 second Suppose that 1 is set for Check_Count The Hot standby function can determine a communication failure after 30 seconds if one of the remote devices is unable to send a response Figure 11 2 4 shows the operation Switching is not executed because the IED c...

Страница 1171: ... received LAN switching is performed because the IED has not confirmed all response Device with Ping_IP3 NG due to no response Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP2 5sec 10sec NG due to no response 5sec 5sec 10sec NG due to no response Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP3 Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1 Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP3 10sec LAN switching is not performed because the IED has not confirmed...

Страница 1172: ...is set for the setting RedundantMode the user can apply IP addresses in the IED The table below shows that both Port A and B can have different IP addresses Table 11 2 5 Default IP address for Fix operation Protocol IEC61850 GOOSE SNTP GR TIEMS MULTIPLOG IP address at Port A 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 11 IP address at Port B Not applicable 192 168 1 12 192 168 1 12 Note Port A 192 168 1 1...

Страница 1173: ...BA ERROR Port A Tx Rx Port B Tx Rx LAN module C11 LAN module C12 I O IN SERVICE Data CPU IED1 Source R L Help Cancel ENTER F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 TOSHIBA ERROR Port A Tx Rx Port B Tx Rx LAN module C11 LAN module C12 I O IN SERVICE Data CPU R L Help Cancel ENTER F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 TOSHIBA ERROR Port A Tx Rx LAN module C11 I O IN SERVICE Data CPU RedBox RedBox Substation computer Port A Port B Tx Tx...

Страница 1174: ...gure 11 2 6 HSR example for ring LAN with DANH Note Prohibition symbol shows the frame is removed by the next terminals ii LRE switches The user should set On for both settings LRE_PortA_EN and LRE_PortB_EN so that the LRE can duplicate the data for A Frame and B Frame iii Entry Forget Time Packets are transferred in A Frame and B Frame over the LAN The user should set the EntryForgetTime to delet...

Страница 1175: ...e VLAN to which the supervision frame belongs and the priority of the supervision frame Use the settings SV_VLAN_ID and SV_VLAN_Priority By default Off is set for the SV_LAN_EN v Monitor It is possible for the user to watch the communion statuses about Port A and Port B Figure 11 2 7 shows the numbers of transferred packets via ports RedundantPacketNum 10 48 1 6 PortA_Send 12345 PortA_Recv 12345 P...

Страница 1176: ...gle IP address in the IED The table below shows that both Port A and B have the same IP address Table 11 2 6 Default IP address for PRP HSR operation Protocol IEC61850 GOOSE SNTP GR TIEMS MULTIPLOG IP address at Port A 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 11 192 168 1 11 IP address at Port B Note Address 192 168 1 11 is set as default Either port A or B is allowed to operate ...

Страница 1177: ...ters When RSTP is set for the RedundantMode the user should enter several PSTP parameters so that the IED is able to enjoy the Spanning Tree topology by the RSTP Setting BridgeHelloTime is used to set a BPDU transferring cycle for other terminals i e BPDU sending interval they are sent for IEDs Network bridges etc Setting BridgeMaxAge instructs the terminal IED to listen to a BPDU cyclically When ...

Страница 1178: ...toEdge Setting PortA_PathCost is used to set the distance for the root bridge path cost when the port is used in the LAN network actually As a rule the setting value depends on the communication bandwidth Setting PortA_Priority is set a priority value for the port Similar to the setting BridgePrioriy a port having the smallest number can have the highest priority Note that a number can be set in 1...

Страница 1179: ...rity 0 7 VLAN Priority of supervision frame 0 EntryForgetTime 100 10000 ms Entry is removed from the duplicate table 400 R S T P BridgeHelloTime 1 10 s Sending interval of BPUD from Root Bridge 2 BridgeMaxAge 6 40 s Receiving interval of BPUD 20 BridgeFwdDelay 4 30 S Waiting times for Listening and Learning 15 BridgePriority 0 61440 4096steps Priority number in Bridge 32768 PortA_AdminEdge Off On ...

Страница 1180: ...f forth target 0 0 0 0 Ping_IP5 0 255 Ping address of fifth target 0 0 0 0 Ping_IP6 0 255 Ping address of sixth target 0 0 0 0 Ping_IP7 0 255 Ping address of seventh target 0 0 0 0 Ping_IP8 0 255 Ping address of eighth target 0 0 0 0 Ping_IP9 0 255 Ping address of ninth target 0 0 0 0 Ping_IP10 0 255 Ping address of tenth target 0 0 0 0 Ping_IP11 0 255 Ping address of eleventh target 0 0 0 0 Ping_...

Страница 1181: ...152 MAC3_OCT3 MAC3 address octet 3 3012001153 MAC3_OCT4 MAC3 address octet 4 3012001154 MAC3_OCT5 MAC3 address octet 5 3012001155 MAC3_OCT6 MAC3 address octet 6 3013001150 MAC4_OCT1 MAC4 address octet 1 3013001151 MAC4_OCT2 MAC4 address octet 2 3013001152 MAC4_OCT3 MAC4 address octet 3 3013001153 MAC4_OCT4 MAC4 address octet 4 3013001154 MAC4_OCT5 MAC4 address octet 5 3013001155 MAC4_OCT6 MAC4 add...

Страница 1182: ...1001 Element ID Name Description 3121001001 NETMONITOR Change to Network monitoring function 3120001460 Ping_IP1 Decision output of PING1 response w r t IP1 address 3120011460 Ping_IP2 Decision output of PING2 response w r t IP2 address 3120021460 Ping_IP3 Decision output of PING3 response w r t IP3 address 3120031460 Ping_IP4 Decision output of PING4 response w r t IP4 address 3120041460 Ping_IP5...

Страница 1183: ...Communication Network Remote Monitoring Fiber Optic Ring 100BASE FX Operator Workstation Printer Engineering Workstation GPS GBU GRT GRG GBU GRL GRB GBU GRG GRZ GBU GRT GRL CONTROL SNTP MEASUREMENT GOOSE Ethernet LAN TCP IP Figure 11 3 1 SAS network using IEC 61850 protocol Note When applying IEC 61850 communications the user should map application signals with the required logical nodes LNs withi...

Страница 1184: ...formation When TCP IP operates the IEDs can communicate with SAS computer operator workstation OWS engineering workstation EWS remote monitoring system SNTP server In the SAS the communication is served with the method of data transfer Report method of sending event messages like measurement status alarm and so on GOOSE Generic Object Oriented Substation Event method of communication between IEDs ...

Страница 1185: ...s domain specific LN The domain specific LN contains the essential function for target devices in the IEC 61850 network LN data model defines the abstract syntax and semantics of the information exchanged between PDs The relation between data object classes data types data attributes and abstract data objects are provided in the LN data model The LN data model is mapped to Manufacturing Message Sp...

Страница 1186: ...l The Physical Model illustrates that both the IED and its functions are communicating with the SAS using the Ethernet The equivalent IEC 61850 Model represents communication at LNs in both the PD using different Communication services which we shall discuss in section 11 3 2 x CB Open Close CB Status Monitoring Harmonics measurement Over current relay Control Monitoring Protection function Substa...

Страница 1187: ... monitoring of GOOSE message Note that there shall be one instance of LGOS per GOOSE subscription for a given GOOSE source The user can handle LGOS with signals shown in Table 11 3 3 The signals are provided for mapping in the 61850 Editon2 Figure 11 3 3 shows an example that they are mapped for the LGOS Table 11 3 3 GOOSE message for the monitor or the diagnostic Signals Data ID Signal names Desc...

Страница 1188: ...g server client communication Report is a data set transferred from the IED to the SAS The reports generated by the predefined triggers are issued regularly in interval the reports are also generated upon a change in the event The reports are grouped into two types 1 Buffered report control block and 2 Unbuffered report control block Note that the system achieved by the unbuffered report service c...

Страница 1189: ...e SAS if the user makes the link between a reviving control message and a control function block that changes the state of the output element Four control modes are provided DOes Direct control with normal security direct operate SBOns SBO control with normal security operate once or operate many DOes Direct control with enhanced security direct operate SBOes SBO control with enhanced security ope...

Страница 1190: ... for the data transmission The MMS operates in the international standardized messaging system that are made of TCP IP and Ethernet viii Generic Substation Events GSE GSE is a control model defined in the IEC 61850 standard it provides a fast and reliable method for transferring the event data over the SAS The GSE provides facility to transfer the same event message to multiple physical devices us...

Страница 1191: ...lock Set of LN variables IEC 61850 7 4 GOOSE subscribe function GOOSE outgoing 2 Mapping data 1 icd cid 3 GOOSE subscribe Logical Node CONTROL Application Data Logical device1 Logical device2 GOOSE incoming REPORT Event Measurement Input Output Signals Voltage Current Binary Input Binary Input VCT BIO IED Figure 11 3 4 IED Data Structure To configure an IED data structure the user should edit the ...

Страница 1192: ...to manage IEC61850 configuration file Import ICD CID file from the selected IED Map the signals to Logical Nodes Edit Data set RCB and GCB Edit signals for GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe Write configured data to IED Choose a required 61850 edition from the pull down list cf sec 11 3 3 i cf sec 11 3 3 i cf sec 11 3 3 ii cf sec 11 3 3 iii cf sec 11 3 3 iv cf sec 11 3 3 iv cf sec 11 3 3 iv cf sec ...

Страница 1193: ...roject folder If the user does not have the project create a new project Figure 11 3 6 shows how to open an existing project or create a new project Figure 11 3 6 File menu Selection of IED When user s project has been created or is opened the user can add new IEDs Figure 11 3 7 illustrates new IED has been added on the project tree Figure 11 3 7 Adding IED ...

Страница 1194: ...dition number Note When the user has purchased the products supporting for Editon1 Option or later edition the GR TIEMS can display the Edition list menu as shown in Figure 11 3 8 thus the user should select one from the edition list However if neither is supported in your products then the menu is not displayed and default Edition1 will be selected directly The user can check it through the IED s...

Страница 1195: ...1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1174 Check to see that four engineering screens are appeared Logical Node Screen Signal List Screen GOOSE Publish Screen GOOSE Subscribe Screen Figure 11 3 9 IEC 61850 screens ...

Страница 1196: ...ich it is connected Exporting and Importing CID ICD file The user can export or import a CID ICD file as a CSV file The user can edit the exported CSV file using the MS EXCEL the user can import the edited CSV file back to the GR TIEMS Figure 11 3 10 shows the options available to import export CID ICD file The user can either click the icons on the menu bar or select the required option form the ...

Страница 1197: ...attributes of LNs Figure 11 3 11 shows an example to check if the signals are mapped in default configuration For example to check for mapping of the primary element signal in earth fault protection EF1 follow the steps below 1 To check if the EF1 signal is already mapped in the LN key EF1 under Signal Name in the Signal List screen EF1 in signal list Mapped data Figure 11 3 11 Signal mapping As s...

Страница 1198: ...s already mapped in the Dataset STAT1 3 To check if the DataSet is already assigned to RCB Right click on LLN0 and select Edit Report Control then Report Control List screen appears as shown in Figure 11 3 13 Figure 11 3 13 Report Control List As shown in the above figure the DataSet STAT1 is already assigned to RCB brcbST A ...

Страница 1199: ...e Signals Mapped data Drag Drop Figure 11 3 14 Signal mapping Note To optimize the performance of the IED Period should be 100 if the signal is not required to be sent immediately The user should map a quality signal i e Qual_Validity U16_00 or U16_01 should be mapped to q with Period 100 The user should map a time signal i e SYS_TIME should be mapped to t Export Import Mapping Data The user can e...

Страница 1200: ...riable of an existing LN Right click Prot and select Add Logical Node or select Edit Logical Node 2 In the Edit Logical Node screen select LN Class Prefix and LN Instance and check the required variable check boxes as shown in Figure 11 3 16 below To Add Logical Node To choose a proper Logical Node To add optional variable Figure 11 3 16 Add or Edit Logical Node Note Refer to IEC 61850 7 4 to choo...

Страница 1201: ...he steps below 1 Right click LLNO and select Edit DataSet DataSet List window appears as shown in Figure 11 3 17 2 Choose the variables to be added to the DataSet and click OK Users can choose the existing Dataset or enter a new DataSet name Figure 11 3 17 Edit DataSet screen Note 100 DataSets can be added in the DataSet List and each DataSet can have maximum of 32 elements ...

Страница 1202: ...et to Report Control Block follow the steps below 1 Under the LN tree structure select Prot Right click LLN0 and select Edit Report Control Report Control List screen appears as shown in Figure 11 3 18 2 Click Add or Edit to add a new dataset or to edit the existing dataset in the Report Control List window as shown in Figure 11 3 18 Figure 11 3 18 Edit Report Control screen ...

Страница 1203: ...he user wishes to assign the DataID for GOOSE operation follow the steps below 1 Click GGIO1 and select Ind1 as shown in Figure 11 3 19 2 Drag and Drop the required signals to be sent by GOOSE Note The user can assign any signal to GGIO1 Ind1 16 for high speed GOOSE as required Drop Drag Figure 11 3 19 Signal mapping for high speed GOOSE As shown in the above figure signals are assigned to System ...

Страница 1204: ...hose variables in the GOOSE Publish screen Figure 11 3 20 shows the GOOSE Publish screen where System is fixed and is not configurable for GGIO1 whereas Ctrl Control and Prot Protection are configurable The user can add new variables from the Logical Node screen to the GOOSE Publish screen using drag drop method Figure 11 3 20 shows an example for GOOSE Publish where System GGIO2 Ind1 stVal is add...

Страница 1205: ...s automatically added in the Signal List of the current IED List 2 List 1 List 2 Figure 11 3 21 GOOSE Subscribe Note The user can monitor about the GOOSE message on the LCD screen See sec 11 3 8 Edit Control function The Data IDs i e Signal Number starting with 5 is used for control function when the IED has the control function by default The user should check whether the required signals are map...

Страница 1206: ...ping period for Control shall be 100 Note For more information of the input points see chapter General control function or Control and monitoring application if available Input DataID DEV01_ CONTROL_ REQ SBOW Oper Cancel Mapping Figure 11 3 22 Control function mapping To complete the setting for control function after mapping data the user needs to set BI BO in the GR TIEMS Setting Note For more i...

Страница 1207: ...rite to IED Follow the below steps to write the file in the IED 1 Save the current project in the PC 2 Right click on the target IED and select Write to IED 3 Click items to write Signal list GOOSE Subscribe CID and Mapping Data 4 Click Write to transfer the files to the IED Figure 11 3 24 Selection of CFD writing items Note If GOOSE subscribe operation is required the user shall select Signal Lis...

Страница 1208: ...Figure 11 3 25 Communication parameter settings 6 Confirm the edition number written in the IED Note The user can check the edition number through on the LCD screen Therefore the user should confirm the edition number written in the IED too See sec 11 3 3 vi to show the LCD screen ...

Страница 1209: ... name ABCD station Description ABCDEFG CP1M Software ABCD IEC61850 eng G2M8500 IEC61850 Support Ed1 Ed1op Ed2 IEC61850 Data Model W2GR_200 IEC61850 SCL Ver Edition 2 2007B IEC61850 Mapping X2GR_00 GOOSE Subscribe No data Information about the IED is supporting 61850 editions Scroll downward Main Menu 10 48 8 10 Record Monitoring Setting I O setting Control Time Test 0Information Security Setting L...

Страница 1210: ... keep alive signal The user should set the time in seconds using the setting 850KEEPALIVE v Setting CommTerm If the user wishes to receive a CommTerm signal carrying an actual operation time from a device outside the IED the user should set scheme switch TCMD On Note that the CommTerm signal will not conform to the IEC 61850 standard when the user turns on this function That is this function can b...

Страница 1211: ...GOOSE message The GOSNDBLK function is useful when there is a conflict in the communication with another active IED on sending a GOOSE signal To block the sending of the GOOSE message the user should set On for scheme switch GOSNDBLK GOOSE receive block GOSUBBLK Suppose the user wishes to simulate a bad reception condition with regard to the GOOSE signal the user can apply a setting that will prev...

Страница 1212: ...e user has to switch the IED off and on if the user has switched to a slave protocol from the others Communication 10 48 1 3 LAN USBCOM SLAVE PROTOCOL SLAVE PROTOCOL 10 48 1 1 Slave Protocol IEC61850 SLAVE PROTOCOL 10 48 1 4 IEC61850 IEC103 DNP3 0 Modbus Figure 11 3 28 Slave protection for the IEC61850 setting menu Note This sample menu illustrates how to select the IEC 61850 so that we discuss ne...

Страница 1213: ...l packed value M Packed overflow2 N N N outOfRange2 N N N badReference Y N N oscillatory2 N N N Failure Y Y N oldData2 N N N inconsistent2 N N N Inaccurate N Y N source2 process substituted M process N N N Test True False M False Y Y Y operatorBlocked2 True False M False N N N 1Note M N O means rules of attributions If it is Mandatory M it shall be used in the IED Optionally O or conditional manda...

Страница 1214: ...consistent source test operatorblocked Detail quality 230302 3112001BB0 1 1 If CHK_IZ Lvl is equal to Serious or Serious Comm RESULT signal 3210001001 If a item is set for CHK_IZ Lvl FB CHK_IZ FB 221901 If CHK_V2 Lvl is equal to Serious or Serious Comm If a item is set for CHK_V2 Lvl RESULT signal FB CHK_V2 FB 221A01 3210001001 If CHK_CT Lvl is equal to Serious or Serious Comm If a item is set for...

Страница 1215: ...nvalid state overcomes when questionable also happens i e the questionable is not presence when the invalid and the questionable are happening together The value of U16_00 validity is influenced by CHK_xxx Lvl settings That is the value will be changed after another item is set for the CHK_xxx Lvl Table 11 3 7 shows the combination cases of validity and detail quality Table 11 3 7 Combinations of ...

Страница 1216: ...ement if Serious error or Serious error Comm is occurring 5 Judgement of Invalid state 6 Judgement for state of Questionable 7 Data type conversion 8 Collection and combination of Invalid states 9 Collection and combination of Questionable states 10 Exclusion of Invalid and Questionable state i e priority of Invalid 11 14 bit shift operation of Invalid bit in the left direction 12 15 bit shift ope...

Страница 1217: ...1BB0 OR WORD_TO_UNIT M_I16_01 quality signal by SERI and MINR_ERR 230302 3112011BB0 1 2 4 3 7 5 6 1 2 4 3 7 5 6 1 2 4 3 7 5 6 1 2 4 3 7 5 6 1 2 4 3 7 5 6 1 2 4 3 7 5 6 1 2 4 3 7 5 6 16 13 15 7 A 1 8 9 10 7 7 11 15 7 12 11 14 17 18 7 7 7 11 13 12 11 13 20 A 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 A 7 D B C U16_00 U16_01 E DIN_UDINT FID DTYPE DID DO ST Setting CHK_V2 Lvl 221A01_3230013001 CHK_V2_LVL DIN_UDINT FID DTYPE D...

Страница 1218: ...ion When errors occur SERI_ERR signal can be generated if Serious and Serious Comm are set for the settings CHK_xxx Lvl On the other hand MINR_ERR signal can be generated if Minor Alarm Warning are set for the settings CHK_xxx Lvl The SERI_ERR signal includes invalid and failure in the detail quality The MINR_ERR signal includes questionable and inaccurate The SERI_ERR and MINR_ERR signals are exc...

Страница 1219: ...0000000000 If severe incidents such as Serious or Serious comm error are detect the IEC61850 interrupts the Qual_Validity as invalid i e it is 0100000000000 If non severe and sever incidents occur at the same time the output of the Qual_Validiy is invalid i e it is 0100000000000 The test mode will be expressed if the Qual_Validiy has a test bit that is 0000000000010 The outputs of MINR_ERR and SER...

Страница 1220: ...UAL 1 SUB_ QUAL 2 SUB_ QUAL 3 SUB_ QUAL 4 SUB_ QUAL 5 SUB_ QUAL 6 SUB_ QUAL 7 SUB_ QUAL 8 SUB_ QUAL 9 SUB_ QUAL 10 SUB_ QUAL 11 SUB_ QUAL 316 SUB_ QUAL 317 SUB_ QUAL 318 SUB_ QUAL 319 Signal names Figure 11 3 33 Screen example of GOOSE Monitoring Note The IED shall be managed with own subscription information to receive the GOOSE packets regarding the other IEDs Thus the user should edit the subsc...

Страница 1221: ...00011001 SUB_QUAL 1 GOOSE subscription quality status 301101 3100021001 SUB_QUAL 2 GOOSE subscription quality status 301101 3100031001 SUB_QUAL 3 GOOSE subscription quality status 301101 3100041001 SUB_QUAL 4 GOOSE subscription quality status 301101 31013E1001 SUB_QUAL 318 GOOSE subscription quality status 301101 31013F1001 SUB_QUAL 319 GOOSE subscription quality status Note The user cannot view G...

Страница 1222: ...ge Unit s Contents Default setting value Notes GOINT 1 to 120 sec Maximum GOOSE resend interval 2 850BLK Off On IEC 61850 enable disable Off 850AUT Off On Authentication of IEC 61850 association Off 850KEEPALIVE 1 to 120 sec TCP KeepAlive time for IEC 61850 20 TCMD Off On Set T in CommTerm as actual Time Off ...

Страница 1223: ...TEPORTNUM 2 Port number of IEC 61850 client 2 3100031001 REMOTEPORTNUM 3 Port number of IEC 61850 client 3 3100041001 REMOTEPORTNUM 4 Port number of IEC 61850 client 4 3100051001 REMOTEPORTNUM 5 Port number of IEC 61850 client 5 3110041005 Qual_Validity IEC 61850 validity of quality Monitoring point for Edition 1 and Editon2 GOOSE Function ID 301101 Note The GR TIEMS cannot display SUB_QUAL signal...

Страница 1224: ...ription quality status 3100221001 SUB_QUAL 34 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100231001 SUB_QUAL 35 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100241001 SUB_QUAL 36 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100251001 SUB_QUAL 37 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100261001 SUB_QUAL 38 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100271001 SUB_QUAL 39 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100281001 SUB_QUAL 40 GOOSE subscr...

Страница 1225: ...ription quality status 31004C1001 SUB_QUAL 76 GOOSE subscription quality status 31004D1001 SUB_QUAL 77 GOOSE subscription quality status 31004E1001 SUB_QUAL 78 GOOSE subscription quality status 31004F1001 SUB_QUAL 79 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100501001 SUB_QUAL 80 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100511001 SUB_QUAL 81 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100521001 SUB_QUAL 82 GOOSE subscr...

Страница 1226: ...tion quality status 3100761001 SUB_QUAL 118 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100771001 SUB_QUAL 119 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100781001 SUB_QUAL 120 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100791001 SUB_QUAL 121 GOOSE subscription quality status 31007A1001 SUB_QUAL 122 GOOSE subscription quality status 31007B1001 SUB_QUAL 123 GOOSE subscription quality status 31007C1001 SUB_QUAL 124 GOOSE su...

Страница 1227: ...tion quality status 3100A01001 SUB_QUAL 160 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100A11001 SUB_QUAL 161 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100A21001 SUB_QUAL 162 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100A31001 SUB_QUAL 163 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100A41001 SUB_QUAL 164 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100A51001 SUB_QUAL 165 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100A61001 SUB_QUAL 166 GOOSE su...

Страница 1228: ...tion quality status 3100CA1001 SUB_QUAL 202 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100CB1001 SUB_QUAL 203 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100CC1001 SUB_QUAL 204 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100CD1001 SUB_QUAL 205 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100CE1001 SUB_QUAL 206 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100CF1001 SUB_QUAL 207 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100D01001 SUB_QUAL 208 GOOSE su...

Страница 1229: ...tion quality status 3100F41001 SUB_QUAL 244 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100F51001 SUB_QUAL 245 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100F61001 SUB_QUAL 246 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100F71001 SUB_QUAL 247 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100F81001 SUB_QUAL 248 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100F91001 SUB_QUAL 249 GOOSE subscription quality status 3100FA1001 SUB_QUAL 250 GOOSE su...

Страница 1230: ...tion quality status 31011E1001 SUB_QUAL 286 GOOSE subscription quality status 31011F1001 SUB_QUAL 287 GOOSE subscription quality status 3101201001 SUB_QUAL 288 GOOSE subscription quality status 3101211001 SUB_QUAL 289 GOOSE subscription quality status 3101221001 SUB_QUAL 290 GOOSE subscription quality status 3101231001 SUB_QUAL 291 GOOSE subscription quality status 3101241001 SUB_QUAL 292 GOOSE su...

Страница 1231: ...iagnose GOOSE Message 7400066470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 6 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400076470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 7 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400086470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 8 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400096470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 9 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74000A6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 10 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74000B6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 11 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400...

Страница 1232: ...TOR 46 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74002F6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 47 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400306470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 48 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400316470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 49 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400326470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 50 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400336470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 51 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400346470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 52 Monitor Diagnos...

Страница 1233: ... Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400596470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 89 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74005A6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 90 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74005B6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 91 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74005C6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 92 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74005D6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 93 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74005E6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 94 Monitor Diagnose GOOS...

Страница 1234: ... 130 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400836470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 131 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400846470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 132 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400856470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 133 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400866470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 134 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400876470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 135 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400886470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 136 Monitor Dia...

Страница 1235: ... 172 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400AD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 173 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400AE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 174 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400AF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 175 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400B06470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 176 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400B16470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 177 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400B26470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 178 Monitor Dia...

Страница 1236: ... 214 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400D76470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 215 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400D86470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 216 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400D96470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 217 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400DA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 218 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400DB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 219 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7400DC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 220 Monitor Dia...

Страница 1237: ... 256 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401016470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 257 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401026470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 258 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401036470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 259 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401046470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 260 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401056470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 261 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 7401066470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 262 Monitor Dia...

Страница 1238: ... 297 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74012A6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 298 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74012B6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 299 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74012C6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 300 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74012D6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 301 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74012E6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 302 Monitor Diagnose GOOSE Message 74012F6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR 303 Monitor Dia...

Страница 1239: ...figuration using the GR TIEMS as cited in the previous section Measured data current voltage active power reactive power frequency Status data events fault indications etc Note The selection of the IEC 60870 5 103 communication is dependent on the ordering code in the communication protocols For the selection see Appendix Ordering Note The selection concerning to the communication module interface...

Страница 1240: ...The GR TIEMS can provide the user the management means for the following data Data management Import data are provided in the CSV file The data are categorized as adding items editing items deleting items and arranging items Process management Creation of the new data Registration clear and change name of a slave IED Registration and clear of signals Edition of the dialog prototype External Interf...

Страница 1241: ...ta ID COT Type of measurands quantities General command INF FUN Control condition Data ID Measurands Type ID 3 9 INF FUN Number of measurands Type of measurands quantities Table 11 4 2 Common settings in IEC 60870 5 103 Items Notice Transmission cycle of Measurands frame To perform to write the settings in the IED effectively the user should turn off the DC supplying to the IED then turn on the DC...

Страница 1242: ...he following specifications should be followed in the respective IEDs 1 Polling cycle 150ms or longer 2 Timeout time time to re sending the request frame to the IED 100ms IEC103 master IED Data request Data request Response frame Response frame Polling cycle 150ms or more Figure 11 4 1 Ping cycles between the master station and the IED ...

Страница 1243: ...nterface in the RS 485 A maximum number of 32 relays is possible in the IEC 60870 5 103 standard Optic interface Several optic communication modules are available Note Either interface is provided with a communication module in the IED the specification is discussed separately See chapter Technical description Signal processing and communication module ii Application Layer The following layers are...

Страница 1244: ...rted commands using the cause of transmission COT negative acknowledgement of a command v Test mode3 For the process in the control system both spontaneous messages and polled measured values are designated by the means in the test mode of CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION The means denoted the test mode of CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION 7 is normally used for the messages transmitted with COT 1 spontaneous or COT 2 c...

Страница 1245: ...ting is 4000ms In the following case the Time tagged measurand with COT 12 occurs Command receive t Time tagged measurand with COT 11 12 checked occurs Remote operation valid time TR ms Figure 11 4 2 Time setting for the remote operation Local operation valid time When Time tagged message or Time tagged measurand occurs during the period from the start of local operation described in 11 4 5 ii 7 t...

Страница 1246: ...on Type ID 3 or 9 occurs its COT shifts COT 7 Test mode Signal No for relative time and fault number This setting is used to set the trigger signal which is attached the frame of Type ID 2 or 4 The trigger signal is selected from the signal list This setting is not related to the frame of Type ID 1 The time ms which is from the establishment of a set signal to the detection of a status change is a...

Страница 1247: ...message the Type ID INF FUN DPI and COT must be set and the maximum 256 frames of Time tagged message can be set The information number of the frame is determined by the INF setting The most left item No is only serial number and can be skipped Common address is linked with the address setting in the IEC 60870 5 103 standard Note For more information see Appendix IEC 60870 5 103 interoperability I...

Страница 1248: ...TIEMS 8 Variable structure qualifier 81H 9 Cause of transmission COT 1 9 11 12 Customized by GR TIEMS 10 Common address of ASDU 1 254 Linked with Address setting 11 Function type FUN 0 255 Customized by GR TIEMS 12 Information number INF 0 255 Customized by GR TIEMS 13 Double point information DPI 0 1 2 3 DP Customized by GR TIEMS 14 Relative time RET 0 65535 Trigger condition to calculate RET is ...

Страница 1249: ...e Appendix is recommended If the frame out of standard is provided the INF should be set referring Table 11 4 5 and the Appendix Table 11 4 5 INF category of Monitor direction INF Category 0 to 15 system functions 16 to 31 Status 32 to 47 Supervision 48 to 63 earth fault 64 to 127 short circuit 128 to 143 auto reclosure 144 to 159 Measurands 160 to 239 not used 240 to 255 generic functions Note Se...

Страница 1250: ...same information number INF Regarding the frame related to a device control the undefined failed status may be required in addition to the close open status for the extension When selecting DP undefined 00 close 01 open 10 failed 11 status is applied in the same information number INF COT Cause of Transmission COT of the frame is set Not only one COT but also two or more COT can be selected each N...

Страница 1251: ...I 1 9 11 12 Always 1 No Events don t occur Yes Always 11 No Always 12 No Always 1 Yes 11 cause at local or 1 other causes No 12 cause at remote or 1 other causes No Always 11 Yes Always 12 Yes 11 cause at local or 12 cause at remote or 1 other causes No 11 cause at local or 1 other causes Yes 12 cause at remote or 1 other causes Yes 11 cause at local or 12 cause at remote or 1 other causes No 11 c...

Страница 1252: ...of Time tagged measurand the INF FUN Sig No Rev COT and SCL must be set and the maximum eight frames of Time tagged measurand can be set The information number of the frame is determined by the INF setting The most left item No is only serial number and can be skipped Common address is linked with the address setting of the relay For more information see Appendix IEC 60870 5 103 interoperability I...

Страница 1253: ...hough the status of set signal changes from ON to OFF If the metering values at the newest fault record are transmitted as the status change frame select the Data ID of F Record_DONE or FAULT RECORD DONE in the signal list of the relay Note A relevant Data ID is required to select in the signal list The description of the Data ID is obtained automatically on the setting Inverse This setting is use...

Страница 1254: ...OT but two or more COT can be selected each No frame COT setting pattern and COT supplemented the frame are according to Table 11 4 6 Though the COT 9 General Interrogation cannot be selected SCL Measurement Name Measurement Description The Data ID corresponding to a measurand is required to select Coefficient Set the conversion coefficient multiplied the power system quantities by using floating ...

Страница 1255: ... can be set The information number of the frame is determined by the INF setting The most left item No is only serial number and can be skipped Common address is linked with the address setting of the relay For more information see Appendix IEC 60870 5 103 interoperability In this setting screen if a Data ID except 0 is set to Sig Off and Sig On the command at INF setting value is provided and Com...

Страница 1256: ...ng from the relay 7 Type identification Type ID 20 8 Variable structure qualifier 81H 9 Cause of transmission COT 20 10 Common address of ASDU 1 254 Linked with Address setting 11 Function type FUN 0 255 12 Information number INF 0 255 Customized by the GR TIEMS 13 Double command DCO 1 2 14 Return Information identifier RII 0 65535 15 Checksum 16 End 16H In the transmission format of Command ACK N...

Страница 1257: ...ntary information SIN 0 255 Answer back of receiving command RII 19 Checksum 20 End 16H Any comment with maximum 16 characters can be entered This setting does not affect the function in the IEC 60870 5 103 communication Description Any comment with maximum 16 characters can be entered This setting does not affect the function in the IEC 60870 5 103 communication Type ID Type ID 20 General command...

Страница 1258: ...11 4 13 Control Scheme of Command Output Signal Sig Off Sig On Inverse checked Control object Receiving command DCO Checked No checked Signal specified to Sig off Signal specified to Sig on Signal specified to Sig off Signal specified to Sig on Off Controlled to 1 Not controlled Controlled to 0 Not controlled On Not controlled Controlled to 1 Not controlled Controlled to 0 When the command output ...

Страница 1259: ...mmand response signal and Timeout is used to set the timeout time for judgment of command response Under specified Ext Ext check box is checked Command ACK or Command NACK responds based on the logic of command response signal against General command When the command response signal is treated as two signals ACK Sig NACK Sig the judgment scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of...

Страница 1260: ...time Table 11 4 16 Judgment Scheme of Command Response ACK Sig NACK Sig Inverse checked Command response signal Receiving command DCO No checked Checked 1 NACK Sig ACK Sig 0 2 NACK Sig ACK Sig 1 3 NACK Sig ACK Sig 0 4 NACK Sig ACK Sig 1 Off Command ACK responds Command NACK responds Command NACK responds Command ACK responds On Command NACK responds Command ACK responds Command ACK responds Comman...

Страница 1261: ... on the start screen of the GR TIEMS the setting screen is displayed Figure 11 4 9 Measurands setting screen Figure 11 4 10 Measurand1 setting screen In one frame of Measurand the Type ID INF FUN settings and its position setting Measurement Name Measurement Description Lower Limit Upper Limit Coefficient must be set No shows the position of power system quantity For details describe later The max...

Страница 1262: ...oes not affect the function of the IEC 60870 5 103 communication Type ID Type ID 3 Measurands I or Type ID 9 Measurands II can be selected to set the frame type of Measurand frame In general the maximum MEA number of Type ID 3 uses 1 or 2 or 4 and that of Type ID 9 uses 9 However the maximum MEA number of both types can extend up to 32 in the GR TIEMS In this case there are no difference between t...

Страница 1263: ...wer limit Upper limit 0 is set The IV flag is always established and it becomes MEA 0 Table 11 4 18 MEA Bit Arrangement High Octet Low Octet Sign B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 RES IV OV If MEA value exceeds the full scale if the value expressed as B1 to B12 is less than 4096 or more than 4095 the MEA is clamped at 4096 or 4095 and OV flag is established However if IV flag is established O...

Страница 1264: ... required after the user turns to the IEC60870 5 103 protocol Communication 10 48 1 3 LAN USBCOM SLAVE PROTOCOL SLAVE PROTOCOL 10 48 1 1 Slave Protocol IEC103 SLAVE PROTOCOL 10 48 1 4 IEC61850 IEC103 DNP3 0 Modbus Figure 11 4 11 Slave protection for the IEC103 protocol on IED setting menu Note This sample menu illustrates how to select the IEC103 so that we do not discuss the inclusion of IEC61850...

Страница 1265: ...ired to modify the IED 1 model_01 map the user should replace the name by new name IED 1 model_02 map Consequently the user can easily discriminate the setting files in the IED model2 i e IED 1 model or IED 2 model and the revision number i e 01 or 02 Figure 11 4 12 shows the editing screen of the GR TIEMS the screen has a remark field concerning to the IEC 60870 5 103 communication Note the avail...

Страница 1266: ...11 4 8 Setting Setting of 103_SLAVE Function ID 304001 Setting item Range Unit s Contents Default setting value Notes 103ADDR 0 to 254 Slave address 2 103TST Off On IEC 60780 5 103 test mode Off 103BLK Off On IEC 60780 5 103 slave block Off ...

Страница 1267: ...us 8A300A1001 GPCMD10STAT General Purpose Command 10 status 8B300B1001 GPCMD11STAT General Purpose Command 11 status 8C300C1001 GPCMD12STAT General Purpose Command 12 status 8D300D1001 GPCMD13STAT General Purpose Command 13 status 8E300E1001 GPCMD14STAT General Purpose Command 14 status 8F300F1001 GPCMD15STAT General Purpose Command 15 status 8030101001 GPCMD16STAT General Purpose Command 16 statu...

Страница 1268: ...select a transmission speed which is shown below by the operation of the setting menu as shown in Figure 11 5 1 USBCOM 10 48 1 1 USBCOM_BRATE_SW 921 6kbps Figure 11 5 1 USB setting menu on IED screen Setting of USB Function ID 231701 Setting item Range Unit s Contents Default setting value Notes USBCOM_BRATE_SW 115 2 921 6 kbps Baud rate Switch for USB Com port 921 6 ...

Страница 1269: ...1 shows the setting screen when the RS485 module 1 operates RS485 10 48 1 2 RS485_1_BRATE_SW 19 2kbps RS485_1_BRATE_SW NONE Figure 11 6 1 RS485 setting menu on IED screen Setting of RS485 Function ID 232201 Setting item Range Unit s Contents Default setting value Notes Module 1 RS485_1_BRATE_SW 9 6 19 2 38 4 57 6 115 2 kbps Transmission speed 19 2 RS485_1_PAR_SW NONE ODD EVEN Parity check code NON...

Страница 1270: ...0 Record sub menu 1256 Test flag enabling screen 1304 Fault record 1256 Mode change screen 1305 Event record 1259 Signal monitoring screen 1305 Disturbance record 1261 Information sub menu 1306 Monitoring sub menu 1263 Security setting sub menu 1307 Metering 1263 Control sub menu 1308 Binary I O 1263 CB operation 1309 Communication 1264 Relay elements 1266 Statistics 1267 Goose monitoring 1269 Dia...

Страница 1271: ...Front Panel ii LCD screen The LCD screen provides the user with detailed internal information provided by the IED such as records monitoring and settings Normally the LCD screen appears blank unless an operation key is pressed by pressing any of the operation keys the LCD screen will display the top menu If the top menu is shown on the LCD screen the user can turn off the screen backlight by press...

Страница 1272: ...ing the function keys Press again to return to the previous page Set by pressing the function key for 2 seconds on the selected page See section 12 5 v 1 Test signal generator A convenient method that can be used for operating binary signals Set by assigning the signal in the settings menu See section 12 5 v 2 Table 12 1 2 Features of Function keys F1 to F7 Labels on Keys Feature and Remark Skip t...

Страница 1273: ...on Clear all latched LEDs Except In service and Error LEDs Display the help message for cases where the active item has a help function Switch between Local mode and Remote mode Control key Close Control key Open Switch for using MIMIC2 mode or for returning back to the menu screen This key is not provided for standard LCD screen2 1Note To scroll up or scroll down quickly press keys or respectivel...

Страница 1274: ... pop up screen for Latest Fault to return to the previous screen 2Note Press the key CLEAR to turn off the LED ii Main menu and Sub menu Main menu If LCD screen is turned off press any key except the key CLEAR Main Menu will appear on the LCD screen see the left of Figure 12 2 1 To go to the next level of hierarchy press the key Sub menu An example of setting the sub menu screen is shown in the ri...

Страница 1275: ...s Fault Record Event Record1 Event Record2 Event Record3 Disturbance Record Clear All Records Metering Binary I O Communication Relay Element Statistics Interlock GOOSE Monitoring Diagnostics Slot n CLP Distance_ZS Distance_ZG Distance_Common OC EF OCN THM BCD CBF SOTFOC STUBOC OV OVS OVG UV UVS FRQ OSTZ ICD PROT_Common FS VTF CTF VCHK Power Value Demand Peak Demand Counter Sigma Iy Accumulated Ti...

Страница 1276: ...ettings for inputs configurable binary inputs configurable binary outputs and configurable LEDs Control The Control sub menu is used to manipulate an external gear such as circuit breaker CB isolator etc Time The Time sub menu provides settings for calendar clock time zone the source of time synchronization and the display format of the calendar clock Test The Test sub menu is used to set and to t...

Страница 1277: ...uting Clear all records Confirmation dialog screen will be displayed i Fault Record The Fault Record sub menu displays the date and time of fault occurrence fault phase tripping mode and the power system quantities as shown in Figure 12 3 2 Figure 12 3 2 Display of Fault Record Record 10 48 1 6 _Fault Record Event Record1 Event Record2 Event Record3 Disturbance Record Clear All Records Fault Recor...

Страница 1278: ...ist sub menu 3 Fault record list in the Fault Record screen is displayed Move cursor to a desired item by or and press 4 Press or to move display items Record 10 48 1 6 _Fault Record Event Record 1 Event Record 2 Event Record 3 Disturbance Record Clear all Records Fault Record 10 48 1 2 _Record List Clear Records Fault Record 10 48 1 6 1 2012 07 25 10 48 21 223 2 2012 07 21 01 15 55 018 3 2012 07 ...

Страница 1279: ...ws the steps to clear all the records Figure 12 3 5 All clear 1 Move cursor to the Clear all Records sub menu and press ENTER 2 Clear all records if ENTER is pressed Back to display of Record directly if CANCEL is pressed Record 10 48 1 6 _Fault Record Event Record 1 Event Record 2 Event Record 3 Disturbance Record Clear all Records Fault Record 10 48 1 2 Record List _Clear Records Fault Record Cl...

Страница 1280: ...ase event records To clear all records refer to section i 3 Figure 12 3 7 Display events 1 Move cursor to Event Record 1 2 or 3 sub menu and press 2 Event Record screen is displayed Press at the Record List sub menu 3 Press or to move display items Event record1 10 48 1 3 1 2012 07 25 10 48 21 223 Set Group change 2 2 2012 07 25 10 20 21 021 Record 10 48 2 6 Fault Record _Event Record 1 Event Reco...

Страница 1281: ... 1 2 or 3 sub menu and press 2 Event Record screen is displayed Press ENTER at the Clear Records sub menu 3 Clear all Event records if ENTER is pressed Back to display of Event Record directly if CANCEL is pressed Record 10 48 2 6 Fault Record _Event Record 1 Event Record 2 Event Record 3 Disturbance Record Clear all Records Event Record1 10 48 1 2 Record List _Clear Records Event Record1 Clear re...

Страница 1282: ...s the steps to display and erase event records To clear all records refer to section i 3 Figure 12 3 10 Disturbance 1 Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press 2 Disturbance Record screen is displayed Press at the Record List sub menu 3 Press or to move display items Disturbance record 10 48 1 6 1 2012 07 25 10 48 04 223 2 2012 07 21 01 15 55 018 3 2012 07 20 13 11 29 621 Record 10 48 2...

Страница 1283: ...rd sub menu and press 2 Disturbance Record screen is displayed Press ENTER at the Clear Records sub menu 3 Clear all Disturbance records if ENTER is pressed Back to display of Disturbance Record directly if CANCEL is pressed Record 10 48 2 6 Fault Record Event Record 1 Event Record 2 Event Record 3 _Disturbance Record Clear all Records Disturbance Record 10 48 1 2 Record List _Clear Records Distur...

Страница 1284: ...example of the Metering sub menu Figure 12 4 1 Display for Metering ii Binary I O Binary I O sub menu can be used to display the respective status of the binary IO module circuits The LCD displays the binary input or output signal number the signal name1 assigned to the circuits of the binary IO modules and their status in a line The status for the binary output circuit is shown by a logic level 1...

Страница 1285: ...tion module is allowed to operate in the IED an operation status of the communication ports is shown as shown in Figure 12 4 5 LAN sub menu can display PortStatus and NetMonitor status If NetMonitor is running active the LCD screen will display a mark Main Menu 10 48 2 9 Record _Monitoring Setting IO setting Time Test Monitoring 10 48 2 14 Statistics Metering _Binary I O Operation Time Relay Eleme...

Страница 1286: ...nication status when the IED has dual LAN communication modules Figure 12 4 6 Communication status IEC61850 sub menu IP addresses of the devices connecting in IEC61850 are shown in a straight line Configurations of those IP addresses are available with GR TIEMS LAN 10 48 1 2 PortStatus NetMonitor Inactive PortStatus 10 48 1 2 Port1_Link UP Port2_Link DOWN Port 1 Port A is connected Port 2 Port B i...

Страница 1287: ...to display the status of the measuring elements 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 61850STAT 10 48 1 6 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 0 0 0 OC 10 48 1 25 OC1 A 0 OC1 B 0 OC1 C 0 OC2 A 0 OC2 B 0 OC2 C 0 Main Menu 10 48 2 9 Record _Monitoring Setting IO setting Time Test Relay Element 10 48 1 4 CBF EFP _OC EF OC 10 48 1 25 OC1 A 0 OC1 B 0 O...

Страница 1288: ...eration key Remark 1 Press key to go to the sub menu 2 ENTER Press ENTER key to execute reset or revise After executing a confirmation dialog screen displays 1Note In order to secure the reliability the reset and revision items are controlled by the vendor 2Note The number of digits for the power value can be reduced based on the units kW MW and kvar For instance when the power is measured as 123 ...

Страница 1289: ...d from 2000 1 to 4000 1 then the value is displayed as 156MW on the IED screen Therefore when the CT ratio setting is changed the user should key in the value of 78MW again to display the compensated value Counter sub menu the name and number of statistical items are shown in two lines When an item is revised a mark is shown at the end of the first line Figure 12 4 12 Display for Counter sub menu ...

Страница 1290: ... GRx200 11 603 has been defined in the Main Menu 10 48 2 10 Record _Monitoring Setting IO Setting Time Test Counter 10 48 1 32 Count1 No Assign 0 Count2 No Assign 0 Count3 No Assign 0 Counter 10 48 1 32 Count1 No Assign 0 Count2 No Assign 1 Count3 No Assign 0 Counter Change ENTER Yes CANCEL No Monitoring 10 48 1 8 Metering Binary I O Communication Relay Element _Statistics GOOSE Monitoring Statist...

Страница 1291: ...ing vii Diagnostics Error message will be published in Automatic supervision If there are no errors an error message is not displayed Figure 12 4 16 Display of Supervision items GOOSE Monitoring 10 48 1 3 GRx200 11 603 OK GRx200 21 603 OK GRx200 31 603 NG Diagnostics 10 48 1 2 PLC data error Data commslv error ...

Страница 1292: ...u four setting modes are provided as follows 1 Element Setting Mode 2 Switch Setting Mode 3 List Selection Mode items selection 4 Signal Selection Mode signal selection Element Setting Mode The Element Setting Mode is used for setting numerical values For each setting the setting name setting value and the unit are displayed in two lines Figure 12 5 1 provides an example of the element setting mod...

Страница 1293: ...n example when the operation keys are pressed Before Key After 1 2 6 7 9 1 2 6 8 0 9 1 7 1 0 1 7 9 1 7 1 0 9 1 7 9 1 1 0 9 1 6 7 5 6 7 5 1 7 5 1 7 5 2 1 2 3 2 1 2 3 Switch Setting Mode The Switch Setting Mode is a setting used for the selection of two modes Figure 12 5 3 provides an example of the switch setting mode For each setting the setting name and the selected item are OC1 10 48 2 8 _OC1 b ...

Страница 1294: ...ould confirm setting values after making any changes to their values For verification refer to Confirmation of Setting discussed later List Selection Mode The List Selection Mode is composed of main setting screens and selection list screens as shown in Figure 12 5 5 In the main OC1 10 48 24 56 _OC1 VTFBlk Non OC1 UseFor Trip OC1 OPMD 3POR Before Changing Setting After Changing OC1 10 48 24 56 OC1...

Страница 1295: ...elect a signal Figure 12 5 6 Operation of signal selection OC1 10 48 23 56 _OC1 2fBlk Non OC1 VTFBlk Non OC1 UseFor Trip OC1 2fBlk 10 48 1 3 _Non Block 3P Block PerP OC1 2fBlk 10 48 2 3 Non _Block 3P Block PerP ENTER CANCEL ENTER CANCEL OC1 10 48 23 56 OC1 2fBlk Block 3P OC1 VTFBlk Non OC1 UseFor Trip OC1 10 48 23 56 OC1 2fBlk Block 3P _OC1 VTFBlk Non OC1 UseFor Trip F1 Key 10 48 1 2 _Signal Assig...

Страница 1296: ...ing of each group is changed the confirmation dialog will appear when returning to the screen of the Protection sub menu as shown in Figure 12 5 8 Case2 Confirmation dialog 2 Suppose a setting is changed the confirmation dialog will appear when returning to the Upper Menu as shown in Figure 12 5 9 Setting Record Metering Communication Protection Active Group Group 1 Group 2 Group 8 Copy gr A B Tri...

Страница 1297: ...CEL No Setting 10 48 4 7 Record Metering Communication _Protection Counter Function key Protection 10 48 3 10 Active group Copy gr A B _Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 ENTER CANCEL CANCEL ENTER The changed Setting is confirmed Protection 10 48 3 10 Active group Copy gr A B _Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 OC 10 48 1 4 OC1EN On OC2EN Off OC3EN Off CANCEL ENTER x 2 x 2 Group1 10 48 2 3 Telecommunica...

Страница 1298: ...0BLK Normal GSECHK ON SI1 1 254 IEC61850 10 48 1 6 850BLK Normal GSECHK ON SI1 1 254 Communication 10 48 2 5 LAN IEC61850 IEC103 Modbus DNP IEC61850 10 48 1 6 850BLK Block GSECHK ON SI1 1 254 Setting Change setting ENTER Yes CANCEL No Setting 10 48 3 7 Record Metering _Communication Protection Counter Function key Communication 10 48 2 5 LAN _IEC61850 IEC103 Modbus DNP ENTER CANCEL CANCEL ENTER Th...

Страница 1299: ...nation of mark in On Off function Display Operation Remark Go to the sub menu ENTER Change setting iv Protection group setting The IED provides eight setting groups for the protection of the power system the user can choose an alternative setting group from one of the eight groups in response to a change in the OC 10 48 1 4 OC1EN Off OC2EN Off OC3EN Off OC 10 48 1 4 OC1EN Off OC2EN Off OC3EN Off P...

Страница 1300: ...re 12 5 12 Note In the Copy Group A B screen the number displayed at A is the current active group number Protection Change Setting ENTER Yes CANCEL No ENTER The changed setting is confirmed Protection 10 48 1 10 Common Active Group Copy Group A B Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 ENTER x 4 x 4 Refer to Note 1 Protection 10 48 5 11 Common Active Group 3 Copy Group A B Group 1 Group 2 x 2 x 2 Note When the s...

Страница 1301: ...o F7 on the IED front panel provide a feature to navigate to a specific screen which is configurable by the user These keys have their own LED which can be Copy Group A B 10 48 1 2 A 1 8 3 _B 1 8 1 Protection Copy Group ENTER Yes CANCEL No ENTER Copy Group A B 10 48 1 2 A 1 8 3 B 1 8 2 Protection 10 48 1 11 Common Active Group 1 Copy Group A B Group 1 Group 2 ENTER Copy Group A B 10 48 1 2 _A 1 8 ...

Страница 1302: ...e 12 5 13 Operation of screen jump setting F1 Key Function 10 48 3 3 Screen Jump Assign Signal _No Assign OC 10 48 1 4 _OC1EN On OC2EN On OC3EN Off ENTER Setting Change Setting ENTER Yes CANCEL No Function Key 10 48 1 7 F1 Key F2 Key F3 Key F4 Key F5 Key F6 Key ENTER x 2 F1 Key 10 48 1 3 Function No Assign Signal No Assign Logic Instant F1 Key Function 10 48 1 3 Screen Jump Assign Signal No Assign...

Страница 1303: ...12 5 iii the screen jump function is also disabled for the function key Figure 12 5 15 Cancelling screen jump function OC 10 48 1 4 _OC1EN On OC2EN On OC3EN Off F1 Main Menu 10 48 2 8 Record _Monitoring Setting IO setting Time Test F1 F1 Key Function 10 48 3 3 Screen Jump Assign Signal _No Assign ENTER Setting Change Setting ENTER Yes CANCEL No Function Key 10 48 1 7 F1 Key F2 Key F3 Key F4 Key F5...

Страница 1304: ...n Key 10 48 1 7 F1 Key F2 Key F3 Key F4 Key F5 Key F6 Key ENTER F1 Key 10 48 1 3 Function No Assign Signal No Assign Logic Instant F1 Key Function 10 48 2 3 Screen Jump Assign Signal No Assign F1 Key 10 48 1 2 Function Assign Signal LED ENTER CANCEL Select Element 10 48 3 128 AF00001001 AF00002001 _AF00003001 AF00004001 AF00005001 AF00006001 ENTER F1 Key 10 48 1 2 Function No Assign Signal 123101A...

Страница 1305: ...voltage During the settings the user can enter the value of the ratio the polarity direction and VT selection in the sub menu below Selection of ratio For example Figure 5 2 1 shows how the channel selection is made for the AC analog input on a VCT module AI 1 VCT 1 Move the cursor by pressing keys and Then press key to go to the next level in the hierarchy Figure 12 6 1 AC analog input screen Not...

Страница 1306: ... VCT module AI 1 VCT 1 Using the cursor by pressing keys and and pressing key go for required setting items Figure 12 6 3 Polarity Change input screen Note This screen is a sample The number of the CTs are dependent upon the configuration of VCT modules in each IED Selection of residual voltage A residual voltage is obtained by the computation in three phase voltages but it can be obtain directly ...

Страница 1307: ...able logic CPL for each binary input circuit For more information of CPL see Chapter Technical description Binary IO module Binary input circuit The user can activate or turn off the above timers and switches using the setting function To configure the binary input circuits the user should follow the procedure in steps ii 1 and ii 2 Selection of binary input circuit For example Figure 12 6 5 illus...

Страница 1308: ...ut circuits Figure 12 6 6 Common screen For example Figure 12 6 7 shows the CPL setting for binary input circuit BI1 The timer and the inverse switch can be activated when On is set for setting BI1_CPL Press key ENTER to commence the setting of a switch or parameter Figure 12 6 7 CPL setting Note Setting items On Delay timer and others are displayed when the user sets BI _CPL On Binary Input 10 48...

Страница 1309: ...ressing keys and Press key to go to the next level in the hierarchy Figure 12 6 8 Selection of slot and binary output circuit Note This screen is a sample The slot numbers displayed are dependent upon the configuration of the binary IO module in each IED case CPL Setting For example Figure 12 6 9 illustrates the setting of a binary output circuit BO1 Using setting BI1_CPL On the CPL logic in BO1 i...

Страница 1310: ... shows how to assign a signal BO1 10 48 1 17 BO1_CPL Off Input signal1 No Assign Input Signal2 No Assign Input Signal3 No Assign Signal8 No Assign LOGIC SW AND On Delay Timer 0 000 s Off Delay Timer 0 000 s INVERSE SW Normal TIMER SW Off Logic Timer 0 000 s FF SW Off Reset Signal No Assign ...

Страница 1311: ...antaneous drop off or for latching operation One or up to eight signals can be assigned to a single LED with selectable LED color Selection of LED Figure 12 6 11 shows the LED selection screen the user can select a setting item by pressing keys and Press key to go to the next level in the hierarchy BO1 10 48 2 17 BO1_CPL On _Signal1 No Assign Signal2 No Assign Select Element 10 48 2 155 No Assign ...

Страница 1312: ...nd assign signals in this screen Figure 12 6 12 LED setting screen LED 10 48 1 31 _LED3 LED4 LED5 LED6 LED7 LED8 LED26 F1 Key F2 Key LED3 10 48 1 16 Color RED Input signal1 No assign Input signal 2 No assign Input signal 8 No assign Reset signal No assign LOGIC SW AND INVERSE SW Normal TIMER SW Off On Delay Timer 0 00 s Off Delay Timer 0 00 s Logic Timer 0 00 s Color ...

Страница 1313: ... is composed of the Time menu Format menu and ActiveSyncSrc menu Time for the IED can be set in the screen When the active synchronizing source is SNTP the user can go to another sub menu to check the current active SNTP server Figure 12 7 3 shows how to handle this screen Time menu Figure 12 7 3 Clock format 1 Move cursor to the Time menu and press ENTER 2 Current time can be changed to press or ...

Страница 1314: ...by UTC in Time zone screen Time zone according as local area for the IED should be set Figure 12 7 5 shows the Time Zone screen Figure 12 7 5 Time zone setting screen Figure 12 7 6 TimeZone 1 Move cursor to the Time zone menu and press ENTER Time zone can be set by 0 25 hour The user has to fill the Time zone in accordance with UTC Coordinate Universal Time Clock 10 00 1 2 Time 2012 11 21 10 00 05...

Страница 1315: ... procedure Figure 12 7 8 TimeSyncSrc 1 Move cursor to the TimeSyncSrc menu and press ENTER 2 The TimeSyncSrc menu is composed of SNTP BI and IRIG B Note When is selected it means that time synchronization is not operated By using time synchronization via Ethernet with a SNTP server the user can connect up to a maximum of four SNTP servers If more than one SNTP is used the priority of the servers c...

Страница 1316: ...s of the server press ENTER BI SYNC menu When the BI SYNC is set to On in Time Sync menu the user can choose a binary input circuit BI as a synchronization standard Adjustment setting SYNC_ADJ is provided Binary synchronization function can be set by the following procedure Figure 12 7 10 BISYNC 1 Enter the Data ID of the BI output 2 Set adjustment time for SYNC ADJ Time Sync 10 48 1 3 TimeSyncSrc...

Страница 1317: ... according to Date_fmt setting The IED provides different formats to display the date Figure 12 7 12 shows display format menu Figure 12 7 12 Display format menu Display Format sub menu is composed of Date_fmt menu Date_delimiter setting Time_delimiter setting and Sec_delimiter setting Date format menu Figure 12 7 13 Date Format 1 Move cursor to Date_fmt and press ENTER 2 Select desired format by ...

Страница 1318: ...red format type Time delimiter menu Figure 12 7 15 Time delimite r 1 Move cursor to the Time_delimiter menu and press ENTER 2 The time delimiter mark is switched Display Format 10 48 1 4 Date_fmt YYYYMMDD _Date_delimiter Time_delimiter Date_delimiter 10 48 1 3 _ Display Format 10 48 3 4 Date_fmt YYYYMMDD Date_delimiter _Time_delimiter Display Format 10 48 3 4 Date_fmt YYYYMMDD Date_delimiter _Time...

Страница 1319: ...ls Figure 12 7 17 DST Summer time menu Notice that summertime can be set by the following procedure If summertime is started or ended in the last week of the month Start_Week and End_Week must be filled 5 The IED controls starting or ending summer time day to set last week of the month on Start_Week or End_Week automatically Display Format 10 48 4 4 Date_delimiter Time_delimiter _Sec_delimiter Dis...

Страница 1320: ... starting date and ending of summer time The following procedure is a case of starting weekday setting Figure 12 7 19 DST setting 1 Move cursor to the Start_Wday menu and press 2 Move cursor to the desired weekday and press ENTER 3 Starting weekday is set Summer Time 10 48 1 13 _Summer time Off Summer Time 10 48 1 9 IS_UTC_base On Start_Month 3 Start_Week 5 Summer Time 10 48 4 9 Start_Month 3 Star...

Страница 1321: ... Test Mode screen Test option screen The Test Option screen shown in Figure 12 8 3 is used to select the following functions and perform a Test flag forced reset Figure 12 8 3 Test Option screen Test flag cancel S TestFlagCancel This function is used to forcibly reset the Test flag in the communication packet The Test flag is set to OFF by default The Test flag is used in combination with another ...

Страница 1322: ...communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal In order to avoid that the user can simulate bad reception tests for a particular IED using the GOSUBBLK function As a result testing will only affect the particular IED under test i e all other terminals will not be influenced by the tests Function test screen Function test screen is provided for testing the use can program test ...

Страница 1323: ...fter selecting Slot 3 BIO1 SET The user can then make the following selections on the screen and configure the items required for simulation ON BI1 output is set forcibly to ON Logic level high 1 regardless of the actual input signal OFF BI1 output is set forcibly to OFF Logic level low 0 regardless of the actual input signal Normal Actual inputs are applied Use the screen shown in Figure 12 8 7 o...

Страница 1324: ...ed in Figure 12 8 8 the status will change to test status The following screen will be displayed after pressing the key ENTER Figure 12 8 9 shows that the IED is in simulation test mode Figure 12 8 9 Running test menu Note The user has to continue to depress the key ENTER on the IED front panel during the simulation test period The simulation status will be released if key ENTER is not pressed Bin...

Страница 1325: ...ng menu after selecting SLOT2 BO01 SET The user can configure the required settings for the simulation test of the binary output circuit ON Output signal for simulation test is ON OFF Output signal for simulation test is OFF Normal Actual inputs are applied iii TestFlag EN screen This function can set all communication protocol Test flags to Test mode The user should select TestFlag EN in Figure 1...

Страница 1326: ...toring points to the monitoring jacks A B and C on the IED front panel Incidentally points have not been assigned for the monitoring jacks in the menu below Figure 12 8 14 Signal monitoring sub menu When the user wishes to use monitoring jack A to monitor a signal monitoring point select Term A in the signal monitoring sub menu Figure 12 8 15 The user can then assign the signal monitoring point fo...

Страница 1327: ...eferred contents The user can key preferred information using the GR TIEMS CP1M Software GS2RLIM1 Name and version number about the CPU Software IEC61850 eng G2M8500 Name and version number of IEC61850 engine IEC61850 Support Ed1 Ed1op Ed2 Numbers of supporting 61850 edition in IED IEC61850 Date Model W2GRZ00 Name and version number of IEC61850 Data Model IEC61850 SCL Ver Edition Version informati...

Страница 1328: ... cannot operate the function Password can be changed in Change Password sub menu in the Security setting Table 12 10 2 Meaning of allowed operation Functions Meaning View All users can see all screens menus Setting In the Setting and IO setting menu the authorized user can change each setting item Operation of the Time menu is also allowed Incidentally all users can set the time Security setting A...

Страница 1329: ...ection Executing Operating completed Operating canceled or Operating failed Table 12 11 1 shows how to operate by the IED front panel The IED can have several control functions which are dependent on the ordering code For more information see Chapter Control and monitoring application or Appendix Ordering for more information Table 12 11 1 Control step in DIR mode or SBO mode Control Scheme Operat...

Страница 1330: ...ontrolling CANCEL Operation stop DPOS_SYN_Dev1 10 48 Operation canceled CANCEL DPOS_SYN_Dev1 10 48 Operation failed CAUSE Select failed Cancel failed Cancel succeeded DPOS_SYN_Dev1 10 48 Operation completed CANCEL Time out1 DPOS_SYN_Dev1 10 48 Operation failed CAUSE Time limit over Control 10 48 1 6 _Circuit Breaker SPOS DPOS TPOS Software Switch Auto Sequence Control 10 48 1 6 _Circuit Breaker SP...

Страница 1331: ...ling precautions 1311 Rated current In change 1317 Unpacking 1312 For rack mounting cable and electrical wiring see a separate service manual entitled Installation handbook for rack mounting cable work etc Document No 6F2S1954 See a service manual entitled Guide for replacement of inner modules depending on the situation Document No 6F2S1955 or 6F2S1956 ...

Страница 1332: ...tic charge free environment That is the user shall use an anti electrostatic wrist band and it is grounded CAUTION Before removing a module ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case Handle the module by its front plate frame or edges of the printed circuit board Avoid touching the electronic components printed circuit board or connectors Place th...

Страница 1333: ...n keys label One label sheet LEDs Label One label sheet White plastic sheets Two sheets Note The white ones are provided to lock the flange screws They are not bundled when the unit case is in 1 1 size they are also not bundled for flush mounting type case ii Manufacture settings In Vn fn Vdc Find the hardware nameplate The user can know the IED has been produced correctly in terms of rated curren...

Страница 1334: ...fn iii Combination of VCT and BIOs The transformer module VCT is located at the far right slot e g at VC1 in Figure 13 3 3 Identify the code at Position 7 to know the VCT type e g VCT12B is mounted when Figure 13 3 2 is true The user can check the layout of the binary input and output modules BI BO or BIO using the ordering codes For example the user can read BI3A and BO1A modules the ordering cor...

Страница 1335: ...te See Section IED case and module slot in Chapter Technical description to find the structure of IED cases and terminals For more information about the BI BO and BIO circuits see Section Binary IO module in the same chapter iv Communication modules LAN and others Figure 13 3 3 shows communication modules are implemented at C11 to C15 The layouts of the communication modules are matched with Order...

Страница 1336: ...HIBA ENERGY SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS CORPORATION Figure 13 3 5 Software nameplate example on the rear Note For more information about relay functions see Chapter Relay application Note For more information about the communication see Chapter Communication protocol vi Flange covers and labels Two flange covers blue ones in Figure 13 3 6 are included in the package The user can attach them on the IED when ...

Страница 1337: ... case if combining cases is required with a mounting kit Remind that the user needs to put the white plastic sheet over the countersunk screws on each side White plastic sheet Left silver flange White plastic sheet Right silver flange Countersunk screws Relay case Figure 13 3 7 Covering the screw holes with white plastic sheets Note When the case is ordered in 1 1 size one the flange is integrated...

Страница 1338: ...de For more detail see Preceding Section Unpack and inspection of hardware and software Step1 Turn off the IED Note that all outputs are locked out when powered off Then open the IED panel Remove a flat cable and lateral beams in the IED case Note For alarm outputs refer to Chapter Automatic supervision Error outputs with contacts and binary output circuits Remind that alarms are dependent on the ...

Страница 1339: ...R_200 1 00 3 2 5A 50 60 100 120 110 250 Month Year VCT12B is mounted in the case TOSHIBA ENERGY SYSTEMS SOLUTIONS CORPORATION Original code Table 13 4 2 CT rating jumpers on VCTs Code at Positon 7 Structure Jumper poisons 1 Transformer module VCT12B W6 7 8 13 and W12 Note For removal refer to the Succeeding section Removing and installation of inside modules Note About the structure refer to Chapt...

Страница 1340: ...de at Positon K Rated current 1 1A 2 5A Rated current In in the IED 1A rated changed by the user Original code Altered code 11 213 00 1J 30 110 Figure 13 4 1 How to check the new rated current with the altered code Note For the LCD screen operation see Chapter User interface Information sub menu Note To know how to read the code refer to the preceding section Unpack and inspection of hardware and ...

Страница 1341: ...current corresponded Open Write to IED menu Click Setting in Writing items Figure 13 4 2 How to initialize the IED with GR TIEMS Step7 DEP setting confirmation For the VCT12B the user shall check that DEP has been set for Ch6 7 8 9 14 settings entirely see Figure 13 4 3 ...

Страница 1342: ...25 26 27 28 Iem Current W12 Ch14 Connector Front Rating jumper locations Rear W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 Tr 1 Tr 2 Tr 4 Tr 3 Tr 5 Tr 6 Tr 7 Tr 8 Tr 12 Tr 13 Figure 13 4 3 DEP setting checking in GR TIEMS for VCT12B Step8 Memo for change rated current There is Factory setting label on the IED Marking the altered rated current on it is a good example Ordering positions 7 8 9 A B ...

Страница 1343: ... x x x x x x DC rated voltage e g 1 110 to 250Vdc selected by the ordering Figure 13 5 1 Alarm threshold set on PWS module CAUTION Note A short wire is connected between terminal screws No 35 37 No 35 36 for type using the ring terminal It is done by the manufacturer The user shall remove that when the user undertakes the dielectric voltage test for the IED and the user shall connect again the ter...

Страница 1344: ...test BI 1330 Cold load protection test CLP 1328 Canceling supervision function AMF 1328 Canceling UVBLK element UV 1329 Distance relay test ZS ZG 1328 GOOSE test 61850 1327 Canceling test flag 1328 LED light test 1330 Mode test MDCTRL 1330 Stub test OC 1329 SOTF test SOTF 1328 Shot number test ARC 1329 Sync check test SYNDIF 1330 Logic single monitor 1330 Test sub menu structure 1327 Thermal overl...

Страница 1345: ...er shall understand the safety precautions to avoid personal injuries or equipment damage Hardware tests Hardware tests should be carried out to ensure that there is no hardware defect in the IED Defects of hardware circuits can be detected in automatic supervision function when the DC power is supplied Function tests Function tests are software based testing Dynamic test set can be required in se...

Страница 1346: ...on do not mount dismount the PCB Before the power is on check the following Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct Make sure the CT circuit is not open Make sure the VT circuit is not short circuited Transformer module is damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage Clear test settings after the test then set original settings again Failure to observe any of the precaut...

Страница 1347: ...d Contact the vendor Relay ratings Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the IED conform to the user s specification The items are relay type and model AC voltage current and frequency ratings and auxiliary DC supply voltage rating Local PC To examine the IED with a PC locally connect the PC with the IED using a USB cable The GR TIEMS software is required to install in th...

Страница 1348: ...Cancel GOSNDBLK GOSBUBLK A M F CLP Test ZS Test CTRL ZS Offset CTRL ZS Test XAngle ZG Test XAngle THM Test THM IP SOTF Test STUB Test UV Test UVS Test SHOTNUM Test SYNC01 Test SYNC02 Test MDCTRL EN MDCTRL SELRST MDCTRL EXERST Term A Term B Term C BI F OP SLOT BI01 SET SLOT BI02 SET SLOT BI03 SET BO F OP SLOT BO01 SET SLOT BO02 SET SLOT BO03 SET Figure 14 4 1 Structure of test menu Note The structu...

Страница 1349: ...ction CLP Test STATE0 or STATE3 will be selected temporally if STATE0 or STATE3 is set for setting CLP TEST See Chapter Relay application Cold load protection for more detail iii ZS ZG test ZS Test CTRL ZS Offset CTRL ZS ZG Test XAngle ZS Test CTRL Setting ZS Test CTRL On allows not to operate Zmin feature For more information about the Zmin see Chapter Relay application Distance protection ZS Off...

Страница 1350: ...relay vii Under voltage test UV UVS Test Settings UV Test and UVS Test On is not to operate UV and UVS blocking elements for testing See Chapter Relay application Phase or Phase to phase under voltage protection viii ARC shot number test SHOTNUM Test Setting SHOTNUM Test is provided so that the user can have the preferred shot number for the ARC test which is discussed in Chapter Relay application...

Страница 1351: ...s to have a virtual output at a binary input circuit Note For the BI and BO test operation see Chapter User interface Test sub menu separately 14 4 5 Test for mode change MDCTRL The function is provided to detect a test mode For more information see Chapter General control function Mode control function separately 14 4 6 Signal monitor The function is provided in order that the user can observe IE...

Страница 1352: ...rcibly changing to CLP state Off ZS Test CTRL Off On ZS test mode use or not use Off ZS Offset CTRL Normal Offset Non Offset ZS offset mho use or not use Normal ZS Test XAngle Off On ZS reactance test mode use or not use Off ZG Test XAngle Off On ZG reactance test mode use or not use Off THM Test Off On To utilize the setting THM IP Off THM IP 0 00 1 00 0 00 5 00 Previous load current for thermal ...

Страница 1353: ... operate start 311B001198 BI12F OP BI12 forced operate start 311C001198 BI13F OP BI13 forced operate start 311D001198 BI14F OP BI14 forced operate start 311E001198 BI15F OP BI15 forced operate start 311F001198 BI16F OP BI16 forced operate start 3110201198 BO1F OP BO1 forced operate start 3111201198 BO2F OP BO2 forced operate start 3112201198 BO3F OP BO3 forced operate start 3113201198 BO4F OP BO4 ...

Страница 1354: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1333 Appendix 1 Signal list for common function ...

Страница 1355: ...t C10_S8 20000A1120 Constant value 10 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit C11_S8 20000B1120 Constant value 11 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit C12_S8 20000C1120 Constant value 12 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit C13_S8 20000D1120 Constant value 13 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit C14_S8 20000E1120 Constant value 14 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit C15_S8 20000F1120 Const...

Страница 1356: ... 21000E1121 Constant value 14 expressed with signed integer in 16 bit C15_S16 21000F1121 Constant value 15 expressed with signed integer in 16 bit C16_S16 2100101121 Constant value 16 expressed with signed integer in 16 bit C17_S16 2100111121 Constant value 17 expressed with signed integer in 16 bit C18_S16 2100121121 Constant value 18 expressed with signed integer in 16 bit C19_S16 2100131121 Con...

Страница 1357: ...C18_S32 2200121122 Constant value 18 expressed with signed integer in 32 bit C19_S32 2200131122 Constant value 19 expressed with signed integer in 32 bit C20_S32 2200141122 Constant value 20 expressed with signed integer in 32 bit C21_S32 2200151122 Constant value 21 expressed with signed integer in 32 bit C22_S32 2200161122 Constant value 22 expressed with signed integer in 32 bit C23_S32 2200171...

Страница 1358: ..._U8 3000141124 Constant value 20 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit C21_U8 3000151124 Constant value 21 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit C22_U8 3000161124 Constant value 22 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit C23_U8 3000171124 Constant value 23 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit C24_U8 3000181124 Constant value 24 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit C25_U8 3000191124 ...

Страница 1359: ... bit C24_U16 3100181125 Constant value 24 expressed with unsigned integer in 16 bit C25_U16 3100191125 Constant value 25 expressed with unsigned integer in 16 bit C26_U16 31001A1125 Constant value 26 expressed with unsigned integer in 16 bit C27_U16 31001B1125 Constant value 27 expressed with unsigned integer in 16 bit C28_U16 31001C1125 Constant value 28 expressed with unsigned integer in 16 bit ...

Страница 1360: ...it C23_U32 3200171126 Constant value 23 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit C24_U32 3200181126 Constant value 24 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit C25_U32 3200191126 Constant value 25 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit C26_U32 32001A1126 Constant value 26 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit C27_U32 32001B1126 Constant value 27 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit C2...

Страница 1361: ... 1 1341 3 4 size case Figure 2 1 2 1342 1 2 size case Figure 2 1 3 1343 Type using ring terminals 1 1 size case Figure 2 2 1 1344 3 4 size case Figure 2 2 2 1345 1 2 size case Figure 2 2 3 1346 Panel cutout 1 1 size case Figure 2 3 1 1347 3 4 size case Figure 2 3 2 1347 1 2 size case Figure 2 3 3 1348 Note Panel cutout figures are common for both types ...

Страница 1362: ...ft 031 032 1341 Type using compression terminals Unit mm The 38 means the height of the VCT terminal 1 1 size case Type using compression terminals Figure 2 1 1 Trihedral figure 1 1 size case Type using compression terminals ...

Страница 1363: ...t 031 032 1342 compression plug and ring lug types Unit mm The 38 means the height of the VCT terminal 3 4 size case Type using compression terminals Figure 2 1 2 Trihedral figure 3 4 size case Type using compression ter mnals ...

Страница 1364: ...15 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1343 Unit mm The 38 means the height of the VCT terminal 1 2 size case Type using compression terminals Figure 2 1 3 Trihedral figure 1 2 size case Type using compression terminals ...

Страница 1365: ...ring terminals 478 465 256 3 229 3 64 4 260 7 265 9 260 7 441 5 437 256 3 229 3 190 5 Unit mm The 64 4 means the height of the tallest ring type terminal 1 1 size case Ring terminals Figure 2 2 1 Trihedral figure 1 1 size case Type using ring terminals ...

Страница 1366: ...45 361 348 256 3 229 3 64 4 260 7 265 9 260 7 190 5 325 320 256 3 229 3 Unit mm The 64 4 means the height of the tallest ring type terminal 3 4 size case ring terminals Figure 2 2 2 Trihedral figure 3 4 size case Type using ring terminals ...

Страница 1367: ...46 218 256 3 229 3 265 9 260 7 190 5 255 242 256 3 229 3 64 4 260 7 214 Unit mm The 64 4 means the height of the tallest ring type terminal 1 2 size case ring terminals Figure 2 2 3 Trihedral figure 1 2 size case Type using ring terminals ...

Страница 1368: ...915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1347 Panel cutout Unit mm Panel cut out for 1 1 case size Figure 2 2 1 Panel cutout 1 1 size case Unit mm Panel cut out for 3 4 case size Figure 2 2 2 Panel cutout 3 4 size case ...

Страница 1369: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1348 Unit mm Panel cut out for 1 2 case size Figure 2 2 3 Panel cutout figure 1 2 size case ...

Страница 1370: ...ompression terminals 1 1 size case GRZ200 11 434 00 66 30 110 Figure 3 1 1350 1 2 size case GRZ200 11 434 00 66 31 110 Figure 3 2 1352 Type using ring terminals 1 1 size case GRZ200 11 234 00 66 30 110 Figure 3 3 1351 1 2 size case GRZ200 11 227 00 66 31 110 Figure 3 4 1353 Typical external connection diagram 1 1 size case GRZ200 11 434 00 66 30 110 Figure 3 5 1354 ...

Страница 1371: ... 36 BO18 4 37 38 BI1 A 1 2 BI1 3 4 BI2 5 6 BI3 7 8 BI4 9 10 BI5 13 14 BI7 11 12 BI6 15 16 BI8 17 18 BI9 21 22 2 BI10 23 24 BI11 25 26 BI12 27 28 BI13 29 30 BI14 31 32 BI15 35 36 BI17 33 34 BI16 37 38 BI18 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 100BASE TX 1000BASE T IRIG B000 B2 A2 B1 SIG A1 B3 GND A3 DISUSE DISUSE 100BASE TX 1000BASE T VCT12B Va 1 2 30 Vb 3 4 Vc 5 6 Vs Ve 7 8 Vs2 Ve 9 10 Ia 11 12 Ib 13 14 Ic 15 16 I...

Страница 1372: ... BO17 4 35 36 BO18 4 37 38 BI1 A 1 2 BI1 3 4 BI2 5 6 BI3 7 8 BI4 9 10 BI5 13 14 BI7 11 12 BI6 15 16 BI8 17 18 BI9 21 22 2 BI10 23 24 BI11 25 26 BI12 27 28 BI13 29 30 BI14 31 32 BI15 35 36 BI17 33 34 BI16 37 38 BI18 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 100BASE TX 1000BASE T IRIG B000 B2 A2 B1 SIG A1 B3 GND A3 DISUSE DISUSE 100BASE TX 1000BASE T VCT12B Va 1 2 30 Vb 3 4 Vc 5 6 Vs Ve 7 8 Vs2 Ve 9 10 Ia 11 12 Ib 13 14 ...

Страница 1373: ... 32 BO16 4 33 34 BO17 4 35 36 BO18 4 37 38 BI1 A 1 2 BI1 3 4 BI2 5 6 BI3 7 8 BI4 9 10 BI5 13 14 BI7 11 12 BI6 15 16 BI8 17 18 BI9 21 22 2 BI10 23 24 BI11 25 26 BI12 27 28 BI13 29 30 BI14 31 32 BI15 35 36 BI17 33 34 BI16 37 38 BI18 100BASE TX 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 1000BASE T IRIG B000 B2 A2 B1 SIG A1 B3 GND A3 DISUSE DISUSE VCT12B Va 1 2 30 Vb 3 4 Vc 5 6 Vs Ve 7 8 Vs2 Ve 9 10 Ia 11 12 Ib 13 14 Ic 1...

Страница 1374: ... 13 14 BO8 4 15 16 BO9 4 17 18 BO11 4 23 24 BO12 4 25 26 BO13 4 27 28 BO14 4 29 30 BO15 4 31 32 BO16 4 33 34 BO17 4 35 36 BO18 4 37 38 C11 C12 C13 C14 C15 100BASE TX 1000BASE T Remote communication TX IRIG B000 B2 A2 B1 SIG A1 B3 GND A3 DISUSE DISUSE 100BASE TX 1000BASE T VCT12B Va 1 2 30 Vb 3 4 Vc 5 6 Vs Ve 7 8 Vs2 Ve 9 10 Ia 11 12 Ib 13 14 Ic 15 16 Ie 17 18 Iem 27 28 GRZ GRL 1 0 IO 2 IO 1 VCT 1 ...

Страница 1375: ...t BO Semi fast BO Semi fast BO Semi fast BO Semi fast BO BO1A BIO3A BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 BI8 Fast BO Fast BO Fast BO Fast BO Fast BO Fast BO BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO7 BO8 BO1 BO2 BO3 BO4 BO5 BO6 BO13 BO14 BO15 BO16 BO17 BO18 BO7 BO8 BO9 BO10 BO11 BO12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 13 14 15 16 17 18 21 22 23 24 25 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 27 28 29 30 3...

Страница 1376: ...H BO2 H BO3 H BO4 H BO5 H BO6 H BO7 H BO8 H BO9 H BO10 H BO11 H BO12 H BO13 H BO14 H BO15 H BO16 H 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 BI2A BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 1 2 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 17 18 BI7 BI8 BI9 BI10 BI11 BI12 FG 21 22 25 26 27 28 31 32 33 34 37 38 40 Figure 3 8 In Output arrangements for BI1A BI2A BI3A BO1A and BO2A BIO1A BI1 BI2 BI3 BI4 BI5 BI6 BI7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ...

Страница 1377: ...n conformance statement 1357 Edition 1 PICS Protocol implementation conformance statement 1390 Edition 1 2 PIXIT Protocol implementation extra information for testing 1397 Edition 1 2 TICS Tissues conformance statement 1414 Edition 1 2 Default Edition 1 mapping information 1420 Edition 1 Default Edition 2 mapping information 1439 Edition 2 ...

Страница 1378: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1357 MICS Edition 1 IEC61850 Edition 1 Model Implementation Conformance Statement MICS GRZ200 Distance protection IED Original document 6F2S1873 Ver 0 0 ...

Страница 1379: ...RDRS RBRF Yes RDIR RFLO Yes RPSB Yes RREC Yes RSYN Yes C Logical Nodes for Control CALH CCGR CILO Yes CPOW CSWI Yes G Logical Nodes for Generic references GAPC Yes GGIO Yes Nodes GRZ200 GGIO_GOOSE Yes GSAL I Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving IARC IHMI ITCI ITMI A Logical Nodes for Automatic control ANCR ARCO ATCC AVCO M Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement MDIF MHAI MHAN MMTR MMXN ...

Страница 1380: ...S Yes ACT Yes ACT_ABC Yes ACD Yes ACD_ABC Yes SEC BCR Measured information MV Yes CMV Yes SAV WYE Yes WYE_ABCN DEL Yes SEQ Yes HMV HWYE HDEL Controllable status information SPC Yes DPC Yes INC Yes BSC ISC Controllable analogue information APC Status settings SPG ING Yes Analogue settings ASG Yes CURVE Description information DPL Yes LPL Yes CSD ...

Страница 1381: ...de Information Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD Mod INC Mode M Y Beh INS Behaviour M Y Health INS Health M Y NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y Optional Logical Node Information Loc SPS Local operation O N EEHealth INS External equipment health O N EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N OpCnt INS Operation counter O N OpTmh INS Operation time O N Data ...

Страница 1382: ...rate Time Delay Multiphase Mode O N PhDlTmms ING Operate Time Delay for Multiphase Faults O N GndDlMod SPG Operate Time Delay for Single Phase Ground Mode O N GndDlTmms ING Operate Time Delay for single phase ground faults O N X1 ASG Positive sequence line reach reactance O Y LinAng ASG Line Angle O Y RisGndRch ASG Resistive Ground Reach O Y RisPhRch ASG Resistive Phase Reach O Y K0Fact ASG Residu...

Страница 1383: ...ignal from weak end infeed function O Y RvABlk ACT_ABC Block signal from current reversal function O Y GrdRx SPS Guard Received O N Settings SchTyp ING Scheme Type O N OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N CrdTmms ING Co ordination timer for blocking scheme O Y DurTmms ING Minimum duration of carrier send signal O N UnBlkMod ING Unblock function mode for scheme type O N SecTmms ING Pickup security t...

Страница 1384: ...N MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y TypRsCrv ING Type of Reset Curve O N RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N DirMod ING Directional Mode O N PTOF class Attribute Name Attr Type Explanation T M O GRZ200 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical Node Class see IEC 61850 7 2 Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inheri...

Страница 1385: ... N MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N PTRC class Attribute Name Attr Type Explanation T M O GRZ200 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical Node Class see IEC 61850 7 2 Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M OpCntRs INC Re...

Страница 1386: ...istic Curve for current measurement Thermal model O N TmpMax ASG Maximum allowed temperature O N StrVal ASG Start Value O Y OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N ConsTms ING Time constant of the thermal model O N AlmVal ASG Alarm Value O N PTUC class Attribute Name Attr Type Explanation T ...

Страница 1387: ...TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O Y RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N PTUF class Attribute Name Attr Type Explanation T M O GRZ200 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical Node Class see IEC 61850 7 2 Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Lo...

Страница 1388: ...ther data shall be used depending on the applied tripping schema RFLO class Attribute Name Attr Type Explanation T M O GRZ200 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical Node Class see IEC 61850 7 2 Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Measured values FltZ CMV Fault Impedance M Y FltDiskm MV...

Страница 1389: ...n SPS Blocking of correlated PDIS zone C1 Y Setting ZeroEna SPG Zero Enable O N NgEna SPG Negative Sequence Current Supervision Enabled O N MaxEna SPG Max Current Supervision Enabled O N SwgVal ASG Power Swing Delta O Y SwgRis ASG Power Swing Delta R O N SwgReact ASG Power Swing Delta X O N SwgTmms ING Power Swing Time O Y UnBlkTmms ING Unblocking Time O N MaxNumSlp ING Maximum number of pole slip...

Страница 1390: ...de Class M OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Controls BlkRec SPC Block Reclosing O N ChkRec SPC Check Reclosing O N Status Information Auto SPS Automatic Operation external switch status O N Op ACT Operate used here to provide close to XCBR T M Y AutoRecSt INS Auto Reclosing Status M Y Setting Rec1Tmms ING First Reclose Time O N Rec2Tmms ING Second Reclose Time O N Rec3Tmms ING Third Rec...

Страница 1391: ... SPS Voltage Difference Indicator O N AngInd SPS Angle Difference Indicator O N HzInd SPS Frequency Difference Indicator O N SynPrg SPS Synchronising in progress O N Measured values DifVClc MV Calculated Difference in Voltage O N DifHzClc MV Calculated Difference in Frequency O N DifAngClc MV Calculated Difference of Phase Angle O N Setting DifV ASG Difference Voltage O N DifHz ASG Difference Freq...

Страница 1392: ...pen M Y EnaCls SPS Enable Close M Y CSWI class Attribute Name Attr Type Explanation T M O GRZ200 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical Node Class see IEC 61850 7 2 Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M Loc SPS Local operation O N OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Controls Pos DPC Switch general M Y PosA DPC Switch L1 O ...

Страница 1393: ...t all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M Loc SPS Local operation O N OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N Controls SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N Status Information Auto SPS Automatic operation O N Str ACD_ABC Start M Y Op ACT_ABC Operate T M Y Se...

Страница 1394: ...t controllable status output O N DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N Status Information IntIn INS Integer status input O N Alm SPS General single alarm O N Ind01 SPS General indication binary input O Y Ind02 SPS General indication binary input O Y Ind03 SPS General indication binary input O Y Ind04 SPS General indication bin...

Страница 1395: ...controllable status output O N Status Information IntIn INS Integer status input O N Alm SPS General single alarm O N Ind01 SPS General indication binary input O Y Ind02 SPS General indication binary input O Y Ind03 SPS General indication binary input O Y Ind04 SPS General indication binary input O Y Ind05 SPS General indication binary input O Y Ind06 SPS General indication binary input O Y Ind07 ...

Страница 1396: ...hase Impedance O N MSQI class Attribute Name Attr Type Explanation T M O GRZ200 LNName Shall be inherited from Logical Node Class see IEC 61850 7 2 Data Common Logical Node Information LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M EEHealth INS External equipment health external sensor O N EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N Measured values SeqA SEQ Positive Negative...

Страница 1397: ...quipment health external sensor O N EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N OpCnt INS Operation counter M Y Controls Pos DPC Switch position M Y BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Y BlkCls SPC Block closing M Y ChaMotEna SPC Charger motor enabled O Y Metered Values SumSwARs BCR Sum of Switched Amperes resetable O N Status Information CBOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability M Y POWCap INS Poi...

Страница 1398: ...C_DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13 INS class Attribute Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value Value Range M O C GRZ200 DataName Inherited from Data Class see IEC 61850 7 2 DataAttribute status stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y 1 q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y Substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal INT...

Страница 1399: ..._DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13 ACT_ABC class Attribute Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value Value Range M O C GRZ200 DataName Inherited from Data Class see IEC 61850 7 2 DataAttribute status general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y neut BOOLEAN ST...

Страница 1400: ..._DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 13 ACD_ABC class Attribute Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value Value Range M O C GRZ200 DataName Inherited from Data Class see IEC 61850 7 2 DataAttribute status general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown forward backward both M Y phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 ...

Страница 1401: ...ubstitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal AnalogueValue SV PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N configuration description and extension units Unit CF see Annex A O Y db INT32U CF 0 100 000 O N zeroDb INT32U CF 0 100 000 O N sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N smpRate INT32U CF O N d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N dU U...

Страница 1402: ... N subVal Vector SV PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N configuration description and extension units Unit CF see Annex A O Y db INT32U CF 0 100 000 O N zeroDb INT32U CF 0 100 000 O N rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N magSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N angSVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N angRef ENUMERATED CF V A other O N smpRate INT32U CF O N d VISIB...

Страница 1403: ...DLNDA_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21 WYE_ABCN class Attribute Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value Value Range M O C GRZ200 DataName Inherited from Data Class see IEC 61850 7 2 Data phsA CMV GC_1 Y phsB CMV GC_1 Y phsC CMV GC_1 Y neut CMV GC_1 Y net CMV GC_1 N res CMV GC_1 N DataAttribute configuration description ...

Страница 1404: ...A_M N cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 21 SEQ class Attribute Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value Value Range M O C GRZ200 DataName Inherited from Data Class see IEC 61850 7 2 Data c1 CMV M Y c2 CMV M Y c3 CMV M Y DataAttribute measured attributes seqT ENUMERATED MX pos neg zero dir quad zero M Y configuration description ...

Страница 1405: ...nd AC_CO_SBOW_E_M and AC_CO_TA_E_M N stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE TRUE AC_ST Y q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y t TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE TRUE PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N configuration description and extension pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N CtlModel ...

Страница 1406: ...CO_TA_E_M Y stVal CODED ENUM ST dchg intermediate state off on bad state M Y q Quality ST qchg M Y t TimeStamp ST M Y stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N Substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal CODED ENUM SV intermediate state off on bad state PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N configuration description and extension pulseConfig PulseConfig CF ...

Страница 1407: ...d AC_CO_TA_E_M N stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y Q Quality ST qchg M Y T TimeStamp ST M Y stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N substitution subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N subVal INT32 SV FALSE TRUE PICS_SUBST N subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N configuration description and extension CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N min...

Страница 1408: ...SIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 39 3 ENUM type is also used ASG class Attribute Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value Value Range M O C GRZ200 DataName Inherited from Data Class see IEC 61850 7 2 DataAttribute setting setMag AnalogueValue SP AC_NSG_M Y setMag AnalogueValue SG SE AC_SG_M N configuration description and extension units Unit CF see Annex A O Y sVC ScaledValueC...

Страница 1409: ...N dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N Services As defined in Table 45 LPL class Attribute Name Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value Value Range M O C GRZ200 DataName Inherited from Data Class see IEC 61850 7 2 DataAttribute configuration description and extension vendor VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y swRev VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y d VISIBLE STRING255 DC M Y dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N configRev VISIBLE STRI...

Страница 1410: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1389 This page is intentionally blank ...

Страница 1411: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1390 PICS Editon1 and 2 IEC61850 ACSI Conformance Statement for GR200 series IED Original document 6F2S1874 Ver 0 6 ...

Страница 1412: ...rface in G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850 01 series version equal to or upper than F G2M850 01 F Each tables of this document is specified in IEC 61850 7 2 Annex A 3 ACSI models conformance statement ASCI basic conformance statement ACSI models conformance statement ACSI service conformance statement Together with the MICS and the PIXIT the PICS forms the basis for a conformance te...

Страница 1413: ...RTY APPLICATION ASSOCIATION Y B12 Client side of TWO PARTY APPLICATION ASSOCIATION N SCSMs supported B21 SCSM IEC 61850 8 1 used Y Y Client Subscrib er side is only GOOSE and SNTP B22 SCSM IEC 61850 9 1 used Deprecated Ed2 B23 SCSM IEC 61850 9 2 used B24 SCSM other Generic substation event model GSE B31 Publisher side Y B32 Subscriber side Y Transmission of sampled value model SVC B41 Publisher si...

Страница 1414: ...uffer overflow N Y M7 7 entryID N Y M7 8 BufTm N Y M7 9 IntgPd N Y M7 10 GI N Y M7 11 conf revision N Y M8 Unbuffered report control N Y M8 1 sequence number N Y M8 2 report time stamp N Y M8 3 reason for inclusion N Y M8 4 data set name N Y M8 5 data reference N Y M8 6 BufTm N Y M8 7 IntgPd N Y M8 8 GI N Y M8 8 conf revision N Y Logging N N M9 Log control N N M9 1 IntgPd N N M10 Log N N M11 Contr...

Страница 1415: ...ogical device S5 1 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory TP N Y Logical node S6 1 GetLogicalNodeDirectory TP N Y S7 1 GetAllDataValues TP N Y Data S8 1 GetDataValues TP N Y S9 1 SetDataValues TP N Y S10 1 GetDataDirectory TP N Y S11 1 GetDataDefinition TP N Y Data set S12 1 GetDataSetValues TP N Y S13 1 SetDataSetValues TP N N S14 1 CreateDataSet TP N N S15 1 DeleteDataSet TP N N S16 1 GetDataSetDirectory TP ...

Страница 1416: ...Values TP N Y S29 1 SetURCBValues TP N Y Logging Log control block S30 1 GetLCBValues TP N N S31 1 SetLCBValues TP N N Log S32 1 QueryLogByTime TP N N S33 1 QueryLogAfter TP N N S34 1 GetLogStatusValues TP N N Generic substation event model GSE GOOSE S35 1 SendGOOSEMessage MC Y Y GOOSE CONTROL BLOCK S36 1 GetGoReference TP N N S37 1 GetGOOSEElementNumber TP N N S38 1 GetGoCBValues TP N Y S39 1 Set...

Страница 1417: ...CBValues TP N N Control S51 1 Select N Y S52 1 SelectWithValue TP N Y S53 1 Cancel TP N Y S54 1 Operate TP N Y S55 1 CommandTermination TP N Y S56 1 TimeActivatedOperate TP N N File transfer S57 1 GetFile TP N Y S58 1 SetFile TP N N S59 1 DeleteFile TP N N S60 1 GetFileAttributeValues TP N Y S61 1 GetServerDirectory FILE SYSTEM TP N Y Time T1 1 Time resolution of internal clock 10 1ms nearest nega...

Страница 1418: ...r testing PIXIT of the IEC 61850 communication interface in GR200 series IED Note The template of this document is PIXIT template extracted from server test procedures version 1 0 and updated according to TPCL version 1 2 6 published by UCA International Using Group Original document 6F2S1875 Ver 0 11 ...

Страница 1419: ...IXIT entries contain information which is not available in the PICS MICS TICS documents or SCL file Each table specifies the PIXIT for applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC 61850 10 Note Term Ed mentions the edition number of the IEC 61850 The editon2 Ed2 provides backward compatibility for legacy the Edition 1 Ed1 2 CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each ...

Страница 1420: ...t selector N Session selector N Presentation selector N AP Title N AE Qualifier N As6 1 2 If association parameters are necessary for association describe the correct values e g N A As7 1 2 What is the maximum and minimum MMS PDU size Max MMS PDU size 16384 Min MMS PDU size Not limited It depends on a request As8 1 2 What is the maximum start up time after a power supply interrupt Typically about ...

Страница 1421: ...be set by server Validity Y Good Y Invalid N Reserved Y Questionable N BadReference Y Oscillatory Y Failure Y OldData Y Inconsistent N Inaccurate Source N Substituted Y Test N OperatorBlocked Sr3 What is the maximum number of data object references in one GetDataValues request Deprecated Sr4 What is the maximum number of data object references in one SetDataValues request Deprecated Sr5 1 Which Mo...

Страница 1422: ... Value Clarification Sg1 1 What is the number of supported setting groups for each logical device 8 Sg2 1 2 What is the effect of when and how the non volatile storage is updated compare IEC 61850 8 1 16 2 4 Just SelectActiveSG service will be supported according to PICS When an IED receives correct SelectActiveSG request the IED returns Response within 10 seconds And the ActSG and LActTm variable...

Страница 1423: ...ta set name Y data reference Y buffer overflow Y entryID Y conf rev Y segmentation Y Rp3 1 2 Can the server send segmented reports when not supported it is allowed to refuse an association with a smaller than minimum PDU size Y Rp4 1 2 Mechanism on second internal data change notification of the same analogue data value within buffer period Compare IEC 61850 7 2 14 2 2 9 Send report immediately Rp...

Страница 1424: ...nfigurable Rp11 1 Does the device support to pre assign a RCB to a specific client in the SCL N Rp12 2 After restart of the server is the value of ConfRev restored from the original configuration or retained prior to restart Restored from original configuration Rp13 1 2 Does the server accepts any client to configure enable a BRCB with ResvTms 1 What fields are used to do the identification N AP T...

Страница 1425: ...n time Is it fixed or configurable 60 seconds with TAL 120sec Fixed Gp5 1 2 What is the fastest retransmission time Is it fixed or configurable 10 milli sec with TAL 30 milli sec Fixed Gp6 Can the GOOSE publish be turned on off by using SetGoCBValues GoEna Deprecated See PICS SetGoCBValues Gp7 1 2 What is the initial GOOSE sqNum after restart The device starts sending GOOSE from stNum 1 and sqNum ...

Страница 1426: ...d to live value from the last received GOOSE message message does not arrive prior to TAL GOOSE subscribe quality information will become QUESTIONABLE 1100 0000 0000 0 GOOSE status change is accepted The behavior can be changed by modifying PLC logic N Substituted Y Test N OperatorBlocked Supports only for GBU DCAI Model Gs3 1 2 What is the behaviour when one or more subscribed GOOSE messages isn ...

Страница 1427: ...VLAN tag Y without the VLAN tag Gs7 1 May the GOOSE data set contain structured data objects FCD timestamp data attributes Y N Gs8 1 2 Subscribed FCD supported common data classes are Supported CDC All excepts measurand CDC MV CMV SAV WYE DEL SEQ HMV HWYE and HDEL Supported data type Boolean BitString Integer Unsigned Integer Other types TimeStamp OctetString etc will be ignored by IED NOTE But ea...

Страница 1428: ...n Gf1 1 2 Performance class P1 Ed 2 for System LLN0 GO goST P3 Ed 2 for all other GOOSE Gf2 1 2 GOOSE ping pong processing method Scan cycle based Gf3 1 2 Application logic scan cycle ms Max 200ms Min 1 38ms in 60Hz Gf4 1 Maximum number of data attributes in GOOSE dataset value and quality has to be counted as separate attributes The dataset for System LLN0 GO goST is fixed and it contains 32 data...

Страница 1429: ...ll the DUT activate the control output when the test attribute is set in the SelectWithValue and or Operate request when N test procedure Ctl2 is applicable Y Ct6 What are the conditions for the time T attribute in the SelectWithValue and or Operate request Deprecated Ct7 Is pulse configuration supported compare pulseConfig Deprecated Ct8 1 What is the behaviour of the DUT when the check condition...

Страница 1430: ...e limit over Y Abortion by trip only for BCPU Y Object not selected Edition 1 specific values Y Parameter change in execution Edition 2 specific values Y Object already selected N No access authority N Ended with overshoot N Abortion due to deviation N Abortion by communication loss N Blocked by command N None Y Inconsistent parameters Y Locked by other client N Parameter change in execution Ct10 ...

Страница 1431: ...3 1 2 Which origin categories are supported accepted N bay control Y station control Y remote control N automatic bay Y automatic station Y automatic remote N maintenance N process maintenance 7 N process 8 N Ct14 1 2 What happens if the orCat value is not supported or invalid DOns SBOns DOes SBOes test not ok IED respond Ct15 1 2 Does the IED accept a SelectWithValue Operate with the same control...

Страница 1432: ...rate response for control with normal security SBOns N DOns N Ct22 2 How to force a parameter change in execution N A Ct23 1 2 How many SBOns SBOes control objects can be selected at the same time SBOns n 1 SBOes n 1 Ct24 1 2 Can a controllable object be forced to keep its old state e g Internal Controllable Objects may not be accessible to force this whereas a switch like Circuit Breaker outside ...

Страница 1433: ... the new time from time server 10 seconds Tm4 1 2 When is the time quality bit ClockFailure setRTC is out of order Tm5 1 2 When is the time quality bit Clock not Synchronized set It depends on the condition of synchronization Typically from 1 to 10 minutes Tm6 Is the timestamp of a binary event adjusted to the configured scan cycle Deprecated Tm7 1 Does the device support time zone and daylight sa...

Страница 1434: ... zipped Ft2 1 2 Directory names are separated from the file name by Ft3 1 The maximum file name size including path recommended 64 chars 64 chars Ft4 1 2 Are directory file name case sensitive N Ft5 1 2 Maximum file size for SetFile N A Ft6 1 Is the requested file path included in the MMS fileDirectory respond file name N Ed2 always complete path Ft7 1 Is the wild char supported MMS fileDirectory ...

Страница 1435: ...d 2 communication interface in GR200 series IED Note The template of this document is Test Procedures Change List TPCL version 1 2 6 for IEC 61850 Edition 2 server test procedures revision 1 0 published by UCA International Users Group Testing Sub Committee in April 3 2018 Original document 6F2S1920 Ver 0 1 ...

Страница 1436: ...he Tissue conformance statement is required to perform a conformance test and is referenced on the certificate This document is applicable for G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850 02 series version equal upper than A G2M850 02 A Note Term Ed is mentioning the edition number of IEC 61850 Editon2 Ed2 provides backward compatibility for legacy Edition 1 Ed1 ...

Страница 1437: ... 788 SICS S56 from optional to mandatory na 789 ConfLdName as services applies to both server and client na 804 valKind and IED versus System configuration na 806 Max length of log name inconsistent between 6 and 7 2 na 807 Need a way to indicate if Owner present in RCB na 823 ValKind for structured data attributes na 824 Short addresses on structured data attributes na 825 Floating point value Y ...

Страница 1438: ...se for PICS template Y 858 typo in enumeration ServiceType na 861 dchg of ConfRev attribute Y 876 GenLogiclNodeClass and SGCB GoCB MsvCB UsvCB na 1038 Loss of Info Detection After Resynch Y 1050 GTS Phycomaddr definition in SCL Y 1062 Entrytime not used in CDC na 1071 Length of DO name Y 1091 The sentence The initial value of EditSG shall be 0 has to be stated in part 7 2 not in 8 1 na 1127 Missin...

Страница 1439: ...a 742 GAPC Str GAPC Op and GAPC StrVal na 743 CCGR PmpCtl and CCGR FanCtl na 744 LN STMP EEHealth and EEName na 773 Loc LocKey and LocSta YPSH and YLTC na 774 ITCI LocKey na 800 Misspelling in CSYN na 802 CCGR and Harmonized control authority na 808 Presence condition of ZMoT DExt and new DOs na 831 Setting of ConfRevNum in LGOS na 838 Testing in Beh Blocked na 844 MFLK PhPiMax MFLK PhPiLoFil MFLK...

Страница 1440: ...Tissues continued Part 8 1 Tissue Description Implemented Y na 784 Tracking of control CTS na 817 Fixed length GOOSE float encoding Y 834 File dir name length 64 Y 951 Encoding of Owner attribute Y 1040 More associate error codes Y 1178 Select Response is non null value Y ...

Страница 1441: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1420 Default mapping Ed 1 Mapping information of the IEC16850 Ed 1 GRZ200 Distance protection IED Sample model GRZ200 11 237 00 L6 30 110 1031 L62 2E ...

Страница 1442: ...01_CONTROL_REQ MDCTRL 550001 7013016D08 sbo with enhanced security 33 System LLN0 Mod sboTimeout sboTimeout INT32U CF MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ MDCTRL 550001 7013016D08 30000 34 System LLN0 Mod sboClass sboClass sboClass CF MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ MDCTRL 550001 7013016D08 operate once 35 System LLN0 Beh stVal stVal Beh ST Beh 61850 301001 3110021001 36 System LLN0 Beh q q Quality ST 37 System LLN0 Beh t t...

Страница 1443: ...Ind12 q q Quality ST 101 System GGIO1 Ind12 t t Timestamp ST 102 System GGIO1 Ind13 stVal stVal BOOLEAN ST 103 System GGIO1 Ind13 q q Quality ST 104 System GGIO1 Ind13 t t Timestamp ST 105 System GGIO1 Ind14 stVal stVal BOOLEAN ST 107 System GGIO1 Ind14 q q Quality ST 108 System GGIO1 Ind14 t t Timestamp ST 109 System GGIO1 Ind15 stVal stVal BOOLEAN ST 110 System GGIO1 Ind15 q q Quality ST 111 Sys...

Страница 1444: ...E CLOCK 200301 9010001006 173 System GGIO2 Ind7 stVal stVal BOOLEAN ST Port1_Link HOTST 341001 3100061001 175 System GGIO2 Ind7 q q Quality ST 176 System GGIO2 Ind7 t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 177 System GGIO2 Ind8 stVal stVal BOOLEAN ST Port2_Link HOTST 341001 3100071001 178 System GGIO2 Ind8 q q Quality ST 179 System GGIO2 Ind8 t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001...

Страница 1445: ...BB0 251 System MMXU1 Beh t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 252 System MMXU1 Health stVal stVal Health ST Health 61850 301001 3110031001 253 System MMXU1 Health q q Quality ST 254 System MMXU1 Health t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 255 System MMXU1 NamPlt vendor vendor VisString255 DC TOSHIBA 256 System MMXU1 NamPlt swRev swRev VisString255 DC GS2RZIM1 257 System M...

Страница 1446: ...301 9010001006 359 System MMXU1 A phsC units SIUnit SIUnit SIUnit CF A 361 System MMXU1 A phsC units multiplier multiplier multiplier CF 362 System MSQI1 Mod stVal stVal Mod ST Mod 61850 301001 3110011001 363 System MSQI1 Mod q q Quality ST U16_00 PLC_DRV 230302 3112001BB0 364 System MSQI1 Mod t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 365 System MSQI1 Mod ctlModel ctlModel ctlModel CF stat...

Страница 1447: ...onfigRev VisString255 DC no data 457 Prot LLN0 NamPlt ldNs ldNs VisString255 EX IEC61850 7 4 2003 458 Prot LPHD1 PhyNam vendor vendor VisString255 DC TOSHIBA 459 Prot LPHD1 PhyHealth stVal stVal Health ST Health 61850 301001 3110031001 460 Prot LPHD1 PhyHealth q q Quality ST 461 Prot LPHD1 PhyHealth t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 462 Prot LPHD1 Proxy stVal stVal BOOLEAN ST 463 P...

Страница 1448: ...Val Beh ST Beh 61850 301001 3110021001 529 Prot ZS_PDIS1 Beh q q Quality ST 530 Prot ZS_PDIS1 Beh t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 531 Prot ZS_PDIS1 Health stVal stVal Health ST Health 61850 301001 3110031001 532 Prot ZS_PDIS1 Health q q Quality ST 533 Prot ZS_PDIS1 Health t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 534 Prot ZS_PDIS1 NamPlt vendor vendor VisString255 DC TOSH...

Страница 1449: ...p ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 601 Prot BCD_PTOC1 Op general general BOOLEAN ST BCD OPT BCD 452001 8000001B60 602 Prot BCD_PTOC1 Op q q Quality ST 603 Prot BCD_PTOC1 Op t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 604 Prot EF_PTOC1 Mod stVal stVal Mod ST Mod 61850 301001 3110011001 605 Prot EF_PTOC1 Mod q q Quality ST 606 Prot EF_PTOC1 Mod t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001...

Страница 1450: ... ST 672 Prot OCN_PTOC1 Str3 q q Quality ST 673 Prot OCN_PTOC1 Str3 t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 674 Prot OCN_PTOC1 Str4 general general BOOLEAN ST OCN4 OCN 443001 8300041C23 675 Prot OCN_PTOC1 Str4 dirGeneral dirGeneral dir ST 676 Prot OCN_PTOC1 Str4 q q Quality ST 677 Prot OCN_PTOC1 Str4 t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 678 Prot OCN_PTOC1 Op1 general general ...

Страница 1451: ...TOC1 Health q q Quality ST 744 Prot SOTF_PTOC1 Health t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 745 Prot SOTF_PTOC1 NamPlt vendor vendor VisString255 DC TOSHIBA 746 Prot SOTF_PTOC1 NamPlt swRev swRev VisString255 DC GS2RZIM1 747 Prot SOTF_PTOC1 NamPlt d d VisString255 DC no data 748 Prot SOTF_PTOC1 Str general general BOOLEAN ST OCSOTF OR SOTFOC 454001 8000001B60 749 Prot SOTF_PTOC1 Str di...

Страница 1452: ...S_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 814 Prot ZS_RPSB1 Mod stVal stVal Mod ST Mod 61850 301001 3110011001 815 Prot ZS_RPSB1 Mod q q Quality ST 817 Prot ZS_RPSB1 Mod t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 818 Prot ZS_RPSB1 Mod ctlModel ctlModel ctlModel CF status only 819 Prot ZS_RPSB1 Beh stVal stVal Beh ST Beh 61850 301001 3110021001 820 Prot ZS_RPSB1 Beh q q Quality ST 821 Prot ZS_RPSB1 Beh...

Страница 1453: ...ICD_PHAR1 Mod t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 886 Prot ICD_PHAR1 Mod ctlModel ctlModel ctlModel CF status only 887 Prot ICD_PHAR1 Beh stVal stVal Beh ST Beh 61850 301001 3110021001 888 Prot ICD_PHAR1 Beh q q Quality ST 889 Prot ICD_PHAR1 Beh t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 890 Prot ICD_PHAR1 Health stVal stVal Health ST Health 61850 301001 3110031001 891 Prot IC...

Страница 1454: ..._TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 963 Prot OVS_PTOV1 Mod ctlModel ctlModel ctlModel CF status only 964 Prot OVS_PTOV1 Beh stVal stVal Beh ST Beh 61850 301001 3110021001 965 Prot OVS_PTOV1 Beh q q Quality ST 966 Prot OVS_PTOV1 Beh t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 967 Prot OVS_PTOV1 Health stVal stVal Health ST Health 61850 301001 3110031001 968 Prot OVS_PTOV1 Health q q Quality ST 969 ...

Страница 1455: ...rot UVS_PTUV1 Str1 t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 1035 Prot UVS_PTUV1 Str2 general general BOOLEAN ST UVS2 OR UVS 471101 8100021B60 1036 Prot UVS_PTUV1 Str2 dirGeneral dirGeneral dir ST 1037 Prot UVS_PTUV1 Str2 q q Quality ST 1038 Prot UVS_PTUV1 Str2 t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 1039 Prot UVS_PTUV1 Op1 general general BOOLEAN ST UVS1 OPT UVS 471101 8000011B6...

Страница 1456: ...tlModel ctlModel CF status only 1107 Prot Distance_PSCH1 Beh stVal stVal Beh ST Beh 61850 301001 3110021001 1108 Prot Distance_PSCH1 Beh q q Quality ST 1109 Prot Distance_PSCH1 Beh t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 1110 Prot Distance_PSCH1 Health stVal stVal Health ST Health 61850 301001 3110031001 1111 Prot Distance_PSCH1 Health q q Quality ST 1112 Prot Distance_PSCH1 Health t t T...

Страница 1457: ...7 1176 Prot CBF_RBRF1 OpIn1 q q Quality ST 1177 Prot CBF_RBRF1 OpIn1 t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 1178 Prot CBF_RBRF1 OpIn2 general general BOOLEAN ST CBF2_TRIP CBF 453001 8B00021B27 1179 Prot CBF_RBRF1 OpIn2 q q Quality ST 1180 Prot CBF_RBRF1 OpIn2 t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 1181 Prot FRQ_PFRC1 Mod stVal stVal Mod ST Mod 61850 301001 3110011001 1182 Pro...

Страница 1458: ...PTOF1 Health stVal stVal Health ST Health 61850 301001 3110031001 1248 Prot FRQ_PTOF1 Health q q Quality ST 1249 Prot FRQ_PTOF1 Health t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 1250 Prot FRQ_PTOF1 NamPlt vendor vendor VisString255 DC 1251 Prot FRQ_PTOF1 NamPlt swRev swRev VisString255 DC GR 1252 Prot FRQ_PTOF1 NamPlt d d VisString255 DC 1253 Prot FRQ_PTOF1 Str1 general general BOOLEAN ST F...

Страница 1459: ...r2 q q Quality ST 1319 Prot FRQ_PTUF1 Str2 t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 1320 Prot FRQ_PTUF1 Str3 general general BOOLEAN ST FRQ3 FRQ 475001 8200031C23 1321 Prot FRQ_PTUF1 Str3 dirGeneral dirGeneral dir ST 1322 Prot FRQ_PTUF1 Str3 q q Quality ST 1324 Prot FRQ_PTUF1 Str3 t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 1325 Prot FRQ_PTUF1 Str4 general general BOOLEAN ST FRQ4 FR...

Страница 1460: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1439 Default mapping Ed 2 Mapping information of the IEC16850 Ed 2 GRZ200 Distance protection IED Sample model GRZ200 11 237 00 L6 30 110 1031 L62 2E ...

Страница 1461: ... MDCTRL 550001 7013016D08 32 System LLN0 Mod Cancel T T Timestamp CO MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ MDCTRL 550001 7013016D08 33 System LLN0 Mod Cancel Test Test BOOLEAN CO MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ MDCTRL 550001 7013016D08 34 System LLN0 Mod Cancel ProtNs ProtNs IEC 61850 8 1 2007 CO 36 System LLN0 Mod Cancel origin orCat orCat OriginatorCa tegoryK ind CO MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ MDCTRL 550001 7013016D08 37 System L...

Страница 1462: ...p ST 105 System GGIO1 Ind16 stVal stVal BOOLEAN ST 107 System GGIO1 Ind16 q q Quality ST 108 System GGIO1 Ind16 t t Timestamp ST 109 System GGIO1 Ind2 stVal stVal BOOLEAN ST 110 System GGIO1 Ind2 q q Quality ST 111 System GGIO1 Ind2 t t Timestamp ST 112 System GGIO1 Ind3 stVal stVal BOOLEAN ST 113 System GGIO1 Ind3 q q Quality ST 114 System GGIO1 Ind3 t t Timestamp ST 115 System GGIO1 Ind4 stVal s...

Страница 1463: ...rKin d CF 200 System MMXU1 A phsC cVal ang f f FLOAT32 MX Ic Angle MES_MANAGEMENT 711001 4201601055 202 System MMXU1 A phsC cVal mag f f FLOAT32 MX Ic MES_MANAGEMENT 711001 420160107A 203 System MMXU1 A phsC q q Quality MX U16_00 PLC_DRV 230302 3112001BB0 204 System MMXU1 A phsC t t Timestamp MX SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 206 System MMXU1 A phsC units SIUnit SIUnit SIUnitKind CF A 207 System...

Страница 1464: ...PDIS4 Beh t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 277 Prot ZG_PDIS4 Str general general BOOLEAN ST Z3G ORX Distance_ZG 431001 8700031B63 278 Prot ZG_PDIS4 Str dirGeneral dirGeneral FaultDirectio nKind ST 279 Prot ZG_PDIS4 Str q q Quality ST 280 Prot ZG_PDIS4 Str t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 282 Prot ZG_PDIS4 Op general general BOOLEAN ST Z3G OPT Distance_ZG 431001 83...

Страница 1465: ...IS4 Beh q q Quality ST 340 Prot ZS_PDIS4 Beh t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 341 Prot ZS_PDIS4 Str general general BOOLEAN ST Z3S ORX Distance_ZS 430001 8700031B63 342 Prot ZS_PDIS4 Str dirGeneral dirGeneral FaultDirectio nKind ST 343 Prot ZS_PDIS4 Str q q Quality ST 344 Prot ZS_PDIS4 Str t t Timestamp ST SYS_TIME CLOCK 200301 9010001006 346 Prot ZS_PDIS4 Op general general BOOLE...

Страница 1466: ...es Pages 1 List of information Time tagged Measurand 1446 1 1 Events 1446 1 2 Time tagged measurand function 1449 1 3 General command 1449 1 4 Measurand 1450 1 5 Legend 1452 2 Troubleshooting 1453 3 Semantics of information number 1456 3 1 In monitor direction 1456 3 2 In control direction 1458 ...

Страница 1467: ...ilable of test mode OK 1 9 11 103SLV 304001 3100003601 103TST 22 Local parameter setting OK 1 Not applicable 23 Characterist1 Available for group setting 1 OK 1 1 9 103SLV 304001 8020011001 AG1STAT 11 Not applicable 12 Issued by GENERAL COMMAND 24 Characteristic 2 Available for group setting 2 OK 1 1 9 103SLV 304001 8120021001 AG2STAT 11 Not applicable 12 Issued by GENERAL COMMAND 25 Characteristi...

Страница 1468: ...SERI_ERR 48 Earth Fault L1 Earth fault with regard to phase A OK 1 1 9 Issued by GENERAL COMMAND 49 Earth Fault L2 Earth fault with regard to phase B OK 1 1 9 Issued by GENERAL COMMAND 50 Earth Fault L3 Earth fault with regard to phase C OK 1 1 9 Issued by GENERAL COMMAND 51 Earth Fault Fwd i e line Earth fault in the forward direction OK 1 1 9 Not supported 52 Earth Fault Rev i e busbar Earth fau...

Страница 1469: ...rip NA 2 1 No default setting 81 Zone4 Zone4 trip NA 2 1 No default setting 82 Zone5 Zone5 trip NA 2 1 No default setting 83 Zone6 Zone6 trip NA 2 1 Not supported 84 General start pick up The OR signal generated by operated relays OK 2 1 9 No default setting 85 Breaker failure CBF relay trip NA 2 1 CBF 453001 8B00011B27 CBF1_TRIP 86 Trip measuring system L1 NA 2 1 Not supported 87 Trip measuring s...

Страница 1470: ...4 73 1 FL Z 495001 4200001340 FltDiskm 1 3 General command Table 5 1 3 Interpretation Type ID INF Valid time ms Time Out ms Function ID Data ID Name Change for the group setting 1 20 23 1000 1200 103slave 304001 8020016422 AG1CMD Change for the group setting 2 20 24 1000 1200 103slave 304001 8120026422 AG2CMD Change for the group setting 3 20 25 1000 1200 103slave 304001 8220036422 AG3CMD Change f...

Страница 1471: ...413 333333 9 VL1 OK 711001 4302041050 Va secondary 53 74606142 9 VL2 OK 711001 4302041052 Vb secondary 53 74606142 9 VL3 OK 711001 4302041054 Vc secondary 53 74606142 9 V1 OK 711001 4302061050 V1 secondary 53 74606142 9 V2 OK 711001 4302061052 V2 secondary 53 74606142 9 V0 OK 711001 4302061056 V0 secondary 53 74606142 9 Ve Not applicable 711001 4302c31056 V4 primary 53 74606142 9 Vs OK 711001 4302...

Страница 1472: ...se phase voltage rating For example in Vn 110V we can have coefficient 53 74606142 4 Active and reactive power P Q Coefficient 4096 Vn 3 VTr In CTr 2 4 where Vn Secondary phase phase voltage rating In Secondary current rating CTr CT ratio VTr VT ratio For example in Vn 110V In 1A CTr 2000 VTr 2000 we can have coefficient 2 23942E 6 5 Frequency f Coefficient 4096 fr 1 2 where fr System frequency Fo...

Страница 1473: ...ags 30 transmission of disturbance values 31 end of transmission COT Cause of Transmission 1 spontaneous 2 cyclic 3 reset frame count bit FCB 4 reset communication unit CU 5 start restart 6 power on 7 test mode 8 time synchronization 9 general interrogation 10 termination of general interrogation 11 local operation 12 remote operation 20 positive acknowledgement of command 21 negative acknowledgem...

Страница 1474: ...ordance with the following settings Start bit 1bit Stop bit 1bit Parity setting even RS485 or optic cable interconnection is incorrect Cable Check the connection port Check the interconnection for RS485 A B COM Check the send and received interconnection for the optic cable The setting of converter is incorrect RS485 optic conversion is executed with the transmission channel etc Conver ter In the ...

Страница 1475: ...more than 100ms acceptable value of response time 50ms plus margin 2 HMI does not display IEC103 event on the SAS side The relevant event sending condition is not valid RY Change the event sending condition signal number of the IEC103 configurator if there is a setting error When the setting is correct check the signal condition using the programmable LED etc The relevant event Information Number ...

Страница 1476: ...ati on BCU does not transmit the time synchronisation frame BCU Transmit the time synchronisation frame The settling of the time synchronisation source is set to other than IEC RY Change the settling of time synchronisation source to IEC Note BCU Bay control unit RY Relay Note The user should set even for the parity setting Not allowed to set except even ...

Страница 1477: ...1 1 7 9 11 t z I IT IL 28 auxiliary input 2 x 1 1 7 9 11 t z I IT IL 29 auxiliary input 3 x 1 1 7 9 11 t z I IT IL 30 auxiliary input 4 x 1 1 7 9 11 t z I IT IL Table 5 3 2 Supervision indications in monitor direction INF Description GI TYP COT FUN typical 32 measurand supervision I x 1 1 7 9 t z I 33 measurand supervision V x 1 1 7 9 t z I 35 phase sequence supervision x 1 1 7 9 t z I 36 trip cir...

Страница 1478: ...6 teleprotection signal transmitted 2 1 7 t z I 77 teleprotection signal received 2 1 7 t z I 78 zone 1 2 1 7 t z 79 zone 2 2 1 7 t z 80 zone 3 2 1 7 t z 81 zone 4 2 1 7 t z 82 zone 5 2 1 7 t z 83 zone 6 2 1 7 t z 84 general start pick up x 2 1 7 9 t z I IT IL 85 breaker failure 2 1 7 t z I 86 trip measuring system L1 2 1 7 IT 87 trip measuring system L2 2 1 7 IT 88 trip measuring system L3 2 1 7 ...

Страница 1479: ...3 VL1 2 3 P Q f 9 2 7 t z 5 3 2 In control direction Table 5 3 7 Status indications in monitor direction INF Description COM TYP COT FUN typical 16 auto recloser on off ON OFF 20 20 t z I IL 17 Teleprotection on off ON OFF 20 20 t z I 18 protection on off ON OFF 20 20 t z I IT IL 19 LED reset ON 20 20 t z I IT IL 23 active characteristic 1 ON 20 20 t z 24 active characteristic 2 ON 20 20 t z 25 ac...

Страница 1480: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1459 Appendix 6 Ordering ...

Страница 1481: ...ase rack mounting type 2 J Terminal blocks for BIOs and PWS Compression plug type 0 BI BO modules Choice from BI BO tables 1 BIO module 1 see pp 1467 1469 2 BIO modules 2 3 BIO modules 3 Terminal blocks for BIOs and PWS Ring type terminal 1 BI BO modules Choice from BI BO tables 1 BIO module 1 see pp 1467 1468 2 BIO modules 2 to be continued on the next page 1 The operation of BI modules is intend...

Страница 1482: ... 4 size case rack mounting type 2 K Terminal blocks for BIOs and PWS Compression plug type 0 BI BO modules Choice from BI BO tables 1 BIO module 1 see pp 1467 1472 2 BIO modules 2 3 BIO modules 3 4 BIO modules 4 5 BIO modules 5 6 BIO modules 6 Terminal blocks for BIOs and PWS Ring type terminal 1 BI BO modules Choice from BI BO tables 1 BIO module 1 see pp 1467 1470 2 BIO modules 2 3 BIO modules 3...

Страница 1483: ...ce from BI BO tables 1 BIO module 1 see pp 1467 1474 2 BIO modules 2 3 BIO modules 3 4 BIO modules 4 5 BIO modules 5 6 BIO modules 6 7 BIO modules 7 8 BIO modules 8 Terminal blocks for BIOs and PWSs Ring type terminal 1 BI BO modules Choice from BI BO tables 1 BIO module 1 see pp 1467 1473 2 BIO modules 2 3 BIO modules 3 4 BIO modules 4 5 BIO modules 5 6 BIO modules 6 7 BIO modules 7 to be continu...

Страница 1484: ... standby 6M 2 C11 C12 1 C15 Hot standby 6N 1 C13 1 C11 1 C15 6Q 1 C13 1 C11 1 C15 6S 1 C13 1 C11 1 C15 6U 1 C13 1 C11 1 C15 7D 1 C13 2 C11 C12 Hot standby 7H 1 C13 2 C11 C12 Hot standby 7P 1 C13 2 C11 C12 Hot standby 7R 1 C13 2 C11 C12 Hot standby 7T 1 C13 2 C11 C12 Hot standby 7V 1 C13 2 C11 C12 Hot standby 9D 1 C13 2 C11 C12 1 C15 Hot standby 9H 1 C13 2 C11 C12 1 C15 Hot standby 9P 1 C13 2 C11 C...

Страница 1485: ...11 C12 1 C15 PRP HSR RSTP NP 1 C13 2 C11 C12 1 C15 PRP HSR RSTP NR 1 C13 2 C11 C12 1 C15 PRP HSR RSTP NT 1 C13 2 C11 C12 1 C15 PRP HSR RSTP NV 1 C13 2 C11 C12 1 C15 PRP HSR RSTP Redundancy and legacy protocol such as PRP HSP RSTP and Hot standby are applicable when dedicated LAN modules are mounted in the IED and a serial module is required for the IEC103 The locations of those modules can be foun...

Страница 1486: ...ent at 9 position see p 1461 or 1462 Language English E 1 One of the codes i e 1 or 2 at positons U has to be selected to be relevant for the user s purpose Table Protocol relevant table Software model at Position G T Ordering code at Position U 1 2 IEC 61850 2 31 32 IEC 60870 5 103 3 31 NA 32 Valid NA Not applicable 2 Duplicated LAN modules are required for the hot standby For the PRP HSR RSTP ch...

Страница 1487: ...b protection OV 59 Phase over voltage protection OVS 59 Phase phase over voltage protection OVG 59N Earth fault over voltage protection UV 27 Phase under voltage protection UVS 27 Phase phase under voltage protection FRQ 81 Frequency protection OSTZ 56Z Out of step tripping by distance ICD ICD Inrush current detection function FS FS Fail safe function VTF VTF VTF detection function CTF CTF CTF det...

Страница 1488: ...tput circuits BO Selections of a BIO module Independent circuit type Independent type variable thresholds Common circuit type Fast operating type Semi fast operating type Auxiliary normal or Form C type Hybrid type 7 6 4 11 1xBIO1A 12 3 2 12 1xBIO2A 8 6 2 13 1xBIO3A N A 18 15 1xBI1A 12 16 1xBI2A 32 17 1xBI3A 6 12 18 1xBO1A Note 1 The code selected is set for A B positions of Hardware selection ...

Страница 1489: ... type Semi fast operating type Auxiliary normal or Form C type Hybrid type 32 6 12 21 1xBI3A 1xBO1A 7 32 6 4 22 1xBI3A 1xBIO1A 12 32 3 2 23 1xBI3A 1xBIO2A 18 6 12 24 1xBI1A 1xBO1A 25 6 4 25 1xBI1A 1xBIO1A 30 3 2 26 1xBI1A 1xBIO2A 8 6 6 14 27 1xBO1A 1xBIO3A 15 6 6 6 28 1xBIO1A 1xBIO3A 7 12 16 29 1xBO1A 1xBIO1A 16 12 4 2A 2xBIO3A 32 16 2B 1xBI3A 1xBO2A 12 6 12 2C 1xBI2A 1xBO1A N A 20 6 3 4 2E 1xBIO2...

Страница 1490: ...14 34 1 1xBI1A 1xBO1A 1xBIO3A 8 32 6 6 14 35 1xBI3A 1xBO1A 1xBIO3A 24 18 6 36 3xBIO3A 25 12 16 37 1xBI1A 1xBO1A 1xBIO1A 36 6 12 39 2xBI1A 1xBO1A 24 6 12 3A 2xBI2A 1xBO1A N A 7 32 6 4 16 3C 1xBI3A 1xBIO1A 1xBO2A 7 32 12 16 3D 1xBI3A 1xBO1A 1xBIO1A 32 6 12 16 3E 1xBI3A 1xBO1A 1xBO2A N A 16 12 6 16 3G 1xBO1A 2xBIO3A N A 26 6 6 14 3J 1 1xBO1A 1xBIO3A 1xBI1A 64 6 12 3K 2xBI3A 1xBO1A 14 32 12 8 3L 1xBI3...

Страница 1491: ...BO1A N A 54 6 12 46 3xBI1A 1xBO1A 20 32 6 9 16 47 1xBI3A 1xBO1A 1xBIO2A 1xBIO3A 26 6 12 26 48 1 1xBO1A 1xBI1A 1xBO1A 1xBIO3A 20 6 15 28 49 2xBO1A 1xBIO2A 1xBIO3A N A 34 12 6 16 4B 1xBI1A 1xBO1A 2xBIO3A 64 32 4C 2xBI3A 2xBO2A 21 32 18 12 4D 1xBI3A 3xBIO1A 128 4E 4xBI3A 7 96 6 4 4F 3xBI3A 1xBIO1A 8 24 6 6 14 4G 2xBI2A 1xBO1A 1xBIO3A 32 18 36 4H 1xBI3A 3xBO1A 26 12 6 6 14 4J 1xBI1A 1xBI2A 1xBO1A 1xBI...

Страница 1492: ...brid type 33 6 6 6 32 51 1xBI1A 1xBIO1A 1xBIO3A 2xBO2A 44 6 12 26 52 2xBI1A 2xBO1A 1xBIO3A 25 96 6 4 53 1xBI1A 3xBI3A 1xBIO1A 8 96 6 6 14 54 3xBI3A 1xBO1A 1xBIO3A N A 62 6 6 14 56 3xBI1A 1xBO1A 1xBIO3A N A N A N A N A 96 12 24 5B 3xBI3A 2xBO1A N A N A 128 6 12 5E 4xBI3A 1xBO1A 160 6 12 5F 5xBI3A 44 12 6 6 14 5G 2xBI1A 1xBI2A 1xBO1A 1xBIO3A 15 6 24 42 5H 3xBO1A 1xBIO1A 1xBIO3A 64 18 36 5J 2xBI3A 3x...

Страница 1493: ...iary normal or Form C type Hybrid type 51 6 18 30 61 2xBI1A 2xBO1A 1xBIO1A 1xBIO3A 8 96 6 12 26 62 3xBI3A 2xBO1A 1xBIO3A 128 12 24 63 4xBI3A 2xBO1A 8 128 6 6 14 64 4xBI3A 1xBO1A 1xBIO3A N A N A N A N A 52 12 4 32 69 2xBI1A 2xBIO3A 2xBO2A 52 12 12 28 6A 2xBI1A 2xBO1A 2xBIO3A 36 24 48 6B 2xBI1A 4xBO1A 36 64 12 24 6C 2xBI1A 2xBI3A 2xBO1A 44 6 18 38 6D 2xBI1A 3xBO1A 1xBIO3A 160 6 12 6E 5xBI3A 1xBO1A 7...

Страница 1494: ...holds Common circuit type Fast operating type Semi fast operating type Auxiliary normal or Form C type Hybrid type 80 6 12 26 71 4xBI1A 2xBO1A 1xBIO3A N A 8 96 6 18 38 73 3xBI3A 3xBO1A 1xBIO3A N A N A N A N A 60 6 12 16 78 5xBI2A 1xBO1A 1xBO2A 160 12 24 79 5xBI3A 2xBO1A N A 54 64 12 24 7B 3xBI1A 2xBI3A 2xBO1A N A 128 18 36 7D 4xBI3A 3xBO1A 7 160 12 16 7E 5xBI3A 1xBO1A 1xBIO1A 192 6 12 7F 6xBI3A 1x...

Страница 1495: ...ent type variable thresholds Common circuit type Fast operating type Semi fast operating type Auxiliary normal or Form C type Hybrid type N A N A 160 18 36 83 5xBI3A 3xBO1A N A N A N A 60 6 12 32 87 5xBI2A 1xBO1A 2xBO2A 8 128 6 18 38 88 4xBI3A 3xBO1A 1xBIO3A N A N A N A 256 8C 8xBI3A N A N A N A 7 224 6 4 8G 7xBI3A 1xBIO1A 192 12 24 8H 6xBI3A 2xBO1A 7 192 12 16 8J 6xBI3A 1xBO1A 1xBIO1A N A N A 7 9...

Страница 1496: ...ing plugs Accessory names Quantity per order Codes Plugs for monitoring jacks on the front 4 EP 222 Rear terminal remover Accessory names Quantity per order Codes Hook tool for detaching rear terminal 1 EP 235 Engineering tools Accessory names Quantity per order Codes GR TIEMS 1 license EP 251 PLC EDITOR 1 license EP 261 Mounting kits for 19 size rack Accessory names Quantity per order Codes Joint...

Страница 1497: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1476 Appendix 7 Technical data ...

Страница 1498: ...0 times rated current for one power cycle 20 or 16 6ms Voltage inputs 2 times rated voltage continuous 2 5 times rated voltage for 1 second Burden Phase current inputs 0 1VA at In 1A 0 2VA at In 5A Earth current inputs 0 3VA at In 1A 0 4VA at In 5A Sensitive earth fault inputs 0 3VA at In 1A 0 4VA at In 5A Voltage inputs 0 1VA at Vn Power Supply Rated auxiliary voltage 24 48 60Vdc Operative range ...

Страница 1499: ... 40ms Typically 3 ms Semi fast operating contacts Make and carry Break Operating time 8A continuously 30A 240Vdc for 1s L R 5ms 0 1A at 250Vdc L R 40ms 0 2A at 125Vdc L R 40ms Typically 6 ms Auxiliary contacts Make and carry Break Operating time 8A continuously 30A 240Vdc for 1s L R 5ms 0 1A at 250Vdc L R 40ms 0 2A at 125Vdc L R 40ms Typically 8 ms Hybrid contacts 10 A breaking Make and carry Brea...

Страница 1500: ... structure VCT Ring type terminal Wire thickness 2 5mm2 through 5 5 mm2 Termination M3 5 ring tongue insulated BI BO PWS Compression plug type terminal Wire thickness 1 5mm2 through 2 5 mm2 or AWG14 Termination Stripping length 10 mm typical Ring type terminal Wire thickness 1 5mm2 through 2 5 mm2 or AWG14 Termination M3 5 ring tongue insulated T 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ...

Страница 1501: ... Multimode fiber 50 125 or 62 5 125μm Connector type SC duplex connector Wave length 1300nm 1000BASE LX For IEC 61850 8 1 over TCP IP Cable type Single mode fiber Connector type LC duplex connector Wave length 1310nm Serial communication rear port RS485 For IEC 60870 5 103 Cable type Connector type Fiber optic Cable type Connector type Wave length Shielded twisted pair cable Push in spring termina...

Страница 1502: ...5 27 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals and earth 2kVrms for 1 minute between independent circuits 1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255 27 IEEE C37 90 Three positive and three negative impulses of 5kV peak 1 2 50 s 0 5J between all terminals and between all terminals and earth Voltage Dips Interruptions Variations and Ripple on DC supply IEC 60255...

Страница 1503: ...munity IEC 60255 22 5 IEC 61000 4 5 IEC 60255 26 Ed 3 1 2 50µms surge in common differential modes Auxiliary supply and input output ports 4 2 1 0 5 kV 1 0 5 kV Communications ports up to 1 0 5 kV 0 kV Surge Withstand IEEE C37 90 1 2002 3kV 1MHZ damped oscillatory wave 4kV 5 50ns fast transient Conducted RF Electromagnetic Disturbance IEC 60255 22 6 IEC 61000 4 6 IEC 60255 26 Ed 3 Sweep test range...

Страница 1504: ...ctive for electrical safety is demonstrated according EN 60255 27 2014 UK Legislation Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016 Compliance is demonstrated according to BS EN 60255 26 2013 Electrical Equipment Safety Regulations 2016 Compliance is demonstrated according to BS EN 60255 27 2014 Performance and Functional Standards Performance and Functional Standards Category Standards General C...

Страница 1505: ... setting value Typically 35ms BO operating time 1 IEC curve 5 of theoretical value for 2 Multiple of threshold value 10 and TMS 1 IEEE curve 10 of theoretical value for 2 multiple of threshold value 10 and TMS 1 Over under voltage protection Pick ups Operating time 5 of setting value Typically 35ms Breaker Failure BF Protection Operating time of overcurrent element Resetting time of overcurrent el...

Страница 1506: ...R 30 to 90 in 1 steps Z DirX Angle and Z DirR Angle Z1G Z1XG Z2G Z3G Z4G Z5G ZCGF ZCGR 0 to 60 in 1 steps ZGF X GrAngle1 and ZGR X GrAngle1 0 to 45 in 1 steps ZGF X GrAngle2 and ZGR X GrAngle2 45 to 90 in 1 steps Trip time characteristics IEC60255 121 See page 1492 Timer Setting Time setting of Z1S Z1XS Z2S Z3S Z4S Z5S Z1G Z1XG Z2G Z3G Z4G Z5G 0 00 to 100 00s in 0 01steps Overcurrent Element for F...

Страница 1507: ... on to fault Protection Overcurrent threshold 0 02 to 5 00A in 0 01A steps 1A rating 0 10 to 15 00A in 0 01A steps 5A rating Stub Protection Overcurrent threshold 0 02 to 5 00A in 0 01A steps 1A rating 0 10 to 15 00A in 0 01A steps 5A rating Out of step Protection Resistive reach at Right side 15 00 to 150 00Ω in 0 01Ω steps 1A rating 3 000 to 30 000Ω in 0 01Ω steps 5A rating Resistive reach at Le...

Страница 1508: ...racteristic Non Directional Forward Backward Characteristic angle 0 to 180 in 1 steps 3I0 lags for 3V0 Polarising voltage 3V0 0 5 to 100 0V in 0 1V steps Delay type DT IEC NI IEC VI IEC EI UK LTI IEEE MI IEEE VI IEEE EI US CO2 US CO8 Original Drop out pick up ratio 10 to 100 in 1 steps DTL delay 0 00 to 300 00s in 0 01s steps IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS 0 010 to 50 000 in 0 001 steps Reset t...

Страница 1509: ...Overvoltage Protection 1st 2nd overvoltage threshold 1 0 to 220 0V in 0 1V steps Delay type DTL IDMT Original Drop out pick up ratio 10 to 100 in 1 steps DTL delay 0 00 to 300 00s in 0 01s steps IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS 0 010 to 100 000 in 0 001 steps Reset delay 0 0 to 300 0s in 0 1s steps Phase to Phase Overvoltage Protection 1st 2nd overvoltage threshold 1 0 to 220 0V in 0 1V steps Del...

Страница 1510: ...s in 0 01s steps Autoreclose reset time 0 01 to 310 00s in 0 01s steps Reset time for developing fault 0 01 to 300 00s in 0 01s steps Synchronism check Synchronism check angle 0 to 75 in 1 steps UV element 10 to 150V in 1V steps OV element 10 to 150V in 1V steps Busbar or line dead check 0 to 150V in 1V steps Busbar or line live check 0 to 150V in 1V steps Synchronism check time 0 01 to 100 00s in...

Страница 1511: ...ering Function AC current Accuracy 0 5 at rating AC voltage Accuracy 0 5 at rating Energy Wh varh Accuracy 1 0 at rating Power P Q Accuracy 1 0 at rating when power quantities being fed Frequency Accuracy 0 03 Time Synchronisation Protocol SNTP ...

Страница 1512: ...e below shows the required fuse in the PWS DO NOT change the fuse by the user The fuse is complies with IEC60127 2 Sheet 5 Table Fuse specification in PWS Specification Description Rated current 3 15A Rated voltage 500Vac 400Vdc Cutoff velocity Type T Manufacture Littelfuse Inc Type 04773 15XP Safety and environment The table below shows the safety category of the insulation resistance and the env...

Страница 1513: ...EC60255 121 ZS for three phase fault ZG for ground fault Short line see page 1493 see page 1494 Long line see page 1495 see page 1496 Note IED was tested on 50Hz system Relay operation time will be reduced by 15 20 approximately when the IED is running on 60Hz system ...

Страница 1514: ...me characteristics for three phase fault ZS element Short line Figure 1 ZS SIR Characteristic on Short line Maximum trip time Figure 2 ZS SIR Characteristic on Short line Minimum trip time Figure 3 ZS SIR Characteristic on Short line Average trip time ...

Страница 1515: ... time characteristics for ground fault ZG element Short line Figure 4 ZG SIR Characteristic on Short line Maximum trip time Figure 5 ZG SIR Characteristic on Short line Minimum trip time Figure 6 ZG SIR Characteristic on Short line Average trip time ...

Страница 1516: ...time characteristics for three phase fault ZS element Long line Figure 7 ZS SIR Characteristic on Long line Maximum trip time Figure 8 ZS SIR Characteristic on Long line Minimum trip time Figure 9 ZS SIR Characteristic on Long line Average trip time ...

Страница 1517: ... time characteristics for ground fault ZG element Long line Figure 10 ZG SIR Characteristic on Long line Maximum trip time Figure 11 ZG SIR Characteristic on Long line Minimum trip time Figure 12 ZG SIR Characteristic on Long line Average trip time ...

Страница 1518: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1497 Appendix 8 Manufacture setting ...

Страница 1519: ...x Green x Lit when IED is in service 2 ERROR o Red x Lit when failure is detected User configurable only Logic condition 3 4 TRIP Red Lit when trip command issued 5 6 TEST Yellow Lit when test mode changed 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 PF Keys in Distance relay PF Key Model F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 GRZ200 Metering Fault Record Event Record1 Event Record2 Event Record3 ...

Страница 1520: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1499 Appendix 9 Matrix between VCT terminals and relay applications ...

Страница 1521: ...r trip FB 485001 DTT Dis carr command FB 436001 DISCAR Dis EF command FB 437001 DEFCAR Switch on to fault FB 454001 SOTF OC X X X Overcurrent FB 440001 OC X X X X X X Earth fault FB 441001 EF X X X X X X X Negative OC FB 443001 OCN X X X X X X Thermal overload FB 451001 THM X X X Broken conductor FB 452001 BCD X X X Circuit breaker FB 453001 CBF X X X X Overvoltage FB 460001 OV X X X Overvoltage F...

Страница 1522: ... 14 15 16 17 18 27 28 Relay applications Function ID Abbr Va Vb Vc Vs Vs2 Ia Ib Ic Ie Iem Fail safe FB 48B001 FS X X X X X X X VT failure detection FB 490001 VTF X X X X X X X CT failure detection FB 491001 CTF X X X X X X X Fault locator FB 496001 FL X X X X X X X Voltage check FB 4A8001 VCHK X X X X X Protection common FB 48A001 PROT _COMM X X X X X X Note X Applicable Blank Not applicable ...

Страница 1523: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1502 Appendix 10 CT requirement ...

Страница 1524: ...ning factor All values refer to the CT secondary side The minimum requirement for Vk is determined for each of the three cases and the highest of the three results is used to dimension the CT k1 k2 and k3 are chosen depending on the primary system time constant as follows Primary system time constant Td ms Transient dimensioning factor k a Stability for faults beyond the zone 1 reach point If_z1_m...

Страница 1525: ...RVA where Vk Knee point voltage In Rated current at secondary CT Rct Resistance of CT RVA Rated burden n Accuracy limiting factor of CT e g 20 for 5P20 All values refer to the CT secondary side 3 Remanent flux has not been considered In cases where a high level of remanent flux may be experienced it may be necessary to include an additional margin when dimensioning the CT 4 The data provided is va...

Страница 1526: ...pendix 11 Notes for the dielectric voltage test Case structures and DC rated voltages 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 IED case structure Type using compression terminals Type using ring terminals DC rated voltage 110 250 Vdc 24 60 Vdc Page 1506 1507 1508 1509 ...

Страница 1527: ...tached on the PSW shall be carefully handled follow the below instructions 1 and 2 1 The short wire between terminal screw No 35 and No 37 Remove the short wire for undertaking the dielectric voltage test If the short wire is not removed the IED will be damaged After the test reconnect the short wire to the original positons 2 The short wire between terminal screw No 38 and FG Never remove the sho...

Страница 1528: ...w No 35 and No 37 Remove the short wire for undertaking the dielectric voltage test If the short wire is not removed the IED will be damaged After the test reconnect the short wire to the original positons 2 The short wire between terminal screw No 38 and FG Never remove the short wire If the short wire is removed the IED will be damaged 3 The short wire between terminal screw No 36 and FG Never r...

Страница 1529: ... below instructions 1 and 2 1 The short wire between terminal screw No 35 and No 36 Remove the short wire for undertaking the dielectric voltage test If the short wire is not removed the IED will be damaged After the test reconnect the short wire to the original positons 2 The Short bar between terminal screw No 37 and FG Never remove the short bar If the short bar is removed the IED will be damag...

Страница 1530: ... No 35 and No 36 Remove the short wire for undertaking the dielectric voltage test If the short wire is not removed the IED will be damaged After the test reconnect the short wire to the original positons 2 The Short bar between terminal screw No 37 and FG Never remove the short bar If the short bar is removed the IED will be damaged 3 The short wire between terminal screw No 38 and FG Never remov...

Страница 1531: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1510 Appendix 12 Engineering exercise ...

Страница 1532: ...breakers Monitor Control Open Closed Pushing Close Pushing Open DPOS setting CB open close control on IED front panel Local end operation ILK setting Checking CB operation Control commands Opening OK decision Figure 2 Exercise CB controlled with DPOS plus MIMIC The example here shows how a CB symbol is created on MIMIC Figure 3 Exercise CB symbol created with GR TIEMS The setting steps will be dis...

Страница 1533: ...ontacts BI1 BI2 OPEN DPOS Commands Phase A B C CLOSE OPEN BO3 BO4 CB state acquisition logic DPOS monitors Aux CB main contact Output CLOSED OPEN Traveling N O Closed Open Open On Off Off N C Open Closed Open Off On Off Traveling States CLOSED BO3 RE BO4 RE Command health check CB main contact Output signals CB state judgements Figure 4 Commands and signals in DPOS01 control OPEN CB main contact C...

Страница 1534: ...RD BO3 RE 9 in order that the command has been issued without discrepancy see Figure 5 Similarly we have the setting DPOS01 OEXBORD BO4 RE 10 Table 4 Exercise in DPOS01 Function ID 512001 Step Signals Settings Signal Setting contents 0 DPOS01 EN DPOS01 ready switch 1 DPOS01 CTRN DPOS01 switch 2 DPOS01A NOPSG N O setting at phase A BI1 BI1 circuit output 3 DPOS01A NCLSG N C setting at phase A BI2 B...

Страница 1535: ...6F2S1915 0 46 GRZ200 Soft 031 032 1514 Step 0 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 Step 10 Step 1 Figure 6 DPOS01 EN etc settings ...

Страница 1536: ...e CLOSE command 11 13 see Figure 7 Similarly for issuing OPEN BO4_CPL On and DPOS01_FEX_BO settings can be made 12 14 as shown in Table 5 Table 5 Exercise materials in DPOS01 IO_SLOT1 2 ID 512001 200B01 200B02 Step Signals Settings Signal Setting contents 11 BO3_CPL CPL switch on BO3 circuit 12 BO4_CPL CPL switch on BO4 circuit 13 DPOS01_OEX_BO Signal for CLOSE 14 DPOS01_FEX_BO Signal for OPEN Ste...

Страница 1537: ... in ILK to generate OK decision but we will skip making the formula in the exercise for the simplicity Thus we will make the formula such that constant_1 C1_BIT is injected at the formula always so that OK decision will be issued unconditionally Table 6 Exercise materials in CONST_VALUE Function ID 100001 Step Signals Settings Signal Setting contents 16 C1_BIT Constant value 1 in bit type Step 16 ...

Страница 1538: ...provided in DPOS01 function so we can drag and drop it on the MIMIC as shown in Figure 9 Preferred name for the symbol can be entered on the screen 24 Table 7 Exercise materials in DPOS01 FB 512001 Step Signals Settings Signal Setting contents 21 DPOS01_MMC_ST Information signal about DPOS01 state Step 20 Step 21 Step 22 Step 23 Step 24 Figure 9 Setting CB symbol on MIMIC ...

Страница 1539: ...s in 0 14 Settings in 15 19 Settings in 20 24 Figure 10 Data write Operation exercise Table 12 1 3 shows the keys for the exercise We can manipulate the CB by touching keys and symbols Table 8 MIMIC operations Keys Symbols CB control operation on MIMIC Push L R key to switch for Local mode Screen the MIMIC Select CB symbol on MIMIC screen Push CLOSE key I for closing Push OPEN key O for opening L ...

Страница 1540: ...1 IO_SLOT1 Plus Minus Test CB for the exercise Made with PLC Short wires Short wires IO_SLOT1 IO_SLOT2 BI3 at IO_SLOT1 BI4 at IO_SLOT1 S1_BI4 OUT Stat RS SET RESET1 Q1 S1_BI3 OUT Stat RS SET RESET1 Q1 Flip flop Flip flop TON IN PT Q TON IN PT Q On delay timer ET ET Time 100ms or longer S2_BO1 Stat IN BO1 at IO_SLOT2 S2_BO1 Stat IN BO2 at IO_SLOT2 Test CB made with PLC logic for exercise Wiring dia...

Страница 1541: ...01 State On Figure 12 Exercise screen metering signal and state on MIMIC The example here shows how meter symbols are created on MIMIC editor On Figure 13 Exercise two symbols are configured with MIMIC editor Preparation Materials exercise We will have an exercise using the materials shown in Table 3 in order that MIMIC example should be achieved in Figure 3 Table 9 Example materials Examples Usag...

Страница 1542: ... is served as an intermediator between the SPOS01 function and MIMIC screen Open Signal lists and select it from them During the drag and drop operation the user can select a symbol from the symbol options Table 10 Exercise materials in SPOS01 FB 510001 Step Signals Settings Signal Setting contents 2 SPOS01_MMC_ST SPOS01 state for MIMIC Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Figure 14 Setting SPOS01 symbol o...

Страница 1543: ...ided as an intermediator between the metering function and MIMIC screen Its data is a raw from the function so we need to weigh it with the multiplier setting We can give a unit 8 for the data Table 11 Exercise materials in MES_MANAGEMENT FB 711001 Step Signals Settings Signal Setting contents 7 Ia Ia measurement primary Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step 8 Figure 15 Setting Ia symbol on MIMIC ...

Страница 1544: ...ed out on the GR TIEMS Step 25 Step 26 Settings in 0 14 Settings in 15 19 Settings in 20 24 Figure 16 Data write Operation exercise Table 12 1 3 shows the keys for the exercise We can manipulate the CB by touching keys and symbols Table 12 MIMIC operations Keys Symbols CB control operation on MIMIC Push L R key to switch for Local mode Screen the MIMIC L R MENU MIMIC ...

Страница 1545: ...s Note Element IDs Names Contents Note 3102011D00 DPSY01_MMC_ST DPSY01 state for MIMIC 3102021D00 DPSY02_MMC_ST DPSY02 state for MIMIC TPOS FunctionID 513001 Element IDs Names Contents Note Element IDs Names Contents Note 3104011D00 TPOS01_MMC_ST TPOS01 state for MIMIC 31040D1D00 TPOS13_MMC_ST TPOS13 state for MIMIC 3104021D00 TPOS02_MMC_ST TPOS02 state for MIMIC 31040E1D00 TPOS14_MMC_ST TPOS14 st...

Страница 1546: ...S17 state for MIMIC 3103351D00 DPOS53_MMC_ST DPOS53 state for MIMIC 3103121D00 DPOS18_MMC_ST DPOS18 state for MIMIC 3103361D00 DPOS54_MMC_ST DPOS54 state for MIMIC 3103131D00 DPOS19_MMC_ST DPOS19 state for MIMIC 3103371D00 DPOS55_MMC_ST DPOS55 state for MIMIC 3103141D00 DPOS20_MMC_ST DPOS20 state for MIMIC 3103381D00 DPOS56_MMC_ST DPOS56 state for MIMIC 3103151D00 DPOS21_MMC_ST DPOS21 state for MI...

Страница 1547: ...nstantaneous measurement primary for fault record 4301311052 Ibc Ibc instantaneous measurement secondary for fault record 4302361078 V2 V2 instantaneous measurement primary for fault record 4301311053 Ibc Angle Ibc instantaneous measurement angle for fault record 430236107C V0 V0 instantaneous measurement primary for fault record 4301311054 Ica Ica instantaneous measurement secondary for fault rec...

Страница 1548: ... Maximum of primary Vca 4321111056 I0 Max Peak maximum of secondary I0 4323391097 Pc Ave Peak average of primary Pc 4312161056 V0 Max Maximum of secondary V0 4321111076 I1 Max Peak maximum of primary I1 4323391098 P Ave Peak average of primary P 431216107C V0 Max Maximum of primary V0 4321111078 I2 Max Peak maximum of primary I2 43241A1095 Qa Max Peak maximum of primary Qa 4312171056 V3 Max Maximu...

Страница 1549: ...module replacement procedures K Kobayashi Aug 1 F Yamazaki Aug 1 T Kaneko July 30 Appendix Tables of BIO codes modified K Kobayashi Aug 26 N Yokoya Aug 26 T Kaneko July 30 0 03 Sep 4 2015 Chap 2 27 Revised the PROT_COM K Kobayashi Sep 4 N Nagano Sep 4 T Kaneko Sep 4 0 04 Oct 15 2015 Chap 4 Added DPOS and TPOS functions K Kobayashi Oct 14 K Kobayashi Oct 14 T Kaneko Oct 14 Chap 5 5 Revised the oper...

Страница 1550: ...o Dec 1 0 09 Dec 15 2015 Chap 4 Restored the ILK 4 6 DPOS 4 7 TPOS 4 8 functions F Kawano Dec 15 K Kobayashi Dec 14 T Kaneko Dec 14 Chap 4 Added the GENBI 4 10 ASEQ 4 11 functions F Kawano Dec 15 K Kobayashi Dec 14 T Kaneko Dec 14 0 10 Jan 18 2016 Chap 2 1 Added for the equations in ZS and ZG functions K Kobayashi Jan 12 T Nakatsuka Jan 12 T Kaneko Jan 12 Chap 2 2 Revised the SOTF OC logic about t...

Страница 1551: ...tion signal module to fiber optic modules T Nakatsuka Mar 23 T Nakatsuka Mar 23 T Kaneko Mar 23 Chap 5 4 2 i Revised the settings about the variable type in BI2 and BIO4 T Kawasaki Mar 30 T Kawasaki Mar 30 T Kaneko Mar 29 Chap 6 3 v Deleted the DCB feature and others T Nakatsuka Mar 17 T Nakatsuka Mar 17 T Kaneko Mar 27 Chap 6 8 Added the 103 feature in the engineering tool H Hiramatsu Mar 28 N Fu...

Страница 1552: ...umbers and their names in SYNDIF J Nagata Apr 25 T Utsumi Apr 25 T Kaneko Apr 23 Chap 4 7 Revised the signal list in ILK J Nagata Apr 25 T Utsumi Apr 25 T Kaneko Apr 23 Chap 4 8 Revised the signal numbers and their names in DPOS J Nagata Apr 25 T Utsumi Apr 25 T Kaneko Apr 23 Chap 4 9 Revised the signal numbers and their names in TPOS J Nagata May 09 T Utsumi May 09 T Kaneko May 09 Chap 4 11 Revis...

Страница 1553: ...dix 6 Added new code 4M in the ordering about the BIO modules T Nakatsuka Jun 1 M Ueda Jun 1 T Kaneko May 31 Appendix 6 Added the table for optional kits in the ordering T Nakatsuka Jun 9 M Ueda Jun 9 T Kaneko Jun 9 Appendix 6 Deleted 3J 3Q 48 codes of the BIO modules in the ordering T Nakatsuka Jun 21 M Ueda Jun 21 T Kaneko Jun 21 Appendix 6 Revised the selection table about serial ports in the o...

Страница 1554: ...RZ200 relay w r t OVP OVN T Nakatsuka Aug 8 T Nakatsuka Aug 8 T Kaneko Aug 8 0 19 Sep 15 2016 Chap 11 2 3 Added the contents of PRP protocol T Nakatsuka Sep 6 M Okai Sep 6 T Kaneko Sep 5 Chap 10 2 37 Added the contents of LRE error in PRP protocol T Nakatsuka Sep 6 M Okai Sep 6 T Kaneko Sep 5 Chap 10 2 39 Added the DataID table in the CHK_FPGA function T Nakatsuka Aug 18 T Nakatsuka Aug 18 T Kanek...

Страница 1555: ... sec 2 12 6 T Nakatsuka Dec 24 T Nakatsuka Dec 24 T Kaneko Dec 9 Chap 2 18 Corrected the defaults of settings in sec 2 18 5 T Nakatsuka Dec 24 T Nakatsuka Dec 24 T Kaneko Dec 9 Chap 11 4 4 ii Revised the usage note of the DPI qualifications regarding in FUN and INF S Katayama Dec 7 S Katayama Dec 7 T Kaneko Dec 6 Chap 12 1 Added the information about screen resolution of MIMIC T Nakatsuka Dec 28 K...

Страница 1556: ...d the setting Tips and notices of SYN Angle and T_SYN in VCHK K Oohashi Aug 9 K Oohashi Aug 9 T Kaneko July 31 Chap 2 25 Corrected the incoming voltage about the relationship between Vs Vs2 Vb in VCHK Y Sonobe Aug 9 G Suzuki Aug 3 T Kaneko Aug 3 Chap 4 6 Added the setting Tips and notices of SyncR1 Angle and SYNC01_TSYN in Sync check K Oohashi Aug 9 K Oohashi Aug 9 T Kaneko July 31 Chap 10 2 Corre...

Страница 1557: ...pendix 6 Added new BIO codes K Oohashi Nov 1 M Ueda Nov 1 T Kaneko Oct 31 Appendix 6 Deleted the 1 5CB arrangement code at Position 7 Not available of 2 for 1 5CB arrangement VCT11B K Oohashi Nov 10 M Kobayashi Nov 10 T Kaneko Nov 9 Appendix 7 Revised the rated current selectable K Oohashi Nov 10 K Kobayashi Nov 8 T Kaneko Nov 7 0 30 Feb 15 2018 Chap 2 10 Corrected and added the blocking ARC signa...

Страница 1558: ...revised the contents at INF 19 LED reset in information list K Oohashi June 20 K Oohashi June 20 T Kaneko June 19 Appendix 6 Deleted unused P and R code in the tables about BIO modules K Oohashi Apr 16 K Kobayashi Apr 16 T Kaneko Apr 16 Appendix 6 Added new BIO code 8N K Oohashi Apr 16 M Ueda Apr 16 T Kaneko Apr 16 0 33 Aug 24 2018 Chap 2 1 7 Added zero sequence compensation logics in Z1G Z1XG and...

Страница 1559: ...da Sep 26 T Kaneko Sep 26 Chap 2 1 Added the contents about reset and OC in PSB fun Rev Fig 2 1 26 rev logics in Fig 2 1 27 28 in ZS ZG K Oohashi Dec 7 K Oohashi Dec 7 T Kaneko Dec 6 Chap 2 3 Corrected incorrect logic connecting lines in Figs 2 3 3 2 3 5 2 3 6 2 3 12 K Oohashi Nov 5 Y Sumida Sep 26 T Kaneko Sep 26 Chap 2 3 Added signals for POP signals in Fig 2 3 4 Corrected incorrect logics K Ooh...

Страница 1560: ...61850 editions in Fig 11 3 7 23 Added Ed2 contents K Oohashi Feb 20 M Okai Feb 19 T Kaneko Feb 4 Chap 13 8 Revised the content about optical cable handlings and Fig 13 8 6 K Oohashi Feb 19 M Ueda Feb 18 T Kaneko Feb 18 Appendix 4 Revised and added the information about 61850 Ed 2 K Oohashi Feb 5 M Okai Feb 5 T Kaneko Feb 4 Appendix 7 Added SIR data sheets for the distance relay K Oohashi Jan 31 K ...

Страница 1561: ...T Kaneko Feb 6 Chap 2 2 Added a missing signal monitoring point of SOTFOC TRIP in Fig 2 2 1 H Amoh Jan 31 K Kobayashi Nov 12 T Kaneko Nov 12 Chap 2 3 Corrected errors in ECHO logic in Fig 2 3 8 in DISCAR H Amoh Dec 19 M Gordon Dec 18 T Kaneko Dec 18 Chap 2 4 Corrected errors in ECHO logic in Fig 2 4 7 in DEFCAR H Amoh Dec 19 M Gordon Dec 18 T Kaneko Dec 18 Chap 2 6 Corrected the EF plc monitoring ...

Страница 1562: ...aneko Sep 9 Chap 10 2 Corrected a typo about the error level of HMI automatic supervision function Table 10 2 1 H Amoh Oct 30 X Tang Oct 30 T Kaneko Oct 30 Chap 11 3 Added the information about the IEC61850 CID file for the Goose and LAN settings H Amoh Oct 30 M Okai Oct 30 T Kaneko Oct 30 Appendix 6 Corrected the information of outlines with regard to the codes F J G K at Position 9 H Amoh Oct 7 ...

Страница 1563: ......

Результаты поиска

Содержание GR 200 Series

Отзывы:

Похожие инструкции для GR 200 Series

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды

Toshiba GR 200 Series, Инструкция по эксплуатации

Результаты поиска

Содержание GR 200 Series

Отзывы:

Похожие инструкции для GR 200 Series

Бренды по названию

Популярные бренды